initial commit

commit: 7d292f29a68fd087b8058504ca73618ab33315eb
author: jwijenbergh · 3y ago · 2023-06-17 08:52 UTC
committer: jwijenbergh · 3y ago · 2023-08-15 10:50 UTC
parent: none (root commit)
signature: GPG Unverified1A2298F6C34F96E5 The key is unknown

696 files · +745353 -0

A LICENSE +21 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
	1	+	MIT License
	2	+
	3	+	Copyright (c) 2023 Jeroen Wijenbergh
	4	+
	5	+	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
	6	+	of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
	7	+	in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
	8	+	to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
	9	+	copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
	10	+	furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
	11	+
	12	+	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
	13	+	copies or substantial portions of the Software.
	14	+
	15	+	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
	16	+	IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
	17	+	FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
	18	+	AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
	19	+	LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
	20	+	OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
	21	+	SOFTWARE.

A README.md +95 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
	1	+	# Puregotk
	2	+
	3	+	> _NOTE:_ This library is currently expiremental and needs thorough testing. Some APIs might be incorrectly exposed
	4	+
	5	+	Autogenerated GTK4+Adwaita bindings for Go leveraging [purego](https://github.com/ebitengine/purego)
	6	+
	7	+	# Motivation
	8	+	I created this library because I found that alternative libraries using Cgo had much too slow compilation speed. For my laptop around 15 minutes to build a simple example for [gotk3](https://github.com/gotk3/gotk3) and also [gotk4](https://github.com/diamondburned/gotk4).
	9	+	This is not a fault for these libraries as CGo compilation is just inherently slow in Go. In this project I want to test a new approach by levering purego which allows you to load libraries using dlopen without needing cgo.
	10	+
	11	+	Compilation speed currently is around 40 seconds for me on basic examples.
	12	+
	13	+	## Advantages
	14	+
	15	+	No Cgo needed, thus:
	16	+	* Easy cross compilation
	17	+	* No C toolchain needed
	18	+	* Much faster compile times than alternatives like [gotk3](https://github.com/gotk3/gotk3) & [gotk4](https://github.com/diamondburned/gotk4)
	19	+
	20	+	## Disadvantages
	21	+
	22	+	Limitations of this library as compared to the alternatives using cgo:
	23	+	* Some APIs are not possible due to purego not currently supporting struct arguments (that are not pointers)
	24	+	* Currently only support for x86, for ARM I need to figure out how to get callbacks working in purego and contribute to purego
	25	+
	26	+	# Planned features
	27	+	In order of priority:
	28	+	* General code cleanup
	29	+	* ARM support
	30	+	* Support for OS other than Linux (I only test on Linux currently)
	31	+	* GTK 3 support
	32	+
	33	+	# Basic example
	34	+
	35	+	```go
	36	+	package main
	37	+
	38	+	import (
	39	+	"os"
	40	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	41	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gio"
	42	+	)
	43	+
	44	+	func main() {
	45	+	app := gtk.NewApplication("com.github.jwijenbergh.puregotk.gtk4.hello", gio.GApplicationFlagsNoneValue)
	46	+	defer app.Unref()
	47	+	app.ConnectActivate(func (_ gio.Application) {
	48	+	activate(app)
	49	+	})
	50	+
	51	+	if code := app.Run(len(os.Args), os.Args); code > 0 {
	52	+	os.Exit(code)
	53	+	}
	54	+	}
	55	+
	56	+	func activate(app gtk.Application) {
	57	+	var window gtk.ApplicationWindow
	58	+	gtk.NewApplicationWindow(app).Cast(&window)
	59	+	window.SetTitle("purego")
	60	+	window.SetChild(gtk.NewLabel("Hello, World!"))
	61	+	window.SetDefaultSize(500, 500)
	62	+	window.Show()
	63	+	}
	64	+	```
	65	+
	66	+	Save this to a main.go and then build & run with
	67	+
	68	+	```bash
	69	+	CGO_ENABLED=0 go run main.go
	70	+	```
	71	+
	72	+	> _NOTE:_ Passing CGO_ENABLED=0 is currently required
	73	+
	74	+	# Generating the library
	75	+	This library is automatically generated by reading GIR files.
	76	+
	77	+	To generate the library, run:
	78	+
	79	+	```bash
	80	+	./gen.sh
	81	+	```
	82	+
	83	+	In the root of the project. This needs:
	84	+
	85	+	- Go >= 1.20
	86	+	- [goimports](https://pkg.go.dev/golang.org/x/tools/cmd/goimports)
	87	+
	88	+	# License
	89	+
	90	+	[MIT](./LICENSE)
	91	+
	92	+	# Acknowledgements
	93	+	* [Purego](https://github.com/ebitengine/purego) and the ebitengine team for their great work
	94	+	* [gotk4](https://github.com/diamondburned/gotk4) for some GIR type definitions
	95	+	* [gtk](https://gitlab.com/gnome/gtk) of course

A gen.go +47 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
	1	+	package main
	2	+
	3	+	import (
	4	+	"os"
	5	+	"path/filepath"
	6	+	"strings"
	7	+	"text/template"
	8	+
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/pass"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/util"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	//go:generate go run gen.go
	14	+
	15	+	func main() {
	16	+	dir := "v4"
	17	+	os.RemoveAll(dir)
	18	+	var girs []string
	19	+	filepath.Walk("internal/gir/spec", func(path string, f os.FileInfo, err error) error {
	20	+	if !strings.HasSuffix(path, ".gir") {
	21	+	return nil
	22	+	}
	23	+	girs = append(girs, path)
	24	+	return nil
	25	+	})
	26	+	p, err := pass.New(girs)
	27	+	if err != nil {
	28	+	panic(err)
	29	+	}
	30	+	// collect basic type info
	31	+	p.First()
	32	+
	33	+	// Create the template
	34	+	gotemp, err := template.New("go").Funcs(template.FuncMap{"conv": util.ConvertArgs, "convc": util.ConvertArgsComma}).ParseFiles("templates/go")
	35	+	if err != nil {
	36	+	panic(err)
	37	+	}
	38	+
	39	+	// Write go files by making the second pass
	40	+	p.Second(dir, gotemp)
	41	+
	42	+	// Finally copy some extra code that we want in the API
	43	+	data, err := os.ReadFile("templates/gobject")
	44	+	if err == nil {
	45	+	os.WriteFile("v4/gobject/more.go", data, 0o644)
	46	+	}
	47	+	}

A gen.sh +18 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
	1	+	#!/usr/bin/env bash
	2	+
	3	+	set -e
	4	+
	5	+	echo "generating go files..."
	6	+	go generate
	7	+
	8	+	tmp=$(mktemp -d)
	9	+
	10	+	echo "making sure imports are correct..."
	11	+	GOPATH="$tmp" goimports --srcdir . -w v4 \|\| { rm -r "$tmp"; exit 1; }
	12	+	rm -r "$tmp"
	13	+
	14	+	echo "formatting files..."
	15	+	go fmt "github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/..."
	16	+
	17	+	echo "running go vet..."
	18	+	go vet ./v4/...

A go.mod +7 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
	1	+	module github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk
	2	+
	3	+	go 1.20
	4	+
	5	+	require github.com/jwijenbergh/purego v0.0.0-20230815104821-b26146068cfb
	6	+
	7	+	require golang.org/x/sys v0.11.0 // indirect

A go.sum +4 -0 generated file: collapsed

load diff

A internal/core/core.go +138 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
	1	+	// package core implements core functionality for the generated files
	2	+	// this core lib is imported by the generated code
	3	+	package core
	4	+
	5	+	import (
	6	+	"bytes"
	7	+	"fmt"
	8	+	"os"
	9	+	"os/exec"
	10	+	"path/filepath"
	11	+	"strings"
	12	+
	13	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	14	+	)
	15	+
	16	+	func PuregoSafeRegister(fptr interface{}, handle uintptr, name string) error {
	17	+	sym, err := purego.Dlsym(handle, name)
	18	+	if err != nil {
	19	+	return err
	20	+	}
	21	+	purego.RegisterFunc(fptr, sym)
	22	+	return nil
	23	+	}
	24	+
	25	+	// paths to where the shared object files should be located
	26	+	// TODO: This needs to be split in architecture and more paths should be added
	27	+	var paths = []string{
	28	+	"/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/",
	29	+	}
	30	+
	31	+	// names is a lookup from library names to shared object filenames
	32	+	var names = map[string][]string{
	33	+	"ADW": {"libadwaita-1.so"},
	34	+	"CAIRO": {"libcairo.so"},
	35	+	"GDK": {"libgtk-4.so"},
	36	+	"GDKPIXBUF": {"libgdk_pixbuf-2.0.so"},
	37	+	"GIO": {"libgio-2.0.so"},
	38	+	"GLIB": {"libglib-2.0.so"},
	39	+	"GMODULE": {"libgmodule-2.0.so"},
	40	+	"GOBJECT": {"libgobject-2.0.so"},
	41	+	"GRAPHENE": {"libgraphene-1.0.so"},
	42	+	"GSK": {"libgtk-4.so"},
	43	+	"GTK": {"libgtk-4.so"},
	44	+	"PANGO": {"libpango-1.0.so"},
	45	+	"PANGOCAIRO": {"libpangocairo-1.0.so"},
	46	+	}
	47	+
	48	+	// pkgConfNames is a lookup from library names to pkg-config library names
	49	+	// TODO: Get this from the package name in the gir files with a fallback to gtk's package name
	50	+	var pkgConfNames = map[string]string{
	51	+	"ADW": "libadwaita-1",
	52	+	"CAIRO": "cairo",
	53	+	"GDK": "gtk4",
	54	+	"GDKPIXBUF": "gdk-pixbuf-2.0",
	55	+	"GIO": "gio-2.0",
	56	+	"GLIB": "glib-2.0",
	57	+	"GMODULE": "gmodule-2.0",
	58	+	"GOBJECT": "gobject-2.0",
	59	+	"GRAPHENE": "graphene-gobject-1.0",
	60	+	"GSK": "gtk4",
	61	+	"GTK": "gtk4",
	62	+	"PANGO": "pango",
	63	+	"PANGOCAIRO": "pangocairo",
	64	+	}
	65	+
	66	+	// findSo tries to find a shared object from a path and a library name
	67	+	// It does this by mapping the library name to a suitable shared object filename and then trying some suffixes
	68	+	func findSo(path string, name string) string {
	69	+	for _, n := range names[name] {
	70	+	suffixes := []string{"", ".0", ".1", ".2"}
	71	+	fn := filepath.Join(path, n)
	72	+	for _, s := range suffixes {
	73	+	if _, err := os.Stat(fn + s); err == nil {
	74	+	return fn
	75	+	}
	76	+	}
	77	+	}
	78	+	return ""
	79	+	}
	80	+
	81	+	// findPkgConf finds a shared object file with pkg-config
	82	+	// it does this by running pkg-config --libs-only-L libname
	83	+	// and then it loops over the directories returned and finds a suitable one
	84	+	func findPkgConf(name string) string {
	85	+	// try to get with pkg-config
	86	+	cmd := exec.Command("pkg-config", "--libs-only-L", pkgConfNames[name])
	87	+	var out, outerr bytes.Buffer
	88	+	cmd.Stdout = &out
	89	+	cmd.Stderr = &outerr
	90	+	err := cmd.Run()
	91	+	if err != nil {
	92	+	fmt.Fprintf(os.Stderr, "pkg-config, failed with: %v and stderr: %s\n", err, outerr.String())
	93	+	return ""
	94	+	}
	95	+	outs := strings.Split(out.String(), "-L")
	96	+	for _, v := range outs {
	97	+	c := strings.TrimSpace(v)
	98	+	if c == "" {
	99	+	continue
	100	+	}
	101	+	g := findSo(c, name)
	102	+	if g != "" {
	103	+	return g
	104	+	}
	105	+	}
	106	+	return ""
	107	+	}
	108	+
	109	+	// GetPath gets a shared object file from a library name
	110	+	// it does it in the following order
	111	+	// see if PUREGOTK_LIBNAME_PATH is set
	112	+	// go over the hardcoded paths
	113	+	// find a library name with pkg-config
	114	+	// panic if failed
	115	+	// TODO: Hardcore a library shared object with linker -X flag
	116	+	// This is useful for packaging
	117	+	func GetPath(name string) string {
	118	+	// try to get from env var
	119	+	ev := fmt.Sprintf("PUREGOTK_%s_PATH", name)
	120	+	if v := os.Getenv(ev); v != "" {
	121	+	return v
	122	+	}
	123	+
	124	+	// try to loop over paths
	125	+	for _, p := range paths {
	126	+	g := findSo(p, name)
	127	+	if g != "" {
	128	+	return g
	129	+	}
	130	+
	131	+	}
	132	+	g := findPkgConf(name)
	133	+	if g != "" {
	134	+	return g
	135	+	}
	136	+
	137	+	panic(fmt.Sprintf("Path for library: %s not found. Please set the path to this library shared object file manually with env variable: %s. Or make sure pkg-config is setup correctly", strings.ToLower(name), ev))
	138	+	}

A internal/gir/pass/pass.go +303 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,303 @@
	1	+	// package pass implements the first and second pass to go from gir files to go files
	2	+	// the first pass collects basic type information
	3	+	// the second pass uses the basic type information to go over the gir files again and convert it to go files
	4	+	package pass
	5	+
	6	+	import (
	7	+	"encoding/xml"
	8	+	"fmt"
	9	+	"os"
	10	+	"strings"
	11	+	"text/template"
	12	+
	13	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/types"
	14	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/util"
	15	+	)
	16	+
	17	+	type Pass struct {
	18	+	Parsed []types.Repository
	19	+	Types types.KindMap
	20	+	}
	21	+
	22	+	// New creates a new pass struct by parsing gir files in the string slice
	23	+	// This pass object will then be used to go over these files multiple times up until we have the full info to convert it to go files
	24	+	func New(files []string) (*Pass, error) {
	25	+	p := Pass{
	26	+	Parsed: make([]types.Repository, len(files)),
	27	+	Types: make(types.KindMap),
	28	+	}
	29	+	for i, f := range files {
	30	+	b, err := os.ReadFile(f)
	31	+	if err != nil {
	32	+	return nil, err
	33	+	}
	34	+	var r types.Repository
	35	+	err = xml.Unmarshal(b, &r)
	36	+	if err != nil {
	37	+	return nil, err
	38	+	}
	39	+	p.Parsed[i] = r
	40	+	}
	41	+	return &p, nil
	42	+	}
	43	+
	44	+	func (p *Pass) collectTypes(r types.Repository) {
	45	+	ns := r.Namespaces[0]
	46	+	for _, cls := range ns.Classes {
	47	+	p.Types.Add(ns.Name, cls.Name, types.ClassesType, cls)
	48	+	}
	49	+	for _, rec := range ns.Records {
	50	+	p.Types.Add(ns.Name, rec.Name, types.RecordsType, rec)
	51	+	}
	52	+	for _, en := range ns.Enums {
	53	+	// TODO: This probably shouldn't be aliastype, but we should make dedicated types
	54	+	p.Types.Add(ns.Name, en.Name, types.AliasType, en)
	55	+	}
	56	+	for _, cb := range ns.Callbacks {
	57	+	p.Types.Add(ns.Name, cb.Name, types.CallbackType, cb)
	58	+	}
	59	+	for _, b := range ns.Bitfields {
	60	+	// TODO: This probably shouldn't be aliastype, but we should make dedicated types
	61	+	p.Types.Add(ns.Name, b.Name, types.AliasType, b)
	62	+	}
	63	+	for _, inter := range ns.Interfaces {
	64	+	p.Types.Add(ns.Name, inter.Name, types.InterfacesType, inter)
	65	+	}
	66	+	}
	67	+
	68	+	// First does a "first pass" meaning it collects basic type information for all the repositories
	69	+	func (p *Pass) First() {
	70	+	for _, r := range p.Parsed {
	71	+	p.collectTypes(r)
	72	+	}
	73	+	}
	74	+
	75	+	func (p Pass) writeGo(r types.Repository, gotemp template.Template, dir string) {
	76	+	ns := r.Namespaces[0]
	77	+
	78	+	aliases := make(map[string][]types.AliasTemplate)
	79	+	enums := make(map[string][]types.EnumTemplate)
	80	+	var files []string
	81	+	for _, el := range ns.Bitfields {
	82	+	temp := el.Template(ns.Name)
	83	+	fn := el.FilenameSafe()
	84	+	files = append(files, fn)
	85	+	enums[fn] = append(enums[fn], temp)
	86	+	}
	87	+
	88	+	for _, el := range ns.Enums {
	89	+	temp := el.Template(ns.Name)
	90	+	fn := el.FilenameSafe()
	91	+	files = append(files, fn)
	92	+	enums[fn] = append(enums[fn], temp)
	93	+	}
	94	+
	95	+	records := make(map[string][]types.RecordTemplate)
	96	+	recordLookup := make(map[string]bool)
	97	+	for _, rec := range ns.Records {
	98	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(rec.Name)
	99	+	fields := make([]types.RecordField, len(rec.Fields))
	100	+	fn := rec.FilenameSafe()
	101	+	files = append(files, fn)
	102	+	for _, f := range rec.Fields {
	103	+	_type := f.Translate(ns.Name, p.Types)
	104	+	if _type == "" {
	105	+	continue
	106	+	}
	107	+	fields = append(fields, types.RecordField{
	108	+	Name: util.SnakeToCamel(f.Name),
	109	+	Type: _type,
	110	+	})
	111	+	}
	112	+	records[fn] = append(records[fn], types.RecordTemplate{
	113	+	Name: name,
	114	+	Doc: rec.Doc.StringSafe(),
	115	+	Fields: fields,
	116	+	})
	117	+	recordLookup[name] = true
	118	+	}
	119	+
	120	+	callbacks := make(map[string][]types.CallbackTemplate)
	121	+	// set every callback equal to uintptr as well
	122	+	for _, cb := range ns.Callbacks {
	123	+	fn := cb.FilenameSafe()
	124	+	files = append(files, fn)
	125	+	cbT := types.CallbackTemplate{
	126	+	Doc: cb.Doc.StringSafe(),
	127	+	Name: cb.Name,
	128	+	Args: cb.Parameters.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	129	+	Ret: cb.ReturnValue.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	130	+	}
	131	+	callbacks[fn] = append(callbacks[fn], cbT)
	132	+	}
	133	+
	134	+	interfaces := make(map[string][]types.InterfaceTemplate)
	135	+	for _, inter := range ns.Interfaces {
	136	+	fn := inter.FilenameSafe()
	137	+	files = append(files, fn)
	138	+	interfaces[fn] = append(interfaces[fn], types.ConvertInterface(ns.Name, "", inter, nil, p.Types))
	139	+	}
	140	+
	141	+	for _, union := range ns.Unions {
	142	+	fn := union.FilenameSafe()
	143	+	files = append(files, fn)
	144	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(union.Name)
	145	+	interT := types.AliasTemplate{
	146	+	Doc: union.Doc.StringSafe(),
	147	+	Name: name,
	148	+	// structs are not yet supported in CGO
	149	+	Value: "uintptr",
	150	+	}
	151	+	aliases[fn] = append(aliases[fn], interT)
	152	+	}
	153	+
	154	+	for _, alias := range ns.Aliases {
	155	+	fn := alias.FilenameSafe()
	156	+	files = append(files, fn)
	157	+	typeName := alias.Type.Template(ns.Name, p.Types)
	158	+	if typeName == "" {
	159	+	typeName = "uintptr"
	160	+	}
	161	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(alias.Name)
	162	+	aliasT := types.AliasTemplate{
	163	+	Doc: alias.Doc.StringSafe(),
	164	+	Name: name,
	165	+	// structs are not yet supported in CGO
	166	+	Value: typeName,
	167	+	}
	168	+	aliases[fn] = append(aliases[fn], aliasT)
	169	+	}
	170	+
	171	+	functions := make(map[string][]types.FuncTemplate)
	172	+	for _, f := range ns.Functions {
	173	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(f.Name)
	174	+	if p.Types.Kind(ns.Name, name) != types.UnknownType {
	175	+	name = "New" + name
	176	+	}
	177	+	fn := f.FilenameSafe()
	178	+	files = append(files, fn)
	179	+	functions[fn] = append(functions[fn], types.FuncTemplate{
	180	+	Name: name,
	181	+	CName: f.CIdentifier,
	182	+	Doc: f.Doc.StringSafe(),
	183	+	Args: f.Parameters.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	184	+	Ret: f.ReturnValue.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	185	+	})
	186	+	}
	187	+
	188	+	classes := make(map[string][]types.ClassTemplate)
	189	+	for _, cls := range ns.Classes {
	190	+	implemented := make(map[string]bool)
	191	+	constructors := make([]types.FuncTemplate, len(cls.Constructors))
	192	+	fn := cls.FilenameSafe()
	193	+	files = append(files, fn)
	194	+
	195	+	for i, c := range cls.Constructors {
	196	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(c.Name)
	197	+	constructors[i] = types.FuncTemplate{
	198	+	Name: name,
	199	+	CName: c.CIdentifier,
	200	+	Doc: c.Doc.StringSafe(),
	201	+	Args: c.Parameters.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	202	+	Ret: c.ReturnValue.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	203	+	}
	204	+	}
	205	+	signals := make([]types.SignalsTemplate, len(cls.Signals))
	206	+	for i, s := range cls.Signals {
	207	+	signals[i] = types.SignalsTemplate{
	208	+	Doc: s.Doc.StringSafe(),
	209	+	Name: util.DashToCamel(s.Name),
	210	+	CName: s.Name,
	211	+	Args: s.Parameters.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	212	+	Ret: s.ReturnValue.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	213	+	}
	214	+	}
	215	+	receivers := make([]types.FuncTemplate, len(cls.Methods))
	216	+	for i, f := range cls.Methods {
	217	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(f.Name)
	218	+	implemented[name] = true
	219	+	receivers[i] = types.FuncTemplate{
	220	+	Doc: f.Doc.StringSafe(),
	221	+	Name: name,
	222	+	CName: f.CIdentifier,
	223	+	Args: f.Parameters.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	224	+	Ret: f.ReturnValue.Template(ns.Name, "", p.Types),
	225	+	}
	226	+	}
	227	+	var interfaces []types.InterfaceTemplate
	228	+	for _, impl := range cls.Implements {
	229	+	interfaces = append(interfaces, types.GetInterfaceFuncs(ns.Name, impl.Name, implemented, p.Types))
	230	+	}
	231	+	classes[fn] = append(classes[fn], types.ClassTemplate{
	232	+	Doc: cls.Doc.StringSafe(),
	233	+	Name: cls.Name,
	234	+	Parent: util.NormalizeNamespace(ns.Name, cls.Parent, true),
	235	+	Constructors: constructors,
	236	+	Receivers: receivers,
	237	+	Interfaces: interfaces,
	238	+	Signals: signals,
	239	+	})
	240	+	}
	241	+
	242	+	pkgName := strings.ToLower(ns.Name)
	243	+	for _, fn := range files {
	244	+	var includesSlice []string
	245	+	//includesSlice := make([]string, len(includes[fn]))
	246	+	//i := 0
	247	+	//for k, v := range includes[fn] {
	248	+	// if v {
	249	+	// includesSlice[i] = k
	250	+	// }
	251	+	// i++
	252	+	//}
	253	+	methods := 0
	254	+	for _, i := range interfaces[fn] {
	255	+	for range i.Methods {
	256	+	methods += 1
	257	+	}
	258	+	}
	259	+	for _, i := range classes[fn] {
	260	+	for range i.Constructors {
	261	+	methods += 1
	262	+	}
	263	+	for range i.Receivers {
	264	+	methods += 1
	265	+	}
	266	+	}
	267	+	// we do not need to add the length of interfaces in here
	268	+	// as they should only be loaded when there are classes
	269	+	needsInit := (len(functions[fn]) + methods) > 0
	270	+
	271	+	args := types.TemplateArg{
	272	+	PkgName: pkgName,
	273	+	PkgEnv: strings.ToUpper(pkgName),
	274	+	NeedsInit: needsInit,
	275	+	Imports: includesSlice,
	276	+	Aliases: aliases[fn],
	277	+	Callbacks: callbacks[fn],
	278	+	Records: records[fn],
	279	+	Enums: enums[fn],
	280	+	Functions: functions[fn],
	281	+	Interfaces: interfaces[fn],
	282	+	Classes: classes[fn],
	283	+	}
	284	+
	285	+	os.MkdirAll(fmt.Sprintf(dir+"/%s", pkgName), 0o755)
	286	+
	287	+	f, err := os.Create(fmt.Sprintf(dir+"/%s/%s", pkgName, fn))
	288	+	if err != nil {
	289	+	panic(err)
	290	+	}
	291	+	err = gotemp.Execute(f, args)
	292	+	if err != nil {
	293	+	panic(err)
	294	+	}
	295	+
	296	+	}
	297	+	}
	298	+
	299	+	func (p Pass) Second(dir string, gotemp template.Template) {
	300	+	for _, r := range p.Parsed {
	301	+	p.writeGo(r, gotemp, dir)
	302	+	}
	303	+	}

A internal/gir/spec/Adw-1.gir +29130 -0 large diff (29130 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/GLib-2.0.gir +83214 -0 large diff (83214 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/GModule-2.0.gir +522 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,522 @@
	1	+	<?xml version="1.0"?>
	2	+	<!-- This file was automatically generated from C sources - DO NOT EDIT!
	3	+	To affect the contents of this file, edit the original C definitions,
	4	+	and/or use gtk-doc annotations. -->
	5	+	<repository version="1.2"
	6	+	xmlns="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0"
	7	+	xmlns:c="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0"
	8	+	xmlns:glib="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0">
	9	+	<include name="GLib" version="2.0"/>
	10	+	<package name="gmodule-2.0"/>
	11	+	<c:include name="gmodule.h"/>
	12	+	<namespace name="GModule"
	13	+	version="2.0"
	14	+	shared-library="libgmodule-2.0.so.0"
	15	+	c:identifier-prefixes="G"
	16	+	c:symbol-prefixes="g">
	17	+	<record name="Module" c:type="GModule" disguised="1">
	18	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	19	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	20	+	line="5">The #GModule struct is an opaque data structure to represent a
	21	+	[dynamically-loaded module][glib-Dynamic-Loading-of-Modules].
	22	+	It should only be accessed via the following functions.</doc>
	23	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="65"/>
	24	+	<method name="close" c:identifier="g_module_close">
	25	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	26	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	27	+	line="185">Closes a module.</doc>
	28	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="105"/>
	29	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	30	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	31	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	32	+	line="191">%TRUE on success</doc>
	33	+	<type name="gboolean" c:type="gboolean"/>
	34	+	</return-value>
	35	+	<parameters>
	36	+	<instance-parameter name="module" transfer-ownership="none">
	37	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	38	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	39	+	line="187">a #GModule to close</doc>
	40	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	41	+	</instance-parameter>
	42	+	</parameters>
	43	+	</method>
	44	+	<method name="make_resident" c:identifier="g_module_make_resident">
	45	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	46	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	47	+	line="204">Ensures that a module will never be unloaded.
	48	+	Any future g_module_close() calls on the module will be ignored.</doc>
	49	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="109"/>
	50	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	51	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	52	+	</return-value>
	53	+	<parameters>
	54	+	<instance-parameter name="module" transfer-ownership="none">
	55	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	56	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	57	+	line="206">a #GModule to make permanently resident</doc>
	58	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	59	+	</instance-parameter>
	60	+	</parameters>
	61	+	</method>
	62	+	<method name="name" c:identifier="g_module_name">
	63	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	64	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	65	+	line="213">Returns the filename that the module was opened with.
	66	+
	67	+	If @module refers to the application itself, "main" is returned.</doc>
	68	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="123"/>
	69	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	70	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	71	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	72	+	line="221">the filename of the module</doc>
	73	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	74	+	</return-value>
	75	+	<parameters>
	76	+	<instance-parameter name="module" transfer-ownership="none">
	77	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	78	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	79	+	line="215">a #GModule</doc>
	80	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	81	+	</instance-parameter>
	82	+	</parameters>
	83	+	</method>
	84	+	<method name="symbol" c:identifier="g_module_symbol">
	85	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	86	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	87	+	line="273">Gets a symbol pointer from a module, such as one exported
	88	+	by %G_MODULE_EXPORT. Note that a valid symbol can be %NULL.</doc>
	89	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="117"/>
	90	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	91	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	92	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	93	+	line="282">%TRUE on success</doc>
	94	+	<type name="gboolean" c:type="gboolean"/>
	95	+	</return-value>
	96	+	<parameters>
	97	+	<instance-parameter name="module" transfer-ownership="none">
	98	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	99	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	100	+	line="275">a #GModule</doc>
	101	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	102	+	</instance-parameter>
	103	+	<parameter name="symbol_name" transfer-ownership="none">
	104	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	105	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	106	+	line="276">the name of the symbol to find</doc>
	107	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	108	+	</parameter>
	109	+	<parameter name="symbol"
	110	+	direction="out"
	111	+	caller-allocates="0"
	112	+	transfer-ownership="full"
	113	+	nullable="1">
	114	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	115	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	116	+	line="277">returns the pointer to the symbol value</doc>
	117	+	<type name="gpointer" c:type="gpointer*"/>
	118	+	</parameter>
	119	+	</parameters>
	120	+	</method>
	121	+	<function name="build_path" c:identifier="g_module_build_path">
	122	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	123	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	124	+	line="159">A portable way to build the filename of a module. The platform-specific
	125	+	prefix and suffix are added to the filename, if needed, and the result
	126	+	is added to the directory, using the correct separator character.
	127	+
	128	+	The directory should specify the directory where the module can be found.
	129	+	It can be %NULL or an empty string to indicate that the module is in a
	130	+	standard platform-specific directory, though this is not recommended
	131	+	since the wrong module may be found.
	132	+
	133	+	For example, calling g_module_build_path() on a Linux system with a
	134	+	@directory of `/lib` and a @module_name of "mylibrary" will return
	135	+	`/lib/libmylibrary.so`. On a Windows system, using `\Windows` as the
	136	+	directory it will return `\Windows\mylibrary.dll`.</doc>
	137	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="137"/>
	138	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full">
	139	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	140	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	141	+	line="180">the complete path of the module, including the standard library
	142	+	prefix and suffix. This should be freed when no longer needed</doc>
	143	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="gchar*"/>
	144	+	</return-value>
	145	+	<parameters>
	146	+	<parameter name="directory"
	147	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	148	+	nullable="1"
	149	+	allow-none="1">
	150	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	151	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	152	+	line="161">the directory where the module is. This can be
	153	+	%NULL or the empty string to indicate that the standard platform-specific
	154	+	directories will be used, though that is not recommended</doc>
	155	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	156	+	</parameter>
	157	+	<parameter name="module_name" transfer-ownership="none">
	158	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	159	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	160	+	line="164">the name of the module</doc>
	161	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	162	+	</parameter>
	163	+	</parameters>
	164	+	</function>
	165	+	<function name="error" c:identifier="g_module_error">
	166	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	167	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	168	+	line="195">Gets a string describing the last module error.</doc>
	169	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="113"/>
	170	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	171	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	172	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	173	+	line="200">a string describing the last module error</doc>
	174	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	175	+	</return-value>
	176	+	</function>
	177	+	<function name="error_quark" c:identifier="g_module_error_quark">
	178	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	179	+	<type name="GLib.Quark" c:type="GQuark"/>
	180	+	</return-value>
	181	+	</function>
	182	+	<function name="open" c:identifier="g_module_open" introspectable="0">
	183	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	184	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	185	+	line="225">A thin wrapper function around g_module_open_full()</doc>
	186	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="95"/>
	187	+	<return-value>
	188	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	189	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	190	+	line="234">a #GModule on success, or %NULL on failure</doc>
	191	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	192	+	</return-value>
	193	+	<parameters>
	194	+	<parameter name="file_name"
	195	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	196	+	nullable="1"
	197	+	allow-none="1">
	198	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	199	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	200	+	line="227">the name of the file containing the module, or %NULL
	201	+	to obtain a #GModule representing the main program itself</doc>
	202	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	203	+	</parameter>
	204	+	<parameter name="flags" transfer-ownership="none">
	205	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	206	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	207	+	line="229">the flags used for opening the module. This can be the
	208	+	logical OR of any of the #GModuleFlags.</doc>
	209	+	<type name="ModuleFlags" c:type="GModuleFlags"/>
	210	+	</parameter>
	211	+	</parameters>
	212	+	</function>
	213	+	<function name="open_full"
	214	+	c:identifier="g_module_open_full"
	215	+	version="2.70"
	216	+	introspectable="0"
	217	+	throws="1">
	218	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	219	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	220	+	line="238">Opens a module. If the module has already been opened,
	221	+	its reference count is incremented.
	222	+
	223	+	First of all g_module_open_full() tries to open @file_name as a module.
	224	+	If that fails and @file_name has the ".la"-suffix (and is a libtool
	225	+	archive) it tries to open the corresponding module. If that fails
	226	+	and it doesn't have the proper module suffix for the platform
	227	+	(%G_MODULE_SUFFIX), this suffix will be appended and the corresponding
	228	+	module will be opened. If that fails and @file_name doesn't have the
	229	+	".la"-suffix, this suffix is appended and g_module_open_full() tries to open
	230	+	the corresponding module. If eventually that fails as well, %NULL is
	231	+	returned.</doc>
	232	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="99"/>
	233	+	<return-value>
	234	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	235	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	236	+	line="259">a #GModule on success, or %NULL on failure</doc>
	237	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	238	+	</return-value>
	239	+	<parameters>
	240	+	<parameter name="file_name"
	241	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	242	+	nullable="1"
	243	+	allow-none="1">
	244	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	245	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	246	+	line="240">the name of the file containing the module, or %NULL
	247	+	to obtain a #GModule representing the main program itself</doc>
	248	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	249	+	</parameter>
	250	+	<parameter name="flags" transfer-ownership="none">
	251	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	252	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	253	+	line="242">the flags used for opening the module. This can be the
	254	+	logical OR of any of the #GModuleFlags</doc>
	255	+	<type name="ModuleFlags" c:type="GModuleFlags"/>
	256	+	</parameter>
	257	+	</parameters>
	258	+	</function>
	259	+	<function name="supported" c:identifier="g_module_supported">
	260	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	261	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	262	+	line="264">Checks if modules are supported on the current platform.</doc>
	263	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="91"/>
	264	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	265	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	266	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	267	+	line="269">%TRUE if modules are supported</doc>
	268	+	<type name="gboolean" c:type="gboolean"/>
	269	+	</return-value>
	270	+	</function>
	271	+	</record>
	272	+	<callback name="ModuleCheckInit" c:type="GModuleCheckInit">
	273	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	274	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	275	+	line="14">Specifies the type of the module initialization function.
	276	+	If a module contains a function named g_module_check_init() it is called
	277	+	automatically when the module is loaded. It is passed the #GModule structure
	278	+	and should return %NULL on success or a string describing the initialization
	279	+	error.</doc>
	280	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="66"/>
	281	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	282	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	283	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	284	+	line="24">%NULL on success, or a string describing the initialization error</doc>
	285	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	286	+	</return-value>
	287	+	<parameters>
	288	+	<parameter name="module" transfer-ownership="none">
	289	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	290	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	291	+	line="16">the #GModule corresponding to the module which has just been loaded</doc>
	292	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	293	+	</parameter>
	294	+	</parameters>
	295	+	</callback>
	296	+	<enumeration name="ModuleError"
	297	+	version="2.70"
	298	+	c:type="GModuleError"
	299	+	glib:error-domain="g-module-error-quark">
	300	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	301	+	filename="gmodule.h"
	302	+	line="73">Errors returned by g_module_open_full().</doc>
	303	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="86"/>
	304	+	<member name="failed" value="0" c:identifier="G_MODULE_ERROR_FAILED">
	305	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	306	+	filename="gmodule.h"
	307	+	line="75">there was an error loading or opening a module file</doc>
	308	+	</member>
	309	+	<member name="check_failed"
	310	+	value="1"
	311	+	c:identifier="G_MODULE_ERROR_CHECK_FAILED">
	312	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	313	+	filename="gmodule.h"
	314	+	line="76">a module returned an error from its `g_module_check_init()` function</doc>
	315	+	</member>
	316	+	</enumeration>
	317	+	<bitfield name="ModuleFlags" c:type="GModuleFlags">
	318	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	319	+	filename="gmodule.h"
	320	+	line="44">Flags passed to g_module_open().
	321	+	Note that these flags are not supported on all platforms.</doc>
	322	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="63"/>
	323	+	<member name="lazy" value="1" c:identifier="G_MODULE_BIND_LAZY">
	324	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	325	+	filename="gmodule.h"
	326	+	line="46">specifies that symbols are only resolved when
	327	+	needed. The default action is to bind all symbols when the module
	328	+	is loaded.</doc>
	329	+	</member>
	330	+	<member name="local" value="2" c:identifier="G_MODULE_BIND_LOCAL">
	331	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	332	+	filename="gmodule.h"
	333	+	line="49">specifies that symbols in the module should
	334	+	not be added to the global name space. The default action on most
	335	+	platforms is to place symbols in the module in the global name space,
	336	+	which may cause conflicts with existing symbols.</doc>
	337	+	</member>
	338	+	<member name="mask" value="3" c:identifier="G_MODULE_BIND_MASK">
	339	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	340	+	filename="gmodule.h"
	341	+	line="53">mask for all flags.</doc>
	342	+	</member>
	343	+	</bitfield>
	344	+	<callback name="ModuleUnload" c:type="GModuleUnload">
	345	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	346	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	347	+	line="28">Specifies the type of the module function called when it is unloaded.
	348	+	If a module contains a function named g_module_unload() it is called
	349	+	automatically when the module is unloaded.
	350	+	It is passed the #GModule structure.</doc>
	351	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="67"/>
	352	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	353	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	354	+	</return-value>
	355	+	<parameters>
	356	+	<parameter name="module" transfer-ownership="none">
	357	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	358	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	359	+	line="30">the #GModule about to be unloaded</doc>
	360	+	<type name="Module" c:type="GModule*"/>
	361	+	</parameter>
	362	+	</parameters>
	363	+	</callback>
	364	+	<function name="module_build_path"
	365	+	c:identifier="g_module_build_path"
	366	+	moved-to="Module.build_path">
	367	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	368	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	369	+	line="159">A portable way to build the filename of a module. The platform-specific
	370	+	prefix and suffix are added to the filename, if needed, and the result
	371	+	is added to the directory, using the correct separator character.
	372	+
	373	+	The directory should specify the directory where the module can be found.
	374	+	It can be %NULL or an empty string to indicate that the module is in a
	375	+	standard platform-specific directory, though this is not recommended
	376	+	since the wrong module may be found.
	377	+
	378	+	For example, calling g_module_build_path() on a Linux system with a
	379	+	@directory of `/lib` and a @module_name of "mylibrary" will return
	380	+	`/lib/libmylibrary.so`. On a Windows system, using `\Windows` as the
	381	+	directory it will return `\Windows\mylibrary.dll`.</doc>
	382	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="137"/>
	383	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full">
	384	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	385	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	386	+	line="180">the complete path of the module, including the standard library
	387	+	prefix and suffix. This should be freed when no longer needed</doc>
	388	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="gchar*"/>
	389	+	</return-value>
	390	+	<parameters>
	391	+	<parameter name="directory"
	392	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	393	+	nullable="1"
	394	+	allow-none="1">
	395	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	396	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	397	+	line="161">the directory where the module is. This can be
	398	+	%NULL or the empty string to indicate that the standard platform-specific
	399	+	directories will be used, though that is not recommended</doc>
	400	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	401	+	</parameter>
	402	+	<parameter name="module_name" transfer-ownership="none">
	403	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	404	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	405	+	line="164">the name of the module</doc>
	406	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	407	+	</parameter>
	408	+	</parameters>
	409	+	</function>
	410	+	<function name="module_error"
	411	+	c:identifier="g_module_error"
	412	+	moved-to="Module.error">
	413	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	414	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	415	+	line="195">Gets a string describing the last module error.</doc>
	416	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="113"/>
	417	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	418	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	419	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	420	+	line="200">a string describing the last module error</doc>
	421	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const gchar*"/>
	422	+	</return-value>
	423	+	</function>
	424	+	<function name="module_error_quark"
	425	+	c:identifier="g_module_error_quark"
	426	+	moved-to="Module.error_quark">
	427	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	428	+	<type name="GLib.Quark" c:type="GQuark"/>
	429	+	</return-value>
	430	+	</function>
	431	+	<function name="module_supported"
	432	+	c:identifier="g_module_supported"
	433	+	moved-to="Module.supported">
	434	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	435	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	436	+	line="264">Checks if modules are supported on the current platform.</doc>
	437	+	<source-position filename="gmodule.h" line="91"/>
	438	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	439	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	440	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	441	+	line="269">%TRUE if modules are supported</doc>
	442	+	<type name="gboolean" c:type="gboolean"/>
	443	+	</return-value>
	444	+	</function>
	445	+	<docsection name="modules">
	446	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	447	+	filename="gmodule-2.0.c"
	448	+	line="79">These functions provide a portable way to dynamically load object files
	449	+	(commonly known as 'plug-ins'). The current implementation supports all
	450	+	systems that provide an implementation of dlopen() (e.g. Linux/Sun), as
	451	+	well as Windows platforms via DLLs.
	452	+
	453	+	A program which wants to use these functions must be linked to the
	454	+	libraries output by the command `pkg-config --libs gmodule-2.0`.
	455	+
	456	+	To use them you must first determine whether dynamic loading
	457	+	is supported on the platform by calling g_module_supported().
	458	+	If it is, you can open a module with g_module_open(),
	459	+	find the module's symbols (e.g. function names) with g_module_symbol(),
	460	+	and later close the module with g_module_close().
	461	+	g_module_name() will return the file name of a currently opened module.
	462	+
	463	+	If any of the above functions fail, the error status can be found with
	464	+	g_module_error().
	465	+
	466	+	The #GModule implementation features reference counting for opened modules,
	467	+	and supports hook functions within a module which are called when the
	468	+	module is loaded and unloaded (see #GModuleCheckInit and #GModuleUnload).
	469	+
	470	+	If your module introduces static data to common subsystems in the running
	471	+	program, e.g. through calling
	472	+	`g_quark_from_static_string ("my-module-stuff")`,
	473	+	it must ensure that it is never unloaded, by calling g_module_make_resident().
	474	+
	475	+	Example: Calling a function defined in a GModule
	476	+	\|[<!-- language="C" -->
	477	+	// the function signature for 'say_hello'
	478	+	typedef void (* SayHelloFunc) (const char *message);
	479	+
	480	+	gboolean
	481	+	just_say_hello (const char filename, GError *error)
	482	+	{
	483	+	SayHelloFunc say_hello;
	484	+	GModule *module;
	485	+
	486	+	module = g_module_open (filename, G_MODULE_BIND_LAZY);
	487	+	if (!module)
	488	+	{
	489	+	g_set_error (error, FOO_ERROR, FOO_ERROR_BLAH,
	490	+	"%s", g_module_error ());
	491	+	return FALSE;
	492	+	}
	493	+
	494	+	if (!g_module_symbol (module, "say_hello", (gpointer *)&say_hello))
	495	+	{
	496	+	g_set_error (error, SAY_ERROR, SAY_ERROR_OPEN,
	497	+	"%s: %s", filename, g_module_error ());
	498	+	if (!g_module_close (module))
	499	+	g_warning ("%s: %s", filename, g_module_error ());
	500	+	return FALSE;
	501	+	}
	502	+
	503	+	if (say_hello == NULL)
	504	+	{
	505	+	g_set_error (error, SAY_ERROR, SAY_ERROR_OPEN,
	506	+	"symbol say_hello is NULL");
	507	+	if (!g_module_close (module))
	508	+	g_warning ("%s: %s", filename, g_module_error ());
	509	+	return FALSE;
	510	+	}
	511	+
	512	+	// call our function in the module
	513	+	say_hello ("Hello world!");
	514	+
	515	+	if (!g_module_close (module))
	516	+	g_warning ("%s: %s", filename, g_module_error ());
	517	+	return TRUE;
	518	+	}
	519	+	]\|</doc>
	520	+	</docsection>
	521	+	</namespace>
	522	+	</repository>

A internal/gir/spec/GObject-2.0.gir +27133 -0 large diff (27133 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/Gdk-4.0.gir +31079 -0 large diff (31079 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/GdkPixbuf-2.0.gir +7353 -0 large diff (7353 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/Gio-2.0.gir +134893 -0 large diff (134893 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/Graphene-1.0.gir +13375 -0 large diff (13375 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/Gsk-4.0.gir +7181 -0 large diff (7181 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/Gtk-4.0.gir +167916 -0 large diff (167916 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/Pango-1.0.gir +22709 -0 large diff (22709 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A internal/gir/spec/PangoCairo-1.0.gir +1136 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,1136 @@
	1	+	<?xml version="1.0"?>
	2	+	<!-- This file was automatically generated from C sources - DO NOT EDIT!
	3	+	To affect the contents of this file, edit the original C definitions,
	4	+	and/or use gtk-doc annotations. -->
	5	+	<repository version="1.2"
	6	+	xmlns="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0"
	7	+	xmlns:c="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0"
	8	+	xmlns:glib="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0">
	9	+	<include name="GObject" version="2.0"/>
	10	+	<include name="Pango" version="1.0"/>
	11	+	<include name="cairo" version="1.0"/>
	12	+	<package name="pangocairo"/>
	13	+	<c:include name="pango/pangocairo.h"/>
	14	+	<namespace name="PangoCairo"
	15	+	version="1.0"
	16	+	shared-library="libpangocairo-1.0.so.0"
	17	+	c:identifier-prefixes="PangoCairo"
	18	+	c:symbol-prefixes="pango_cairo">
	19	+	<function-macro name="FONT"
	20	+	c:identifier="PANGO_CAIRO_FONT"
	21	+	introspectable="0">
	22	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="49"/>
	23	+	<parameters>
	24	+	<parameter name="obj">
	25	+	</parameter>
	26	+	</parameters>
	27	+	</function-macro>
	28	+	<function-macro name="FONT_MAP"
	29	+	c:identifier="PANGO_CAIRO_FONT_MAP"
	30	+	introspectable="0">
	31	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="72"/>
	32	+	<parameters>
	33	+	<parameter name="obj">
	34	+	</parameter>
	35	+	</parameters>
	36	+	</function-macro>
	37	+	<interface name="Font"
	38	+	c:symbol-prefix="font"
	39	+	c:type="PangoCairoFont"
	40	+	version="1.18"
	41	+	glib:type-name="PangoCairoFont"
	42	+	glib:get-type="pango_cairo_font_get_type">
	43	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	44	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo.h"
	45	+	line="30">`PangoCairoFont` is an interface exported by fonts for
	46	+	use with Cairo.
	47	+
	48	+	The actual type of the font will depend on the particular
	49	+	font technology Cairo was compiled to use.</doc>
	50	+	<prerequisite name="Pango.Font"/>
	51	+	<method name="get_scaled_font"
	52	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_get_scaled_font"
	53	+	version="1.18">
	54	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	55	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-font.c"
	56	+	line="138">Gets the `cairo_scaled_font_t` used by @font.
	57	+	The scaled font can be referenced and kept using
	58	+	cairo_scaled_font_reference().</doc>
	59	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="133"/>
	60	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none" nullable="1">
	61	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	62	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-font.c"
	63	+	line="146">the `cairo_scaled_font_t`
	64	+	used by @font</doc>
	65	+	<type name="cairo.ScaledFont" c:type="cairo_scaled_font_t*"/>
	66	+	</return-value>
	67	+	<parameters>
	68	+	<instance-parameter name="font"
	69	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	70	+	nullable="1"
	71	+	allow-none="1">
	72	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	73	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-font.c"
	74	+	line="140">a `PangoFont` from a `PangoCairoFontMap`</doc>
	75	+	<type name="Font" c:type="PangoCairoFont*"/>
	76	+	</instance-parameter>
	77	+	</parameters>
	78	+	</method>
	79	+	</interface>
	80	+	<interface name="FontMap"
	81	+	c:symbol-prefix="font_map"
	82	+	c:type="PangoCairoFontMap"
	83	+	version="1.10"
	84	+	glib:type-name="PangoCairoFontMap"
	85	+	glib:get-type="pango_cairo_font_map_get_type">
	86	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	87	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo.h"
	88	+	line="57">`PangoCairoFontMap` is an interface exported by font maps for
	89	+	use with Cairo.
	90	+
	91	+	The actual type of the font map will depend on the particular
	92	+	font technology Cairo was compiled to use.</doc>
	93	+	<prerequisite name="Pango.FontMap"/>
	94	+	<function name="get_default"
	95	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_get_default"
	96	+	version="1.10">
	97	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	98	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	99	+	line="151">Gets a default `PangoCairoFontMap` to use with Cairo.
	100	+
	101	+	Note that the type of the returned object will depend on the
	102	+	particular font backend Cairo was compiled to use; you generally
	103	+	should only use the `PangoFontMap` and `PangoCairoFontMap`
	104	+	interfaces on the returned object.
	105	+
	106	+	The default Cairo fontmap can be changed by using
	107	+	[method@PangoCairo.FontMap.set_default]. This can be used to
	108	+	change the Cairo font backend that the default fontmap uses
	109	+	for example.
	110	+
	111	+	Note that since Pango 1.32.6, the default fontmap is per-thread.
	112	+	Each thread gets its own default fontmap. In this way, PangoCairo
	113	+	can be used safely from multiple threads.</doc>
	114	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="110"/>
	115	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	116	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	117	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	118	+	line="170">the default PangoCairo fontmap
	119	+	for the current thread. This object is owned by Pango and must
	120	+	not be freed.</doc>
	121	+	<type name="Pango.FontMap" c:type="PangoFontMap*"/>
	122	+	</return-value>
	123	+	</function>
	124	+	<function name="new"
	125	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_new"
	126	+	version="1.10">
	127	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	128	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	129	+	line="47">Creates a new `PangoCairoFontMap` object.
	130	+
	131	+	A fontmap is used to cache information about available fonts,
	132	+	and holds certain global parameters such as the resolution.
	133	+	In most cases, you can use `func@PangoCairo.font_map_get_default]
	134	+	instead.
	135	+
	136	+	Note that the type of the returned object will depend
	137	+	on the particular font backend Cairo was compiled to use;
	138	+	You generally should only use the `PangoFontMap` and
	139	+	`PangoCairoFontMap` interfaces on the returned object.
	140	+
	141	+	You can override the type of backend returned by using an
	142	+	environment variable %PANGOCAIRO_BACKEND. Supported types,
	143	+	based on your build, are fc (fontconfig), win32, and coretext.
	144	+	If requested type is not available, NULL is returned. Ie.
	145	+	this is only useful for testing, when at least two backends
	146	+	are compiled in.</doc>
	147	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="106"/>
	148	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full">
	149	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	150	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	151	+	line="69">the newly allocated `PangoFontMap`,
	152	+	which should be freed with g_object_unref().</doc>
	153	+	<type name="Pango.FontMap" c:type="PangoFontMap*"/>
	154	+	</return-value>
	155	+	</function>
	156	+	<function name="new_for_font_type"
	157	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type"
	158	+	version="1.18">
	159	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	160	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	161	+	line="110">Creates a new `PangoCairoFontMap` object of the type suitable
	162	+	to be used with cairo font backend of type @fonttype.
	163	+
	164	+	In most cases one should simply use [func@PangoCairo.FontMap.new], or
	165	+	in fact in most of those cases, just use [func@PangoCairo.FontMap.get_default].</doc>
	166	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="108"/>
	167	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full" nullable="1">
	168	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	169	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	170	+	line="120">the newly allocated
	171	+	`PangoFontMap` of suitable type which should be freed with
	172	+	g_object_unref(), or %NULL if the requested cairo font backend
	173	+	is not supported / compiled in.</doc>
	174	+	<type name="Pango.FontMap" c:type="PangoFontMap*"/>
	175	+	</return-value>
	176	+	<parameters>
	177	+	<parameter name="fonttype" transfer-ownership="none">
	178	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	179	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	180	+	line="112">desired #cairo_font_type_t</doc>
	181	+	<type name="cairo.FontType" c:type="cairo_font_type_t"/>
	182	+	</parameter>
	183	+	</parameters>
	184	+	</function>
	185	+	<method name="create_context"
	186	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_create_context"
	187	+	version="1.10"
	188	+	introspectable="0"
	189	+	deprecated="1"
	190	+	deprecated-version="1.22">
	191	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	192	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	193	+	line="267">Create a `PangoContext` for the given fontmap.</doc>
	194	+	<doc-deprecated xml:space="preserve">Use pango_font_map_create_context() instead.</doc-deprecated>
	195	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="123"/>
	196	+	<return-value>
	197	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	198	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	199	+	line="273">the newly created context; free with g_object_unref().</doc>
	200	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	201	+	</return-value>
	202	+	<parameters>
	203	+	<instance-parameter name="fontmap" transfer-ownership="none">
	204	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	205	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	206	+	line="269">a `PangoCairoFontMap`</doc>
	207	+	<type name="FontMap" c:type="PangoCairoFontMap*"/>
	208	+	</instance-parameter>
	209	+	</parameters>
	210	+	</method>
	211	+	<method name="get_font_type"
	212	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_get_font_type"
	213	+	version="1.18">
	214	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	215	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	216	+	line="287">Gets the type of Cairo font backend that @fontmap uses.</doc>
	217	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="114"/>
	218	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	219	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	220	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	221	+	line="293">the `cairo_font_type_t` cairo font backend type</doc>
	222	+	<type name="cairo.FontType" c:type="cairo_font_type_t"/>
	223	+	</return-value>
	224	+	<parameters>
	225	+	<instance-parameter name="fontmap" transfer-ownership="none">
	226	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	227	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	228	+	line="289">a `PangoCairoFontMap`</doc>
	229	+	<type name="FontMap" c:type="PangoCairoFontMap*"/>
	230	+	</instance-parameter>
	231	+	</parameters>
	232	+	</method>
	233	+	<method name="get_resolution"
	234	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_get_resolution"
	235	+	version="1.10">
	236	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	237	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	238	+	line="247">Gets the resolution for the fontmap.
	239	+
	240	+	See [method@PangoCairo.FontMap.set_resolution].</doc>
	241	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="120"/>
	242	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	243	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	244	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	245	+	line="255">the resolution in "dots per inch"</doc>
	246	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	247	+	</return-value>
	248	+	<parameters>
	249	+	<instance-parameter name="fontmap" transfer-ownership="none">
	250	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	251	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	252	+	line="249">a `PangoCairoFontMap`</doc>
	253	+	<type name="FontMap" c:type="PangoCairoFontMap*"/>
	254	+	</instance-parameter>
	255	+	</parameters>
	256	+	</method>
	257	+	<method name="set_default"
	258	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_set_default"
	259	+	version="1.22">
	260	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	261	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	262	+	line="190">Sets a default `PangoCairoFontMap` to use with Cairo.
	263	+
	264	+	This can be used to change the Cairo font backend that the
	265	+	default fontmap uses for example. The old default font map
	266	+	is unreffed and the new font map referenced.
	267	+
	268	+	Note that since Pango 1.32.6, the default fontmap is per-thread.
	269	+	This function only changes the default fontmap for
	270	+	the current thread. Default fontmaps of existing threads
	271	+	are not changed. Default fontmaps of any new threads will
	272	+	still be created using [func@PangoCairo.FontMap.new].
	273	+
	274	+	A value of %NULL for @fontmap will cause the current default
	275	+	font map to be released and a new default font map to be created
	276	+	on demand, using [func@PangoCairo.FontMap.new].</doc>
	277	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="112"/>
	278	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	279	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	280	+	</return-value>
	281	+	<parameters>
	282	+	<instance-parameter name="fontmap"
	283	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	284	+	nullable="1"
	285	+	allow-none="1">
	286	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	287	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	288	+	line="192">The new default font map</doc>
	289	+	<type name="FontMap" c:type="PangoCairoFontMap*"/>
	290	+	</instance-parameter>
	291	+	</parameters>
	292	+	</method>
	293	+	<method name="set_resolution"
	294	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_set_resolution"
	295	+	version="1.10">
	296	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	297	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	298	+	line="223">Sets the resolution for the fontmap.
	299	+
	300	+	This is a scale factor between
	301	+	points specified in a `PangoFontDescription` and Cairo units. The
	302	+	default value is 96, meaning that a 10 point font will be 13
	303	+	units high. (10 * 96. / 72. = 13.3).</doc>
	304	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="117"/>
	305	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	306	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	307	+	</return-value>
	308	+	<parameters>
	309	+	<instance-parameter name="fontmap" transfer-ownership="none">
	310	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	311	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	312	+	line="225">a `PangoCairoFontMap`</doc>
	313	+	<type name="FontMap" c:type="PangoCairoFontMap*"/>
	314	+	</instance-parameter>
	315	+	<parameter name="dpi" transfer-ownership="none">
	316	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	317	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	318	+	line="226">the resolution in "dots per inch". (Physical inches aren't actually
	319	+	involved; the terminology is conventional.)</doc>
	320	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	321	+	</parameter>
	322	+	</parameters>
	323	+	</method>
	324	+	</interface>
	325	+	<function-macro name="IS_FONT"
	326	+	c:identifier="PANGO_CAIRO_IS_FONT"
	327	+	introspectable="0">
	328	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="50"/>
	329	+	<parameters>
	330	+	<parameter name="obj">
	331	+	</parameter>
	332	+	</parameters>
	333	+	</function-macro>
	334	+	<function-macro name="IS_FONT_MAP"
	335	+	c:identifier="PANGO_CAIRO_IS_FONT_MAP"
	336	+	introspectable="0">
	337	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="73"/>
	338	+	<parameters>
	339	+	<parameter name="obj">
	340	+	</parameter>
	341	+	</parameters>
	342	+	</function-macro>
	343	+	<callback name="ShapeRendererFunc" c:type="PangoCairoShapeRendererFunc">
	344	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	345	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo.h"
	346	+	line="80">Function type for rendering attributes of type %PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE
	347	+	with Pango's Cairo renderer.</doc>
	348	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="94"/>
	349	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	350	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	351	+	</return-value>
	352	+	<parameters>
	353	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	354	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	355	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo.h"
	356	+	line="82">a Cairo context with current point set to where the shape should
	357	+	be rendered</doc>
	358	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	359	+	</parameter>
	360	+	<parameter name="attr" transfer-ownership="none">
	361	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	362	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo.h"
	363	+	line="84">the %PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE to render</doc>
	364	+	<type name="Pango.AttrShape" c:type="PangoAttrShape*"/>
	365	+	</parameter>
	366	+	<parameter name="do_path" transfer-ownership="none">
	367	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	368	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo.h"
	369	+	line="85">whether only the shape path should be appended to current
	370	+	path of @cr and no filling/stroking done. This will be set
	371	+	to %TRUE when called from pango_cairo_layout_path() and
	372	+	pango_cairo_layout_line_path() rendering functions.</doc>
	373	+	<type name="gboolean" c:type="gboolean"/>
	374	+	</parameter>
	375	+	<parameter name="data"
	376	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	377	+	nullable="1"
	378	+	allow-none="1"
	379	+	closure="3">
	380	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	381	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo.h"
	382	+	line="89">user data passed to pango_cairo_context_set_shape_renderer()</doc>
	383	+	<type name="gpointer" c:type="gpointer"/>
	384	+	</parameter>
	385	+	</parameters>
	386	+	</callback>
	387	+	<function name="context_get_font_options"
	388	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_context_get_font_options"
	389	+	version="1.10">
	390	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	391	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	392	+	line="284">Retrieves any font rendering options previously set with
	393	+	[func@PangoCairo.context_set_font_options].
	394	+
	395	+	This function does not report options that are derived from
	396	+	the target surface by [func@update_context].</doc>
	397	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="145"/>
	398	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none" nullable="1">
	399	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	400	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	401	+	line="294">the font options previously set on the
	402	+	context, or %NULL if no options have been set. This value is
	403	+	owned by the context and must not be modified or freed.</doc>
	404	+	<type name="cairo.FontOptions" c:type="const cairo_font_options_t*"/>
	405	+	</return-value>
	406	+	<parameters>
	407	+	<parameter name="context" transfer-ownership="none">
	408	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	409	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	410	+	line="286">a `PangoContext`, from a pangocairo font map</doc>
	411	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	412	+	</parameter>
	413	+	</parameters>
	414	+	</function>
	415	+	<function name="context_get_resolution"
	416	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_context_get_resolution"
	417	+	version="1.10">
	418	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	419	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	420	+	line="205">Gets the resolution for the context.
	421	+
	422	+	See [func@PangoCairo.context_set_resolution]</doc>
	423	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="151"/>
	424	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	425	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	426	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	427	+	line="213">the resolution in "dots per inch". A negative value will
	428	+	be returned if no resolution has previously been set.</doc>
	429	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	430	+	</return-value>
	431	+	<parameters>
	432	+	<parameter name="context" transfer-ownership="none">
	433	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	434	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	435	+	line="207">a `PangoContext`, from a pangocairo font map</doc>
	436	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	437	+	</parameter>
	438	+	</parameters>
	439	+	</function>
	440	+	<function name="context_get_shape_renderer"
	441	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_context_get_shape_renderer"
	442	+	version="1.18"
	443	+	introspectable="0">
	444	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	445	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	446	+	line="380">Sets callback function for context to use for rendering attributes
	447	+	of type %PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE.
	448	+
	449	+	See `PangoCairoShapeRendererFunc` for details.
	450	+
	451	+	Retrieves callback function and associated user data for rendering
	452	+	attributes of type %PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE as set by
	453	+	[func@PangoCairo.context_set_shape_renderer], if any.</doc>
	454	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="159"/>
	455	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none" nullable="1">
	456	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	457	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	458	+	line="394">the shape rendering callback
	459	+	previously set on the context, or %NULL if no shape rendering callback
	460	+	have been set.</doc>
	461	+	<type name="ShapeRendererFunc" c:type="PangoCairoShapeRendererFunc"/>
	462	+	</return-value>
	463	+	<parameters>
	464	+	<parameter name="context" transfer-ownership="none">
	465	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	466	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	467	+	line="382">a `PangoContext`, from a pangocairo font map</doc>
	468	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	469	+	</parameter>
	470	+	<parameter name="data"
	471	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	472	+	nullable="1"
	473	+	allow-none="1">
	474	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	475	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	476	+	line="383">Pointer to `gpointer` to return user data</doc>
	477	+	<type name="gpointer" c:type="gpointer*"/>
	478	+	</parameter>
	479	+	</parameters>
	480	+	</function>
	481	+	<function name="context_set_font_options"
	482	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_context_set_font_options"
	483	+	version="1.10">
	484	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	485	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	486	+	line="229">Sets the font options used when rendering text with this context.
	487	+
	488	+	These options override any options that [func@update_context]
	489	+	derives from the target surface.</doc>
	490	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="142"/>
	491	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	492	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	493	+	</return-value>
	494	+	<parameters>
	495	+	<parameter name="context" transfer-ownership="none">
	496	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	497	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	498	+	line="231">a `PangoContext`, from a pangocairo font map</doc>
	499	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	500	+	</parameter>
	501	+	<parameter name="options"
	502	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	503	+	nullable="1"
	504	+	allow-none="1">
	505	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	506	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	507	+	line="232">a `cairo_font_options_t`, or %NULL to unset
	508	+	any previously set options. A copy is made.</doc>
	509	+	<type name="cairo.FontOptions" c:type="const cairo_font_options_t*"/>
	510	+	</parameter>
	511	+	</parameters>
	512	+	</function>
	513	+	<function name="context_set_resolution"
	514	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_context_set_resolution"
	515	+	version="1.10">
	516	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	517	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	518	+	line="182">Sets the resolution for the context.
	519	+
	520	+	This is a scale factor between points specified in a `PangoFontDescription`
	521	+	and Cairo units. The default value is 96, meaning that a 10 point font will
	522	+	be 13 units high. (10 * 96. / 72. = 13.3).</doc>
	523	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="148"/>
	524	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	525	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	526	+	</return-value>
	527	+	<parameters>
	528	+	<parameter name="context" transfer-ownership="none">
	529	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	530	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	531	+	line="184">a `PangoContext`, from a pangocairo font map</doc>
	532	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	533	+	</parameter>
	534	+	<parameter name="dpi" transfer-ownership="none">
	535	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	536	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	537	+	line="185">the resolution in "dots per inch". (Physical inches aren't actually
	538	+	involved; the terminology is conventional.) A 0 or negative value
	539	+	means to use the resolution from the font map.</doc>
	540	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	541	+	</parameter>
	542	+	</parameters>
	543	+	</function>
	544	+	<function name="context_set_shape_renderer"
	545	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_context_set_shape_renderer"
	546	+	version="1.18">
	547	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	548	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	549	+	line="344">Sets callback function for context to use for rendering attributes
	550	+	of type %PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE.
	551	+
	552	+	See `PangoCairoShapeRendererFunc` for details.</doc>
	553	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="154"/>
	554	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	555	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	556	+	</return-value>
	557	+	<parameters>
	558	+	<parameter name="context" transfer-ownership="none">
	559	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	560	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	561	+	line="346">a `PangoContext`, from a pangocairo font map</doc>
	562	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	563	+	</parameter>
	564	+	<parameter name="func"
	565	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	566	+	nullable="1"
	567	+	allow-none="1"
	568	+	scope="notified"
	569	+	closure="2"
	570	+	destroy="3">
	571	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	572	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	573	+	line="347">Callback function for rendering attributes of
	574	+	type %PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE, or %NULL to disable shape rendering.</doc>
	575	+	<type name="ShapeRendererFunc" c:type="PangoCairoShapeRendererFunc"/>
	576	+	</parameter>
	577	+	<parameter name="data"
	578	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	579	+	nullable="1"
	580	+	allow-none="1">
	581	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	582	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	583	+	line="349">User data that will be passed to @func.</doc>
	584	+	<type name="gpointer" c:type="gpointer"/>
	585	+	</parameter>
	586	+	<parameter name="dnotify"
	587	+	transfer-ownership="none"
	588	+	nullable="1"
	589	+	allow-none="1"
	590	+	scope="async">
	591	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	592	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	593	+	line="350">Callback that will be called when the
	594	+	context is freed to release @data</doc>
	595	+	<type name="GLib.DestroyNotify" c:type="GDestroyNotify"/>
	596	+	</parameter>
	597	+	</parameters>
	598	+	</function>
	599	+	<function name="create_context"
	600	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_create_context"
	601	+	version="1.22">
	602	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	603	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	604	+	line="424">Creates a context object set up to match the current transformation
	605	+	and target surface of the Cairo context.
	606	+
	607	+	This context can then be
	608	+	used to create a layout using [ctor@Pango.Layout.new].
	609	+
	610	+	This function is a convenience function that creates a context using
	611	+	the default font map, then updates it to @cr. If you just need to
	612	+	create a layout for use with @cr and do not need to access `PangoContext`
	613	+	directly, you can use [func@create_layout] instead.</doc>
	614	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="165"/>
	615	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full">
	616	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	617	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	618	+	line="439">the newly created `PangoContext`</doc>
	619	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	620	+	</return-value>
	621	+	<parameters>
	622	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	623	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	624	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	625	+	line="426">a Cairo context</doc>
	626	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	627	+	</parameter>
	628	+	</parameters>
	629	+	</function>
	630	+	<function name="create_layout"
	631	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_create_layout"
	632	+	version="1.10">
	633	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	634	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	635	+	line="458">Creates a layout object set up to match the current transformation
	636	+	and target surface of the Cairo context.
	637	+
	638	+	This layout can then be used for text measurement with functions
	639	+	like [method@Pango.Layout.get_size] or drawing with functions like
	640	+	[func@show_layout]. If you change the transformation or target
	641	+	surface for @cr, you need to call [func@update_layout].
	642	+
	643	+	This function is the most convenient way to use Cairo with Pango,
	644	+	however it is slightly inefficient since it creates a separate
	645	+	`PangoContext` object for each layout. This might matter in an
	646	+	application that was laying out large amounts of text.</doc>
	647	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="167"/>
	648	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full">
	649	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	650	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	651	+	line="475">the newly created `PangoLayout`</doc>
	652	+	<type name="Pango.Layout" c:type="PangoLayout*"/>
	653	+	</return-value>
	654	+	<parameters>
	655	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	656	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	657	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	658	+	line="460">a Cairo context</doc>
	659	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	660	+	</parameter>
	661	+	</parameters>
	662	+	</function>
	663	+	<function name="error_underline_path"
	664	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_error_underline_path"
	665	+	version="1.14">
	666	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	667	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	668	+	line="1244">Add a squiggly line to the current path in the specified cairo context that
	669	+	approximately covers the given rectangle in the style of an underline used
	670	+	to indicate a spelling error.
	671	+
	672	+	The width of the underline is rounded to an integer number of up/down
	673	+	segments and the resulting rectangle is centered in the original rectangle.</doc>
	674	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="212"/>
	675	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	676	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	677	+	</return-value>
	678	+	<parameters>
	679	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	680	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	681	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	682	+	line="1246">a Cairo context</doc>
	683	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	684	+	</parameter>
	685	+	<parameter name="x" transfer-ownership="none">
	686	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	687	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	688	+	line="1247">The X coordinate of one corner of the rectangle</doc>
	689	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	690	+	</parameter>
	691	+	<parameter name="y" transfer-ownership="none">
	692	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	693	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	694	+	line="1248">The Y coordinate of one corner of the rectangle</doc>
	695	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	696	+	</parameter>
	697	+	<parameter name="width" transfer-ownership="none">
	698	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	699	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	700	+	line="1249">Non-negative width of the rectangle</doc>
	701	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	702	+	</parameter>
	703	+	<parameter name="height" transfer-ownership="none">
	704	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	705	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	706	+	line="1250">Non-negative height of the rectangle</doc>
	707	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	708	+	</parameter>
	709	+	</parameters>
	710	+	</function>
	711	+	<function name="font_map_get_default"
	712	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_get_default"
	713	+	moved-to="FontMap.get_default"
	714	+	version="1.10">
	715	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	716	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	717	+	line="151">Gets a default `PangoCairoFontMap` to use with Cairo.
	718	+
	719	+	Note that the type of the returned object will depend on the
	720	+	particular font backend Cairo was compiled to use; you generally
	721	+	should only use the `PangoFontMap` and `PangoCairoFontMap`
	722	+	interfaces on the returned object.
	723	+
	724	+	The default Cairo fontmap can be changed by using
	725	+	[method@PangoCairo.FontMap.set_default]. This can be used to
	726	+	change the Cairo font backend that the default fontmap uses
	727	+	for example.
	728	+
	729	+	Note that since Pango 1.32.6, the default fontmap is per-thread.
	730	+	Each thread gets its own default fontmap. In this way, PangoCairo
	731	+	can be used safely from multiple threads.</doc>
	732	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="110"/>
	733	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	734	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	735	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	736	+	line="170">the default PangoCairo fontmap
	737	+	for the current thread. This object is owned by Pango and must
	738	+	not be freed.</doc>
	739	+	<type name="Pango.FontMap" c:type="PangoFontMap*"/>
	740	+	</return-value>
	741	+	</function>
	742	+	<function name="font_map_new"
	743	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_new"
	744	+	moved-to="FontMap.new"
	745	+	version="1.10">
	746	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	747	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	748	+	line="47">Creates a new `PangoCairoFontMap` object.
	749	+
	750	+	A fontmap is used to cache information about available fonts,
	751	+	and holds certain global parameters such as the resolution.
	752	+	In most cases, you can use `func@PangoCairo.font_map_get_default]
	753	+	instead.
	754	+
	755	+	Note that the type of the returned object will depend
	756	+	on the particular font backend Cairo was compiled to use;
	757	+	You generally should only use the `PangoFontMap` and
	758	+	`PangoCairoFontMap` interfaces on the returned object.
	759	+
	760	+	You can override the type of backend returned by using an
	761	+	environment variable %PANGOCAIRO_BACKEND. Supported types,
	762	+	based on your build, are fc (fontconfig), win32, and coretext.
	763	+	If requested type is not available, NULL is returned. Ie.
	764	+	this is only useful for testing, when at least two backends
	765	+	are compiled in.</doc>
	766	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="106"/>
	767	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full">
	768	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	769	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	770	+	line="69">the newly allocated `PangoFontMap`,
	771	+	which should be freed with g_object_unref().</doc>
	772	+	<type name="Pango.FontMap" c:type="PangoFontMap*"/>
	773	+	</return-value>
	774	+	</function>
	775	+	<function name="font_map_new_for_font_type"
	776	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type"
	777	+	moved-to="FontMap.new_for_font_type"
	778	+	version="1.18">
	779	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	780	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	781	+	line="110">Creates a new `PangoCairoFontMap` object of the type suitable
	782	+	to be used with cairo font backend of type @fonttype.
	783	+
	784	+	In most cases one should simply use [func@PangoCairo.FontMap.new], or
	785	+	in fact in most of those cases, just use [func@PangoCairo.FontMap.get_default].</doc>
	786	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="108"/>
	787	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="full" nullable="1">
	788	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	789	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	790	+	line="120">the newly allocated
	791	+	`PangoFontMap` of suitable type which should be freed with
	792	+	g_object_unref(), or %NULL if the requested cairo font backend
	793	+	is not supported / compiled in.</doc>
	794	+	<type name="Pango.FontMap" c:type="PangoFontMap*"/>
	795	+	</return-value>
	796	+	<parameters>
	797	+	<parameter name="fonttype" transfer-ownership="none">
	798	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	799	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-fontmap.c"
	800	+	line="112">desired #cairo_font_type_t</doc>
	801	+	<type name="cairo.FontType" c:type="cairo_font_type_t"/>
	802	+	</parameter>
	803	+	</parameters>
	804	+	</function>
	805	+	<function name="glyph_string_path"
	806	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_glyph_string_path"
	807	+	version="1.10">
	808	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	809	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	810	+	line="1173">Adds the glyphs in @glyphs to the current path in the specified
	811	+	cairo context.
	812	+
	813	+	The origin of the glyphs (the left edge of the baseline)
	814	+	will be at the current point of the cairo context.</doc>
	815	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="201"/>
	816	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	817	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	818	+	</return-value>
	819	+	<parameters>
	820	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	821	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	822	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	823	+	line="1175">a Cairo context</doc>
	824	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	825	+	</parameter>
	826	+	<parameter name="font" transfer-ownership="none">
	827	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	828	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	829	+	line="1176">a `PangoFont` from a `PangoCairoFontMap`</doc>
	830	+	<type name="Pango.Font" c:type="PangoFont*"/>
	831	+	</parameter>
	832	+	<parameter name="glyphs" transfer-ownership="none">
	833	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	834	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	835	+	line="1177">a `PangoGlyphString`</doc>
	836	+	<type name="Pango.GlyphString" c:type="PangoGlyphString*"/>
	837	+	</parameter>
	838	+	</parameters>
	839	+	</function>
	840	+	<function name="layout_line_path"
	841	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_layout_line_path"
	842	+	version="1.10">
	843	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	844	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	845	+	line="1198">Adds the text in `PangoLayoutLine` to the current path in the
	846	+	specified cairo context.
	847	+
	848	+	The origin of the glyphs (the left edge of the line) will be
	849	+	at the current point of the cairo context.</doc>
	850	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="205"/>
	851	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	852	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	853	+	</return-value>
	854	+	<parameters>
	855	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	856	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	857	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	858	+	line="1200">a Cairo context</doc>
	859	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	860	+	</parameter>
	861	+	<parameter name="line" transfer-ownership="none">
	862	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	863	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	864	+	line="1201">a `PangoLayoutLine`</doc>
	865	+	<type name="Pango.LayoutLine" c:type="PangoLayoutLine*"/>
	866	+	</parameter>
	867	+	</parameters>
	868	+	</function>
	869	+	<function name="layout_path"
	870	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_layout_path"
	871	+	version="1.10">
	872	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	873	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	874	+	line="1221">Adds the text in a `PangoLayout` to the current path in the
	875	+	specified cairo context.
	876	+
	877	+	The top-left corner of the `PangoLayout` will be at the
	878	+	current point of the cairo context.</doc>
	879	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="208"/>
	880	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	881	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	882	+	</return-value>
	883	+	<parameters>
	884	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	885	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	886	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	887	+	line="1223">a Cairo context</doc>
	888	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	889	+	</parameter>
	890	+	<parameter name="layout" transfer-ownership="none">
	891	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	892	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	893	+	line="1224">a Pango layout</doc>
	894	+	<type name="Pango.Layout" c:type="PangoLayout*"/>
	895	+	</parameter>
	896	+	</parameters>
	897	+	</function>
	898	+	<function name="show_error_underline"
	899	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_show_error_underline"
	900	+	version="1.14">
	901	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	902	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	903	+	line="1142">Draw a squiggly line in the specified cairo context that approximately
	904	+	covers the given rectangle in the style of an underline used to indicate a
	905	+	spelling error.
	906	+
	907	+	The width of the underline is rounded to an integer
	908	+	number of up/down segments and the resulting rectangle is centered in the
	909	+	original rectangle.</doc>
	910	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="191"/>
	911	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	912	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	913	+	</return-value>
	914	+	<parameters>
	915	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	916	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	917	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	918	+	line="1144">a Cairo context</doc>
	919	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	920	+	</parameter>
	921	+	<parameter name="x" transfer-ownership="none">
	922	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	923	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	924	+	line="1145">The X coordinate of one corner of the rectangle</doc>
	925	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	926	+	</parameter>
	927	+	<parameter name="y" transfer-ownership="none">
	928	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	929	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	930	+	line="1146">The Y coordinate of one corner of the rectangle</doc>
	931	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	932	+	</parameter>
	933	+	<parameter name="width" transfer-ownership="none">
	934	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	935	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	936	+	line="1147">Non-negative width of the rectangle</doc>
	937	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	938	+	</parameter>
	939	+	<parameter name="height" transfer-ownership="none">
	940	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	941	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	942	+	line="1148">Non-negative height of the rectangle</doc>
	943	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="double"/>
	944	+	</parameter>
	945	+	</parameters>
	946	+	</function>
	947	+	<function name="show_glyph_item"
	948	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_show_glyph_item"
	949	+	version="1.22">
	950	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	951	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	952	+	line="1066">Draws the glyphs in @glyph_item in the specified cairo context,
	953	+
	954	+	embedding the text associated with the glyphs in the output if the
	955	+	output format supports it (PDF for example), otherwise it acts
	956	+	similar to [func@show_glyph_string].
	957	+
	958	+	The origin of the glyphs (the left edge of the baseline) will
	959	+	be drawn at the current point of the cairo context.
	960	+
	961	+	Note that @text is the start of the text for layout, which is then
	962	+	indexed by `glyph_item->item->offset`.</doc>
	963	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="180"/>
	964	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	965	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	966	+	</return-value>
	967	+	<parameters>
	968	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	969	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	970	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	971	+	line="1068">a Cairo context</doc>
	972	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	973	+	</parameter>
	974	+	<parameter name="text" transfer-ownership="none">
	975	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	976	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	977	+	line="1069">the UTF-8 text that @glyph_item refers to</doc>
	978	+	<type name="utf8" c:type="const char*"/>
	979	+	</parameter>
	980	+	<parameter name="glyph_item" transfer-ownership="none">
	981	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	982	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	983	+	line="1070">a `PangoGlyphItem`</doc>
	984	+	<type name="Pango.GlyphItem" c:type="PangoGlyphItem*"/>
	985	+	</parameter>
	986	+	</parameters>
	987	+	</function>
	988	+	<function name="show_glyph_string"
	989	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_show_glyph_string"
	990	+	version="1.10">
	991	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	992	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	993	+	line="1041">Draws the glyphs in @glyphs in the specified cairo context.
	994	+
	995	+	The origin of the glyphs (the left edge of the baseline) will
	996	+	be drawn at the current point of the cairo context.</doc>
	997	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="176"/>
	998	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	999	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	1000	+	</return-value>
	1001	+	<parameters>
	1002	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	1003	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1004	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1005	+	line="1043">a Cairo context</doc>
	1006	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	1007	+	</parameter>
	1008	+	<parameter name="font" transfer-ownership="none">
	1009	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1010	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1011	+	line="1044">a `PangoFont` from a `PangoCairoFontMap`</doc>
	1012	+	<type name="Pango.Font" c:type="PangoFont*"/>
	1013	+	</parameter>
	1014	+	<parameter name="glyphs" transfer-ownership="none">
	1015	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1016	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1017	+	line="1045">a `PangoGlyphString`</doc>
	1018	+	<type name="Pango.GlyphString" c:type="PangoGlyphString*"/>
	1019	+	</parameter>
	1020	+	</parameters>
	1021	+	</function>
	1022	+	<function name="show_layout"
	1023	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_show_layout"
	1024	+	version="1.10">
	1025	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1026	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1027	+	line="1120">Draws a `PangoLayout` in the specified cairo context.
	1028	+
	1029	+	The top-left corner of the `PangoLayout` will be drawn
	1030	+	at the current point of the cairo context.</doc>
	1031	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="187"/>
	1032	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	1033	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	1034	+	</return-value>
	1035	+	<parameters>
	1036	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	1037	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1038	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1039	+	line="1122">a Cairo context</doc>
	1040	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	1041	+	</parameter>
	1042	+	<parameter name="layout" transfer-ownership="none">
	1043	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1044	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1045	+	line="1123">a Pango layout</doc>
	1046	+	<type name="Pango.Layout" c:type="PangoLayout*"/>
	1047	+	</parameter>
	1048	+	</parameters>
	1049	+	</function>
	1050	+	<function name="show_layout_line"
	1051	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_show_layout_line"
	1052	+	version="1.10">
	1053	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1054	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1055	+	line="1098">Draws a `PangoLayoutLine` in the specified cairo context.
	1056	+
	1057	+	The origin of the glyphs (the left edge of the line) will
	1058	+	be drawn at the current point of the cairo context.</doc>
	1059	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="184"/>
	1060	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	1061	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	1062	+	</return-value>
	1063	+	<parameters>
	1064	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	1065	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1066	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1067	+	line="1100">a Cairo context</doc>
	1068	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	1069	+	</parameter>
	1070	+	<parameter name="line" transfer-ownership="none">
	1071	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1072	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-render.c"
	1073	+	line="1101">a `PangoLayoutLine`</doc>
	1074	+	<type name="Pango.LayoutLine" c:type="PangoLayoutLine*"/>
	1075	+	</parameter>
	1076	+	</parameters>
	1077	+	</function>
	1078	+	<function name="update_context"
	1079	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_update_context"
	1080	+	version="1.10">
	1081	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1082	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	1083	+	line="158">Updates a `PangoContext` previously created for use with Cairo to
	1084	+	match the current transformation and target surface of a Cairo
	1085	+	context.
	1086	+
	1087	+	If any layouts have been created for the context, it's necessary
	1088	+	to call [method@Pango.Layout.context_changed] on those layouts.</doc>
	1089	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="138"/>
	1090	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	1091	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	1092	+	</return-value>
	1093	+	<parameters>
	1094	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	1095	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1096	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	1097	+	line="160">a Cairo context</doc>
	1098	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	1099	+	</parameter>
	1100	+	<parameter name="context" transfer-ownership="none">
	1101	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1102	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	1103	+	line="161">a `PangoContext`, from a pangocairo font map</doc>
	1104	+	<type name="Pango.Context" c:type="PangoContext*"/>
	1105	+	</parameter>
	1106	+	</parameters>
	1107	+	</function>
	1108	+	<function name="update_layout"
	1109	+	c:identifier="pango_cairo_update_layout"
	1110	+	version="1.10">
	1111	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1112	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	1113	+	line="494">Updates the private `PangoContext` of a `PangoLayout` created with
	1114	+	[func@create_layout] to match the current transformation and target
	1115	+	surface of a Cairo context.</doc>
	1116	+	<source-position filename="../pango/pangocairo.h" line="169"/>
	1117	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	1118	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	1119	+	</return-value>
	1120	+	<parameters>
	1121	+	<parameter name="cr" transfer-ownership="none">
	1122	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1123	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	1124	+	line="496">a Cairo context</doc>
	1125	+	<type name="cairo.Context" c:type="cairo_t*"/>
	1126	+	</parameter>
	1127	+	<parameter name="layout" transfer-ownership="none">
	1128	+	<doc xml:space="preserve"
	1129	+	filename="../pango/pangocairo-context.c"
	1130	+	line="497">a `PangoLayout`, from [func@create_layout]</doc>
	1131	+	<type name="Pango.Layout" c:type="PangoLayout*"/>
	1132	+	</parameter>
	1133	+	</parameters>
	1134	+	</function>
	1135	+	</namespace>
	1136	+	</repository>

A internal/gir/spec/cairo-1.0.gir +688 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,688 @@
	1	+	<?xml version="1.0"?>
	2	+	<repository version="1.2"
	3	+	xmlns="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0"
	4	+	xmlns:c="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0"
	5	+	xmlns:glib="http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0">
	6	+	<package name="cairo-gobject"/>
	7	+	<c:include name="cairo-gobject.h"/>
	8	+	<namespace name="cairo" version="1.0"
	9	+	shared-library="libcairo-gobject.so.2"
	10	+	c:identifier-prefixes="cairo"
	11	+	c:symbol-prefixes="cairo">
	12	+	<record name="Context" c:type="cairo_t" foreign="1"
	13	+	glib:type-name="CairoContext"
	14	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_context_get_type"/>
	15	+	<record name="Device" c:type="cairo_device_t" foreign="1"
	16	+	glib:type-name="CairoDevice"
	17	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_device_get_type"/>
	18	+	<record name="Surface" c:type="cairo_surface_t" foreign="1"
	19	+	glib:type-name="CairoSurface"
	20	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_surface_get_type"/>
	21	+	<record name="Matrix" c:type="cairo_matrix_t" foreign="1"/>
	22	+	<record name="Pattern" c:type="cairo_pattern_t" foreign="1"
	23	+	glib:type-name="CairoPattern"
	24	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_pattern_get_type"/>
	25	+	<record name="Region" c:type="cairo_region_t" foreign="1"
	26	+	glib:type-name="CairoRegion"
	27	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_region_get_type"/>
	28	+	<enumeration name="Status" c:type="cairo_status_t"
	29	+	glib:type-name="cairo_status_t"
	30	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_status_get_type">
	31	+	<member name="success"
	32	+	value="0"
	33	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_SUCCESS"/>
	34	+	<member name="no_memory"
	35	+	value="1"
	36	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_NO_MEMORY"/>
	37	+	<member name="invalid_restore"
	38	+	value="2"
	39	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_RESTORE"/>
	40	+	<member name="invalid_pop_group"
	41	+	value="3"
	42	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_POP_GROUP"/>
	43	+	<member name="no_current_point"
	44	+	value="4"
	45	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_NO_CURRENT_POINT"/>
	46	+	<member name="invalid_matrix"
	47	+	value="5"
	48	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_MATRIX"/>
	49	+	<member name="invalid_status"
	50	+	value="6"
	51	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_STATUS"/>
	52	+	<member name="null_pointer"
	53	+	value="7"
	54	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_NULL_POINTER"/>
	55	+	<member name="invalid_string"
	56	+	value="8"
	57	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_STRING"/>
	58	+	<member name="invalid_path_data"
	59	+	value="9"
	60	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_PATH_DATA"/>
	61	+	<member name="read_error"
	62	+	value="10"
	63	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_READ_ERROR"/>
	64	+	<member name="write_error"
	65	+	value="11"
	66	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_WRITE_ERROR"/>
	67	+	<member name="surface_finished"
	68	+	value="12"
	69	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_SURFACE_FINISHED"/>
	70	+	<member name="surface_type_mismatch"
	71	+	value="13"
	72	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_SURFACE_TYPE_MISMATCH"/>
	73	+	<member name="pattern_type_mismatch"
	74	+	value="14"
	75	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_PATTERN_TYPE_MISMATCH"/>
	76	+	<member name="invalid_content"
	77	+	value="15"
	78	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_CONTENT"/>
	79	+	<member name="invalid_format"
	80	+	value="16"
	81	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_FORMAT"/>
	82	+	<member name="invalid_visual"
	83	+	value="17"
	84	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_VISUAL"/>
	85	+	<member name="file_not_found"
	86	+	value="18"
	87	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_FILE_NOT_FOUND"/>
	88	+	<member name="invalid_dash"
	89	+	value="19"
	90	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_DASH"/>
	91	+	<member name="invalid_dsc_comment"
	92	+	value="20"
	93	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_DSC_COMMENT"/>
	94	+	<member name="invalid_index"
	95	+	value="21"
	96	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_INDEX"/>
	97	+	<member name="clip_not_representable"
	98	+	value="22"
	99	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_CLIP_NOT_REPRESENTABLE"/>
	100	+	<member name="temp_file_error"
	101	+	value="23"
	102	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_TEMP_FILE_ERROR"/>
	103	+	<member name="invalid_stride"
	104	+	value="24"
	105	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_STRIDE"/>
	106	+	<member name="font_type_mismatch"
	107	+	value="25"
	108	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_FONT_TYPE_MISMATCH"/>
	109	+	<member name="user_font_immutable"
	110	+	value="26"
	111	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_USER_FONT_IMMUTABLE"/>
	112	+	<member name="user_font_error"
	113	+	value="27"
	114	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_USER_FONT_ERROR"/>
	115	+	<member name="negative_count"
	116	+	value="28"
	117	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_NEGATIVE_COUNT"/>
	118	+	<member name="invalid_clusters"
	119	+	value="29"
	120	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_CLUSTERS"/>
	121	+	<member name="invalid_slant"
	122	+	value="30"
	123	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_SLANT"/>
	124	+	<member name="invalid_weight"
	125	+	value="31"
	126	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_WEIGHT"/>
	127	+	<member name="invalid_size"
	128	+	value="32"
	129	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_SIZE"/>
	130	+	<member name="user_font_not_implemented"
	131	+	value="33"
	132	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_USER_FONT_NOT_IMPLEMENTED"/>
	133	+	<member name="device_type_mismatch"
	134	+	value="34"
	135	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_DEVICE_TYPE_MISMATCH"/>
	136	+	<member name="device_error"
	137	+	value="35"
	138	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_DEVICE_ERROR"/>
	139	+	<member name="invalid_mesh_construction"
	140	+	value="36"
	141	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_INVALID_MESH_CONSTRUCTION"/>
	142	+	<member name="device_finished"
	143	+	value="37"
	144	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_DEVICE_FINISHED"/>
	145	+	<member name="jbig2_global_missing"
	146	+	value="38"
	147	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_STATUS_JBIG2_GLOBAL_MISSING"/>
	148	+	</enumeration>
	149	+	<enumeration name="Content" c:type="cairo_content_t"
	150	+	glib:type-name="cairo_content_t"
	151	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_content_get_type">
	152	+	<member name="color"
	153	+	value="4096"
	154	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_CONTENT_COLOR"/>
	155	+	<member name="alpha"
	156	+	value="8192"
	157	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_CONTENT_ALPHA"/>
	158	+	<member name="color_alpha"
	159	+	value="12288"
	160	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_CONTENT_COLOR_ALPHA"/>
	161	+	</enumeration>
	162	+	<enumeration name="Operator" c:type="cairo_operator_t"
	163	+	glib:type-name="cairo_operator_t"
	164	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_operator_get_type">
	165	+	<member name="clear"
	166	+	value="0"
	167	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_CLEAR"/>
	168	+	<member name="source"
	169	+	value="1"
	170	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_SOURCE"/>
	171	+	<member name="over"
	172	+	value="2"
	173	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_OVER"/>
	174	+	<member name="in"
	175	+	value="3"
	176	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_IN"/>
	177	+	<member name="out"
	178	+	value="4"
	179	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_OUT"/>
	180	+	<member name="atop"
	181	+	value="5"
	182	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_ATOP"/>
	183	+	<member name="dest"
	184	+	value="6"
	185	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_DEST"/>
	186	+	<member name="dest_over"
	187	+	value="7"
	188	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_DEST_OVER"/>
	189	+	<member name="dest_in"
	190	+	value="8"
	191	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_DEST_IN"/>
	192	+	<member name="dest_out"
	193	+	value="9"
	194	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_DEST_OUT"/>
	195	+	<member name="dest_atop"
	196	+	value="10"
	197	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_DEST_ATOP"/>
	198	+	<member name="xor"
	199	+	value="11"
	200	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_XOR"/>
	201	+	<member name="add"
	202	+	value="12"
	203	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_ADD"/>
	204	+	<member name="saturate"
	205	+	value="13"
	206	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_SATURATE"/>
	207	+	<member name="multiply"
	208	+	value="14"
	209	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_MULTIPLY"/>
	210	+	<member name="screen"
	211	+	value="15"
	212	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_SCREEN"/>
	213	+	<member name="overlay"
	214	+	value="16"
	215	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_OVERLAY"/>
	216	+	<member name="darken"
	217	+	value="17"
	218	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_DARKEN"/>
	219	+	<member name="lighten"
	220	+	value="18"
	221	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_LIGHTEN"/>
	222	+	<member name="color_dodge"
	223	+	value="19"
	224	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_COLOR_DODGE"/>
	225	+	<member name="color_burn"
	226	+	value="20"
	227	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_COLOR_BURN"/>
	228	+	<member name="hard_light"
	229	+	value="21"
	230	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_HARD_LIGHT"/>
	231	+	<member name="soft_light"
	232	+	value="22"
	233	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_SOFT_LIGHT"/>
	234	+	<member name="difference"
	235	+	value="23"
	236	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_DIFFERENCE"/>
	237	+	<member name="exclusion"
	238	+	value="24"
	239	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_EXCLUSION"/>
	240	+	<member name="hsl_hue"
	241	+	value="25"
	242	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_HSL_HUE"/>
	243	+	<member name="hsl_saturation"
	244	+	value="26"
	245	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_HSL_SATURATION"/>
	246	+	<member name="hsl_color"
	247	+	value="27"
	248	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_HSL_COLOR"/>
	249	+	<member name="hsl_luminosity"
	250	+	value="28"
	251	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_OPERATOR_HSL_LUMINOSITY"/>
	252	+	</enumeration>
	253	+	<enumeration name="Antialias" c:type="cairo_antialias_t"
	254	+	glib:type-name="cairo_antialias_t"
	255	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_antialias_get_type">
	256	+	<member name="default"
	257	+	value="0"
	258	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_ANTIALIAS_DEFAULT"/>
	259	+	<member name="none"
	260	+	value="1"
	261	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_ANTIALIAS_NONE"/>
	262	+	<member name="gray"
	263	+	value="2"
	264	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_ANTIALIAS_GRAY"/>
	265	+	<member name="subpixel"
	266	+	value="3"
	267	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_ANTIALIAS_SUBPIXEL"/>
	268	+	<member name="fast"
	269	+	value="4"
	270	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_ANTIALIAS_FAST"/>
	271	+	<member name="good"
	272	+	value="5"
	273	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_ANTIALIAS_GOOD"/>
	274	+	<member name="best"
	275	+	value="6"
	276	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_ANTIALIAS_BEST"/>
	277	+	</enumeration>
	278	+	<enumeration name="FillRule" c:type="cairo_fill_rule_t"
	279	+	glib:type-name="cairo_fill_rule_t"
	280	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_fill_rule_get_type">
	281	+	<member name="winding"
	282	+	value="0"
	283	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILL_RULE_WINDING"/>
	284	+	<member name="even_odd"
	285	+	value="1"
	286	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILL_RULE_EVEN_ODD"/>
	287	+	</enumeration>
	288	+	<enumeration name="LineCap" c:type="cairo_line_cap_t"
	289	+	glib:type-name="cairo_line_cap_t"
	290	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_line_cap_get_type">
	291	+	<member name="butt"
	292	+	value="0"
	293	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_LINE_CAP_BUTT"/>
	294	+	<member name="round"
	295	+	value="1"
	296	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_LINE_CAP_ROUND"/>
	297	+	<member name="square"
	298	+	value="2"
	299	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_LINE_CAP_SQUARE"/>
	300	+	</enumeration>
	301	+	<enumeration name="LineJoin" c:type="cairo_line_join_t"
	302	+	glib:type-name="cairo_line_join_t"
	303	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_line_join_get_type">
	304	+	<member name="miter"
	305	+	value="0"
	306	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_MITER"/>
	307	+	<member name="round"
	308	+	value="1"
	309	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_ROUND"/>
	310	+	<member name="bevel"
	311	+	value="2"
	312	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_BEVEL"/>
	313	+	</enumeration>
	314	+	<enumeration name="TextClusterFlags" c:type="cairo_text_cluster_flags_t"
	315	+	glib:type-name="cairo_text_cluster_flags_t"
	316	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_text_cluster_flags_get_type">
	317	+	<member name="backward"
	318	+	value="1"
	319	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_TEXT_CLUSTER_FLAG_BACKWARD"/>
	320	+	</enumeration>
	321	+	<enumeration name="FontSlant" c:type="cairo_font_slant_t"
	322	+	glib:type-name="cairo_font_slant_t"
	323	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_font_slant_get_type">
	324	+	<member name="normal"
	325	+	value="0"
	326	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_SLANT_NORMAL"/>
	327	+	<member name="italic"
	328	+	value="1"
	329	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_SLANT_ITALIC"/>
	330	+	<member name="oblique"
	331	+	value="2"
	332	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_SLANT_OBLIQUE"/>
	333	+	</enumeration>
	334	+	<enumeration name="FontWeight" c:type="cairo_font_weight_t"
	335	+	glib:type-name="cairo_font_weight_t"
	336	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_font_weight_get_type">
	337	+	<member name="normal"
	338	+	value="0"
	339	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_WEIGHT_NORMAL"/>
	340	+	<member name="bold"
	341	+	value="1"
	342	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_WEIGHT_BOLD"/>
	343	+	</enumeration>
	344	+	<enumeration name="SubpixelOrder" c:type="cairo_subpixel_order_t"
	345	+	glib:type-name="cairo_subpixel_order_t"
	346	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_subpixel_order_get_type">
	347	+	<member name="default"
	348	+	value="0"
	349	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SUBPIXEL_ORDER_DEFAULT"/>
	350	+	<member name="rgb"
	351	+	value="1"
	352	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SUBPIXEL_ORDER_RGB"/>
	353	+	<member name="bgr"
	354	+	value="2"
	355	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SUBPIXEL_ORDER_BGR"/>
	356	+	<member name="vrgb"
	357	+	value="3"
	358	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SUBPIXEL_ORDER_VRGB"/>
	359	+	<member name="vbgr"
	360	+	value="4"
	361	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SUBPIXEL_ORDER_VBGR"/>
	362	+	</enumeration>
	363	+	<enumeration name="HintStyle" c:type="cairo_hint_style_t"
	364	+	glib:type-name="cairo_hint_style_t"
	365	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_hint_style_get_type">
	366	+	<member name="default"
	367	+	value="0"
	368	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_STYLE_DEFAULT"/>
	369	+	<member name="none"
	370	+	value="1"
	371	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_STYLE_NONE"/>
	372	+	<member name="slight"
	373	+	value="2"
	374	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_STYLE_SLIGHT"/>
	375	+	<member name="medium"
	376	+	value="3"
	377	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_STYLE_MEDIUM"/>
	378	+	<member name="full"
	379	+	value="4"
	380	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_STYLE_FULL"/>
	381	+	</enumeration>
	382	+	<enumeration name="HintMetrics" c:type="cairo_hint_metrics_t"
	383	+	glib:type-name="cairo_hint_metrics_t"
	384	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_hint_metrics_get_type">
	385	+	<member name="default"
	386	+	value="0"
	387	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_METRICS_DEFAULT"/>
	388	+	<member name="off"
	389	+	value="1"
	390	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_METRICS_OFF"/>
	391	+	<member name="on"
	392	+	value="2"
	393	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_HINT_METRICS_ON"/>
	394	+	</enumeration>
	395	+	<record name="FontOptions" c:type="cairo_font_options_t" foreign="1"
	396	+	glib:type-name="CairoFontOptions"
	397	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_font_options_get_type"/>
	398	+	<enumeration name="FontType" c:type="cairo_font_type_t"
	399	+	glib:type-name="cairo_font_type_t"
	400	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_font_type_get_type">
	401	+	<member name="toy"
	402	+	value="0"
	403	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_TOY"/>
	404	+	<member name="ft"
	405	+	value="1"
	406	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT"/>
	407	+	<member name="win32"
	408	+	value="2"
	409	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_WIN32"/>
	410	+	<member name="quartz"
	411	+	value="3"
	412	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_QUARTZ"/>
	413	+	<member name="user"
	414	+	value="4"
	415	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_USER"/>
	416	+	</enumeration>
	417	+	<enumeration name="PathDataType" c:type="cairo_path_data_type_t"
	418	+	glib:type-name="cairo_path_data_type_t"
	419	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_path_data_type_get_type">
	420	+	<member name="move_to"
	421	+	value="0"
	422	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATH_MOVE_TO"/>
	423	+	<member name="line_to"
	424	+	value="1"
	425	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATH_LINE_TO"/>
	426	+	<member name="curve_to"
	427	+	value="2"
	428	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATH_CURVE_TO"/>
	429	+	<member name="close_path"
	430	+	value="3"
	431	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATH_CLOSE_PATH"/>
	432	+	</enumeration>
	433	+	<enumeration name="DeviceType" c:type="cairo_device_type_t"
	434	+	glib:type-name="cairo_device_type_t"
	435	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_device_type_get_type">
	436	+	<member name="drm"
	437	+	value="0"
	438	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_DRM"/>
	439	+	<member name="gl"
	440	+	value="1"
	441	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_GL"/>
	442	+	<member name="script"
	443	+	value="2"
	444	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_SCRIPT"/>
	445	+	<member name="xcb"
	446	+	value="3"
	447	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_XCB"/>
	448	+	<member name="xlib"
	449	+	value="4"
	450	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_XLIB"/>
	451	+	<member name="xml"
	452	+	value="5"
	453	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_XML"/>
	454	+	<member name="cogl"
	455	+	value="6"
	456	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_COGL"/>
	457	+	<member name="win32"
	458	+	value="7"
	459	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_WIN32"/>
	460	+	<member name="invalid"
	461	+	value="-1"
	462	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_DEVICE_TYPE_INVALID"/>
	463	+	</enumeration>
	464	+	<enumeration name="SurfaceType" c:type="cairo_surface_type_t"
	465	+	glib:type-name="cairo_surface_type_t"
	466	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_surface_type_get_type">
	467	+	<member name="image"
	468	+	value="0"
	469	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_IMAGE"/>
	470	+	<member name="pdf"
	471	+	value="1"
	472	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_PDF"/>
	473	+	<member name="ps"
	474	+	value="2"
	475	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_PS"/>
	476	+	<member name="xlib"
	477	+	value="3"
	478	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_XLIB"/>
	479	+	<member name="xcb"
	480	+	value="4"
	481	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_XCB"/>
	482	+	<member name="glitz"
	483	+	value="5"
	484	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_GLITZ"/>
	485	+	<member name="quartz"
	486	+	value="6"
	487	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_QUARTZ"/>
	488	+	<member name="win32"
	489	+	value="7"
	490	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_WIN32"/>
	491	+	<member name="beos"
	492	+	value="8"
	493	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_BEOS"/>
	494	+	<member name="directfb"
	495	+	value="9"
	496	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_DIRECTFB"/>
	497	+	<member name="svg"
	498	+	value="10"
	499	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_SVG"/>
	500	+	<member name="os2"
	501	+	value="11"
	502	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_OS2"/>
	503	+	<member name="win32_printing"
	504	+	value="12"
	505	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_WIN32_PRINTING"/>
	506	+	<member name="quartz_image"
	507	+	value="13"
	508	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_QUARTZ_IMAGE"/>
	509	+	<member name="script"
	510	+	value="14"
	511	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_SCRIPT"/>
	512	+	<member name="qt"
	513	+	value="15"
	514	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_QT"/>
	515	+	<member name="recording"
	516	+	value="16"
	517	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_RECORDING"/>
	518	+	<member name="vg"
	519	+	value="17"
	520	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_VG"/>
	521	+	<member name="gl"
	522	+	value="18"
	523	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_GL"/>
	524	+	<member name="drm"
	525	+	value="19"
	526	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_DRM"/>
	527	+	<member name="tee"
	528	+	value="20"
	529	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_TEE"/>
	530	+	<member name="xml"
	531	+	value="21"
	532	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_XML"/>
	533	+	<member name="skia"
	534	+	value="22"
	535	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_SKIA"/>
	536	+	<member name="subsurface"
	537	+	value="23"
	538	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_SUBSURFACE"/>
	539	+	<member name="cogl"
	540	+	value="24"
	541	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_SURFACE_TYPE_COGL"/>
	542	+	</enumeration>
	543	+	<enumeration name="Format" c:type="cairo_format_t"
	544	+	glib:type-name="cairo_format_t"
	545	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_format_get_type">
	546	+	<member name="invalid"
	547	+	value="-1"
	548	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FORMAT_INVALID"/>
	549	+	<member name="argb32"
	550	+	value="0"
	551	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FORMAT_ARGB32"/>
	552	+	<member name="rgb24"
	553	+	value="1"
	554	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FORMAT_RGB24"/>
	555	+	<member name="a8"
	556	+	value="2"
	557	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FORMAT_A8"/>
	558	+	<member name="a1"
	559	+	value="3"
	560	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FORMAT_A1"/>
	561	+	<member name="rgb16_565"
	562	+	value="4"
	563	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FORMAT_RGB16_565"/>
	564	+	<member name="rgb30"
	565	+	value="5"
	566	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FORMAT_RGB30"/>
	567	+	</enumeration>
	568	+	<enumeration name="PatternType" c:type="cairo_pattern_type_t"
	569	+	glib:type-name="cairo_pattern_type_t"
	570	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_pattern_type_get_type">
	571	+	<member name="solid"
	572	+	value="0"
	573	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATTERN_TYPE_SOLID"/>
	574	+	<member name="surface"
	575	+	value="1"
	576	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATTERN_TYPE_SURFACE"/>
	577	+	<member name="linear"
	578	+	value="2"
	579	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATTERN_TYPE_LINEAR"/>
	580	+	<member name="radial"
	581	+	value="3"
	582	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATTERN_TYPE_RADIAL"/>
	583	+	<member name="mesh"
	584	+	value="4"
	585	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATTERN_TYPE_MESH"/>
	586	+	<member name="raster_source"
	587	+	value="5"
	588	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_PATTERN_TYPE_RASTER_SOURCE"/>
	589	+	</enumeration>
	590	+	<enumeration name="Extend" c:type="cairo_extend_t"
	591	+	glib:type-name="cairo_extend_t"
	592	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_extend_get_type">
	593	+	<member name="none"
	594	+	value="0"
	595	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_EXTEND_NONE"/>
	596	+	<member name="repeat"
	597	+	value="1"
	598	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_EXTEND_REPEAT"/>
	599	+	<member name="reflect"
	600	+	value="2"
	601	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_EXTEND_REFLECT"/>
	602	+	<member name="pad"
	603	+	value="3"
	604	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_EXTEND_PAD"/>
	605	+	</enumeration>
	606	+	<enumeration name="Filter" c:type="cairo_filter_t"
	607	+	glib:type-name="cairo_filter_t"
	608	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_filter_get_type">
	609	+	<member name="fast"
	610	+	value="0"
	611	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILTER_FAST"/>
	612	+	<member name="good"
	613	+	value="1"
	614	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILTER_GOOD"/>
	615	+	<member name="best"
	616	+	value="2"
	617	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILTER_BEST"/>
	618	+	<member name="nearest"
	619	+	value="3"
	620	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILTER_NEAREST"/>
	621	+	<member name="bilinear"
	622	+	value="4"
	623	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILTER_BILINEAR"/>
	624	+	<member name="gaussian"
	625	+	value="5"
	626	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_FILTER_GAUSSIAN"/>
	627	+	</enumeration>
	628	+	<enumeration name="RegionOverlap" c:type="cairo_region_overlap_t"
	629	+	glib:type-name="cairo_region_overlap_t"
	630	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_region_overlap_get_type">
	631	+	<member name="in"
	632	+	value="0"
	633	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_REGION_OVERLAP_IN"/>
	634	+	<member name="out"
	635	+	value="1"
	636	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_REGION_OVERLAP_OUT"/>
	637	+	<member name="part"
	638	+	value="2"
	639	+	c:identifier="CAIRO_REGION_OVERLAP_PART"/>
	640	+	</enumeration>
	641	+	<record name="FontFace" c:type="cairo_font_face_t" foreign="1"
	642	+	glib:type-name="CairoFontFace"
	643	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_font_face_get_type"/>
	644	+	<record name="ScaledFont" c:type="cairo_scaled_font_t" foreign="1"
	645	+	glib:type-name="CairoScaledFont"
	646	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_scaled_font_get_type"/>
	647	+	<record name="Path" c:type="cairo_path_t" foreign="1"/>
	648	+	<record name="Rectangle" c:type="cairo_rectangle_t"
	649	+	glib:type-name="CairoRectangle"
	650	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_rectangle_get_type">
	651	+	<field name="x" writable="1">
	652	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="gdouble"/>
	653	+	</field>
	654	+	<field name="y" writable="1">
	655	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="gdouble"/>
	656	+	</field>
	657	+	<field name="width" writable="1">
	658	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="gdouble"/>
	659	+	</field>
	660	+	<field name="height" writable="1">
	661	+	<type name="gdouble" c:type="gdouble"/>
	662	+	</field>
	663	+	</record>
	664	+	<record name="RectangleInt" c:type="cairo_rectangle_int_t"
	665	+	glib:type-name="CairoRectangleInt"
	666	+	glib:get-type="cairo_gobject_rectangle_int_get_type">
	667	+	<field name="x" writable="1">
	668	+	<type name="gint" c:type="gint"/>
	669	+	</field>
	670	+	<field name="y" writable="1">
	671	+	<type name="gint" c:type="gint"/>
	672	+	</field>
	673	+	<field name="width" writable="1">
	674	+	<type name="gint" c:type="gint"/>
	675	+	</field>
	676	+	<field name="height" writable="1">
	677	+	<type name="gint" c:type="gint"/>
	678	+	</field>
	679	+	</record>
	680	+	<function name="image_surface_create" c:identifier="cairo_image_surface_create">
	681	+	<return-value transfer-ownership="none">
	682	+	<type name="none" c:type="void"/>
	683	+	</return-value>
	684	+	<parameters>
	685	+	</parameters>
	686	+	</function>
	687	+	</namespace>
	688	+	</repository>

A internal/gir/types/interface.go +52 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
	1	+	package types
	2	+
	3	+	import (
	4	+	"strings"
	5	+
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/util"
	7	+	)
	8	+
	9	+	func ConvertInterface(currns string, ins string, inter Interface, implemented map[string]bool, kinds KindMap) InterfaceTemplate {
	10	+	var methods []InterfaceFuncTemplate
	11	+
	12	+	for _, m := range inter.Methods {
	13	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(m.Name)
	14	+	if implemented != nil {
	15	+	v, ok := implemented[name]
	16	+	if v && ok {
	17	+	continue
	18	+	}
	19	+	}
	20	+	var newns string
	21	+	if ins != "" {
	22	+	newns = ins + "."
	23	+	}
	24	+	methods = append(methods, InterfaceFuncTemplate{
	25	+	Namespace: newns,
	26	+	FullName: util.SnakeToCamel(m.CIdentifier),
	27	+	FuncTemplate: FuncTemplate{
	28	+	Doc: m.Doc.StringSafe(),
	29	+	CName: m.CIdentifier,
	30	+	Name: name,
	31	+	Args: m.Parameters.Template(currns, ins, kinds),
	32	+	Ret: m.ReturnValue.Template(currns, ins, kinds),
	33	+	},
	34	+	})
	35	+	}
	36	+	name := util.SnakeToCamel(inter.Name)
	37	+	return InterfaceTemplate{
	38	+	Name: name,
	39	+	Doc: inter.Doc.StringSafe(),
	40	+	Methods: methods,
	41	+	}
	42	+	}
	43	+
	44	+	func GetInterfaceFuncs(ns string, name string, implemented map[string]bool, kinds KindMap) InterfaceTemplate {
	45	+	inter := kinds.MustInterface(ns, name)
	46	+	parts := strings.Split(name, ".")
	47	+	var ins string
	48	+	if len(parts) > 1 {
	49	+	ins = strings.ToLower(parts[0])
	50	+	}
	51	+	return ConvertInterface(ns, ins, inter, implemented, kinds)
	52	+	}

A internal/gir/types/kind.go +51 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
	1	+	package types
	2	+
	3	+	import "github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/util"
	4	+
	5	+	type Kind int8
	6	+
	7	+	const (
	8	+	UnknownType Kind = iota
	9	+	AliasType
	10	+	CallbackType
	11	+	ClassesType
	12	+	InterfacesType
	13	+	RecordsType
	14	+	OtherType
	15	+	)
	16	+
	17	+	type KindMap map[string]KindPair
	18	+
	19	+	func (km KindMap) key(ns string, name string) string {
	20	+	return util.NormalizeNamespace(ns, name, false)
	21	+	}
	22	+
	23	+	func (km KindMap) Add(ns string, name string, t Kind, v interface{}) {
	24	+	k := km.key(ns, name)
	25	+	km[k] = KindPair{
	26	+	K: t,
	27	+	Value: v,
	28	+	}
	29	+	}
	30	+
	31	+	func (km KindMap) pair(ns string, name string) KindPair {
	32	+	f := util.NormalizeNamespace(ns, name, false)
	33	+	return km[f]
	34	+	}
	35	+
	36	+	func (km KindMap) Kind(ns string, name string) Kind {
	37	+	return km.pair(ns, name).K
	38	+	}
	39	+
	40	+	func (km KindMap) MustInterface(ns string, name string) Interface {
	41	+	p := km.pair(ns, name)
	42	+	if p.K != InterfacesType {
	43	+	panic("value is not an interface")
	44	+	}
	45	+	return p.Value.(Interface)
	46	+	}
	47	+
	48	+	type KindPair struct {
	49	+	K Kind
	50	+	Value interface{}
	51	+	}

A internal/gir/types/template.go +284 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
	1	+	package types
	2	+
	3	+	import (
	4	+	"fmt"
	5	+	"strings"
	6	+
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/util"
	8	+	)
	9	+
	10	+	type argsTemplate struct {
	11	+	// Names are the variables but just the names
	12	+	Names []string
	13	+
	14	+	// Types are the variables but just the types
	15	+	Types []string
	16	+
	17	+	// Call are the variables as given in a function call
	18	+	Call []string
	19	+
	20	+	Full []string
	21	+	}
	22	+
	23	+	type funcArgsTemplate struct {
	24	+	// Pure are the arguments as passed directly to PureGo
	25	+	// The pure Call is a special case that contains the arguments for a callback call
	26	+	Pure argsTemplate
	27	+
	28	+	// API are the arguments as suitable for a Go API
	29	+	API argsTemplate
	30	+	}
	31	+
	32	+	func (f *funcArgsTemplate) AddAPI(t string, n string, k Kind, ns string) {
	33	+	c := n
	34	+	stars := strings.Count(t, "*")
	35	+	gobjectNs := "gobject."
	36	+	if strings.ToLower(ns) == "gobject" {
	37	+	gobjectNs = ""
	38	+	}
	39	+	switch k {
	40	+	case CallbackType:
	41	+	c = fmt.Sprintf("purego.NewCallback(%s)", n)
	42	+	case ClassesType:
	43	+	if stars == 0 {
	44	+	c = n
	45	+	t = "uintptr"
	46	+	} else if stars > 1 {
	47	+	c = fmt.Sprintf("%sConvertPtr(%s)", gobjectNs, n)
	48	+	} else if stars == 1 {
	49	+	c = n + ".GoPointer()"
	50	+	}
	51	+	case InterfacesType:
	52	+	t = strings.TrimPrefix(t, "*")
	53	+	if stars == 0 {
	54	+	c = n
	55	+	t = "uintptr"
	56	+	} else if stars > 1 {
	57	+	c = fmt.Sprintf("%sConvertPtr(%s)", gobjectNs, n)
	58	+	} else if stars == 1 {
	59	+	c = n + ".GoPointer()"
	60	+	}
	61	+	}
	62	+
	63	+	// special case for varargs
	64	+	if n == "varArgs" {
	65	+	c = n + "..."
	66	+	}
	67	+	f.API.Names = append(f.API.Names, n)
	68	+	f.API.Types = append(f.API.Types, t)
	69	+	f.API.Call = append(f.API.Call, c)
	70	+	f.API.Full = append(f.API.Full, n+" "+t)
	71	+	}
	72	+
	73	+	func (f *funcArgsTemplate) AddPure(t string, n string, k Kind) {
	74	+	n += "p"
	75	+	c := n
	76	+	stars := strings.Count(t, "*")
	77	+	switch k {
	78	+	case RecordsType:
	79	+	if stars == 0 {
	80	+	t = "uintptr"
	81	+	}
	82	+	case CallbackType:
	83	+	t = "uintptr"
	84	+	case ClassesType:
	85	+	if stars == 0 {
	86	+	c = n
	87	+	t = "uintptr"
	88	+	} else {
	89	+	c = fmt.Sprintf("%sNewFromInternalPtr(%s)", strings.TrimPrefix(t, "*"), n)
	90	+	t = strings.Repeat("*", stars-1) + "uintptr"
	91	+	}
	92	+	case InterfacesType:
	93	+	if stars == 0 {
	94	+	c = n
	95	+	t = "uintptr"
	96	+	} else {
	97	+	c = fmt.Sprintf("%s{Ptr: %s}", t+"Base", n)
	98	+	t = strings.Repeat("*", stars-1) + "uintptr"
	99	+	}
	100	+	}
	101	+	f.Pure.Names = append(f.Pure.Names, n)
	102	+	f.Pure.Types = append(f.Pure.Types, t)
	103	+	f.Pure.Call = append(f.Pure.Call, c)
	104	+	f.Pure.Full = append(f.Pure.Full, n+" "+t)
	105	+	}
	106	+
	107	+	func (f *funcArgsTemplate) Add(p Parameter, ins string, ns string, kinds KindMap) {
	108	+	// get the lookup namespace
	109	+	// as if the interface namespace is non-empty
	110	+	// means we can also lookup in the namespace of the interface
	111	+	lns := ns
	112	+	if ins != "" {
	113	+	lns = ins
	114	+	}
	115	+	goType := p.Translate(lns, kinds)
	116	+	kind := kinds.Kind(lns, goType)
	117	+	stars := strings.Count(goType, "*")
	118	+	goType = util.NormalizeNamespace(ns, goType, true)
	119	+	if kind != OtherType && kind != UnknownType {
	120	+	if ins != "" && strings.Count(goType, ".") < 1 {
	121	+	goType = ins + "." + goType
	122	+	}
	123	+	}
	124	+	if stars > 0 {
	125	+	goType = strings.Repeat("", stars) + strings.ReplaceAll(goType, "", "")
	126	+	}
	127	+
	128	+	// Get a suitable variable name
	129	+	varName := p.VarName()
	130	+
	131	+	f.AddAPI(goType, varName, kind, ns)
	132	+	f.AddPure(goType, varName, kind)
	133	+	}
	134	+
	135	+	type CallbackTemplate struct {
	136	+	Doc string
	137	+	Name string
	138	+	Args funcArgsTemplate
	139	+	Ret funcRetTemplate
	140	+	}
	141	+
	142	+	type AliasTemplate struct {
	143	+	// Name is the name of the alias given to the Go type declaration
	144	+	Name string
	145	+
	146	+	// Doc is the documentation of the alias
	147	+	Doc string
	148	+
	149	+	// Value is the value for the alias as a Go type
	150	+	Value string
	151	+	}
	152	+
	153	+	type RecordField struct {
	154	+	// Name is the Go name of the field
	155	+	Name string
	156	+
	157	+	// Type is the Go type of the field
	158	+	Type string
	159	+	}
	160	+
	161	+	type RecordTemplate struct {
	162	+	// Name is the name of the record given to the Go type declaration
	163	+	Name string
	164	+
	165	+	// Doc is the documentation of the alias
	166	+	Doc string
	167	+
	168	+	// Fields is the list of record fields
	169	+	Fields []RecordField
	170	+	}
	171	+
	172	+	type enumValues struct {
	173	+	// Doc is the documentation for the value
	174	+	Doc string
	175	+	// Name is the name of the enumeration value
	176	+	Name string
	177	+	// Value is the actual underlying value
	178	+	Value int
	179	+	}
	180	+
	181	+	type EnumTemplate struct {
	182	+	// Name is the name of the enumeration declared as the Go type for the int
	183	+	Name string
	184	+	// Doc is the documentation for the enumeration
	185	+	Doc string
	186	+	// Values are the list of values for the enumeration
	187	+	Values []enumValues
	188	+	}
	189	+
	190	+	type funcRetTemplate struct {
	191	+	// Raw is the raw value for the underlying purego function
	192	+	Raw string
	193	+	// Value is the underlying return value as a Go type
	194	+	Value string
	195	+	// Class indicates whether or not the return value is a class
	196	+	Class bool
	197	+	// RefSink indicates whether or not we should increase the reference count using obj.RefSink()
	198	+	RefSink bool
	199	+	}
	200	+
	201	+	func (fr *funcRetTemplate) Instance() string {
	202	+	if strings.HasPrefix(fr.Value, "*") {
	203	+	return "&"+fr.Value[1:]
	204	+	}
	205	+	return fr.Value
	206	+	}
	207	+
	208	+	type FuncTemplate struct {
	209	+	// Name is the name of the function declared as the Go function variable and public exposed API
	210	+	Name string
	211	+	// CName is the raw c name to be passed to purego register
	212	+	CName string
	213	+	// Doc is the documentation for the function
	214	+	Doc string
	215	+	// Args are the arguments
	216	+	Args funcArgsTemplate
	217	+	// Ret is the return argument
	218	+	Ret funcRetTemplate
	219	+	}
	220	+
	221	+	type InterfaceFuncTemplate struct {
	222	+	Namespace string
	223	+	FullName string
	224	+	FuncTemplate
	225	+	}
	226	+
	227	+	type SignalsTemplate struct {
	228	+	Doc string
	229	+	Name string
	230	+	CName string
	231	+	Args funcArgsTemplate
	232	+	Ret funcRetTemplate
	233	+	}
	234	+
	235	+	type ClassTemplate struct {
	236	+	// Doc is the documentation for the class
	237	+	Doc string
	238	+	// Name is the name of the class that is given to the Go struct
	239	+	Name string
	240	+	// Parent is a non-empty string of the embedded parent struct
	241	+	Parent string
	242	+	// Constructors is the slice of functions that create the class struct
	243	+	Constructors []FuncTemplate
	244	+	// Receivers is the slice of functions that have value receivers to the struct
	245	+	Receivers []FuncTemplate
	246	+	// Interfaces are receiver methods that are implemented because it needs to satisfy a certain interface
	247	+	Interfaces []InterfaceTemplate
	248	+	// Signals are helpers for ConnectX receivers
	249	+	Signals []SignalsTemplate
	250	+	}
	251	+
	252	+	type InterfaceTemplate struct {
	253	+	Doc string
	254	+	Name string
	255	+	// Methods is the methods that this interface defines
	256	+	Methods []InterfaceFuncTemplate
	257	+	}
	258	+
	259	+	type TemplateArg struct {
	260	+	// PkgName is the name of the package, declared at the top-level
	261	+	PkgName string
	262	+	// PkgEnv is the name of the package in the load environment variable
	263	+	PkgEnv string
	264	+	// NeedsInit declares whether or not this file needs an init code to register functions with purego
	265	+	NeedsInit bool
	266	+	// Imports defines the package imports that we need
	267	+	// This does not include purego
	268	+	// As the template already includes that if `NeedsInit` is set to true
	269	+	Imports []string
	270	+	// Aliases are type aliases declared as type ... = ...
	271	+	Aliases []AliasTemplate
	272	+	// Aliases are structs that are not classes
	273	+	Records []RecordTemplate
	274	+	// Callbacks are functions that will be converted with purego to uintptr
	275	+	Callbacks []CallbackTemplate
	276	+	// Enums are enumerations declared as const ... .... = ....
	277	+	Enums []EnumTemplate
	278	+	// Functions are the Go function declarations
	279	+	Functions []FuncTemplate
	280	+	// Interfaces is the list of interfaces that this package implements
	281	+	Interfaces []InterfaceTemplate
	282	+	// Classes are the Go struct with receiver declarations
	283	+	Classes []ClassTemplate
	284	+	}

A internal/gir/types/types.go +698 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,698 @@
	1	+	// package types implements types as found in gir XML files
	2	+	// NOTE: This was copied largely from (the type definitions) from
	3	+	package types
	4	+
	5	+	import (
	6	+	"encoding/xml"
	7	+	"strconv"
	8	+	"strings"
	9	+
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/gir/util"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	// convList maps the given GIR primitive type to a Go builtin type.
	14	+	// See https://github.com/diamondburned/gotk4/blob/fd960d20b525a07580938d10a214336bafb47d12/gir/girgen/types/types.go#LL483C1-L512C2
	15	+	var convList = map[string]string{
	16	+	"none": "",
	17	+	"gboolean": "bool",
	18	+	"gfloat": "float32",
	19	+	"gdouble": "float64",
	20	+	// This was changed because e.g. the error code in a GError struct is a gint and it has to be an int32
	21	+	// gint is a typedef to an int and on 32 and 64 bit systems a c int is 32 bits commonly, whereas in go an int is 32 bits on 32 bits systems and 64 bits on 64 bits systems
	22	+	// gotk4 seems to not cast these, see e.g. https://github.com/diamondburned/gotk4/blob/fd960d20b525a07580938d10a214336bafb47d12/gir/girgen/types/types.go#L473-L481
	23	+	"gint": "int32",
	24	+	"gssize": "int",
	25	+	"gint8": "int8",
	26	+	"gint16": "int16",
	27	+	"gshort": "int16",
	28	+	"gint32": "int32",
	29	+	"glong": "int32",
	30	+	"int32": "int32",
	31	+	"gint64": "int64",
	32	+	"guint": "uint",
	33	+	"gsize": "uint",
	34	+	"guchar": "byte",
	35	+	"gchar": "byte",
	36	+	"guint8": "byte", // some weird cases
	37	+	"guint16": "uint16",
	38	+	"gushort": "uint16",
	39	+	"guint32": "uint32",
	40	+	"gulong": "uint32",
	41	+	"gunichar": "uint32",
	42	+	"guint64": "uint64",
	43	+	"guintptr": "uintptr",
	44	+	"utf8": "string",
	45	+	"filename": "string",
	46	+
	47	+	// these are probably not correct but needed to compile
	48	+	"long double": "float64",
	49	+	"va_list": "[]interface{}",
	50	+	"gpointer": "uintptr",
	51	+	"GType": "[]interface{}",
	52	+	"const char*": "string",
	53	+	"char**": "[]string",
	54	+	// not exported
	55	+	"HarfBuzz.font_t": "uintptr",
	56	+	//"GLib.Quark": "byte",
	57	+	//"Allocation": "uintptr",
	58	+	}
	59	+
	60	+	// Repository represents a GObject Introspection Repository, which contains the
	61	+	// includes, C includes and namespaces of a single gir file.
	62	+	type Repository struct {
	63	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 repository"`
	64	+
	65	+	Version string `xml:"version,attr"`
	66	+	CIdentifierPrefixes string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 identifier-prefixes,attr"`
	67	+	CSymbolPrefixes string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 symbol-prefixes,attr"`
	68	+
	69	+	Includes []Include `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 include"`
	70	+	CIncludes []CInclude `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 include"`
	71	+	Packages []Package `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 package"`
	72	+	Namespaces []Namespace `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 namespace"`
	73	+	}
	74	+
	75	+	// https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gobject-introspection/-/blob/master/docs/gir-1.2.rnc
	76	+
	77	+	type Alias struct {
	78	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 alias"`
	79	+
	80	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	81	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	82	+
	83	+	InfoAttrs
	84	+	InfoElements
	85	+
	86	+	Type Type `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 type"`
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	type AnyType struct {
	90	+	// Possible variants.
	91	+	Type *Type `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 type"`
	92	+	Array *Array `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 array"`
	93	+	}
	94	+
	95	+	func (a *AnyType) Translate(ns string, kinds KindMap) string {
	96	+	if a == nil {
	97	+	panic("unknown type found")
	98	+	}
	99	+	t := a.Type
	100	+	if t == nil {
	101	+	if a.Array == nil {
	102	+	return ""
	103	+	}
	104	+	if v, ok := convList[a.Array.CType]; ok {
	105	+	return v
	106	+	}
	107	+	return "uintptr"
	108	+	}
	109	+	return a.Type.Template(ns, kinds)
	110	+	}
	111	+
	112	+	type Annotation struct {
	113	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 attribute"`
	114	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	115	+	Value string `xml:"value,attr"`
	116	+	}
	117	+
	118	+	type Array struct {
	119	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 array"`
	120	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	121	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	122	+	Length *int `xml:"length,attr"` // ix of .Parameters
	123	+	ZeroTerminated *bool `xml:"zero-terminated,attr"`
	124	+	FixedSize int `xml:"fixed-size,attr"`
	125	+	Introspectable bool `xml:"introspectable,attr"`
	126	+	// Type is the array's inner type.
	127	+	Type *Type `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 type"`
	128	+	}
	129	+
	130	+	// IsZeroTerminated returns true if the Array is zero-terminated. It accounts
	131	+	// for edge cases of the structure.
	132	+	func (a Array) IsZeroTerminated() bool {
	133	+	return a.Name == "" && (a.ZeroTerminated == nil \|\| *a.ZeroTerminated)
	134	+	}
	135	+
	136	+	type Bitfield struct {
	137	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 bitfield"`
	138	+
	139	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"` // Go case
	140	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	141	+	GLibTypeName string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-name,attr"`
	142	+	GLibGetType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 get-type,attr"`
	143	+
	144	+	Members []Member `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 member"`
	145	+	Functions []Function `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	146	+
	147	+	InfoAttrs
	148	+	InfoElements
	149	+	}
	150	+
	151	+	func (b *Bitfield) Template(ns string) EnumTemplate {
	152	+	els := make([]enumValues, len(b.Members))
	153	+	for i, m := range b.Members {
	154	+	v, err := strconv.Atoi(m.Value)
	155	+	if err != nil {
	156	+	panic(err)
	157	+	}
	158	+	// + Value needed to get rid of duplicates
	159	+	els[i] = enumValues{
	160	+	Doc: m.Doc.StringSafe(),
	161	+	Name: util.SnakeToCamel(util.RemoveSnakePrefix(strings.ToLower(m.CIdentifier), ns)) + "Value",
	162	+	Value: v,
	163	+	}
	164	+	}
	165	+	return EnumTemplate{
	166	+	Name: util.SnakeToCamel(b.Name),
	167	+	Doc: b.Doc.StringSafe(),
	168	+	Values: els,
	169	+	}
	170	+	}
	171	+
	172	+	type Signal struct {
	173	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 signal"`
	174	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	175	+	Detailed bool `xml:"detailed,attr"`
	176	+	When SignalWhen `xml:"when,attr"`
	177	+	Action bool `xml:"action,attr"`
	178	+	NoHooks bool `xml:"no-hooks,attr"`
	179	+	NoRecurse bool `xml:"no-recurse,attr"`
	180	+	InfoElements
	181	+	Parameters *Parameters `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 parameters"`
	182	+	ReturnValue *ReturnValue `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 return-value"`
	183	+	}
	184	+
	185	+	type SignalWhen string
	186	+
	187	+	const (
	188	+	SignalWhenFirst = "first"
	189	+	SignalWhenLast = "last"
	190	+	SignalWhenCleanup = "cleanup"
	191	+	)
	192	+
	193	+	type SourcePosition struct {
	194	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 source-position"`
	195	+	Filename string `xml:"filename,attr"`
	196	+	Line int `xml:"line,attr"`
	197	+	Column int `xml:"column,attr"`
	198	+	}
	199	+
	200	+	type TransferOwnership struct {
	201	+	TransferOwnership string `xml:"transfer-ownership,attr"`
	202	+	}
	203	+
	204	+	type Type struct {
	205	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 type"`
	206	+
	207	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	208	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	209	+	Introspectable *bool `xml:"introspectable,attr"`
	210	+
	211	+	DocElements
	212	+	// Types is the type's inner types.
	213	+	Types []Type `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 type"`
	214	+	}
	215	+
	216	+	func (typ *Type) IsIntrospectable() bool {
	217	+	return typ.Introspectable == nil \|\| *typ.Introspectable
	218	+	}
	219	+
	220	+	func (t *Type) Template(ns string, kinds KindMap) string {
	221	+	if v, ok := convList[t.Name]; ok {
	222	+	return v
	223	+	}
	224	+
	225	+	_type := util.NormalizeNamespace(ns, t.Name, true)
	226	+
	227	+	kind := kinds.Kind(ns, _type)
	228	+	// find the total pointer count
	229	+	count := strings.Count(t.CType, "*")
	230	+	w := strings.Trim(t.CType, "*")
	231	+	if w == "gpointer" {
	232	+	count += 1
	233	+	}
	234	+	// set the same pointer types on the name
	235	+	if count > 0 && kind != CallbackType {
	236	+	_type = strings.Repeat("*", count) + _type
	237	+	} else if kind == RecordsType {
	238	+	// if it's not a pointer
	239	+	// then purego doesn't support it (struct by value is not supported
	240	+	// so return uintptr
	241	+	_type = "uintptr"
	242	+	}
	243	+	return _type
	244	+	}
	245	+
	246	+	type Union struct {
	247	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 union"`
	248	+
	249	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"` // Go case
	250	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	251	+	CSymbolPrefix string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 symbol-prefix,attr"`
	252	+	GLibTypeName string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-name,attr"`
	253	+	GLibGetType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 get-type,attr"`
	254	+
	255	+	InfoAttrs
	256	+	InfoElements
	257	+
	258	+	Fields []Field `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 field"`
	259	+	Constructors []Constructor `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 constructor"`
	260	+	Methods []Method `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 method"`
	261	+	Functions []Function `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	262	+	Records []Record `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 record"`
	263	+	}
	264	+
	265	+	type VarArgs struct {
	266	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 varargs"`
	267	+	}
	268	+
	269	+	type VirtualMethod struct {
	270	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 virtual-method"`
	271	+
	272	+	Invoker string `xml:"invoker,attr"`
	273	+	CallableAttrs
	274	+	}
	275	+
	276	+	type Boxed struct{}
	277	+
	278	+	type CInclude struct {
	279	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 include"`
	280	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	281	+	}
	282	+
	283	+	type CallableAttrs struct {
	284	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	285	+	CIdentifier string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 identifier,attr"`
	286	+	ShadowedBy string `xml:"shadowed-by,attr"`
	287	+	Shadows string `xml:"shadows,attr"`
	288	+	Throws bool `xml:"throws,attr"`
	289	+	MovedTo string `xml:"moved-to,attr"`
	290	+	Parameters *Parameters `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 parameters"`
	291	+	ReturnValue *ReturnValue `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 return-value"`
	292	+	InfoAttrs
	293	+	InfoElements
	294	+	}
	295	+
	296	+	type Callback struct {
	297	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 callback"`
	298	+	CallableAttrs
	299	+	}
	300	+
	301	+	type Class struct {
	302	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 class"`
	303	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	304	+	Parent string `xml:"parent,attr"`
	305	+	Abstract bool `xml:"abstract,attr"`
	306	+
	307	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	308	+	CSymbolPrefix string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 symbol-prefix,attr"`
	309	+
	310	+	GLibTypeName string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-name,attr"`
	311	+	GLibGetType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 get-type,attr"`
	312	+	GLibTypeStruct string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-struct,attr"`
	313	+
	314	+	InfoAttrs
	315	+	InfoElements
	316	+
	317	+	Functions []Function `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	318	+	Implements []Implements `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 implements"`
	319	+	Constructors []Constructor `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 constructor"`
	320	+	Methods []Method `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 method"`
	321	+	VirtualMethods []VirtualMethod `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 virtual-method"`
	322	+	Fields []Field `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 field"`
	323	+	Signals []Signal `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 signal"`
	324	+	}
	325	+
	326	+	type Constant struct {
	327	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 constant"`
	328	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	329	+	Value string `xml:"value,attr"`
	330	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	331	+
	332	+	Type Type `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 type"`
	333	+
	334	+	InfoAttrs
	335	+	InfoElements
	336	+	}
	337	+
	338	+	type Constructor struct {
	339	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 constructor"`
	340	+	CallableAttrs
	341	+	}
	342	+
	343	+	type Doc struct {
	344	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 doc"`
	345	+	Filename string `xml:"filename,attr"`
	346	+	String string `xml:",innerxml"`
	347	+	Line int `xml:"line,attr"`
	348	+	}
	349	+
	350	+	func (d *Doc) StringSafe() string {
	351	+	if d == nil {
	352	+	return ""
	353	+	}
	354	+	lines := strings.Split(d.String, "\n")
	355	+	for i, l := range lines {
	356	+	lines[i] = "// " + l
	357	+	}
	358	+	return strings.Join(lines, "\n")
	359	+	}
	360	+
	361	+	type DocDeprecated struct {
	362	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 doc-deprecated"`
	363	+	String string `xml:",innerxml"`
	364	+	}
	365	+
	366	+	type DocElements struct {
	367	+	Doc *Doc
	368	+	DocDeprecated *DocDeprecated
	369	+	SourcePosition *SourcePosition
	370	+	}
	371	+
	372	+	func (d *DocElements) FilenameSafe() string {
	373	+	if d == nil \|\| (d.SourcePosition == nil && d.Doc == nil) {
	374	+	return "main.go"
	375	+	}
	376	+	if d.SourcePosition != nil {
	377	+	return util.TranslateFilename(d.SourcePosition.Filename)
	378	+	}
	379	+	return util.TranslateFilename(d.Doc.Filename)
	380	+	}
	381	+
	382	+	type Enum struct {
	383	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 enumeration"`
	384	+
	385	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"` // Go case
	386	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	387	+	GLibTypeName string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-name,attr"`
	388	+	GLibGetType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 get-type,attr"`
	389	+	GLibErrorDomain string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 error-domain,attr"`
	390	+
	391	+	Members []Member `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 member"`
	392	+	Functions []Function `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	393	+
	394	+	InfoAttrs
	395	+	InfoElements
	396	+	}
	397	+
	398	+	func (e *Enum) Template(ns string) EnumTemplate {
	399	+	els := make([]enumValues, len(e.Members))
	400	+
	401	+	for i, m := range e.Members {
	402	+	v, err := strconv.Atoi(m.Value)
	403	+	if err != nil {
	404	+	panic(err)
	405	+	}
	406	+	id := strings.ToLower(m.CIdentifier)
	407	+	sID := util.RemoveSnakePrefix(id, ns)
	408	+	els[i] = enumValues{
	409	+	Doc: m.Doc.StringSafe(),
	410	+	// + Value needed to get rid of duplicates
	411	+	Name: util.SnakeToCamel(sID) + "Value",
	412	+	Value: v,
	413	+	}
	414	+	}
	415	+	return EnumTemplate{
	416	+	Name: util.SnakeToCamel(e.Name),
	417	+	Doc: e.Doc.StringSafe(),
	418	+	Values: els,
	419	+	}
	420	+	}
	421	+
	422	+	type Field struct {
	423	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 field"`
	424	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	425	+	Bits int `xml:"bits,attr"`
	426	+	Private bool `xml:"private,attr"`
	427	+	Writable bool `xml:"writable,attr"` // default false
	428	+	Readable *bool `xml:"readable,attr"` // default true
	429	+	AnyType
	430	+	Callback *Callback
	431	+	Doc *Doc
	432	+	}
	433	+
	434	+	// IsReadable returns true if the field is readable.
	435	+	func (f Field) IsReadable() bool {
	436	+	return f.Readable == nil \|\| *f.Readable
	437	+	}
	438	+
	439	+	type Function struct {
	440	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	441	+	CallableAttrs
	442	+	}
	443	+
	444	+	type Implements struct {
	445	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 implements"`
	446	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	447	+	}
	448	+
	449	+	type Include struct {
	450	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 include"`
	451	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	452	+	Version string `xml:"version,attr"`
	453	+	}
	454	+
	455	+	type InfoAttrs struct {
	456	+	Introspectable *bool `xml:"introspectable,attr"` // default true
	457	+	Deprecated bool `xml:"deprecated,attr"`
	458	+	DeprecatedVersion string `xml:"deprecated-version,attr"`
	459	+	Version string `xml:"version,attr"`
	460	+	Stability string `xml:"stability,attr"`
	461	+	}
	462	+
	463	+	// IsIntrospectable returns true if the InfoAttrs indicates that the type is
	464	+	// introspectable.
	465	+	func (inf InfoAttrs) IsIntrospectable() bool {
	466	+	return inf.Introspectable == nil \|\| *inf.Introspectable
	467	+	}
	468	+
	469	+	type InfoElements struct {
	470	+	DocElements
	471	+	Annotations []Annotation `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 attribute"`
	472	+	}
	473	+
	474	+	type InstanceParameter struct {
	475	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 instance-parameter"`
	476	+	ParameterAttrs
	477	+	}
	478	+
	479	+	type Interface struct {
	480	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 interface"`
	481	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	482	+
	483	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	484	+	CSymbolPrefix string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 symbol-prefix,attr"`
	485	+
	486	+	GLibTypeName string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-name,attr"`
	487	+	GLibGetType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 get-type,attr"`
	488	+	GLibTypeStruct string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-struct,attr"`
	489	+
	490	+	Functions []Function `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	491	+	Methods []Method `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 method"`
	492	+	VirtualMethods []VirtualMethod `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 virtual-method"`
	493	+	Prerequisites []Prerequisite `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 prerequisite"`
	494	+	Signals []Signal `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 signal"`
	495	+
	496	+	InfoAttrs
	497	+	InfoElements
	498	+	}
	499	+
	500	+	type Member struct {
	501	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 member"`
	502	+
	503	+	Names []xml.Attr `xml:"name,attr"`
	504	+	Value string `xml:"value,attr"`
	505	+	CIdentifier string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 identifier,attr"`
	506	+	GLibNick string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 nick,attr"`
	507	+
	508	+	InfoAttrs
	509	+	InfoElements
	510	+	}
	511	+
	512	+	func (m Member) Name() string {
	513	+	return m.nameAttr(xml.Name{Local: "name"})
	514	+	}
	515	+
	516	+	func (m Member) GLibName() string {
	517	+	return m.nameAttr(xml.Name{Space: "http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0", Local: "name"})
	518	+	}
	519	+
	520	+	func (m Member) nameAttr(name xml.Name) string {
	521	+	for _, attr := range m.Names {
	522	+	if attr.Name == name {
	523	+	return attr.Value
	524	+	}
	525	+	}
	526	+	return ""
	527	+	}
	528	+
	529	+	type Method struct {
	530	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 method"`
	531	+	CallableAttrs
	532	+	}
	533	+
	534	+	type Namespace struct {
	535	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 namespace"`
	536	+
	537	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	538	+	Version string `xml:"version,attr"`
	539	+	CIdentifierPrefixes string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 identifier-prefixes,attr"`
	540	+	CSymbolPrefixes string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 symbol-prefixes,attr"`
	541	+	Prefix string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 prefix,attr"`
	542	+	SharedLibrary string `xml:"shared-library,attr"`
	543	+
	544	+	Aliases []Alias `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 alias"`
	545	+	Classes []Class `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 class"`
	546	+	Interfaces []Interface `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 interface"`
	547	+	Records []Record `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 record"`
	548	+	Enums []Enum `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 enumeration"`
	549	+	Functions []Function `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	550	+	Unions []Union `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 union"`
	551	+	Bitfields []Bitfield `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 bitfield"`
	552	+	Callbacks []Callback `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 callback"`
	553	+	Constants []Constant `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 constant"`
	554	+	Annotations []Annotation `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 attribute"`
	555	+	Boxeds []Boxed `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 boxed"`
	556	+	}
	557	+
	558	+	type Package struct {
	559	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 package"`
	560	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	561	+	}
	562	+
	563	+	type Parameter struct {
	564	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 parameter"`
	565	+	ParameterAttrs
	566	+	}
	567	+
	568	+	func (p *Parameter) Translate(ns string, kinds KindMap) string {
	569	+	if p.Name == "..." {
	570	+	return "...interface{}"
	571	+	}
	572	+	return p.AnyType.Translate(ns, kinds)
	573	+	}
	574	+
	575	+	func (p *Parameter) VarName() string {
	576	+	snaked := util.SnakeToCamel(p.Name)
	577	+	if snaked == "..." {
	578	+	return "varArgs"
	579	+	}
	580	+	// avoid clash between same name of type and var
	581	+	// could also do first letter to lower?
	582	+	return snaked + "Var"
	583	+	}
	584	+
	585	+	func (p *Parameters) Template(ns string, ifacens string, kinds KindMap) funcArgsTemplate {
	586	+	if p == nil {
	587	+	return funcArgsTemplate{}
	588	+	}
	589	+	params := p.Parameters
	590	+	if len(params) == 0 {
	591	+	return funcArgsTemplate{}
	592	+	}
	593	+	args := funcArgsTemplate{}
	594	+	for _, par := range params {
	595	+	args.Add(par, ifacens, ns, kinds)
	596	+	}
	597	+	return args
	598	+	}
	599	+
	600	+	type ParameterAttrs struct {
	601	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	602	+	Direction string `xml:"direction,attr"`
	603	+	Scope string `xml:"scope,attr"`
	604	+	Closure *int `xml:"closure,attr"`
	605	+	Destroy *int `xml:"destroy,attr"`
	606	+	CallerAllocates bool `xml:"caller-allocates,attr"`
	607	+	Skip bool `xml:"skip,attr"`
	608	+	Optional bool `xml:"optional,attr"`
	609	+	Nullable bool `xml:"nullable,attr"`
	610	+
	611	+	TransferOwnership
	612	+	AnyType
	613	+	Doc *Doc
	614	+	}
	615	+
	616	+	type Parameters struct {
	617	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 parameters"`
	618	+	InstanceParameter *InstanceParameter `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 instance-parameter"`
	619	+	Parameters []Parameter `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 parameter"`
	620	+	}
	621	+
	622	+	type Prerequisite struct {
	623	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 prerequisite"`
	624	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	625	+	}
	626	+
	627	+	type Property struct{}
	628	+
	629	+	type Record struct {
	630	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 record"`
	631	+	Name string `xml:"name,attr"`
	632	+	CType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 type,attr"`
	633	+	GLibTypeName string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 type-name,attr"`
	634	+	GLibGetType string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 get-type,attr"`
	635	+	CSymbolPrefix string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/c/1.0 symbol-prefix,attr"`
	636	+	GLibIsGTypeStructFor string `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/glib/1.0 is-gtype-struct-for,attr"`
	637	+	Disguised bool `xml:"disguised,attr"`
	638	+	Foreign bool `xml:"foreign,attr"`
	639	+
	640	+	Fields []Field `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 field"`
	641	+	Functions []Function `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 function"`
	642	+	Unions []Union `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 union"`
	643	+	Methods []Method `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 method"`
	644	+	Constructors []Constructor `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 constructor"`
	645	+	Properties []Property `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 property"`
	646	+
	647	+	InfoAttrs
	648	+	InfoElements
	649	+	}
	650	+
	651	+	type ReturnValue struct {
	652	+	XMLName xml.Name `xml:"http://www.gtk.org/introspection/core/1.0 return-value"`
	653	+	Scope string `xml:"scope,attr"`
	654	+	Closure *int `xml:"closure,attr"`
	655	+	Destroy *int `xml:"destroy,attr"`
	656	+	Introspectable bool `xml:"introspectable,attr"`
	657	+	Nullable bool `xml:"nullable,attr"`
	658	+	Skip bool `xml:"skip,attr"`
	659	+	AllowNone bool `xml:"allow-none,attr"`
	660	+	TransferOwnership
	661	+	DocElements
	662	+	AnyType
	663	+	}
	664	+
	665	+	func (r *ReturnValue) Template(ns string, ins string, kinds KindMap) funcRetTemplate {
	666	+	val := r.AnyType.Translate(ns, kinds)
	667	+	raw := val
	668	+	class := false
	669	+	lns := ns
	670	+	if ins != "" {
	671	+	lns = ins
	672	+	}
	673	+	kind := kinds.Kind(lns, raw)
	674	+	stars := strings.Count(val, "*")
	675	+	if kind != OtherType && kind != UnknownType {
	676	+	if ins != "" && strings.Count(val, ".") < 1 {
	677	+	val = ins + "." + val
	678	+	}
	679	+	}
	680	+	if stars > 0 {
	681	+	val = strings.Repeat("", stars) + strings.ReplaceAll(val, "", "")
	682	+	}
	683	+	switch kind {
	684	+	case ClassesType:
	685	+	raw = "uintptr"
	686	+	class = true
	687	+	case InterfacesType:
	688	+	raw = "uintptr"
	689	+	val += "Base"
	690	+	class = true
	691	+	}
	692	+	return funcRetTemplate{
	693	+	Raw: raw,
	694	+	Value: val,
	695	+	Class: class,
	696	+	RefSink: r.TransferOwnership.TransferOwnership == "none",
	697	+	}
	698	+	}

A internal/gir/util/util.go +93 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
	1	+	// package util implements some utility functions for parsing/converting gir files
	2	+	// TODO: Maybe some of this can more easily be done with regexes?
	3	+	//
	4	+	// But using regexes introduces 2 problems :^)
	5	+	package util
	6	+
	7	+	import (
	8	+	"path/filepath"
	9	+	"strings"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	// delimToCamel to camel converts a string with parts separated by `delim` to CamelCase
	13	+	func delimToCamel(s string, delim string) string {
	14	+	var sb strings.Builder
	15	+	words := strings.Split(s, delim)
	16	+	for _, w := range words {
	17	+	sb.WriteString(strings.Title(w))
	18	+	}
	19	+	return sb.String()
	20	+	}
	21	+
	22	+	// SnakeToCamel converts hello_world to HelloWorld
	23	+	func SnakeToCamel(s string) string {
	24	+	return delimToCamel(s, "_")
	25	+	}
	26	+
	27	+	// DashToCamel converts hello-world to HelloWorld
	28	+	func DashToCamel(s string) string {
	29	+	return delimToCamel(s, "-")
	30	+	}
	31	+
	32	+	// RemoveSnakePrefix removes `prefix` from string `s` if that prefix ise separated with a _
	33	+	// it removes lowercase or all u
	34	+	func RemoveSnakePrefix(s string, prefix string) string {
	35	+	parts := strings.Split(s, "_")
	36	+	if len(parts) <= 1 {
	37	+	return s
	38	+	}
	39	+	if strings.EqualFold(parts[0], prefix) {
	40	+	parts = parts[1:]
	41	+	}
	42	+	return strings.Join(parts, "_")
	43	+	}
	44	+
	45	+	// ReplaceExtension replaces an extension from filename with ext
	46	+	// the extension is found by splitting on "." and taking the last part
	47	+	func ReplaceExtension(filename string, ext string) string {
	48	+	splt := strings.Split(filename, ".")
	49	+	if len(splt) == 1 {
	50	+	return filename
	51	+	}
	52	+	splt[len(splt)-1] = ext
	53	+	return strings.Join(splt, ".")
	54	+	}
	55	+
	56	+	// NormalizeNamespace converts a type to one that always includes a lowercase namespace
	57	+	// if no namespace is found, it adds `ns`, unless if strip is True then namespaces always equaling `ns` will be removed
	58	+	func NormalizeNamespace(ns string, gotype string, strip bool) string {
	59	+	if ns == "" {
	60	+	return ""
	61	+	}
	62	+	gotype = strings.Trim(gotype, "*")
	63	+	splt := strings.Split(gotype, ".")
	64	+	if len(splt) <= 1 {
	65	+	splt = append([]string{ns}, splt...)
	66	+	}
	67	+	splt[0] = strings.ToLower(splt[0])
	68	+	if strip && splt[0] == strings.ToLower(ns) {
	69	+	splt = splt[1:]
	70	+	}
	71	+	return strings.Join(splt, ".")
	72	+	}
	73	+
	74	+	// TranslateFilename translates a file path by renaming the file to a go suitable file
	75	+	func TranslateFilename(filename string) string {
	76	+	if filename == "" {
	77	+	return "main.go"
	78	+	}
	79	+
	80	+	b := filepath.Base(filename)
	81	+	return ReplaceExtension(b, "go")
	82	+	}
	83	+
	84	+	func ConvertArgs(a []string) string {
	85	+	return strings.Join(a, ", ")
	86	+	}
	87	+
	88	+	func ConvertArgsComma(a []string) string {
	89	+	if len(a) == 0 {
	90	+	return ""
	91	+	}
	92	+	return ", " + strings.Join(a, ", ")
	93	+	}

A shell.nix +26 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
	1	+	{ pkgs ? import <nixpkgs> {} }:
	2	+	pkgs.mkShell {
	3	+	# nativeBuildInputs is usually what you want -- tools you need to run
	4	+	buildInputs = [
	5	+	pkgs.go
	6	+	pkgs.godef
	7	+	pkgs.go-tools
	8	+	pkgs.vim
	9	+	pkgs.gofumpt
	10	+	pkgs.gopls
	11	+	pkgs.python3
	12	+	pkgs.libadwaita.dev
	13	+	pkgs.python3.pkgs.pip
	14	+	pkgs.gotools
	15	+	];
	16	+	shellHook = ''
	17	+	# Tells pip to put packages into $PIP_PREFIX instead of the usual locations.
	18	+	# See https://pip.pypa.io/en/stable/user_guide/#environment-variables.
	19	+	export PIP_PREFIX=$(pwd)/_build/pip_packages
	20	+	export PYTHONPATH="$PIP_PREFIX/${pkgs.python3.sitePackages}:$PYTHONPATH"
	21	+	export PATH="$PIP_PREFIX/bin:$PATH"
	22	+	export GOPATH="$HOME/go"
	23	+	unset SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH
	24	+	'';
	25	+	}
	26	+

A templates/go +264 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
	1	+	// Package {{.PkgName}} was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package {{.PkgName}}
	3	+
	4	+	{{ $NotGObject := ne .PkgName "gobject" }}
	5	+
	6	+	{{if or .Imports .NeedsInit}}
	7	+	import (
	8	+	{{if .NeedsInit}}
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	11	+	{{end}}
	12	+	{{range .Imports -}}
	13	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/{{.}}"
	14	+	{{end}}
	15	+	)
	16	+	{{end}}
	17	+
	18	+	{{$outer := .}}
	19	+
	20	+	{{range .Callbacks -}}
	21	+	{{.Doc}}
	22	+	type {{.Name}} func({{ conv .Args.Pure.Types }}) {{.Ret.Raw}}
	23	+	{{end}}
	24	+
	25	+	{{range .Records -}}
	26	+	{{.Doc}}
	27	+	type {{.Name}} struct {
	28	+	{{range .Fields}}
	29	+	{{.Name}} {{.Type}}
	30	+	{{end}}
	31	+	}
	32	+	{{end}}
	33	+
	34	+	{{range .Interfaces -}}
	35	+	{{.Doc}}
	36	+	type {{.Name}} interface {
	37	+	GoPointer() uintptr
	38	+	SetGoPointer(uintptr)
	39	+	{{range .Methods -}}
	40	+	{{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Full}}) {{.Ret.Value}}
	41	+	{{end}}
	42	+	}
	43	+	type {{.Name}}Base struct {
	44	+	Ptr uintptr
	45	+	}
	46	+
	47	+	func (x *{{.Name}}Base) GoPointer() uintptr {
	48	+	return x.Ptr
	49	+	}
	50	+
	51	+	func (x *{{.Name}}Base) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	52	+	x.Ptr = ptr
	53	+	}
	54	+
	55	+	{{$outer := .}}
	56	+	{{range .Methods -}}
	57	+	{{.Doc}}
	58	+	func (x *{{$outer.Name}}Base) {{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Full}}) {{.Ret.Value}} {
	59	+	{{if .Ret.Class}}
	60	+	{{.Name}}Ptr := {{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	61	+	if {{.Name}}Ptr == 0 {
	62	+	return nil
	63	+	}
	64	+	{{if .Ret.RefSink}}
	65	+	{{if $NotGObject}}gobject.{{end}}IncreaseRef({{.Name}}Ptr)
	66	+	{{end}}
	67	+	{{.Name}}Cls := {{.Ret.Instance}}{}
	68	+	{{.Name}}Cls.Ptr = {{.Name}}Ptr
	69	+	return {{.Name}}Cls
	70	+	{{else if .Ret.Value}}
	71	+	return {{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	72	+	{{else}}
	73	+	{{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	74	+	{{end}}
	75	+	}
	76	+	{{end}}
	77	+
	78	+	{{range .Methods -}}
	79	+	var {{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}} func(uintptr {{convc .Args.Pure.Types}}) {{.Ret.Raw}}
	80	+	{{end}}
	81	+	{{end}}
	82	+
	83	+	{{range .Aliases -}}
	84	+	{{.Doc}}
	85	+	type {{.Name}} = {{.Value}}
	86	+	{{end}}
	87	+
	88	+	{{range .Enums -}}
	89	+	{{.Doc}}
	90	+	type {{.Name}} int
	91	+	const (
	92	+	{{$outer := .}}
	93	+	{{range .Values -}}
	94	+	{{.Doc}}
	95	+	{{.Name}} {{$outer.Name}} = {{.Value}}
	96	+	{{end}}
	97	+	)
	98	+	{{end}}
	99	+
	100	+	{{range .Functions -}}
	101	+	var x{{.Name}} func({{conv .Args.Pure.Types}}) {{.Ret.Raw}}
	102	+
	103	+	{{.Doc}}
	104	+	func {{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Full}}) {{.Ret.Value}} {
	105	+	{{if .Ret.Class}}
	106	+	{{.Name}}Ptr := x{{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Call}})
	107	+	if {{.Name}}Ptr == 0 {
	108	+	return nil
	109	+	}
	110	+	{{if .Ret.RefSink}}
	111	+	{{if $NotGObject}}gobject.{{end}}IncreaseRef({{.Name}}Ptr)
	112	+	{{end}}
	113	+	{{.Name}}Cls := {{.Ret.Instance}}{}
	114	+	{{.Name}}Cls.Ptr = {{.Name}}Ptr
	115	+	return {{.Name}}Cls
	116	+	{{else if .Ret.Value}}
	117	+	return x{{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Call}})
	118	+	{{else}}
	119	+	x{{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Call}})
	120	+	{{end}}
	121	+	}
	122	+	{{end}}
	123	+
	124	+	{{range .Classes -}}
	125	+	{{.Doc}}
	126	+	type {{.Name}} struct {
	127	+	{{.Parent}}
	128	+	{{if not .Parent}}
	129	+	Ptr uintptr
	130	+	{{end}}
	131	+	}
	132	+
	133	+	{{$outer := .}}
	134	+	func {{.Name}}NewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *{{.Name}} {
	135	+	cls := &{{.Name}}{}
	136	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	137	+	return cls
	138	+	}
	139	+
	140	+	{{range .Constructors -}}
	141	+	var x{{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}} func({{conv .Args.Pure.Types}}) {{.Ret.Raw}}
	142	+
	143	+
	144	+	{{.Doc}}
	145	+	func {{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Full}}) {{.Ret.Value}} {
	146	+	{{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}Ptr := x{{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Call}})
	147	+	if {{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}Ptr == 0 {
	148	+	return nil
	149	+	}
	150	+	{{if .Ret.RefSink}}
	151	+	{{if $NotGObject}}gobject.{{end}}IncreaseRef({{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}Ptr)
	152	+	{{end}}
	153	+	{{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}Cls := {{.Ret.Instance}}{}
	154	+	{{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}Cls.Ptr = {{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}Ptr
	155	+	return {{.Name}}{{$outer.Name}}Cls
	156	+	}
	157	+	{{end}}
	158	+
	159	+	{{$outer := .}}
	160	+	{{range .Receivers -}}
	161	+	var x{{$outer.Name}}{{.Name}} func(uintptr {{convc .Args.Pure.Types}}) {{.Ret.Raw}}
	162	+
	163	+	{{.Doc}}
	164	+	func (x *{{$outer.Name}}) {{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Full}}) {{.Ret.Value}} {
	165	+	{{if .Ret.Class}}
	166	+	{{.Name}}Ptr := x{{$outer.Name}}{{.Name}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	167	+	if {{.Name}}Ptr == 0 {
	168	+	return nil
	169	+	}
	170	+	{{if .Ret.RefSink}}
	171	+	{{if $NotGObject}}gobject.{{end}}IncreaseRef({{.Name}}Ptr)
	172	+	{{end}}
	173	+	{{.Name}}Cls := {{.Ret.Instance}}{}
	174	+	{{.Name}}Cls.Ptr = {{.Name}}Ptr
	175	+	return {{.Name}}Cls
	176	+	{{else if .Ret.Value}}
	177	+	return x{{$outer.Name}}{{.Name}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	178	+	{{else}}
	179	+	x{{$outer.Name}}{{.Name}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	180	+	{{end}}
	181	+	}
	182	+	{{end}}
	183	+
	184	+	func (c *{{.Name}}) GoPointer() uintptr {
	185	+	return c.Ptr
	186	+	}
	187	+
	188	+	func (c *{{.Name}}) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	189	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	190	+	}
	191	+
	192	+	{{range .Signals -}}
	193	+
	194	+	{{.Doc}}
	195	+	func (x *{{$outer.Name}}) Connect{{.Name}}(cb func({{$outer.Name}} {{convc .Args.API.Types}}) {{.Ret.Value}}) {
	196	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr {{convc .Args.Pure.Full}}) {{.Ret.Raw}} {
	197	+	fa := {{$outer.Name}}{}
	198	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	199	+	{{if .Ret.Class}}
	200	+	{{.Name}}Cls := cb(fa {{convc .Args.Pure.Call}})
	201	+	return {{.Name}}Cls.Ptr
	202	+	{{else if .Ret.Value}}
	203	+	return cb(fa {{convc .Args.Pure.Call}})
	204	+	{{else}}
	205	+	cb(fa {{convc .Args.Pure.Call}})
	206	+	{{end}}
	207	+	}
	208	+	{{if $NotGObject}}gobject.{{end}}ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::{{.CName}}", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	209	+	}
	210	+	{{end}}
	211	+
	212	+	{{range .Interfaces -}}
	213	+	{{range .Methods -}}
	214	+	{{.Doc}}
	215	+	func (x *{{$outer.Name}}) {{.Name}}({{conv .Args.API.Full}}) {{.Ret.Value}} {
	216	+	{{if .Ret.Class}}
	217	+	{{.Name}}Ptr := {{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	218	+	if {{.Name}}Ptr == 0 {
	219	+	return nil
	220	+	}
	221	+	{{if .Ret.RefSink}}
	222	+	{{if $NotGObject}}gobject.{{end}}IncreaseRef({{.Name}}Ptr)
	223	+	{{end}}
	224	+	{{.Name}}Cls := {{.Ret.Instance}}{}
	225	+	{{.Name}}Cls.Ptr = {{.Name}}Ptr
	226	+	return {{.Name}}Cls
	227	+	{{else if .Ret.Value}}
	228	+	return {{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	229	+	{{else}}
	230	+	{{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}}(x.GoPointer() {{convc .Args.API.Call}})
	231	+	{{end}}
	232	+	}
	233	+	{{end}}
	234	+	{{end}}
	235	+
	236	+	{{end}}
	237	+
	238	+
	239	+	{{if .NeedsInit}}
	240	+
	241	+	func init() {
	242	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("{{.PkgEnv}}"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	243	+	if err != nil {
	244	+	panic(err)
	245	+	}
	246	+	{{range .Functions -}}
	247	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&x{{.Name}}, lib, "{{.CName}}")
	248	+	{{end}}
	249	+	{{range .Classes -}}
	250	+	{{$cls := .}}
	251	+	{{range .Constructors -}}
	252	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&x{{.Name}}{{$cls.Name}}, lib, "{{.CName}}")
	253	+	{{end}}
	254	+	{{range .Receivers -}}
	255	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&x{{$cls.Name}}{{.Name}}, lib, "{{.CName}}")
	256	+	{{end}}
	257	+	{{end}}
	258	+	{{range .Interfaces -}}
	259	+	{{range .Methods -}}
	260	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&{{.Namespace}}X{{.FullName}}, lib, "{{.CName}}")
	261	+	{{end}}
	262	+	{{end}}
	263	+	}
	264	+	{{end}}

A templates/gobject +94 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
	1	+	package gobject
	2	+
	3	+	import (
	4	+	"os"
	5	+	"reflect"
	6	+
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type Ptr interface {
	12	+	GoPointer() uintptr
	13	+	SetGoPointer(uintptr)
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	func ConvertPtr(a interface{}) *uintptr {
	17	+	if a == nil \|\| (reflect.ValueOf(a).Kind() == reflect.Ptr && reflect.ValueOf(a).IsNil()) {
	18	+	return nil
	19	+	}
	20	+	ptr := reflect.ValueOf(a).Elem()
	21	+	v, ok := ptr.Interface().(Ptr);
	22	+	if !ok {
	23	+	panic("not valid")
	24	+	}
	25	+	g := v.GoPointer()
	26	+	return &g
	27	+	}
	28	+
	29	+	func IncreaseRef(a uintptr) {
	30	+	xObjectRefSink(a)
	31	+	}
	32	+
	33	+	func ObjectConnect(a uintptr, b string, c ...interface{}) uintptr {
	34	+	return xObjectConnect(a, b, c...)
	35	+	}
	36	+
	37	+	func (o Object) Cast(v Ptr) {
	38	+	v.SetGoPointer(o.GoPointer())
	39	+	}
	40	+
	41	+	// NewCallback is an alias to purego.NewCallback
	42	+	func NewCallback(fn interface{}) uintptr {
	43	+	return purego.NewCallback(fn)
	44	+	}
	45	+
	46	+	// types
	47	+	const (
	48	+	TypeInvalidVal Type = 0
	49	+	TypeNoneVal = 1 << 2
	50	+	TypeInterfaceVal = 2 << 2
	51	+	TypeCharVal = 3 << 2
	52	+	TypeUcharVal = 4 << 2
	53	+	TypeBooleanVal = 5 << 2
	54	+	TypeIntVal = 6 << 2
	55	+	TypeUintVal = 7 << 2
	56	+	TypeLongVal = 8 << 2
	57	+	TypeUlongVal = 9 << 2
	58	+	TypeInt64Val = 10 << 2
	59	+	TypeUint64Val = 11 << 2
	60	+	TypeEnumVal = 12 << 2
	61	+	TypeFlagsVal = 13 << 2
	62	+	TypeFloatVal = 14 << 2
	63	+	TypeDoubleVal = 15 << 2
	64	+	TypeStringVal = 16 << 2
	65	+	TypePointerVal = 17 << 2
	66	+	TypeBoxedVal = 18 << 2
	67	+	TypeParamVal = 19 << 2
	68	+	TypeObjectVal = 20 << 2
	69	+	TypeReservedGLibLastVal = 31 << 2
	70	+	TypeReservedBseFirstVal = 32 << 2
	71	+	TypeReservedBseLastVal = 48 << 2
	72	+	TypeReservedUserFirstVal = 49 << 2
	73	+	)
	74	+
	75	+	var xValueDupString func(*Value) string
	76	+
	77	+	func (v *Value) String() string {
	78	+	return xValueDupString(v)
	79	+	}
	80	+
	81	+	var xValueGetInt func(*Value) int
	82	+
	83	+	func (v *Value) Int() int {
	84	+	return xValueGetInt(v)
	85	+	}
	86	+
	87	+	func init() {
	88	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(os.Getenv("PUREGOTK_GTK_PATH"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	89	+	if err != nil {
	90	+	panic(err)
	91	+	}
	92	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xValueDupString, lib, "g_value_dup_string")
	93	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xValueGetInt, lib, "g_value_get_int")
	94	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-about-window.go +1220 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,1220 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gsk"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	type AboutWindowClass struct {
	14	+	ParentClass uintptr
	15	+	}
	16	+
	17	+	var xShowAboutWindow func(uintptr, string, ...interface{})
	18	+
	19	+	// A convenience function for showing an application’s about window.
	20	+	func ShowAboutWindow(ParentVar *gtk.Window, FirstPropertyNameVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	21	+
	22	+	xShowAboutWindow(ParentVar.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyNameVar, varArgs...)
	23	+
	24	+	}
	25	+
	26	+	// A window showing information about the application.
	27	+	//
	28	+	// <picture>
	29	+	//
	30	+	// <source srcset="about-window-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	31	+	// <img src="about-window.png" alt="about-window">
	32	+	//
	33	+	// </picture>
	34	+	//
	35	+	// An about window is typically opened when the user activates the `About …`
	36	+	// item in the application's primary menu. All parts of the window are optional.
	37	+	//
	38	+	// ## Main page
	39	+	//
	40	+	// `AdwAboutWindow` prominently displays the application's icon, name, developer
	41	+	// name and version. They can be set with the [property@AboutWindow:application-icon],
	42	+	// [property@AboutWindow:application-name],
	43	+	// [property@AboutWindow:developer-name] and [property@AboutWindow:version]
	44	+	// respectively.
	45	+	//
	46	+	// ## What's New
	47	+	//
	48	+	// `AdwAboutWindow` provides a way for applications to display their release
	49	+	// notes, set with the [property@AboutWindow:release-notes] property.
	50	+	//
	51	+	// Release notes are formatted the same way as
	52	+	// [AppStream descriptions](https://freedesktop.org/software/appstream/docs/chap-Metadata.html#tag-description).
	53	+	//
	54	+	// The supported formatting options are:
	55	+	//
	56	+	// * Paragraph (`<p>`)
	57	+	// * Ordered list (`<ol>`), with list items (`<li>`)
	58	+	// * Unordered list (`<ul>`), with list items (`<li>`)
	59	+	//
	60	+	// Within paragraphs and list items, emphasis (`<em>`) and inline code
	61	+	// (`<code>`) text styles are supported. The emphasis is rendered in italic,
	62	+	// while inline code is shown in a monospaced font.
	63	+	//
	64	+	// Any text outside paragraphs or list items is ignored.
	65	+	//
	66	+	// Nested lists are not supported.
	67	+	//
	68	+	// Only one version can be shown at a time. By default, the displayed version
	69	+	// number matches [property@AboutWindow:version]. Use
	70	+	// [property@AboutWindow:release-notes-version] to override it.
	71	+	//
	72	+	// ## Details
	73	+	//
	74	+	// The Details page displays the application comments and links.
	75	+	//
	76	+	// The comments can be set with the [property@AboutWindow:comments] property.
	77	+	// Unlike [property@Gtk.AboutDialog:comments], this string can be long and
	78	+	// detailed. It can also contain links and Pango markup.
	79	+	//
	80	+	// To set the application website, use [property@AboutWindow:website].
	81	+	// To add extra links below the website, use [method@AboutWindow.add_link].
	82	+	//
	83	+	// If the Details page doesn't have any other content besides website, the
	84	+	// website will be displayed on the main page instead.
	85	+	//
	86	+	// ## Troubleshooting
	87	+	//
	88	+	// `AdwAboutWindow` displays the following two links on the main page:
	89	+	//
	90	+	// * Support Questions, set with the [property@AboutWindow:support-url] property,
	91	+	// * Report an Issue, set with the [property@AboutWindow:issue-url] property.
	92	+	//
	93	+	// Additionally, applications can provide debugging information. It will be
	94	+	// shown separately on the Troubleshooting page. Use the
	95	+	// [property@AboutWindow:debug-info] property to specify it.
	96	+	//
	97	+	// It's intended to be attached to issue reports when reporting issues against
	98	+	// the application. As such, it cannot contain markup or links.
	99	+	//
	100	+	// `AdwAboutWindow` provides a quick way to save debug information to a file.
	101	+	// When saving, [property@AboutWindow:debug-info-filename] would be used as
	102	+	// the suggested filename.
	103	+	//
	104	+	// ## Credits and Acknowledgements
	105	+	//
	106	+	// The Credits page has the following default sections:
	107	+	//
	108	+	// * Developers, set with the [property@AboutWindow:developers] property,
	109	+	// * Designers, set with the [property@AboutWindow:designers] property,
	110	+	// * Artists, set with the [property@AboutWindow:artists] property,
	111	+	// * Documenters, set with the [property@AboutWindow:documenters] property,
	112	+	// * Translators, set with the [property@AboutWindow:translator-credits] property.
	113	+	//
	114	+	// When setting translator credits, use the strings `"translator-credits"` or
	115	+	// `"translator_credits"` and mark them as translatable.
	116	+	//
	117	+	// The default sections that don't contain any names won't be displayed.
	118	+	//
	119	+	// The Credits page can also contain an arbitrary number of extra sections below
	120	+	// the default ones. Use [method@AboutWindow.add_credit_section] to add them.
	121	+	//
	122	+	// The Acknowledgements page can be used to acknowledge additional people and
	123	+	// organizations for their non-development contributions. Use
	124	+	// [method@AboutWindow.add_acknowledgement_section] to add sections to it. For
	125	+	// example, it can be used to list backers in a crowdfunded project or to give
	126	+	// special thanks.
	127	+	//
	128	+	// Each of the people or organizations can have an email address or a website
	129	+	// specified. To add a email address, use a string like
	130	+	// `Edgar Allan Poe <edgar@poe.com>`. To specify a website with a title, use a
	131	+	// string like `The GNOME Project https://www.gnome.org`:
	132	+	//
	133	+	// <picture>
	134	+	//
	135	+	// <source srcset="about-window-credits-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	136	+	// <img src="about-window-credits.png" alt="about-window-credits">
	137	+	//
	138	+	// </picture>
	139	+	//
	140	+	// ## Legal
	141	+	//
	142	+	// The Legal page displays the copyright and licensing information for the
	143	+	// application and other modules.
	144	+	//
	145	+	// The copyright string is set with the [property@AboutWindow:copyright]
	146	+	// property and should be a short string of one or two lines, for example:
	147	+	// `© 2022 Example`.
	148	+	//
	149	+	// Licensing information can be quickly set from a list of known licenses with
	150	+	// the [property@AboutWindow:license-type] property. If the application's
	151	+	// license is not in the list, [property@AboutWindow:license] can be used
	152	+	// instead.
	153	+	//
	154	+	// To add information about other modules, such as application dependencies or
	155	+	// data, use [method@AboutWindow.add_legal_section].
	156	+	//
	157	+	// ## Constructing
	158	+	//
	159	+	// To make constructing an `AdwAboutWindow` as convenient as possible, you can
	160	+	// use the function [func@show_about_window] which constructs and shows a
	161	+	// window.
	162	+	//
	163	+	// ```c
	164	+	// static void
	165	+	// show_about (GtkApplication *app)
	166	+	//
	167	+	// {
	168	+	// const char *developers[] = {
	169	+	// "Angela Avery",
	170	+	// NULL
	171	+	// };
	172	+	//
	173	+	// const char *designers[] = {
	174	+	// "GNOME Design Team",
	175	+	// NULL
	176	+	// };
	177	+	//
	178	+	// adw_show_about_window (gtk_application_get_active_window (app),
	179	+	// "application-name", _("Example"),
	180	+	// "application-icon", "org.example.App",
	181	+	// "version", "1.2.3",
	182	+	// "copyright", "© 2022 Angela Avery",
	183	+	// "issue-url", "https://gitlab.gnome.org/example/example/-/issues/new",
	184	+	// "license-type", GTK_LICENSE_GPL_3_0,
	185	+	// "developers", developers,
	186	+	// "designers", designers,
	187	+	// "translator-credits", _("translator-credits"),
	188	+	// NULL);
	189	+	// }
	190	+	//
	191	+	// ```
	192	+	//
	193	+	// ## CSS nodes
	194	+	//
	195	+	// `AdwAboutWindow` has a main CSS node with the name `window` and the
	196	+	// style class `.about`.
	197	+	type AboutWindow struct {
	198	+	Window
	199	+	}
	200	+
	201	+	func AboutWindowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *AboutWindow {
	202	+	cls := &AboutWindow{}
	203	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	204	+	return cls
	205	+	}
	206	+
	207	+	var xNewAboutWindow func() uintptr
	208	+
	209	+	// Creates a new `AdwAboutWindow`.
	210	+	func NewAboutWindow() *gtk.Widget {
	211	+	NewAboutWindowPtr := xNewAboutWindow()
	212	+	if NewAboutWindowPtr == 0 {
	213	+	return nil
	214	+	}
	215	+
	216	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewAboutWindowPtr)
	217	+
	218	+	NewAboutWindowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	219	+	NewAboutWindowCls.Ptr = NewAboutWindowPtr
	220	+	return NewAboutWindowCls
	221	+	}
	222	+
	223	+	var xAboutWindowAddAcknowledgementSection func(uintptr, string, uintptr)
	224	+
	225	+	// Adds a section to the Acknowledgements page.
	226	+	//
	227	+	// This can be used to acknowledge additional people and organizations for their
	228	+	// non-development contributions - for example, backers in a crowdfunded
	229	+	// project.
	230	+	//
	231	+	// Each name may contain email addresses and URLs, see the introduction for more
	232	+	// details.
	233	+	//
	234	+	// See also:
	235	+	//
	236	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:developers]
	237	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:designers]
	238	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:artists]
	239	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:documenters]
	240	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:translator-credits]
	241	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_credit_section]
	242	+	func (x *AboutWindow) AddAcknowledgementSection(NameVar string, PeopleVar uintptr) {
	243	+
	244	+	xAboutWindowAddAcknowledgementSection(x.GoPointer(), NameVar, PeopleVar)
	245	+
	246	+	}
	247	+
	248	+	var xAboutWindowAddCreditSection func(uintptr, string, uintptr)
	249	+
	250	+	// Adds an extra section to the Credits page.
	251	+	//
	252	+	// Extra sections are displayed below the standard categories.
	253	+	//
	254	+	// Each name may contain email addresses and URLs, see the introduction for more
	255	+	// details.
	256	+	//
	257	+	// See also:
	258	+	//
	259	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:developers]
	260	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:designers]
	261	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:artists]
	262	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:documenters]
	263	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:translator-credits]
	264	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_acknowledgement_section]
	265	+	func (x *AboutWindow) AddCreditSection(NameVar string, PeopleVar uintptr) {
	266	+
	267	+	xAboutWindowAddCreditSection(x.GoPointer(), NameVar, PeopleVar)
	268	+
	269	+	}
	270	+
	271	+	var xAboutWindowAddLegalSection func(uintptr, string, string, gtk.License, string)
	272	+
	273	+	// Adds an extra section to the Legal page.
	274	+	//
	275	+	// Extra sections will be displayed below the application's own information.
	276	+	//
	277	+	// The parameters @copyright, @license_type and @license will be used to present
	278	+	// the it the same way as [property@AboutWindow:copyright],
	279	+	// [property@AboutWindow:license-type] and [property@AboutWindow:license] are
	280	+	// for the application's own information.
	281	+	//
	282	+	// See those properties for more details.
	283	+	//
	284	+	// This can be useful to attribute the application dependencies or data.
	285	+	//
	286	+	// Examples:
	287	+	//
	288	+	// ```c
	289	+	// adw_about_window_add_legal_section (ADW_ABOUT_WINDOW (about),
	290	+	//
	291	+	// _("Copyright and a known license"),
	292	+	// "© 2022 Example",
	293	+	// GTK_LICENSE_LGPL_2_1,
	294	+	// NULL);
	295	+	//
	296	+	// adw_about_window_add_legal_section (ADW_ABOUT_WINDOW (about),
	297	+	//
	298	+	// _("Copyright and custom license"),
	299	+	// "© 2022 Example",
	300	+	// GTK_LICENSE_CUSTOM,
	301	+	// "Custom license text");
	302	+	//
	303	+	// adw_about_window_add_legal_section (ADW_ABOUT_WINDOW (about),
	304	+	//
	305	+	// _("Copyright only"),
	306	+	// "© 2022 Example",
	307	+	// GTK_LICENSE_UNKNOWN,
	308	+	// NULL);
	309	+	//
	310	+	// adw_about_window_add_legal_section (ADW_ABOUT_WINDOW (about),
	311	+	//
	312	+	// _("Custom license only"),
	313	+	// NULL,
	314	+	// GTK_LICENSE_CUSTOM,
	315	+	// "Something completely custom here.");
	316	+	//
	317	+	// ```
	318	+	func (x *AboutWindow) AddLegalSection(TitleVar string, CopyrightVar string, LicenseTypeVar gtk.License, LicenseVar string) {
	319	+
	320	+	xAboutWindowAddLegalSection(x.GoPointer(), TitleVar, CopyrightVar, LicenseTypeVar, LicenseVar)
	321	+
	322	+	}
	323	+
	324	+	var xAboutWindowAddLink func(uintptr, string, string)
	325	+
	326	+	// Adds an extra link to the Details page.
	327	+	//
	328	+	// Extra links are displayed under the comment and website.
	329	+	//
	330	+	// Underlines in @title will be interpreted as indicating a mnemonic.
	331	+	//
	332	+	// See [property@AboutWindow:website].
	333	+	func (x *AboutWindow) AddLink(TitleVar string, UrlVar string) {
	334	+
	335	+	xAboutWindowAddLink(x.GoPointer(), TitleVar, UrlVar)
	336	+
	337	+	}
	338	+
	339	+	var xAboutWindowGetApplicationIcon func(uintptr) string
	340	+
	341	+	// Gets the name of the application icon for @self.
	342	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetApplicationIcon() string {
	343	+
	344	+	return xAboutWindowGetApplicationIcon(x.GoPointer())
	345	+
	346	+	}
	347	+
	348	+	var xAboutWindowGetApplicationName func(uintptr) string
	349	+
	350	+	// Gets the application name for @self.
	351	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetApplicationName() string {
	352	+
	353	+	return xAboutWindowGetApplicationName(x.GoPointer())
	354	+
	355	+	}
	356	+
	357	+	var xAboutWindowGetArtists func(uintptr) uintptr
	358	+
	359	+	// Gets the list of artists of the application.
	360	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetArtists() uintptr {
	361	+
	362	+	return xAboutWindowGetArtists(x.GoPointer())
	363	+
	364	+	}
	365	+
	366	+	var xAboutWindowGetComments func(uintptr) string
	367	+
	368	+	// Gets the comments about the application.
	369	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetComments() string {
	370	+
	371	+	return xAboutWindowGetComments(x.GoPointer())
	372	+
	373	+	}
	374	+
	375	+	var xAboutWindowGetCopyright func(uintptr) string
	376	+
	377	+	// Gets the copyright information for @self.
	378	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetCopyright() string {
	379	+
	380	+	return xAboutWindowGetCopyright(x.GoPointer())
	381	+
	382	+	}
	383	+
	384	+	var xAboutWindowGetDebugInfo func(uintptr) string
	385	+
	386	+	// Gets the debug information for @self.
	387	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetDebugInfo() string {
	388	+
	389	+	return xAboutWindowGetDebugInfo(x.GoPointer())
	390	+
	391	+	}
	392	+
	393	+	var xAboutWindowGetDebugInfoFilename func(uintptr) string
	394	+
	395	+	// Gets the debug information filename for @self.
	396	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetDebugInfoFilename() string {
	397	+
	398	+	return xAboutWindowGetDebugInfoFilename(x.GoPointer())
	399	+
	400	+	}
	401	+
	402	+	var xAboutWindowGetDesigners func(uintptr) uintptr
	403	+
	404	+	// Gets the list of designers of the application.
	405	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetDesigners() uintptr {
	406	+
	407	+	return xAboutWindowGetDesigners(x.GoPointer())
	408	+
	409	+	}
	410	+
	411	+	var xAboutWindowGetDeveloperName func(uintptr) string
	412	+
	413	+	// Gets the developer name for @self.
	414	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetDeveloperName() string {
	415	+
	416	+	return xAboutWindowGetDeveloperName(x.GoPointer())
	417	+
	418	+	}
	419	+
	420	+	var xAboutWindowGetDevelopers func(uintptr) uintptr
	421	+
	422	+	// Gets the list of developers of the application.
	423	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetDevelopers() uintptr {
	424	+
	425	+	return xAboutWindowGetDevelopers(x.GoPointer())
	426	+
	427	+	}
	428	+
	429	+	var xAboutWindowGetDocumenters func(uintptr) uintptr
	430	+
	431	+	// Gets the list of documenters of the application.
	432	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetDocumenters() uintptr {
	433	+
	434	+	return xAboutWindowGetDocumenters(x.GoPointer())
	435	+
	436	+	}
	437	+
	438	+	var xAboutWindowGetIssueUrl func(uintptr) string
	439	+
	440	+	// Gets the issue tracker URL for @self.
	441	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetIssueUrl() string {
	442	+
	443	+	return xAboutWindowGetIssueUrl(x.GoPointer())
	444	+
	445	+	}
	446	+
	447	+	var xAboutWindowGetLicense func(uintptr) string
	448	+
	449	+	// Gets the license for @self.
	450	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetLicense() string {
	451	+
	452	+	return xAboutWindowGetLicense(x.GoPointer())
	453	+
	454	+	}
	455	+
	456	+	var xAboutWindowGetLicenseType func(uintptr) gtk.License
	457	+
	458	+	// Gets the license type for @self.
	459	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetLicenseType() gtk.License {
	460	+
	461	+	return xAboutWindowGetLicenseType(x.GoPointer())
	462	+
	463	+	}
	464	+
	465	+	var xAboutWindowGetReleaseNotes func(uintptr) string
	466	+
	467	+	// Gets the release notes for @self.
	468	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetReleaseNotes() string {
	469	+
	470	+	return xAboutWindowGetReleaseNotes(x.GoPointer())
	471	+
	472	+	}
	473	+
	474	+	var xAboutWindowGetReleaseNotesVersion func(uintptr) string
	475	+
	476	+	// Gets the version described by the application's release notes.
	477	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetReleaseNotesVersion() string {
	478	+
	479	+	return xAboutWindowGetReleaseNotesVersion(x.GoPointer())
	480	+
	481	+	}
	482	+
	483	+	var xAboutWindowGetSupportUrl func(uintptr) string
	484	+
	485	+	// Gets the URL of the support page for @self.
	486	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetSupportUrl() string {
	487	+
	488	+	return xAboutWindowGetSupportUrl(x.GoPointer())
	489	+
	490	+	}
	491	+
	492	+	var xAboutWindowGetTranslatorCredits func(uintptr) string
	493	+
	494	+	// Gets the translator credits string.
	495	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetTranslatorCredits() string {
	496	+
	497	+	return xAboutWindowGetTranslatorCredits(x.GoPointer())
	498	+
	499	+	}
	500	+
	501	+	var xAboutWindowGetVersion func(uintptr) string
	502	+
	503	+	// Gets the version for @self.
	504	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetVersion() string {
	505	+
	506	+	return xAboutWindowGetVersion(x.GoPointer())
	507	+
	508	+	}
	509	+
	510	+	var xAboutWindowGetWebsite func(uintptr) string
	511	+
	512	+	// Gets the application website URL for @self.
	513	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetWebsite() string {
	514	+
	515	+	return xAboutWindowGetWebsite(x.GoPointer())
	516	+
	517	+	}
	518	+
	519	+	var xAboutWindowSetApplicationIcon func(uintptr, string)
	520	+
	521	+	// Sets the name of the application icon for @self.
	522	+	//
	523	+	// The icon is displayed at the top of the main page.
	524	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetApplicationIcon(ApplicationIconVar string) {
	525	+
	526	+	xAboutWindowSetApplicationIcon(x.GoPointer(), ApplicationIconVar)
	527	+
	528	+	}
	529	+
	530	+	var xAboutWindowSetApplicationName func(uintptr, string)
	531	+
	532	+	// Sets the application name for @self.
	533	+	//
	534	+	// The name is displayed at the top of the main page.
	535	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetApplicationName(ApplicationNameVar string) {
	536	+
	537	+	xAboutWindowSetApplicationName(x.GoPointer(), ApplicationNameVar)
	538	+
	539	+	}
	540	+
	541	+	var xAboutWindowSetArtists func(uintptr, uintptr)
	542	+
	543	+	// Sets the list of artists of the application.
	544	+	//
	545	+	// It will be displayed on the Credits page.
	546	+	//
	547	+	// Each name may contain email addresses and URLs, see the introduction for more
	548	+	// details.
	549	+	//
	550	+	// See also:
	551	+	//
	552	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:developers]
	553	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:designers]
	554	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:documenters]
	555	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:translator-credits]
	556	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_credit_section]
	557	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_acknowledgement_section]
	558	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetArtists(ArtistsVar uintptr) {
	559	+
	560	+	xAboutWindowSetArtists(x.GoPointer(), ArtistsVar)
	561	+
	562	+	}
	563	+
	564	+	var xAboutWindowSetComments func(uintptr, string)
	565	+
	566	+	// Sets the comments about the application.
	567	+	//
	568	+	// Comments will be shown on the Details page, above links.
	569	+	//
	570	+	// Unlike [property@Gtk.AboutDialog:comments], this string can be long and
	571	+	// detailed. It can also contain links and Pango markup.
	572	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetComments(CommentsVar string) {
	573	+
	574	+	xAboutWindowSetComments(x.GoPointer(), CommentsVar)
	575	+
	576	+	}
	577	+
	578	+	var xAboutWindowSetCopyright func(uintptr, string)
	579	+
	580	+	// Sets the copyright information for @self.
	581	+	//
	582	+	// This should be a short string of one or two lines, for example:
	583	+	// `© 2022 Example`.
	584	+	//
	585	+	// The copyright information will be displayed on the Legal page, before the
	586	+	// application license.
	587	+	//
	588	+	// [method@AboutWindow.add_legal_section] can be used to add copyright
	589	+	// information for the application dependencies or other components.
	590	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetCopyright(CopyrightVar string) {
	591	+
	592	+	xAboutWindowSetCopyright(x.GoPointer(), CopyrightVar)
	593	+
	594	+	}
	595	+
	596	+	var xAboutWindowSetDebugInfo func(uintptr, string)
	597	+
	598	+	// Sets the debug information for @self.
	599	+	//
	600	+	// Debug information will be shown on the Troubleshooting page. It's intended
	601	+	// to be attached to issue reports when reporting issues against the
	602	+	// application.
	603	+	//
	604	+	// `AdwAboutWindow` provides a quick way to save debug information to a file.
	605	+	// When saving, [property@AboutWindow:debug-info-filename] would be used as
	606	+	// the suggested filename.
	607	+	//
	608	+	// Debug information cannot contain markup or links.
	609	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetDebugInfo(DebugInfoVar string) {
	610	+
	611	+	xAboutWindowSetDebugInfo(x.GoPointer(), DebugInfoVar)
	612	+
	613	+	}
	614	+
	615	+	var xAboutWindowSetDebugInfoFilename func(uintptr, string)
	616	+
	617	+	// Sets the debug information filename for @self.
	618	+	//
	619	+	// It will be used as the suggested filename when saving debug information to a
	620	+	// file.
	621	+	//
	622	+	// See [property@AboutWindow:debug-info].
	623	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetDebugInfoFilename(FilenameVar string) {
	624	+
	625	+	xAboutWindowSetDebugInfoFilename(x.GoPointer(), FilenameVar)
	626	+
	627	+	}
	628	+
	629	+	var xAboutWindowSetDesigners func(uintptr, uintptr)
	630	+
	631	+	// Sets the list of designers of the application.
	632	+	//
	633	+	// It will be displayed on the Credits page.
	634	+	//
	635	+	// Each name may contain email addresses and URLs, see the introduction for more
	636	+	// details.
	637	+	//
	638	+	// See also:
	639	+	//
	640	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:developers]
	641	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:artists]
	642	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:documenters]
	643	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:translator-credits]
	644	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_credit_section]
	645	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_acknowledgement_section]
	646	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetDesigners(DesignersVar uintptr) {
	647	+
	648	+	xAboutWindowSetDesigners(x.GoPointer(), DesignersVar)
	649	+
	650	+	}
	651	+
	652	+	var xAboutWindowSetDeveloperName func(uintptr, string)
	653	+
	654	+	// Sets the developer name for @self.
	655	+	//
	656	+	// The developer name is displayed on the main page, under the application name.
	657	+	//
	658	+	// If the application is developed by multiple people, the developer name can be
	659	+	// set to values like "AppName team", "AppName developers" or
	660	+	// "The AppName project", and the individual contributors can be listed on the
	661	+	// Credits page, with [property@AboutWindow:developers] and related properties.
	662	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetDeveloperName(DeveloperNameVar string) {
	663	+
	664	+	xAboutWindowSetDeveloperName(x.GoPointer(), DeveloperNameVar)
	665	+
	666	+	}
	667	+
	668	+	var xAboutWindowSetDevelopers func(uintptr, uintptr)
	669	+
	670	+	// Sets the list of developers of the application.
	671	+	//
	672	+	// It will be displayed on the Credits page.
	673	+	//
	674	+	// Each name may contain email addresses and URLs, see the introduction for more
	675	+	// details.
	676	+	//
	677	+	// See also:
	678	+	//
	679	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:designers]
	680	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:artists]
	681	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:documenters]
	682	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:translator-credits]
	683	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_credit_section]
	684	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_acknowledgement_section]
	685	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetDevelopers(DevelopersVar uintptr) {
	686	+
	687	+	xAboutWindowSetDevelopers(x.GoPointer(), DevelopersVar)
	688	+
	689	+	}
	690	+
	691	+	var xAboutWindowSetDocumenters func(uintptr, uintptr)
	692	+
	693	+	// Sets the list of documenters of the application.
	694	+	//
	695	+	// It will be displayed on the Credits page.
	696	+	//
	697	+	// Each name may contain email addresses and URLs, see the introduction for more
	698	+	// details.
	699	+	//
	700	+	// See also:
	701	+	//
	702	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:developers]
	703	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:designers]
	704	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:artists]
	705	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:translator-credits]
	706	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_credit_section]
	707	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_acknowledgement_section]
	708	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetDocumenters(DocumentersVar uintptr) {
	709	+
	710	+	xAboutWindowSetDocumenters(x.GoPointer(), DocumentersVar)
	711	+
	712	+	}
	713	+
	714	+	var xAboutWindowSetIssueUrl func(uintptr, string)
	715	+
	716	+	// Sets the issue tracker URL for @self.
	717	+	//
	718	+	// The issue tracker link is displayed on the main page.
	719	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetIssueUrl(IssueUrlVar string) {
	720	+
	721	+	xAboutWindowSetIssueUrl(x.GoPointer(), IssueUrlVar)
	722	+
	723	+	}
	724	+
	725	+	var xAboutWindowSetLicense func(uintptr, string)
	726	+
	727	+	// Sets the license for @self.
	728	+	//
	729	+	// This can be used to set a custom text for the license if it can't be set via
	730	+	// [property@AboutWindow:license-type].
	731	+	//
	732	+	// When set, [property@AboutWindow:license-type] will be set to
	733	+	// `GTK_LICENSE_CUSTOM`.
	734	+	//
	735	+	// The license text will be displayed on the Legal page, below the copyright
	736	+	// information.
	737	+	//
	738	+	// License text can contain Pango markup and links.
	739	+	//
	740	+	// [method@AboutWindow.add_legal_section] can be used to add license information
	741	+	// for the application dependencies or other components.
	742	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetLicense(LicenseVar string) {
	743	+
	744	+	xAboutWindowSetLicense(x.GoPointer(), LicenseVar)
	745	+
	746	+	}
	747	+
	748	+	var xAboutWindowSetLicenseType func(uintptr, gtk.License)
	749	+
	750	+	// Sets the license for @self from a list of known licenses.
	751	+	//
	752	+	// If the application's license is not in the list,
	753	+	// [property@AboutWindow:license] can be used instead. The license type will be
	754	+	// automatically set to `GTK_LICENSE_CUSTOM` in that case.
	755	+	//
	756	+	// If @license_type is `GTK_LICENSE_UNKNOWN`, no information will be displayed.
	757	+	//
	758	+	// If @license_type is different from `GTK_LICENSE_CUSTOM`.
	759	+	// [property@AboutWindow:license] will be cleared out.
	760	+	//
	761	+	// The license description will be displayed on the Legal page, below the
	762	+	// copyright information.
	763	+	//
	764	+	// [method@AboutWindow.add_legal_section] can be used to add license information
	765	+	// for the application dependencies or other components.
	766	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetLicenseType(LicenseTypeVar gtk.License) {
	767	+
	768	+	xAboutWindowSetLicenseType(x.GoPointer(), LicenseTypeVar)
	769	+
	770	+	}
	771	+
	772	+	var xAboutWindowSetReleaseNotes func(uintptr, string)
	773	+
	774	+	// Sets the release notes for @self.
	775	+	//
	776	+	// Release notes are displayed on the the What's New page.
	777	+	//
	778	+	// Release notes are formatted the same way as
	779	+	// [AppStream descriptions](https://freedesktop.org/software/appstream/docs/chap-Metadata.html#tag-description).
	780	+	//
	781	+	// The supported formatting options are:
	782	+	//
	783	+	// * Paragraph (`<p>`)
	784	+	// * Ordered list (`<ol>`), with list items (`<li>`)
	785	+	// * Unordered list (`<ul>`), with list items (`<li>`)
	786	+	//
	787	+	// Within paragraphs and list items, emphasis (`<em>`) and inline code
	788	+	// (`<code>`) text styles are supported. The emphasis is rendered in italic,
	789	+	// while inline code is shown in a monospaced font.
	790	+	//
	791	+	// Any text outside paragraphs or list items is ignored.
	792	+	//
	793	+	// Nested lists are not supported.
	794	+	//
	795	+	// `AdwAboutWindow` displays the version above the release notes. If set, the
	796	+	// [property@AboutWindow:release-notes-version] of the property will be used
	797	+	// as the version; otherwise, [property@AboutWindow:version] is used.
	798	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetReleaseNotes(ReleaseNotesVar string) {
	799	+
	800	+	xAboutWindowSetReleaseNotes(x.GoPointer(), ReleaseNotesVar)
	801	+
	802	+	}
	803	+
	804	+	var xAboutWindowSetReleaseNotesVersion func(uintptr, string)
	805	+
	806	+	// Sets the version described by the application's release notes.
	807	+	//
	808	+	// The release notes version is displayed on the What's New page, above the
	809	+	// release notes.
	810	+	//
	811	+	// If not set, [property@AboutWindow:version] will be used instead.
	812	+	//
	813	+	// For example, an application with the current version 2.0.2 might want to
	814	+	// keep the release notes from 2.0.0, and set the release notes version
	815	+	// accordingly.
	816	+	//
	817	+	// See [property@AboutWindow:release-notes].
	818	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetReleaseNotesVersion(VersionVar string) {
	819	+
	820	+	xAboutWindowSetReleaseNotesVersion(x.GoPointer(), VersionVar)
	821	+
	822	+	}
	823	+
	824	+	var xAboutWindowSetSupportUrl func(uintptr, string)
	825	+
	826	+	// Sets the URL of the support page for @self.
	827	+	//
	828	+	// The support page link is displayed on the main page.
	829	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetSupportUrl(SupportUrlVar string) {
	830	+
	831	+	xAboutWindowSetSupportUrl(x.GoPointer(), SupportUrlVar)
	832	+
	833	+	}
	834	+
	835	+	var xAboutWindowSetTranslatorCredits func(uintptr, string)
	836	+
	837	+	// Sets the translator credits string.
	838	+	//
	839	+	// It will be displayed on the Credits page.
	840	+	//
	841	+	// This string should be `"translator-credits"` or `"translator_credits"` and
	842	+	// should be marked as translatable.
	843	+	//
	844	+	// The string may contain email addresses and URLs, see the introduction for
	845	+	// more details.
	846	+	//
	847	+	// See also:
	848	+	//
	849	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:developers]
	850	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:designers]
	851	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:artists]
	852	+	// * [property@AboutWindow:documenters]
	853	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_credit_section]
	854	+	// * [method@AboutWindow.add_acknowledgement_section]
	855	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetTranslatorCredits(TranslatorCreditsVar string) {
	856	+
	857	+	xAboutWindowSetTranslatorCredits(x.GoPointer(), TranslatorCreditsVar)
	858	+
	859	+	}
	860	+
	861	+	var xAboutWindowSetVersion func(uintptr, string)
	862	+
	863	+	// Sets the version for @self.
	864	+	//
	865	+	// The version is displayed on the main page.
	866	+	//
	867	+	// If [property@AboutWindow:release-notes-version] is not set, the version will
	868	+	// also be displayed above the release notes on the What's New page.
	869	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetVersion(VersionVar string) {
	870	+
	871	+	xAboutWindowSetVersion(x.GoPointer(), VersionVar)
	872	+
	873	+	}
	874	+
	875	+	var xAboutWindowSetWebsite func(uintptr, string)
	876	+
	877	+	// Sets the application website URL for @self.
	878	+	//
	879	+	// Website is displayed on the Details page, below comments, or on the main page
	880	+	// if the Details page doesn't have any other content.
	881	+	//
	882	+	// Applications can add other links below, see [method@AboutWindow.add_link].
	883	+	func (x *AboutWindow) SetWebsite(WebsiteVar string) {
	884	+
	885	+	xAboutWindowSetWebsite(x.GoPointer(), WebsiteVar)
	886	+
	887	+	}
	888	+
	889	+	func (c *AboutWindow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	890	+	return c.Ptr
	891	+	}
	892	+
	893	+	func (c *AboutWindow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	894	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	895	+	}
	896	+
	897	+	// Emitted when a URL is activated.
	898	+	//
	899	+	// Applications may connect to it to override the default behavior, which is
	900	+	// to call [func@Gtk.show_uri].
	901	+	func (x *AboutWindow) ConnectActivateLink(cb func(AboutWindow, string) bool) {
	902	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr, UriVarp string) bool {
	903	+	fa := AboutWindow{}
	904	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	905	+
	906	+	return cb(fa, UriVarp)
	907	+
	908	+	}
	909	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::activate-link", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	910	+	}
	911	+
	912	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	913	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	914	+
	915	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	916	+
	917	+	}
	918	+
	919	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	920	+	func (x *AboutWindow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	921	+
	922	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	923	+
	924	+	}
	925	+
	926	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	927	+	func (x *AboutWindow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	928	+
	929	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	930	+
	931	+	}
	932	+
	933	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	934	+	func (x *AboutWindow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	935	+
	936	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	937	+
	938	+	}
	939	+
	940	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	941	+	//
	942	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	943	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	944	+	//
	945	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	946	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	947	+	// technologies.
	948	+	//
	949	+	// Example:
	950	+	// ```c
	951	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	952	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	953	+	//
	954	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	955	+	// -1);
	956	+	//
	957	+	// ```
	958	+	func (x *AboutWindow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	959	+
	960	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	961	+
	962	+	}
	963	+
	964	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	965	+	//
	966	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	967	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	968	+	//
	969	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	970	+	func (x *AboutWindow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	971	+
	972	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	973	+
	974	+	}
	975	+
	976	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	977	+	//
	978	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	979	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	980	+	//
	981	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	982	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	983	+	//
	984	+	// ```c
	985	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	986	+	//
	987	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	988	+	// ref1, NULL,
	989	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	990	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	991	+	// -1);
	992	+	//
	993	+	// ```
	994	+	func (x *AboutWindow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	995	+
	996	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	997	+
	998	+	}
	999	+
	1000	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	1001	+	//
	1002	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	1003	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	1004	+	//
	1005	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	1006	+	func (x *AboutWindow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	1007	+
	1008	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	1009	+
	1010	+	}
	1011	+
	1012	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	1013	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	1014	+	//
	1015	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	1016	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	1017	+	//
	1018	+	// Example:
	1019	+	// ```c
	1020	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	1021	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	1022	+	//
	1023	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	1024	+	// -1);
	1025	+	//
	1026	+	// ```
	1027	+	func (x *AboutWindow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	1028	+
	1029	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	1030	+
	1031	+	}
	1032	+
	1033	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	1034	+	//
	1035	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	1036	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	1037	+	//
	1038	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	1039	+	func (x *AboutWindow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	1040	+
	1041	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	1042	+
	1043	+	}
	1044	+
	1045	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	1046	+	//
	1047	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	1048	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	1049	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetBuildableId() string {
	1050	+
	1051	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	1052	+
	1053	+	}
	1054	+
	1055	+	// Returns the renderer that is used for this `GtkNative`.
	1056	+	func (x AboutWindow) GetRenderer() gsk.Renderer {
	1057	+
	1058	+	GetRendererPtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetRenderer(x.GoPointer())
	1059	+	if GetRendererPtr == 0 {
	1060	+	return nil
	1061	+	}
	1062	+
	1063	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetRendererPtr)
	1064	+
	1065	+	GetRendererCls := &gsk.Renderer{}
	1066	+	GetRendererCls.Ptr = GetRendererPtr
	1067	+	return GetRendererCls
	1068	+
	1069	+	}
	1070	+
	1071	+	// Returns the surface of this `GtkNative`.
	1072	+	func (x AboutWindow) GetSurface() gdk.Surface {
	1073	+
	1074	+	GetSurfacePtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurface(x.GoPointer())
	1075	+	if GetSurfacePtr == 0 {
	1076	+	return nil
	1077	+	}
	1078	+
	1079	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetSurfacePtr)
	1080	+
	1081	+	GetSurfaceCls := &gdk.Surface{}
	1082	+	GetSurfaceCls.Ptr = GetSurfacePtr
	1083	+	return GetSurfaceCls
	1084	+
	1085	+	}
	1086	+
	1087	+	// Retrieves the surface transform of @self.
	1088	+	//
	1089	+	// This is the translation from @self's surface coordinates into
	1090	+	// @self's widget coordinates.
	1091	+	func (x *AboutWindow) GetSurfaceTransform(XVar float64, YVar float64) {
	1092	+
	1093	+	gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurfaceTransform(x.GoPointer(), XVar, YVar)
	1094	+
	1095	+	}
	1096	+
	1097	+	// Realizes a `GtkNative`.
	1098	+	//
	1099	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	1100	+	func (x *AboutWindow) Realize() {
	1101	+
	1102	+	gtk.XGtkNativeRealize(x.GoPointer())
	1103	+
	1104	+	}
	1105	+
	1106	+	// Unrealizes a `GtkNative`.
	1107	+	//
	1108	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	1109	+	func (x *AboutWindow) Unrealize() {
	1110	+
	1111	+	gtk.XGtkNativeUnrealize(x.GoPointer())
	1112	+
	1113	+	}
	1114	+
	1115	+	// Returns the display that this `GtkRoot` is on.
	1116	+	func (x AboutWindow) GetDisplay() gdk.Display {
	1117	+
	1118	+	GetDisplayPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetDisplay(x.GoPointer())
	1119	+	if GetDisplayPtr == 0 {
	1120	+	return nil
	1121	+	}
	1122	+
	1123	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetDisplayPtr)
	1124	+
	1125	+	GetDisplayCls := &gdk.Display{}
	1126	+	GetDisplayCls.Ptr = GetDisplayPtr
	1127	+	return GetDisplayCls
	1128	+
	1129	+	}
	1130	+
	1131	+	// Retrieves the current focused widget within the root.
	1132	+	//
	1133	+	// Note that this is the widget that would have the focus
	1134	+	// if the root is active; if the root is not focused then
	1135	+	// `gtk_widget_has_focus (widget)` will be %FALSE for the
	1136	+	// widget.
	1137	+	func (x AboutWindow) GetFocus() gtk.Widget {
	1138	+
	1139	+	GetFocusPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetFocus(x.GoPointer())
	1140	+	if GetFocusPtr == 0 {
	1141	+	return nil
	1142	+	}
	1143	+
	1144	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetFocusPtr)
	1145	+
	1146	+	GetFocusCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	1147	+	GetFocusCls.Ptr = GetFocusPtr
	1148	+	return GetFocusCls
	1149	+
	1150	+	}
	1151	+
	1152	+	// If @focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
	1153	+	// it as the focus widget for the root.
	1154	+	//
	1155	+	// If @focus is %NULL, unsets the focus widget for the root.
	1156	+	//
	1157	+	// To set the focus to a particular widget in the root, it is usually
	1158	+	// more convenient to use [method@Gtk.Widget.grab_focus] instead of
	1159	+	// this function.
	1160	+	func (x AboutWindow) SetFocus(FocusVar gtk.Widget) {
	1161	+
	1162	+	gtk.XGtkRootSetFocus(x.GoPointer(), FocusVar.GoPointer())
	1163	+
	1164	+	}
	1165	+
	1166	+	func init() {
	1167	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	1168	+	if err != nil {
	1169	+	panic(err)
	1170	+	}
	1171	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xShowAboutWindow, lib, "adw_show_about_window")
	1172	+
	1173	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewAboutWindow, lib, "adw_about_window_new")
	1174	+
	1175	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowAddAcknowledgementSection, lib, "adw_about_window_add_acknowledgement_section")
	1176	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowAddCreditSection, lib, "adw_about_window_add_credit_section")
	1177	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowAddLegalSection, lib, "adw_about_window_add_legal_section")
	1178	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowAddLink, lib, "adw_about_window_add_link")
	1179	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetApplicationIcon, lib, "adw_about_window_get_application_icon")
	1180	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetApplicationName, lib, "adw_about_window_get_application_name")
	1181	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetArtists, lib, "adw_about_window_get_artists")
	1182	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetComments, lib, "adw_about_window_get_comments")
	1183	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetCopyright, lib, "adw_about_window_get_copyright")
	1184	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetDebugInfo, lib, "adw_about_window_get_debug_info")
	1185	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetDebugInfoFilename, lib, "adw_about_window_get_debug_info_filename")
	1186	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetDesigners, lib, "adw_about_window_get_designers")
	1187	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetDeveloperName, lib, "adw_about_window_get_developer_name")
	1188	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetDevelopers, lib, "adw_about_window_get_developers")
	1189	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetDocumenters, lib, "adw_about_window_get_documenters")
	1190	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetIssueUrl, lib, "adw_about_window_get_issue_url")
	1191	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetLicense, lib, "adw_about_window_get_license")
	1192	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetLicenseType, lib, "adw_about_window_get_license_type")
	1193	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetReleaseNotes, lib, "adw_about_window_get_release_notes")
	1194	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetReleaseNotesVersion, lib, "adw_about_window_get_release_notes_version")
	1195	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetSupportUrl, lib, "adw_about_window_get_support_url")
	1196	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetTranslatorCredits, lib, "adw_about_window_get_translator_credits")
	1197	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetVersion, lib, "adw_about_window_get_version")
	1198	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowGetWebsite, lib, "adw_about_window_get_website")
	1199	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetApplicationIcon, lib, "adw_about_window_set_application_icon")
	1200	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetApplicationName, lib, "adw_about_window_set_application_name")
	1201	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetArtists, lib, "adw_about_window_set_artists")
	1202	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetComments, lib, "adw_about_window_set_comments")
	1203	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetCopyright, lib, "adw_about_window_set_copyright")
	1204	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetDebugInfo, lib, "adw_about_window_set_debug_info")
	1205	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetDebugInfoFilename, lib, "adw_about_window_set_debug_info_filename")
	1206	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetDesigners, lib, "adw_about_window_set_designers")
	1207	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetDeveloperName, lib, "adw_about_window_set_developer_name")
	1208	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetDevelopers, lib, "adw_about_window_set_developers")
	1209	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetDocumenters, lib, "adw_about_window_set_documenters")
	1210	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetIssueUrl, lib, "adw_about_window_set_issue_url")
	1211	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetLicense, lib, "adw_about_window_set_license")
	1212	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetLicenseType, lib, "adw_about_window_set_license_type")
	1213	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetReleaseNotes, lib, "adw_about_window_set_release_notes")
	1214	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetReleaseNotesVersion, lib, "adw_about_window_set_release_notes_version")
	1215	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetSupportUrl, lib, "adw_about_window_set_support_url")
	1216	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetTranslatorCredits, lib, "adw_about_window_set_translator_credits")
	1217	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetVersion, lib, "adw_about_window_set_version")
	1218	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAboutWindowSetWebsite, lib, "adw_about_window_set_website")
	1219	+
	1220	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-action-row.go +524 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,524 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type ActionRowClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+
	15	+	Padding uintptr
	16	+	}
	17	+
	18	+	// A [class@Gtk.ListBoxRow] used to present actions.
	19	+	//
	20	+	// <picture>
	21	+	//
	22	+	// <source srcset="action-row-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	23	+	// <img src="action-row.png" alt="action-row">
	24	+	//
	25	+	// </picture>
	26	+	//
	27	+	// The `AdwActionRow` widget can have a title, a subtitle and an icon. The row
	28	+	// can receive additional widgets at its end, or prefix widgets at its start.
	29	+	//
	30	+	// It is convenient to present a preference and its related actions.
	31	+	//
	32	+	// `AdwActionRow` is unactivatable by default, giving it an activatable widget
	33	+	// will automatically make it activatable, but unsetting it won't change the
	34	+	// row's activatability.
	35	+	//
	36	+	// ## AdwActionRow as GtkBuildable
	37	+	//
	38	+	// The `AdwActionRow` implementation of the [iface@Gtk.Buildable] interface
	39	+	// supports adding a child at its end by specifying “suffix” or omitting the
	40	+	// “type” attribute of a <child> element.
	41	+	//
	42	+	// It also supports adding a child as a prefix widget by specifying “prefix” as
	43	+	// the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
	44	+	//
	45	+	// ## CSS nodes
	46	+	//
	47	+	// `AdwActionRow` has a main CSS node with name `row`.
	48	+	//
	49	+	// It contains the subnode `box.header` for its main horizontal box, and
	50	+	// `box.title` for the vertical box containing the title and subtitle labels.
	51	+	//
	52	+	// It contains subnodes `label.title` and `label.subtitle` representing
	53	+	// respectively the title label and subtitle label.
	54	+	type ActionRow struct {
	55	+	PreferencesRow
	56	+	}
	57	+
	58	+	func ActionRowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *ActionRow {
	59	+	cls := &ActionRow{}
	60	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	61	+	return cls
	62	+	}
	63	+
	64	+	var xNewActionRow func() uintptr
	65	+
	66	+	// Creates a new `AdwActionRow`.
	67	+	func NewActionRow() *gtk.Widget {
	68	+	NewActionRowPtr := xNewActionRow()
	69	+	if NewActionRowPtr == 0 {
	70	+	return nil
	71	+	}
	72	+
	73	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewActionRowPtr)
	74	+
	75	+	NewActionRowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	76	+	NewActionRowCls.Ptr = NewActionRowPtr
	77	+	return NewActionRowCls
	78	+	}
	79	+
	80	+	var xActionRowActivate func(uintptr)
	81	+
	82	+	// Activates @self.
	83	+	func (x *ActionRow) Activate() {
	84	+
	85	+	xActionRowActivate(x.GoPointer())
	86	+
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	var xActionRowAddPrefix func(uintptr, uintptr)
	90	+
	91	+	// Adds a prefix widget to @self.
	92	+	func (x ActionRow) AddPrefix(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	93	+
	94	+	xActionRowAddPrefix(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	95	+
	96	+	}
	97	+
	98	+	var xActionRowAddSuffix func(uintptr, uintptr)
	99	+
	100	+	// Adds a suffix widget to @self.
	101	+	func (x ActionRow) AddSuffix(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	102	+
	103	+	xActionRowAddSuffix(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	104	+
	105	+	}
	106	+
	107	+	var xActionRowGetActivatableWidget func(uintptr) uintptr
	108	+
	109	+	// Gets the widget activated when @self is activated.
	110	+	func (x ActionRow) GetActivatableWidget() gtk.Widget {
	111	+
	112	+	GetActivatableWidgetPtr := xActionRowGetActivatableWidget(x.GoPointer())
	113	+	if GetActivatableWidgetPtr == 0 {
	114	+	return nil
	115	+	}
	116	+
	117	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetActivatableWidgetPtr)
	118	+
	119	+	GetActivatableWidgetCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	120	+	GetActivatableWidgetCls.Ptr = GetActivatableWidgetPtr
	121	+	return GetActivatableWidgetCls
	122	+
	123	+	}
	124	+
	125	+	var xActionRowGetIconName func(uintptr) string
	126	+
	127	+	// Gets the icon name for @self.
	128	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetIconName() string {
	129	+
	130	+	return xActionRowGetIconName(x.GoPointer())
	131	+
	132	+	}
	133	+
	134	+	var xActionRowGetSubtitle func(uintptr) string
	135	+
	136	+	// Gets the subtitle for @self.
	137	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetSubtitle() string {
	138	+
	139	+	return xActionRowGetSubtitle(x.GoPointer())
	140	+
	141	+	}
	142	+
	143	+	var xActionRowGetSubtitleLines func(uintptr) int32
	144	+
	145	+	// Gets the number of lines at the end of which the subtitle label will be
	146	+	// ellipsized.
	147	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetSubtitleLines() int32 {
	148	+
	149	+	return xActionRowGetSubtitleLines(x.GoPointer())
	150	+
	151	+	}
	152	+
	153	+	var xActionRowGetSubtitleSelectable func(uintptr) bool
	154	+
	155	+	// Gets whether the user can copy the subtitle from the label
	156	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetSubtitleSelectable() bool {
	157	+
	158	+	return xActionRowGetSubtitleSelectable(x.GoPointer())
	159	+
	160	+	}
	161	+
	162	+	var xActionRowGetTitleLines func(uintptr) int32
	163	+
	164	+	// Gets the number of lines at the end of which the title label will be
	165	+	// ellipsized.
	166	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetTitleLines() int32 {
	167	+
	168	+	return xActionRowGetTitleLines(x.GoPointer())
	169	+
	170	+	}
	171	+
	172	+	var xActionRowRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	173	+
	174	+	// Removes a child from @self.
	175	+	func (x ActionRow) Remove(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	176	+
	177	+	xActionRowRemove(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	178	+
	179	+	}
	180	+
	181	+	var xActionRowSetActivatableWidget func(uintptr, uintptr)
	182	+
	183	+	// Sets the widget to activate when @self is activated.
	184	+	//
	185	+	// The row can be activated either by clicking on it, calling
	186	+	// [method@ActionRow.activate], or via mnemonics in the title.
	187	+	// See the [property@PreferencesRow:use-underline] property to enable mnemonics.
	188	+	//
	189	+	// The target widget will be activated by emitting the
	190	+	// [signal@Gtk.Widget::mnemonic-activate] signal on it.
	191	+	func (x ActionRow) SetActivatableWidget(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	192	+
	193	+	xActionRowSetActivatableWidget(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	194	+
	195	+	}
	196	+
	197	+	var xActionRowSetIconName func(uintptr, string)
	198	+
	199	+	// Sets the icon name for @self.
	200	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetIconName(IconNameVar string) {
	201	+
	202	+	xActionRowSetIconName(x.GoPointer(), IconNameVar)
	203	+
	204	+	}
	205	+
	206	+	var xActionRowSetSubtitle func(uintptr, string)
	207	+
	208	+	// Sets the subtitle for @self.
	209	+	//
	210	+	// The subtitle is interpreted as Pango markup unless
	211	+	// [property@PreferencesRow:use-markup] is set to `FALSE`.
	212	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetSubtitle(SubtitleVar string) {
	213	+
	214	+	xActionRowSetSubtitle(x.GoPointer(), SubtitleVar)
	215	+
	216	+	}
	217	+
	218	+	var xActionRowSetSubtitleLines func(uintptr, int32)
	219	+
	220	+	// Sets the number of lines at the end of which the subtitle label will be
	221	+	// ellipsized.
	222	+	//
	223	+	// If the value is 0, the number of lines won't be limited.
	224	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetSubtitleLines(SubtitleLinesVar int32) {
	225	+
	226	+	xActionRowSetSubtitleLines(x.GoPointer(), SubtitleLinesVar)
	227	+
	228	+	}
	229	+
	230	+	var xActionRowSetSubtitleSelectable func(uintptr, bool)
	231	+
	232	+	// Sets whether the user can copy the subtitle from the label
	233	+	//
	234	+	// See also [property@Gtk.Label:selectable].
	235	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetSubtitleSelectable(SubtitleSelectableVar bool) {
	236	+
	237	+	xActionRowSetSubtitleSelectable(x.GoPointer(), SubtitleSelectableVar)
	238	+
	239	+	}
	240	+
	241	+	var xActionRowSetTitleLines func(uintptr, int32)
	242	+
	243	+	// Sets the number of lines at the end of which the title label will be
	244	+	// ellipsized.
	245	+	//
	246	+	// If the value is 0, the number of lines won't be limited.
	247	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetTitleLines(TitleLinesVar int32) {
	248	+
	249	+	xActionRowSetTitleLines(x.GoPointer(), TitleLinesVar)
	250	+
	251	+	}
	252	+
	253	+	func (c *ActionRow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	254	+	return c.Ptr
	255	+	}
	256	+
	257	+	func (c *ActionRow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	258	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	259	+	}
	260	+
	261	+	// This signal is emitted after the row has been activated.
	262	+	func (x *ActionRow) ConnectActivated(cb func(ActionRow)) {
	263	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr) {
	264	+	fa := ActionRow{}
	265	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	266	+
	267	+	cb(fa)
	268	+
	269	+	}
	270	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::activated", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	271	+	}
	272	+
	273	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	274	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	275	+
	276	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	277	+
	278	+	}
	279	+
	280	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	281	+	func (x *ActionRow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	282	+
	283	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	284	+
	285	+	}
	286	+
	287	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	288	+	func (x *ActionRow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	289	+
	290	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	291	+
	292	+	}
	293	+
	294	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	295	+	func (x *ActionRow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	296	+
	297	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	298	+
	299	+	}
	300	+
	301	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	302	+	//
	303	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	304	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	305	+	//
	306	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	307	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	308	+	// technologies.
	309	+	//
	310	+	// Example:
	311	+	// ```c
	312	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	313	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	314	+	//
	315	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	316	+	// -1);
	317	+	//
	318	+	// ```
	319	+	func (x *ActionRow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	320	+
	321	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	322	+
	323	+	}
	324	+
	325	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	326	+	//
	327	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	328	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	329	+	//
	330	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	331	+	func (x *ActionRow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	332	+
	333	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	334	+
	335	+	}
	336	+
	337	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	338	+	//
	339	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	340	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	341	+	//
	342	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	343	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	344	+	//
	345	+	// ```c
	346	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	347	+	//
	348	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	349	+	// ref1, NULL,
	350	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	351	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	352	+	// -1);
	353	+	//
	354	+	// ```
	355	+	func (x *ActionRow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	356	+
	357	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	358	+
	359	+	}
	360	+
	361	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	362	+	//
	363	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	364	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	365	+	//
	366	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	367	+	func (x *ActionRow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	368	+
	369	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	370	+
	371	+	}
	372	+
	373	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	374	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	375	+	//
	376	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	377	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	378	+	//
	379	+	// Example:
	380	+	// ```c
	381	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	382	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	383	+	//
	384	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	385	+	// -1);
	386	+	//
	387	+	// ```
	388	+	func (x *ActionRow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	389	+
	390	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	391	+
	392	+	}
	393	+
	394	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	395	+	//
	396	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	397	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	398	+	//
	399	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	400	+	func (x *ActionRow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	401	+
	402	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	403	+
	404	+	}
	405	+
	406	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	407	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetActionName() string {
	408	+
	409	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	410	+
	411	+	}
	412	+
	413	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	414	+	func (x ActionRow) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	415	+
	416	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	417	+
	418	+	}
	419	+
	420	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	421	+	// associated.
	422	+	//
	423	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	424	+	// any previous action.
	425	+	//
	426	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	427	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	428	+	//
	429	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	430	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	431	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	432	+	// associated with the window.
	433	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	434	+
	435	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	436	+
	437	+	}
	438	+
	439	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	440	+	//
	441	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	442	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	443	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	444	+	//
	445	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	446	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	447	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	448	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	449	+
	450	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	451	+
	452	+	}
	453	+
	454	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	455	+	//
	456	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	457	+	//
	458	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	459	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	460	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	461	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	462	+	//
	463	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	464	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	465	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	466	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	467	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	468	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	469	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	470	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	471	+	// rendered inactive).
	472	+	func (x ActionRow) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	473	+
	474	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	475	+
	476	+	}
	477	+
	478	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	479	+	// actionable widget.
	480	+	//
	481	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	482	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	483	+	func (x *ActionRow) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	484	+
	485	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	486	+
	487	+	}
	488	+
	489	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	490	+	//
	491	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	492	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	493	+	func (x *ActionRow) GetBuildableId() string {
	494	+
	495	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	496	+
	497	+	}
	498	+
	499	+	func init() {
	500	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	501	+	if err != nil {
	502	+	panic(err)
	503	+	}
	504	+
	505	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewActionRow, lib, "adw_action_row_new")
	506	+
	507	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowActivate, lib, "adw_action_row_activate")
	508	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowAddPrefix, lib, "adw_action_row_add_prefix")
	509	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowAddSuffix, lib, "adw_action_row_add_suffix")
	510	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowGetActivatableWidget, lib, "adw_action_row_get_activatable_widget")
	511	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowGetIconName, lib, "adw_action_row_get_icon_name")
	512	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowGetSubtitle, lib, "adw_action_row_get_subtitle")
	513	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowGetSubtitleLines, lib, "adw_action_row_get_subtitle_lines")
	514	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowGetSubtitleSelectable, lib, "adw_action_row_get_subtitle_selectable")
	515	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowGetTitleLines, lib, "adw_action_row_get_title_lines")
	516	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowRemove, lib, "adw_action_row_remove")
	517	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowSetActivatableWidget, lib, "adw_action_row_set_activatable_widget")
	518	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowSetIconName, lib, "adw_action_row_set_icon_name")
	519	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowSetSubtitle, lib, "adw_action_row_set_subtitle")
	520	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowSetSubtitleLines, lib, "adw_action_row_set_subtitle_lines")
	521	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowSetSubtitleSelectable, lib, "adw_action_row_set_subtitle_selectable")
	522	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xActionRowSetTitleLines, lib, "adw_action_row_set_title_lines")
	523	+
	524	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-animation-target.go +181 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	// Prototype for animation targets based on user callbacks.
	12	+	type AnimationTargetFunc func(float64, uintptr)
	13	+
	14	+	type AnimationTargetClass struct {
	15	+	}
	16	+
	17	+	type CallbackAnimationTargetClass struct {
	18	+	}
	19	+
	20	+	type PropertyAnimationTargetClass struct {
	21	+	}
	22	+
	23	+	// Represents a value [class@Animation] can animate.
	24	+	type AnimationTarget struct {
	25	+	gobject.Object
	26	+	}
	27	+
	28	+	func AnimationTargetNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *AnimationTarget {
	29	+	cls := &AnimationTarget{}
	30	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	31	+	return cls
	32	+	}
	33	+
	34	+	func (c *AnimationTarget) GoPointer() uintptr {
	35	+	return c.Ptr
	36	+	}
	37	+
	38	+	func (c *AnimationTarget) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	39	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	40	+	}
	41	+
	42	+	// An [class@AnimationTarget] that calls a given callback during the
	43	+	// animation.
	44	+	type CallbackAnimationTarget struct {
	45	+	AnimationTarget
	46	+	}
	47	+
	48	+	func CallbackAnimationTargetNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *CallbackAnimationTarget {
	49	+	cls := &CallbackAnimationTarget{}
	50	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	51	+	return cls
	52	+	}
	53	+
	54	+	var xNewCallbackAnimationTarget func(uintptr, uintptr, uintptr) uintptr
	55	+
	56	+	// Creates a new `AdwAnimationTarget` that calls the given @callback during
	57	+	// the animation.
	58	+	func NewCallbackAnimationTarget(CallbackVar AnimationTargetFunc, UserDataVar uintptr, DestroyVar glib.DestroyNotify) *AnimationTarget {
	59	+	NewCallbackAnimationTargetPtr := xNewCallbackAnimationTarget(purego.NewCallback(CallbackVar), UserDataVar, purego.NewCallback(DestroyVar))
	60	+	if NewCallbackAnimationTargetPtr == 0 {
	61	+	return nil
	62	+	}
	63	+
	64	+	NewCallbackAnimationTargetCls := &AnimationTarget{}
	65	+	NewCallbackAnimationTargetCls.Ptr = NewCallbackAnimationTargetPtr
	66	+	return NewCallbackAnimationTargetCls
	67	+	}
	68	+
	69	+	func (c *CallbackAnimationTarget) GoPointer() uintptr {
	70	+	return c.Ptr
	71	+	}
	72	+
	73	+	func (c *CallbackAnimationTarget) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	74	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	75	+	}
	76	+
	77	+	// An [class@AnimationTarget] changing the value of a property of a
	78	+	// [class@GObject.Object] instance.
	79	+	type PropertyAnimationTarget struct {
	80	+	AnimationTarget
	81	+	}
	82	+
	83	+	func PropertyAnimationTargetNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *PropertyAnimationTarget {
	84	+	cls := &PropertyAnimationTarget{}
	85	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	86	+	return cls
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	var xNewPropertyAnimationTarget func(uintptr, string) uintptr
	90	+
	91	+	// Creates a new `AdwPropertyAnimationTarget` for the @property_name property on
	92	+	// @object.
	93	+	func NewPropertyAnimationTarget(ObjectVar gobject.Object, PropertyNameVar string) AnimationTarget {
	94	+	NewPropertyAnimationTargetPtr := xNewPropertyAnimationTarget(ObjectVar.GoPointer(), PropertyNameVar)
	95	+	if NewPropertyAnimationTargetPtr == 0 {
	96	+	return nil
	97	+	}
	98	+
	99	+	NewPropertyAnimationTargetCls := &AnimationTarget{}
	100	+	NewPropertyAnimationTargetCls.Ptr = NewPropertyAnimationTargetPtr
	101	+	return NewPropertyAnimationTargetCls
	102	+	}
	103	+
	104	+	var xNewForPspecPropertyAnimationTarget func(uintptr, uintptr) uintptr
	105	+
	106	+	// Creates a new `AdwPropertyAnimationTarget` for the @pspec property on
	107	+	// @object.
	108	+	func NewForPspecPropertyAnimationTarget(ObjectVar gobject.Object, PspecVar gobject.ParamSpec) *AnimationTarget {
	109	+	NewForPspecPropertyAnimationTargetPtr := xNewForPspecPropertyAnimationTarget(ObjectVar.GoPointer(), PspecVar.GoPointer())
	110	+	if NewForPspecPropertyAnimationTargetPtr == 0 {
	111	+	return nil
	112	+	}
	113	+
	114	+	NewForPspecPropertyAnimationTargetCls := &AnimationTarget{}
	115	+	NewForPspecPropertyAnimationTargetCls.Ptr = NewForPspecPropertyAnimationTargetPtr
	116	+	return NewForPspecPropertyAnimationTargetCls
	117	+	}
	118	+
	119	+	var xPropertyAnimationTargetGetObject func(uintptr) uintptr
	120	+
	121	+	// Gets the object animated by @self.
	122	+	//
	123	+	// The `AdwPropertyAnimationTarget` instance does not hold a strong reference on
	124	+	// the object; make sure the object is kept alive throughout the target's
	125	+	// lifetime.
	126	+	func (x PropertyAnimationTarget) GetObject() gobject.Object {
	127	+
	128	+	GetObjectPtr := xPropertyAnimationTargetGetObject(x.GoPointer())
	129	+	if GetObjectPtr == 0 {
	130	+	return nil
	131	+	}
	132	+
	133	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetObjectPtr)
	134	+
	135	+	GetObjectCls := &gobject.Object{}
	136	+	GetObjectCls.Ptr = GetObjectPtr
	137	+	return GetObjectCls
	138	+
	139	+	}
	140	+
	141	+	var xPropertyAnimationTargetGetPspec func(uintptr) uintptr
	142	+
	143	+	// Gets the `GParamSpec` of the property animated by @self.
	144	+	func (x PropertyAnimationTarget) GetPspec() gobject.ParamSpec {
	145	+
	146	+	GetPspecPtr := xPropertyAnimationTargetGetPspec(x.GoPointer())
	147	+	if GetPspecPtr == 0 {
	148	+	return nil
	149	+	}
	150	+
	151	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetPspecPtr)
	152	+
	153	+	GetPspecCls := &gobject.ParamSpec{}
	154	+	GetPspecCls.Ptr = GetPspecPtr
	155	+	return GetPspecCls
	156	+
	157	+	}
	158	+
	159	+	func (c *PropertyAnimationTarget) GoPointer() uintptr {
	160	+	return c.Ptr
	161	+	}
	162	+
	163	+	func (c *PropertyAnimationTarget) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	164	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	165	+	}
	166	+
	167	+	func init() {
	168	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	169	+	if err != nil {
	170	+	panic(err)
	171	+	}
	172	+
	173	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewCallbackAnimationTarget, lib, "adw_callback_animation_target_new")
	174	+
	175	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewPropertyAnimationTarget, lib, "adw_property_animation_target_new")
	176	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewForPspecPropertyAnimationTarget, lib, "adw_property_animation_target_new_for_pspec")
	177	+
	178	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPropertyAnimationTargetGetObject, lib, "adw_property_animation_target_get_object")
	179	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPropertyAnimationTargetGetPspec, lib, "adw_property_animation_target_get_pspec")
	180	+
	181	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-animation-util.go +39 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	8	+	)
	9	+
	10	+	var xGetEnableAnimations func(uintptr) bool
	11	+
	12	+	// Checks whether animations are enabled for @widget.
	13	+	//
	14	+	// This should be used when implementing an animated widget to know whether to
	15	+	// animate it or not.
	16	+	func GetEnableAnimations(WidgetVar *gtk.Widget) bool {
	17	+
	18	+	return xGetEnableAnimations(WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	19	+
	20	+	}
	21	+
	22	+	var xLerp func(float64, float64, float64) float64
	23	+
	24	+	// Computes the linear interpolation between @a and @b for @t.
	25	+	func Lerp(AVar float64, BVar float64, TVar float64) float64 {
	26	+
	27	+	return xLerp(AVar, BVar, TVar)
	28	+
	29	+	}
	30	+
	31	+	func init() {
	32	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	33	+	if err != nil {
	34	+	panic(err)
	35	+	}
	36	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xGetEnableAnimations, lib, "adw_get_enable_animations")
	37	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLerp, lib, "adw_lerp")
	38	+
	39	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-animation.go +307 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type AnimationClass struct {
	12	+	}
	13	+
	14	+	// Describes the possible states of an [class@Animation].
	15	+	//
	16	+	// The state can be controlled with [method@Animation.play],
	17	+	// [method@Animation.pause], [method@Animation.resume],
	18	+	// [method@Animation.reset] and [method@Animation.skip].
	19	+	type AnimationState int
	20	+
	21	+	const (
	22	+
	23	+	// The animation hasn't started yet.
	24	+	AnimationIdleValue AnimationState = 0
	25	+	// The animation has been paused.
	26	+	AnimationPausedValue AnimationState = 1
	27	+	// The animation is currently playing.
	28	+	AnimationPlayingValue AnimationState = 2
	29	+	// The animation has finished.
	30	+	AnimationFinishedValue AnimationState = 3
	31	+	)
	32	+
	33	+	// A base class for animations.
	34	+	//
	35	+	// `AdwAnimation` represents an animation on a widget. It has a target that
	36	+	// provides a value to animate, and a state indicating whether the
	37	+	// animation hasn't been started yet, is playing, paused or finished.
	38	+	//
	39	+	// Currently there are two concrete animation types:
	40	+	// [class@TimedAnimation] and [class@SpringAnimation].
	41	+	//
	42	+	// `AdwAnimation` will automatically skip the animation if
	43	+	// [property@Animation:widget] is unmapped, or if
	44	+	// [property@Gtk.Settings:gtk-enable-animations] is `FALSE`.
	45	+	//
	46	+	// The [signal@Animation::done] signal can be used to perform an action after
	47	+	// the animation ends, for example hiding a widget after animating its
	48	+	// [property@Gtk.Widget:opacity] to 0.
	49	+	//
	50	+	// `AdwAnimation` will be kept alive while the animation is playing. As such,
	51	+	// it's safe to create an animation, start it and immediately unref it:
	52	+	// A fire-and-forget animation:
	53	+	//
	54	+	// ```c
	55	+	// static void
	56	+	// animation_cb (double value,
	57	+	//
	58	+	// MyObject *self)
	59	+	//
	60	+	// {
	61	+	// // Do something with @value
	62	+	// }
	63	+	//
	64	+	// static void
	65	+	// my_object_animate (MyObject *self)
	66	+	//
	67	+	// {
	68	+	// AdwAnimationTarget *target =
	69	+	// adw_callback_animation_target_new ((AdwAnimationTargetFunc) animation_cb,
	70	+	// self, NULL);
	71	+	// g_autoptr (AdwAnimation) animation =
	72	+	// adw_timed_animation_new (widget, 0, 1, 250, target);
	73	+	//
	74	+	// adw_animation_play (animation);
	75	+	// }
	76	+	//
	77	+	// ```
	78	+	//
	79	+	// If there's a chance the previous animation for the same target hasn't yet
	80	+	// finished, the previous animation should be stopped first, or the existing
	81	+	// `AdwAnimation` object can be reused.
	82	+	type Animation struct {
	83	+	gobject.Object
	84	+	}
	85	+
	86	+	func AnimationNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Animation {
	87	+	cls := &Animation{}
	88	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	89	+	return cls
	90	+	}
	91	+
	92	+	var xAnimationGetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting func(uintptr) bool
	93	+
	94	+	// Gets whether @self should be skipped when animations are globally disabled.
	95	+	func (x *Animation) GetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting() bool {
	96	+
	97	+	return xAnimationGetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting(x.GoPointer())
	98	+
	99	+	}
	100	+
	101	+	var xAnimationGetState func(uintptr) AnimationState
	102	+
	103	+	// Gets the current value of @self.
	104	+	//
	105	+	// The state indicates whether @self is currently playing, paused, finished or
	106	+	// hasn't been started yet.
	107	+	func (x *Animation) GetState() AnimationState {
	108	+
	109	+	return xAnimationGetState(x.GoPointer())
	110	+
	111	+	}
	112	+
	113	+	var xAnimationGetTarget func(uintptr) uintptr
	114	+
	115	+	// Gets the target @self animates.
	116	+	func (x Animation) GetTarget() AnimationTarget {
	117	+
	118	+	GetTargetPtr := xAnimationGetTarget(x.GoPointer())
	119	+	if GetTargetPtr == 0 {
	120	+	return nil
	121	+	}
	122	+
	123	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetTargetPtr)
	124	+
	125	+	GetTargetCls := &AnimationTarget{}
	126	+	GetTargetCls.Ptr = GetTargetPtr
	127	+	return GetTargetCls
	128	+
	129	+	}
	130	+
	131	+	var xAnimationGetValue func(uintptr) float64
	132	+
	133	+	// Gets the current value of @self.
	134	+	func (x *Animation) GetValue() float64 {
	135	+
	136	+	return xAnimationGetValue(x.GoPointer())
	137	+
	138	+	}
	139	+
	140	+	var xAnimationGetWidget func(uintptr) uintptr
	141	+
	142	+	// Gets the widget @self was created for.
	143	+	//
	144	+	// It provides the frame clock for the animation. It's not strictly necessary
	145	+	// for this widget to be same as the one being animated.
	146	+	//
	147	+	// The widget must be mapped in order for the animation to work. If it's not
	148	+	// mapped, or if it gets unmapped during an ongoing animation, the animation
	149	+	// will be automatically skipped.
	150	+	func (x Animation) GetWidget() gtk.Widget {
	151	+
	152	+	GetWidgetPtr := xAnimationGetWidget(x.GoPointer())
	153	+	if GetWidgetPtr == 0 {
	154	+	return nil
	155	+	}
	156	+
	157	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetWidgetPtr)
	158	+
	159	+	GetWidgetCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	160	+	GetWidgetCls.Ptr = GetWidgetPtr
	161	+	return GetWidgetCls
	162	+
	163	+	}
	164	+
	165	+	var xAnimationPause func(uintptr)
	166	+
	167	+	// Pauses a playing animation for @self.
	168	+	//
	169	+	// Does nothing if the current state of @self isn't `ADW_ANIMATION_PLAYING`.
	170	+	//
	171	+	// Sets [property@Animation:state] to `ADW_ANIMATION_PAUSED`.
	172	+	func (x *Animation) Pause() {
	173	+
	174	+	xAnimationPause(x.GoPointer())
	175	+
	176	+	}
	177	+
	178	+	var xAnimationPlay func(uintptr)
	179	+
	180	+	// Starts the animation for @self.
	181	+	//
	182	+	// If the animation is playing, paused or has been completed, restarts it from
	183	+	// the beginning. This allows to easily play an animation regardless of whether
	184	+	// it's already playing or not.
	185	+	//
	186	+	// Sets [property@Animation:state] to `ADW_ANIMATION_PLAYING`.
	187	+	//
	188	+	// The animation will be automatically skipped if [property@Animation:widget] is
	189	+	// unmapped, or if [property@Gtk.Settings:gtk-enable-animations] is `FALSE`.
	190	+	//
	191	+	// As such, it's not guaranteed that the animation will actually run. For
	192	+	// example, when using [func@GLib.idle_add] and starting an animation
	193	+	// immediately afterwards, it's entirely possible that the idle callback will
	194	+	// run after the animation has already finished, and not while it's playing.
	195	+	func (x *Animation) Play() {
	196	+
	197	+	xAnimationPlay(x.GoPointer())
	198	+
	199	+	}
	200	+
	201	+	var xAnimationReset func(uintptr)
	202	+
	203	+	// Resets the animation for @self.
	204	+	//
	205	+	// Sets [property@Animation:state] to `ADW_ANIMATION_IDLE`.
	206	+	func (x *Animation) Reset() {
	207	+
	208	+	xAnimationReset(x.GoPointer())
	209	+
	210	+	}
	211	+
	212	+	var xAnimationResume func(uintptr)
	213	+
	214	+	// Resumes a paused animation for @self.
	215	+	//
	216	+	// This function must only be used if the animation has been paused with
	217	+	// [method@Animation.pause].
	218	+	//
	219	+	// Sets [property@Animation:state] to `ADW_ANIMATION_PLAYING`.
	220	+	func (x *Animation) Resume() {
	221	+
	222	+	xAnimationResume(x.GoPointer())
	223	+
	224	+	}
	225	+
	226	+	var xAnimationSetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting func(uintptr, bool)
	227	+
	228	+	// Sets whether to skip @self when animations are globally disabled.
	229	+	//
	230	+	// The default behavior is to skip the animation. Set to `FALSE` to disable this
	231	+	// behavior.
	232	+	//
	233	+	// This can be useful for cases where animation is essential, like spinners, or
	234	+	// in demo applications. Most other animations should keep it enabled.
	235	+	//
	236	+	// See [property@Gtk.Settings:gtk-enable-animations].
	237	+	func (x *Animation) SetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting(SettingVar bool) {
	238	+
	239	+	xAnimationSetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting(x.GoPointer(), SettingVar)
	240	+
	241	+	}
	242	+
	243	+	var xAnimationSetTarget func(uintptr, uintptr)
	244	+
	245	+	// Sets the target @self animates to @target.
	246	+	func (x Animation) SetTarget(TargetVar AnimationTarget) {
	247	+
	248	+	xAnimationSetTarget(x.GoPointer(), TargetVar.GoPointer())
	249	+
	250	+	}
	251	+
	252	+	var xAnimationSkip func(uintptr)
	253	+
	254	+	// Skips the animation for @self.
	255	+	//
	256	+	// If the animation hasn't been started yet, is playing, or is paused, instantly
	257	+	// skips the animation to the end and causes [signal@Animation::done] to be
	258	+	// emitted.
	259	+	//
	260	+	// Sets [property@Animation:state] to `ADW_ANIMATION_FINISHED`.
	261	+	func (x *Animation) Skip() {
	262	+
	263	+	xAnimationSkip(x.GoPointer())
	264	+
	265	+	}
	266	+
	267	+	func (c *Animation) GoPointer() uintptr {
	268	+	return c.Ptr
	269	+	}
	270	+
	271	+	func (c *Animation) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	272	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	273	+	}
	274	+
	275	+	// This signal is emitted when the animation has been completed, either on its
	276	+	// own or via calling [method@Animation.skip].
	277	+	func (x *Animation) ConnectDone(cb func(Animation)) {
	278	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr) {
	279	+	fa := Animation{}
	280	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	281	+
	282	+	cb(fa)
	283	+
	284	+	}
	285	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::done", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	286	+	}
	287	+
	288	+	func init() {
	289	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	290	+	if err != nil {
	291	+	panic(err)
	292	+	}
	293	+
	294	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationGetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting, lib, "adw_animation_get_follow_enable_animations_setting")
	295	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationGetState, lib, "adw_animation_get_state")
	296	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationGetTarget, lib, "adw_animation_get_target")
	297	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationGetValue, lib, "adw_animation_get_value")
	298	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationGetWidget, lib, "adw_animation_get_widget")
	299	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationPause, lib, "adw_animation_pause")
	300	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationPlay, lib, "adw_animation_play")
	301	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationReset, lib, "adw_animation_reset")
	302	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationResume, lib, "adw_animation_resume")
	303	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationSetFollowEnableAnimationsSetting, lib, "adw_animation_set_follow_enable_animations_setting")
	304	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationSetTarget, lib, "adw_animation_set_target")
	305	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAnimationSkip, lib, "adw_animation_skip")
	306	+
	307	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-application-window.go +686 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,686 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gio"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	11	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gsk"
	12	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	13	+	)
	14	+
	15	+	type ApplicationWindowClass struct {
	16	+	ParentClass uintptr
	17	+
	18	+	Padding uintptr
	19	+	}
	20	+
	21	+	// A freeform application window.
	22	+	//
	23	+	// <picture>
	24	+	//
	25	+	// <source srcset="application-window-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	26	+	// <img src="application-window.png" alt="application-window">
	27	+	//
	28	+	// </picture>
	29	+	//
	30	+	// `AdwApplicationWindow` is a [class@Gtk.ApplicationWindow] subclass providing
	31	+	// the same features as [class@Window].
	32	+	//
	33	+	// See [class@Window] for details.
	34	+	//
	35	+	// Using [property@Gtk.Application:menubar] is not supported and may result in
	36	+	// visual glitches.
	37	+	type ApplicationWindow struct {
	38	+	gtk.ApplicationWindow
	39	+	}
	40	+
	41	+	func ApplicationWindowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *ApplicationWindow {
	42	+	cls := &ApplicationWindow{}
	43	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	44	+	return cls
	45	+	}
	46	+
	47	+	var xNewApplicationWindow func(uintptr) uintptr
	48	+
	49	+	// Creates a new `AdwApplicationWindow` for @app.
	50	+	func NewApplicationWindow(AppVar gtk.Application) gtk.Widget {
	51	+	NewApplicationWindowPtr := xNewApplicationWindow(AppVar.GoPointer())
	52	+	if NewApplicationWindowPtr == 0 {
	53	+	return nil
	54	+	}
	55	+
	56	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewApplicationWindowPtr)
	57	+
	58	+	NewApplicationWindowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	59	+	NewApplicationWindowCls.Ptr = NewApplicationWindowPtr
	60	+	return NewApplicationWindowCls
	61	+	}
	62	+
	63	+	var xApplicationWindowGetContent func(uintptr) uintptr
	64	+
	65	+	// Gets the content widget of @self.
	66	+	//
	67	+	// This method should always be used instead of [method@Gtk.Window.get_child].
	68	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetContent() gtk.Widget {
	69	+
	70	+	GetContentPtr := xApplicationWindowGetContent(x.GoPointer())
	71	+	if GetContentPtr == 0 {
	72	+	return nil
	73	+	}
	74	+
	75	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetContentPtr)
	76	+
	77	+	GetContentCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	78	+	GetContentCls.Ptr = GetContentPtr
	79	+	return GetContentCls
	80	+
	81	+	}
	82	+
	83	+	var xApplicationWindowSetContent func(uintptr, uintptr)
	84	+
	85	+	// Sets the content widget of @self.
	86	+	//
	87	+	// This method should always be used instead of [method@Gtk.Window.set_child].
	88	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) SetContent(ContentVar gtk.Widget) {
	89	+
	90	+	xApplicationWindowSetContent(x.GoPointer(), ContentVar.GoPointer())
	91	+
	92	+	}
	93	+
	94	+	func (c *ApplicationWindow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	95	+	return c.Ptr
	96	+	}
	97	+
	98	+	func (c *ApplicationWindow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	99	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	100	+	}
	101	+
	102	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-added signal on @action_group.
	103	+	//
	104	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	105	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) ActionAdded(ActionNameVar string) {
	106	+
	107	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionAdded(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	108	+
	109	+	}
	110	+
	111	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-enabled-changed signal on @action_group.
	112	+	//
	113	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	114	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) ActionEnabledChanged(ActionNameVar string, EnabledVar bool) {
	115	+
	116	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionEnabledChanged(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, EnabledVar)
	117	+
	118	+	}
	119	+
	120	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-removed signal on @action_group.
	121	+	//
	122	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	123	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) ActionRemoved(ActionNameVar string) {
	124	+
	125	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionRemoved(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	126	+
	127	+	}
	128	+
	129	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-state-changed signal on @action_group.
	130	+	//
	131	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	132	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) ActionStateChanged(ActionNameVar string, StateVar glib.Variant) {
	133	+
	134	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionStateChanged(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, StateVar)
	135	+
	136	+	}
	137	+
	138	+	// Activate the named action within @action_group.
	139	+	//
	140	+	// If the action is expecting a parameter, then the correct type of
	141	+	// parameter must be given as @parameter. If the action is expecting no
	142	+	// parameters then @parameter must be %NULL. See
	143	+	// g_action_group_get_action_parameter_type().
	144	+	//
	145	+	// If the #GActionGroup implementation supports asynchronous remote
	146	+	// activation over D-Bus, this call may return before the relevant
	147	+	// D-Bus traffic has been sent, or any replies have been received. In
	148	+	// order to block on such asynchronous activation calls,
	149	+	// g_dbus_connection_flush() should be called prior to the code, which
	150	+	// depends on the result of the action activation. Without flushing
	151	+	// the D-Bus connection, there is no guarantee that the action would
	152	+	// have been activated.
	153	+	//
	154	+	// The following code which runs in a remote app instance, shows an
	155	+	// example of a "quit" action being activated on the primary app
	156	+	// instance over D-Bus. Here g_dbus_connection_flush() is called
	157	+	// before `exit()`. Without g_dbus_connection_flush(), the "quit" action
	158	+	// may fail to be activated on the primary instance.
	159	+	//
	160	+	// \|[<!-- language="C" -->
	161	+	// // call "quit" action on primary instance
	162	+	// g_action_group_activate_action (G_ACTION_GROUP (app), "quit", NULL);
	163	+	//
	164	+	// // make sure the action is activated now
	165	+	// g_dbus_connection_flush (...);
	166	+	//
	167	+	// g_debug ("application has been terminated. exiting.");
	168	+	//
	169	+	// exit (0);
	170	+	// ]\|
	171	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) ActivateAction(ActionNameVar string, ParameterVar glib.Variant) {
	172	+
	173	+	gio.XGActionGroupActivateAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, ParameterVar)
	174	+
	175	+	}
	176	+
	177	+	// Request for the state of the named action within @action_group to be
	178	+	// changed to @value.
	179	+	//
	180	+	// The action must be stateful and @value must be of the correct type.
	181	+	// See g_action_group_get_action_state_type().
	182	+	//
	183	+	// This call merely requests a change. The action may refuse to change
	184	+	// its state or may change its state to something other than @value.
	185	+	// See g_action_group_get_action_state_hint().
	186	+	//
	187	+	// If the @value GVariant is floating, it is consumed.
	188	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) ChangeActionState(ActionNameVar string, ValueVar glib.Variant) {
	189	+
	190	+	gio.XGActionGroupChangeActionState(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, ValueVar)
	191	+
	192	+	}
	193	+
	194	+	// Checks if the named action within @action_group is currently enabled.
	195	+	//
	196	+	// An action must be enabled in order to be activated or in order to
	197	+	// have its state changed from outside callers.
	198	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) GetActionEnabled(ActionNameVar string) bool {
	199	+
	200	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionEnabled(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	201	+
	202	+	}
	203	+
	204	+	// Queries the type of the parameter that must be given when activating
	205	+	// the named action within @action_group.
	206	+	//
	207	+	// When activating the action using g_action_group_activate_action(),
	208	+	// the #GVariant given to that function must be of the type returned
	209	+	// by this function.
	210	+	//
	211	+	// In the case that this function returns %NULL, you must not give any
	212	+	// #GVariant, but %NULL instead.
	213	+	//
	214	+	// The parameter type of a particular action will never change but it is
	215	+	// possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
	216	+	// with the same name but a different parameter type.
	217	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetActionParameterType(ActionNameVar string) glib.VariantType {
	218	+
	219	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionParameterType(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	220	+
	221	+	}
	222	+
	223	+	// Queries the current state of the named action within @action_group.
	224	+	//
	225	+	// If the action is not stateful then %NULL will be returned. If the
	226	+	// action is stateful then the type of the return value is the type
	227	+	// given by g_action_group_get_action_state_type().
	228	+	//
	229	+	// The return value (if non-%NULL) should be freed with
	230	+	// g_variant_unref() when it is no longer required.
	231	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetActionState(ActionNameVar string) glib.Variant {
	232	+
	233	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionState(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	234	+
	235	+	}
	236	+
	237	+	// Requests a hint about the valid range of values for the state of the
	238	+	// named action within @action_group.
	239	+	//
	240	+	// If %NULL is returned it either means that the action is not stateful
	241	+	// or that there is no hint about the valid range of values for the
	242	+	// state of the action.
	243	+	//
	244	+	// If a #GVariant array is returned then each item in the array is a
	245	+	// possible value for the state. If a #GVariant pair (ie: two-tuple) is
	246	+	// returned then the tuple specifies the inclusive lower and upper bound
	247	+	// of valid values for the state.
	248	+	//
	249	+	// In any case, the information is merely a hint. It may be possible to
	250	+	// have a state value outside of the hinted range and setting a value
	251	+	// within the range may fail.
	252	+	//
	253	+	// The return value (if non-%NULL) should be freed with
	254	+	// g_variant_unref() when it is no longer required.
	255	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetActionStateHint(ActionNameVar string) glib.Variant {
	256	+
	257	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionStateHint(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	258	+
	259	+	}
	260	+
	261	+	// Queries the type of the state of the named action within
	262	+	// @action_group.
	263	+	//
	264	+	// If the action is stateful then this function returns the
	265	+	// #GVariantType of the state. All calls to
	266	+	// g_action_group_change_action_state() must give a #GVariant of this
	267	+	// type and g_action_group_get_action_state() will return a #GVariant
	268	+	// of the same type.
	269	+	//
	270	+	// If the action is not stateful then this function will return %NULL.
	271	+	// In that case, g_action_group_get_action_state() will return %NULL
	272	+	// and you must not call g_action_group_change_action_state().
	273	+	//
	274	+	// The state type of a particular action will never change but it is
	275	+	// possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
	276	+	// with the same name but a different state type.
	277	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetActionStateType(ActionNameVar string) glib.VariantType {
	278	+
	279	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionStateType(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	280	+
	281	+	}
	282	+
	283	+	// Checks if the named action exists within @action_group.
	284	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) HasAction(ActionNameVar string) bool {
	285	+
	286	+	return gio.XGActionGroupHasAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	287	+
	288	+	}
	289	+
	290	+	// Lists the actions contained within @action_group.
	291	+	//
	292	+	// The caller is responsible for freeing the list with g_strfreev() when
	293	+	// it is no longer required.
	294	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) ListActions() uintptr {
	295	+
	296	+	return gio.XGActionGroupListActions(x.GoPointer())
	297	+
	298	+	}
	299	+
	300	+	// Queries all aspects of the named action within an @action_group.
	301	+	//
	302	+	// This function acquires the information available from
	303	+	// g_action_group_has_action(), g_action_group_get_action_enabled(),
	304	+	// g_action_group_get_action_parameter_type(),
	305	+	// g_action_group_get_action_state_type(),
	306	+	// g_action_group_get_action_state_hint() and
	307	+	// g_action_group_get_action_state() with a single function call.
	308	+	//
	309	+	// This provides two main benefits.
	310	+	//
	311	+	// The first is the improvement in efficiency that comes with not having
	312	+	// to perform repeated lookups of the action in order to discover
	313	+	// different things about it. The second is that implementing
	314	+	// #GActionGroup can now be done by only overriding this one virtual
	315	+	// function.
	316	+	//
	317	+	// The interface provides a default implementation of this function that
	318	+	// calls the individual functions, as required, to fetch the
	319	+	// information. The interface also provides default implementations of
	320	+	// those functions that call this function. All implementations,
	321	+	// therefore, must override either this function or all of the others.
	322	+	//
	323	+	// If the action exists, %TRUE is returned and any of the requested
	324	+	// fields (as indicated by having a non-%NULL reference passed in) are
	325	+	// filled. If the action doesn't exist, %FALSE is returned and the
	326	+	// fields may or may not have been modified.
	327	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) QueryAction(ActionNameVar string, EnabledVar bool, ParameterTypeVar glib.VariantType, StateTypeVar glib.VariantType, StateHintVar glib.Variant, StateVar *glib.Variant) bool {
	328	+
	329	+	return gio.XGActionGroupQueryAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, EnabledVar, ParameterTypeVar, StateTypeVar, StateHintVar, StateVar)
	330	+
	331	+	}
	332	+
	333	+	// Adds an action to the @action_map.
	334	+	//
	335	+	// If the action map already contains an action with the same name
	336	+	// as @action then the old action is dropped from the action map.
	337	+	//
	338	+	// The action map takes its own reference on @action.
	339	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) AddAction(ActionVar gio.Action) {
	340	+
	341	+	gio.XGActionMapAddAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionVar.GoPointer())
	342	+
	343	+	}
	344	+
	345	+	// A convenience function for creating multiple #GSimpleAction instances
	346	+	// and adding them to a #GActionMap.
	347	+	//
	348	+	// Each action is constructed as per one #GActionEntry.
	349	+	//
	350	+	// \|[<!-- language="C" -->
	351	+	// static void
	352	+	// activate_quit (GSimpleAction *simple,
	353	+	//
	354	+	// GVariant *parameter,
	355	+	// gpointer user_data)
	356	+	//
	357	+	// {
	358	+	// exit (0);
	359	+	// }
	360	+	//
	361	+	// static void
	362	+	// activate_print_string (GSimpleAction *simple,
	363	+	//
	364	+	// GVariant *parameter,
	365	+	// gpointer user_data)
	366	+	//
	367	+	// {
	368	+	// g_print ("%s\n", g_variant_get_string (parameter, NULL));
	369	+	// }
	370	+	//
	371	+	// static GActionGroup *
	372	+	// create_action_group (void)
	373	+	//
	374	+	// {
	375	+	// const GActionEntry entries[] = {
	376	+	// { "quit", activate_quit },
	377	+	// { "print-string", activate_print_string, "s" }
	378	+	// };
	379	+	// GSimpleActionGroup *group;
	380	+	//
	381	+	// group = g_simple_action_group_new ();
	382	+	// g_action_map_add_action_entries (G_ACTION_MAP (group), entries, G_N_ELEMENTS (entries), NULL);
	383	+	//
	384	+	// return G_ACTION_GROUP (group);
	385	+	// }
	386	+	//
	387	+	// ]\|
	388	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) AddActionEntries(EntriesVar uintptr, NEntriesVar int32, UserDataVar uintptr) {
	389	+
	390	+	gio.XGActionMapAddActionEntries(x.GoPointer(), EntriesVar, NEntriesVar, UserDataVar)
	391	+
	392	+	}
	393	+
	394	+	// Looks up the action with the name @action_name in @action_map.
	395	+	//
	396	+	// If no such action exists, returns %NULL.
	397	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) LookupAction(ActionNameVar string) gio.ActionBase {
	398	+
	399	+	LookupActionPtr := gio.XGActionMapLookupAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	400	+	if LookupActionPtr == 0 {
	401	+	return nil
	402	+	}
	403	+
	404	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(LookupActionPtr)
	405	+
	406	+	LookupActionCls := &gio.ActionBase{}
	407	+	LookupActionCls.Ptr = LookupActionPtr
	408	+	return LookupActionCls
	409	+
	410	+	}
	411	+
	412	+	// Removes the named action from the action map.
	413	+	//
	414	+	// If no action of this name is in the map then nothing happens.
	415	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) RemoveAction(ActionNameVar string) {
	416	+
	417	+	gio.XGActionMapRemoveAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	418	+
	419	+	}
	420	+
	421	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	422	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	423	+
	424	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	425	+
	426	+	}
	427	+
	428	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	429	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	430	+
	431	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	432	+
	433	+	}
	434	+
	435	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	436	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	437	+
	438	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	439	+
	440	+	}
	441	+
	442	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	443	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	444	+
	445	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	446	+
	447	+	}
	448	+
	449	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	450	+	//
	451	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	452	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	453	+	//
	454	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	455	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	456	+	// technologies.
	457	+	//
	458	+	// Example:
	459	+	// ```c
	460	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	461	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	462	+	//
	463	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	464	+	// -1);
	465	+	//
	466	+	// ```
	467	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	468	+
	469	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	470	+
	471	+	}
	472	+
	473	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	474	+	//
	475	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	476	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	477	+	//
	478	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	479	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	480	+
	481	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	482	+
	483	+	}
	484	+
	485	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	486	+	//
	487	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	488	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	489	+	//
	490	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	491	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	492	+	//
	493	+	// ```c
	494	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	495	+	//
	496	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	497	+	// ref1, NULL,
	498	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	499	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	500	+	// -1);
	501	+	//
	502	+	// ```
	503	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	504	+
	505	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	506	+
	507	+	}
	508	+
	509	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	510	+	//
	511	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	512	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	513	+	//
	514	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	515	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	516	+
	517	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	518	+
	519	+	}
	520	+
	521	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	522	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	523	+	//
	524	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	525	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	526	+	//
	527	+	// Example:
	528	+	// ```c
	529	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	530	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	531	+	//
	532	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	533	+	// -1);
	534	+	//
	535	+	// ```
	536	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	537	+
	538	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	539	+
	540	+	}
	541	+
	542	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	543	+	//
	544	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	545	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	546	+	//
	547	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	548	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	549	+
	550	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	551	+
	552	+	}
	553	+
	554	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	555	+	//
	556	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	557	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	558	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) GetBuildableId() string {
	559	+
	560	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	561	+
	562	+	}
	563	+
	564	+	// Returns the renderer that is used for this `GtkNative`.
	565	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetRenderer() gsk.Renderer {
	566	+
	567	+	GetRendererPtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetRenderer(x.GoPointer())
	568	+	if GetRendererPtr == 0 {
	569	+	return nil
	570	+	}
	571	+
	572	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetRendererPtr)
	573	+
	574	+	GetRendererCls := &gsk.Renderer{}
	575	+	GetRendererCls.Ptr = GetRendererPtr
	576	+	return GetRendererCls
	577	+
	578	+	}
	579	+
	580	+	// Returns the surface of this `GtkNative`.
	581	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetSurface() gdk.Surface {
	582	+
	583	+	GetSurfacePtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurface(x.GoPointer())
	584	+	if GetSurfacePtr == 0 {
	585	+	return nil
	586	+	}
	587	+
	588	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetSurfacePtr)
	589	+
	590	+	GetSurfaceCls := &gdk.Surface{}
	591	+	GetSurfaceCls.Ptr = GetSurfacePtr
	592	+	return GetSurfaceCls
	593	+
	594	+	}
	595	+
	596	+	// Retrieves the surface transform of @self.
	597	+	//
	598	+	// This is the translation from @self's surface coordinates into
	599	+	// @self's widget coordinates.
	600	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) GetSurfaceTransform(XVar float64, YVar float64) {
	601	+
	602	+	gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurfaceTransform(x.GoPointer(), XVar, YVar)
	603	+
	604	+	}
	605	+
	606	+	// Realizes a `GtkNative`.
	607	+	//
	608	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	609	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) Realize() {
	610	+
	611	+	gtk.XGtkNativeRealize(x.GoPointer())
	612	+
	613	+	}
	614	+
	615	+	// Unrealizes a `GtkNative`.
	616	+	//
	617	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	618	+	func (x *ApplicationWindow) Unrealize() {
	619	+
	620	+	gtk.XGtkNativeUnrealize(x.GoPointer())
	621	+
	622	+	}
	623	+
	624	+	// Returns the display that this `GtkRoot` is on.
	625	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetDisplay() gdk.Display {
	626	+
	627	+	GetDisplayPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetDisplay(x.GoPointer())
	628	+	if GetDisplayPtr == 0 {
	629	+	return nil
	630	+	}
	631	+
	632	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetDisplayPtr)
	633	+
	634	+	GetDisplayCls := &gdk.Display{}
	635	+	GetDisplayCls.Ptr = GetDisplayPtr
	636	+	return GetDisplayCls
	637	+
	638	+	}
	639	+
	640	+	// Retrieves the current focused widget within the root.
	641	+	//
	642	+	// Note that this is the widget that would have the focus
	643	+	// if the root is active; if the root is not focused then
	644	+	// `gtk_widget_has_focus (widget)` will be %FALSE for the
	645	+	// widget.
	646	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) GetFocus() gtk.Widget {
	647	+
	648	+	GetFocusPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetFocus(x.GoPointer())
	649	+	if GetFocusPtr == 0 {
	650	+	return nil
	651	+	}
	652	+
	653	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetFocusPtr)
	654	+
	655	+	GetFocusCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	656	+	GetFocusCls.Ptr = GetFocusPtr
	657	+	return GetFocusCls
	658	+
	659	+	}
	660	+
	661	+	// If @focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
	662	+	// it as the focus widget for the root.
	663	+	//
	664	+	// If @focus is %NULL, unsets the focus widget for the root.
	665	+	//
	666	+	// To set the focus to a particular widget in the root, it is usually
	667	+	// more convenient to use [method@Gtk.Widget.grab_focus] instead of
	668	+	// this function.
	669	+	func (x ApplicationWindow) SetFocus(FocusVar gtk.Widget) {
	670	+
	671	+	gtk.XGtkRootSetFocus(x.GoPointer(), FocusVar.GoPointer())
	672	+
	673	+	}
	674	+
	675	+	func init() {
	676	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	677	+	if err != nil {
	678	+	panic(err)
	679	+	}
	680	+
	681	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewApplicationWindow, lib, "adw_application_window_new")
	682	+
	683	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xApplicationWindowGetContent, lib, "adw_application_window_get_content")
	684	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xApplicationWindowSetContent, lib, "adw_application_window_set_content")
	685	+
	686	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-application.go +433 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,433 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gio"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	type ApplicationClass struct {
	14	+	ParentClass uintptr
	15	+
	16	+	Padding uintptr
	17	+	}
	18	+
	19	+	// A base class for Adwaita applications.
	20	+	//
	21	+	// `AdwApplication` handles library initialization by calling [func@init] in the
	22	+	// default [signal@Gio.Application::startup] signal handler, in turn chaining up
	23	+	// as required by [class@Gtk.Application]. Therefore, any subclass of
	24	+	// `AdwApplication` should always chain up its `startup` handler before using
	25	+	// any Adwaita or GTK API.
	26	+	//
	27	+	// ## Automatic Resources
	28	+	//
	29	+	// `AdwApplication` will automatically load stylesheets located in the
	30	+	// application's resource base path (see
	31	+	// [method@Gio.Application.set_resource_base_path], if they're present.
	32	+	//
	33	+	// They can be used to add custom styles to the application, as follows:
	34	+	//
	35	+	// - `style.css` contains styles that are always present.
	36	+	//
	37	+	// - `style-dark.css` contains styles only used when
	38	+	// [property@StyleManager:dark] is `TRUE`.
	39	+	//
	40	+	// - `style-hc.css` contains styles used when the system high contrast
	41	+	// preference is enabled.
	42	+	//
	43	+	// - `style-hc-dark.css` contains styles used when the system high contrast
	44	+	// preference is enabled and [property@StyleManager:dark] is `TRUE`.
	45	+	type Application struct {
	46	+	gtk.Application
	47	+	}
	48	+
	49	+	func ApplicationNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Application {
	50	+	cls := &Application{}
	51	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	52	+	return cls
	53	+	}
	54	+
	55	+	var xNewApplication func(string, gio.ApplicationFlags) uintptr
	56	+
	57	+	// Creates a new `AdwApplication`.
	58	+	//
	59	+	// If `application_id` is not `NULL`, then it must be valid. See
	60	+	// [func@Gio.Application.id_is_valid].
	61	+	//
	62	+	// If no application ID is given then some features (most notably application
	63	+	// uniqueness) will be disabled.
	64	+	func NewApplication(ApplicationIdVar string, FlagsVar gio.ApplicationFlags) *Application {
	65	+	NewApplicationPtr := xNewApplication(ApplicationIdVar, FlagsVar)
	66	+	if NewApplicationPtr == 0 {
	67	+	return nil
	68	+	}
	69	+
	70	+	NewApplicationCls := &Application{}
	71	+	NewApplicationCls.Ptr = NewApplicationPtr
	72	+	return NewApplicationCls
	73	+	}
	74	+
	75	+	var xApplicationGetStyleManager func(uintptr) uintptr
	76	+
	77	+	// Gets the style manager for @self.
	78	+	//
	79	+	// This is a convenience property allowing to access `AdwStyleManager` through
	80	+	// property bindings or expressions.
	81	+	func (x Application) GetStyleManager() StyleManager {
	82	+
	83	+	GetStyleManagerPtr := xApplicationGetStyleManager(x.GoPointer())
	84	+	if GetStyleManagerPtr == 0 {
	85	+	return nil
	86	+	}
	87	+
	88	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetStyleManagerPtr)
	89	+
	90	+	GetStyleManagerCls := &StyleManager{}
	91	+	GetStyleManagerCls.Ptr = GetStyleManagerPtr
	92	+	return GetStyleManagerCls
	93	+
	94	+	}
	95	+
	96	+	func (c *Application) GoPointer() uintptr {
	97	+	return c.Ptr
	98	+	}
	99	+
	100	+	func (c *Application) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	101	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	102	+	}
	103	+
	104	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-added signal on @action_group.
	105	+	//
	106	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	107	+	func (x *Application) ActionAdded(ActionNameVar string) {
	108	+
	109	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionAdded(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	110	+
	111	+	}
	112	+
	113	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-enabled-changed signal on @action_group.
	114	+	//
	115	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	116	+	func (x *Application) ActionEnabledChanged(ActionNameVar string, EnabledVar bool) {
	117	+
	118	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionEnabledChanged(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, EnabledVar)
	119	+
	120	+	}
	121	+
	122	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-removed signal on @action_group.
	123	+	//
	124	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	125	+	func (x *Application) ActionRemoved(ActionNameVar string) {
	126	+
	127	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionRemoved(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	128	+
	129	+	}
	130	+
	131	+	// Emits the #GActionGroup::action-state-changed signal on @action_group.
	132	+	//
	133	+	// This function should only be called by #GActionGroup implementations.
	134	+	func (x Application) ActionStateChanged(ActionNameVar string, StateVar glib.Variant) {
	135	+
	136	+	gio.XGActionGroupActionStateChanged(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, StateVar)
	137	+
	138	+	}
	139	+
	140	+	// Activate the named action within @action_group.
	141	+	//
	142	+	// If the action is expecting a parameter, then the correct type of
	143	+	// parameter must be given as @parameter. If the action is expecting no
	144	+	// parameters then @parameter must be %NULL. See
	145	+	// g_action_group_get_action_parameter_type().
	146	+	//
	147	+	// If the #GActionGroup implementation supports asynchronous remote
	148	+	// activation over D-Bus, this call may return before the relevant
	149	+	// D-Bus traffic has been sent, or any replies have been received. In
	150	+	// order to block on such asynchronous activation calls,
	151	+	// g_dbus_connection_flush() should be called prior to the code, which
	152	+	// depends on the result of the action activation. Without flushing
	153	+	// the D-Bus connection, there is no guarantee that the action would
	154	+	// have been activated.
	155	+	//
	156	+	// The following code which runs in a remote app instance, shows an
	157	+	// example of a "quit" action being activated on the primary app
	158	+	// instance over D-Bus. Here g_dbus_connection_flush() is called
	159	+	// before `exit()`. Without g_dbus_connection_flush(), the "quit" action
	160	+	// may fail to be activated on the primary instance.
	161	+	//
	162	+	// \|[<!-- language="C" -->
	163	+	// // call "quit" action on primary instance
	164	+	// g_action_group_activate_action (G_ACTION_GROUP (app), "quit", NULL);
	165	+	//
	166	+	// // make sure the action is activated now
	167	+	// g_dbus_connection_flush (...);
	168	+	//
	169	+	// g_debug ("application has been terminated. exiting.");
	170	+	//
	171	+	// exit (0);
	172	+	// ]\|
	173	+	func (x Application) ActivateAction(ActionNameVar string, ParameterVar glib.Variant) {
	174	+
	175	+	gio.XGActionGroupActivateAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, ParameterVar)
	176	+
	177	+	}
	178	+
	179	+	// Request for the state of the named action within @action_group to be
	180	+	// changed to @value.
	181	+	//
	182	+	// The action must be stateful and @value must be of the correct type.
	183	+	// See g_action_group_get_action_state_type().
	184	+	//
	185	+	// This call merely requests a change. The action may refuse to change
	186	+	// its state or may change its state to something other than @value.
	187	+	// See g_action_group_get_action_state_hint().
	188	+	//
	189	+	// If the @value GVariant is floating, it is consumed.
	190	+	func (x Application) ChangeActionState(ActionNameVar string, ValueVar glib.Variant) {
	191	+
	192	+	gio.XGActionGroupChangeActionState(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, ValueVar)
	193	+
	194	+	}
	195	+
	196	+	// Checks if the named action within @action_group is currently enabled.
	197	+	//
	198	+	// An action must be enabled in order to be activated or in order to
	199	+	// have its state changed from outside callers.
	200	+	func (x *Application) GetActionEnabled(ActionNameVar string) bool {
	201	+
	202	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionEnabled(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	203	+
	204	+	}
	205	+
	206	+	// Queries the type of the parameter that must be given when activating
	207	+	// the named action within @action_group.
	208	+	//
	209	+	// When activating the action using g_action_group_activate_action(),
	210	+	// the #GVariant given to that function must be of the type returned
	211	+	// by this function.
	212	+	//
	213	+	// In the case that this function returns %NULL, you must not give any
	214	+	// #GVariant, but %NULL instead.
	215	+	//
	216	+	// The parameter type of a particular action will never change but it is
	217	+	// possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
	218	+	// with the same name but a different parameter type.
	219	+	func (x Application) GetActionParameterType(ActionNameVar string) glib.VariantType {
	220	+
	221	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionParameterType(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	222	+
	223	+	}
	224	+
	225	+	// Queries the current state of the named action within @action_group.
	226	+	//
	227	+	// If the action is not stateful then %NULL will be returned. If the
	228	+	// action is stateful then the type of the return value is the type
	229	+	// given by g_action_group_get_action_state_type().
	230	+	//
	231	+	// The return value (if non-%NULL) should be freed with
	232	+	// g_variant_unref() when it is no longer required.
	233	+	func (x Application) GetActionState(ActionNameVar string) glib.Variant {
	234	+
	235	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionState(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	236	+
	237	+	}
	238	+
	239	+	// Requests a hint about the valid range of values for the state of the
	240	+	// named action within @action_group.
	241	+	//
	242	+	// If %NULL is returned it either means that the action is not stateful
	243	+	// or that there is no hint about the valid range of values for the
	244	+	// state of the action.
	245	+	//
	246	+	// If a #GVariant array is returned then each item in the array is a
	247	+	// possible value for the state. If a #GVariant pair (ie: two-tuple) is
	248	+	// returned then the tuple specifies the inclusive lower and upper bound
	249	+	// of valid values for the state.
	250	+	//
	251	+	// In any case, the information is merely a hint. It may be possible to
	252	+	// have a state value outside of the hinted range and setting a value
	253	+	// within the range may fail.
	254	+	//
	255	+	// The return value (if non-%NULL) should be freed with
	256	+	// g_variant_unref() when it is no longer required.
	257	+	func (x Application) GetActionStateHint(ActionNameVar string) glib.Variant {
	258	+
	259	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionStateHint(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	260	+
	261	+	}
	262	+
	263	+	// Queries the type of the state of the named action within
	264	+	// @action_group.
	265	+	//
	266	+	// If the action is stateful then this function returns the
	267	+	// #GVariantType of the state. All calls to
	268	+	// g_action_group_change_action_state() must give a #GVariant of this
	269	+	// type and g_action_group_get_action_state() will return a #GVariant
	270	+	// of the same type.
	271	+	//
	272	+	// If the action is not stateful then this function will return %NULL.
	273	+	// In that case, g_action_group_get_action_state() will return %NULL
	274	+	// and you must not call g_action_group_change_action_state().
	275	+	//
	276	+	// The state type of a particular action will never change but it is
	277	+	// possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
	278	+	// with the same name but a different state type.
	279	+	func (x Application) GetActionStateType(ActionNameVar string) glib.VariantType {
	280	+
	281	+	return gio.XGActionGroupGetActionStateType(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	282	+
	283	+	}
	284	+
	285	+	// Checks if the named action exists within @action_group.
	286	+	func (x *Application) HasAction(ActionNameVar string) bool {
	287	+
	288	+	return gio.XGActionGroupHasAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	289	+
	290	+	}
	291	+
	292	+	// Lists the actions contained within @action_group.
	293	+	//
	294	+	// The caller is responsible for freeing the list with g_strfreev() when
	295	+	// it is no longer required.
	296	+	func (x *Application) ListActions() uintptr {
	297	+
	298	+	return gio.XGActionGroupListActions(x.GoPointer())
	299	+
	300	+	}
	301	+
	302	+	// Queries all aspects of the named action within an @action_group.
	303	+	//
	304	+	// This function acquires the information available from
	305	+	// g_action_group_has_action(), g_action_group_get_action_enabled(),
	306	+	// g_action_group_get_action_parameter_type(),
	307	+	// g_action_group_get_action_state_type(),
	308	+	// g_action_group_get_action_state_hint() and
	309	+	// g_action_group_get_action_state() with a single function call.
	310	+	//
	311	+	// This provides two main benefits.
	312	+	//
	313	+	// The first is the improvement in efficiency that comes with not having
	314	+	// to perform repeated lookups of the action in order to discover
	315	+	// different things about it. The second is that implementing
	316	+	// #GActionGroup can now be done by only overriding this one virtual
	317	+	// function.
	318	+	//
	319	+	// The interface provides a default implementation of this function that
	320	+	// calls the individual functions, as required, to fetch the
	321	+	// information. The interface also provides default implementations of
	322	+	// those functions that call this function. All implementations,
	323	+	// therefore, must override either this function or all of the others.
	324	+	//
	325	+	// If the action exists, %TRUE is returned and any of the requested
	326	+	// fields (as indicated by having a non-%NULL reference passed in) are
	327	+	// filled. If the action doesn't exist, %FALSE is returned and the
	328	+	// fields may or may not have been modified.
	329	+	func (x Application) QueryAction(ActionNameVar string, EnabledVar bool, ParameterTypeVar glib.VariantType, StateTypeVar glib.VariantType, StateHintVar glib.Variant, StateVar *glib.Variant) bool {
	330	+
	331	+	return gio.XGActionGroupQueryAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar, EnabledVar, ParameterTypeVar, StateTypeVar, StateHintVar, StateVar)
	332	+
	333	+	}
	334	+
	335	+	// Adds an action to the @action_map.
	336	+	//
	337	+	// If the action map already contains an action with the same name
	338	+	// as @action then the old action is dropped from the action map.
	339	+	//
	340	+	// The action map takes its own reference on @action.
	341	+	func (x *Application) AddAction(ActionVar gio.Action) {
	342	+
	343	+	gio.XGActionMapAddAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionVar.GoPointer())
	344	+
	345	+	}
	346	+
	347	+	// A convenience function for creating multiple #GSimpleAction instances
	348	+	// and adding them to a #GActionMap.
	349	+	//
	350	+	// Each action is constructed as per one #GActionEntry.
	351	+	//
	352	+	// \|[<!-- language="C" -->
	353	+	// static void
	354	+	// activate_quit (GSimpleAction *simple,
	355	+	//
	356	+	// GVariant *parameter,
	357	+	// gpointer user_data)
	358	+	//
	359	+	// {
	360	+	// exit (0);
	361	+	// }
	362	+	//
	363	+	// static void
	364	+	// activate_print_string (GSimpleAction *simple,
	365	+	//
	366	+	// GVariant *parameter,
	367	+	// gpointer user_data)
	368	+	//
	369	+	// {
	370	+	// g_print ("%s\n", g_variant_get_string (parameter, NULL));
	371	+	// }
	372	+	//
	373	+	// static GActionGroup *
	374	+	// create_action_group (void)
	375	+	//
	376	+	// {
	377	+	// const GActionEntry entries[] = {
	378	+	// { "quit", activate_quit },
	379	+	// { "print-string", activate_print_string, "s" }
	380	+	// };
	381	+	// GSimpleActionGroup *group;
	382	+	//
	383	+	// group = g_simple_action_group_new ();
	384	+	// g_action_map_add_action_entries (G_ACTION_MAP (group), entries, G_N_ELEMENTS (entries), NULL);
	385	+	//
	386	+	// return G_ACTION_GROUP (group);
	387	+	// }
	388	+	//
	389	+	// ]\|
	390	+	func (x *Application) AddActionEntries(EntriesVar uintptr, NEntriesVar int32, UserDataVar uintptr) {
	391	+
	392	+	gio.XGActionMapAddActionEntries(x.GoPointer(), EntriesVar, NEntriesVar, UserDataVar)
	393	+
	394	+	}
	395	+
	396	+	// Looks up the action with the name @action_name in @action_map.
	397	+	//
	398	+	// If no such action exists, returns %NULL.
	399	+	func (x Application) LookupAction(ActionNameVar string) gio.ActionBase {
	400	+
	401	+	LookupActionPtr := gio.XGActionMapLookupAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	402	+	if LookupActionPtr == 0 {
	403	+	return nil
	404	+	}
	405	+
	406	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(LookupActionPtr)
	407	+
	408	+	LookupActionCls := &gio.ActionBase{}
	409	+	LookupActionCls.Ptr = LookupActionPtr
	410	+	return LookupActionCls
	411	+
	412	+	}
	413	+
	414	+	// Removes the named action from the action map.
	415	+	//
	416	+	// If no action of this name is in the map then nothing happens.
	417	+	func (x *Application) RemoveAction(ActionNameVar string) {
	418	+
	419	+	gio.XGActionMapRemoveAction(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	420	+
	421	+	}
	422	+
	423	+	func init() {
	424	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	425	+	if err != nil {
	426	+	panic(err)
	427	+	}
	428	+
	429	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewApplication, lib, "adw_application_new")
	430	+
	431	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xApplicationGetStyleManager, lib, "adw_application_get_style_manager")
	432	+
	433	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-avatar.go +364 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,364 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type AvatarClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	// A widget displaying an image, with a generated fallback.
	17	+	//
	18	+	// <picture>
	19	+	//
	20	+	// <source srcset="avatar-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	21	+	// <img src="avatar.png" alt="avatar">
	22	+	//
	23	+	// </picture>
	24	+	//
	25	+	// `AdwAvatar` is a widget that shows a round avatar.
	26	+	//
	27	+	// `AdwAvatar` generates an avatar with the initials of the
	28	+	// [property@Avatar:text] on top of a colored background.
	29	+	//
	30	+	// The color is picked based on the hash of the [property@Avatar:text].
	31	+	//
	32	+	// If [property@Avatar:show-initials] is set to `FALSE`,
	33	+	// [property@Avatar:icon-name] or `avatar-default-symbolic` is shown instead of
	34	+	// the initials.
	35	+	//
	36	+	// Use [property@Avatar:custom-image] to set a custom image.
	37	+	//
	38	+	// ## CSS nodes
	39	+	//
	40	+	// `AdwAvatar` has a single CSS node with name `avatar`.
	41	+	type Avatar struct {
	42	+	gtk.Widget
	43	+	}
	44	+
	45	+	func AvatarNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Avatar {
	46	+	cls := &Avatar{}
	47	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	48	+	return cls
	49	+	}
	50	+
	51	+	var xNewAvatar func(int32, string, bool) uintptr
	52	+
	53	+	// Creates a new `AdwAvatar`.
	54	+	func NewAvatar(SizeVar int32, TextVar string, ShowInitialsVar bool) *gtk.Widget {
	55	+	NewAvatarPtr := xNewAvatar(SizeVar, TextVar, ShowInitialsVar)
	56	+	if NewAvatarPtr == 0 {
	57	+	return nil
	58	+	}
	59	+
	60	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewAvatarPtr)
	61	+
	62	+	NewAvatarCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	63	+	NewAvatarCls.Ptr = NewAvatarPtr
	64	+	return NewAvatarCls
	65	+	}
	66	+
	67	+	var xAvatarDrawToTexture func(uintptr, int32) uintptr
	68	+
	69	+	// Renders @self into a [class@Gdk.Texture] at @scale_factor.
	70	+	//
	71	+	// This can be used to export the fallback avatar.
	72	+	func (x Avatar) DrawToTexture(ScaleFactorVar int32) gdk.Texture {
	73	+
	74	+	DrawToTexturePtr := xAvatarDrawToTexture(x.GoPointer(), ScaleFactorVar)
	75	+	if DrawToTexturePtr == 0 {
	76	+	return nil
	77	+	}
	78	+
	79	+	DrawToTextureCls := &gdk.Texture{}
	80	+	DrawToTextureCls.Ptr = DrawToTexturePtr
	81	+	return DrawToTextureCls
	82	+
	83	+	}
	84	+
	85	+	var xAvatarGetCustomImage func(uintptr) uintptr
	86	+
	87	+	// Gets the custom image paintable.
	88	+	func (x Avatar) GetCustomImage() gdk.PaintableBase {
	89	+
	90	+	GetCustomImagePtr := xAvatarGetCustomImage(x.GoPointer())
	91	+	if GetCustomImagePtr == 0 {
	92	+	return nil
	93	+	}
	94	+
	95	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetCustomImagePtr)
	96	+
	97	+	GetCustomImageCls := &gdk.PaintableBase{}
	98	+	GetCustomImageCls.Ptr = GetCustomImagePtr
	99	+	return GetCustomImageCls
	100	+
	101	+	}
	102	+
	103	+	var xAvatarGetIconName func(uintptr) string
	104	+
	105	+	// Gets the name of an icon to use as a fallback.
	106	+	func (x *Avatar) GetIconName() string {
	107	+
	108	+	return xAvatarGetIconName(x.GoPointer())
	109	+
	110	+	}
	111	+
	112	+	var xAvatarGetShowInitials func(uintptr) bool
	113	+
	114	+	// Gets whether initials are used instead of an icon on the fallback avatar.
	115	+	func (x *Avatar) GetShowInitials() bool {
	116	+
	117	+	return xAvatarGetShowInitials(x.GoPointer())
	118	+
	119	+	}
	120	+
	121	+	var xAvatarGetSize func(uintptr) int32
	122	+
	123	+	// Gets the size of the avatar.
	124	+	func (x *Avatar) GetSize() int32 {
	125	+
	126	+	return xAvatarGetSize(x.GoPointer())
	127	+
	128	+	}
	129	+
	130	+	var xAvatarGetText func(uintptr) string
	131	+
	132	+	// Gets the text used to generate the fallback initials and color.
	133	+	func (x *Avatar) GetText() string {
	134	+
	135	+	return xAvatarGetText(x.GoPointer())
	136	+
	137	+	}
	138	+
	139	+	var xAvatarSetCustomImage func(uintptr, uintptr)
	140	+
	141	+	// Sets the custom image paintable.
	142	+	//
	143	+	// Custom image is displayed instead of initials or icon.
	144	+	func (x *Avatar) SetCustomImage(CustomImageVar gdk.Paintable) {
	145	+
	146	+	xAvatarSetCustomImage(x.GoPointer(), CustomImageVar.GoPointer())
	147	+
	148	+	}
	149	+
	150	+	var xAvatarSetIconName func(uintptr, string)
	151	+
	152	+	// Sets the name of an icon to use as a fallback.
	153	+	//
	154	+	// If no name is set, `avatar-default-symbolic` will be used.
	155	+	func (x *Avatar) SetIconName(IconNameVar string) {
	156	+
	157	+	xAvatarSetIconName(x.GoPointer(), IconNameVar)
	158	+
	159	+	}
	160	+
	161	+	var xAvatarSetShowInitials func(uintptr, bool)
	162	+
	163	+	// Sets whether to use initials instead of an icon on the fallback avatar.
	164	+	//
	165	+	// See [property@Avatar:icon-name] for how to change the fallback icon.
	166	+	func (x *Avatar) SetShowInitials(ShowInitialsVar bool) {
	167	+
	168	+	xAvatarSetShowInitials(x.GoPointer(), ShowInitialsVar)
	169	+
	170	+	}
	171	+
	172	+	var xAvatarSetSize func(uintptr, int32)
	173	+
	174	+	// Sets the size of the avatar.
	175	+	func (x *Avatar) SetSize(SizeVar int32) {
	176	+
	177	+	xAvatarSetSize(x.GoPointer(), SizeVar)
	178	+
	179	+	}
	180	+
	181	+	var xAvatarSetText func(uintptr, string)
	182	+
	183	+	// Sets the text used to generate the fallback initials and color.
	184	+	//
	185	+	// It's only used to generate the color if [property@Avatar:show-initials] is
	186	+	// `FALSE`.
	187	+	func (x *Avatar) SetText(TextVar string) {
	188	+
	189	+	xAvatarSetText(x.GoPointer(), TextVar)
	190	+
	191	+	}
	192	+
	193	+	func (c *Avatar) GoPointer() uintptr {
	194	+	return c.Ptr
	195	+	}
	196	+
	197	+	func (c *Avatar) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	198	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	199	+	}
	200	+
	201	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	202	+	func (x *Avatar) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	203	+
	204	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	205	+
	206	+	}
	207	+
	208	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	209	+	func (x *Avatar) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	210	+
	211	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	212	+
	213	+	}
	214	+
	215	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	216	+	func (x *Avatar) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	217	+
	218	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	219	+
	220	+	}
	221	+
	222	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	223	+	func (x *Avatar) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	224	+
	225	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	226	+
	227	+	}
	228	+
	229	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	230	+	//
	231	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	232	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	233	+	//
	234	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	235	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	236	+	// technologies.
	237	+	//
	238	+	// Example:
	239	+	// ```c
	240	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	241	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	242	+	//
	243	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	244	+	// -1);
	245	+	//
	246	+	// ```
	247	+	func (x *Avatar) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	248	+
	249	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	250	+
	251	+	}
	252	+
	253	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	254	+	//
	255	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	256	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	257	+	//
	258	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	259	+	func (x *Avatar) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	260	+
	261	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	262	+
	263	+	}
	264	+
	265	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	266	+	//
	267	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	268	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	269	+	//
	270	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	271	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	272	+	//
	273	+	// ```c
	274	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	275	+	//
	276	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	277	+	// ref1, NULL,
	278	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	279	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	280	+	// -1);
	281	+	//
	282	+	// ```
	283	+	func (x *Avatar) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	284	+
	285	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	286	+
	287	+	}
	288	+
	289	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	290	+	//
	291	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	292	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	293	+	//
	294	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	295	+	func (x *Avatar) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	296	+
	297	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	298	+
	299	+	}
	300	+
	301	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	302	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	303	+	//
	304	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	305	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	306	+	//
	307	+	// Example:
	308	+	// ```c
	309	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	310	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	311	+	//
	312	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	313	+	// -1);
	314	+	//
	315	+	// ```
	316	+	func (x *Avatar) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	317	+
	318	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	319	+
	320	+	}
	321	+
	322	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	323	+	//
	324	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	325	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	326	+	//
	327	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	328	+	func (x *Avatar) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	329	+
	330	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	331	+
	332	+	}
	333	+
	334	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	335	+	//
	336	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	337	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	338	+	func (x *Avatar) GetBuildableId() string {
	339	+
	340	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	341	+
	342	+	}
	343	+
	344	+	func init() {
	345	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	346	+	if err != nil {
	347	+	panic(err)
	348	+	}
	349	+
	350	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewAvatar, lib, "adw_avatar_new")
	351	+
	352	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarDrawToTexture, lib, "adw_avatar_draw_to_texture")
	353	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarGetCustomImage, lib, "adw_avatar_get_custom_image")
	354	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarGetIconName, lib, "adw_avatar_get_icon_name")
	355	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarGetShowInitials, lib, "adw_avatar_get_show_initials")
	356	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarGetSize, lib, "adw_avatar_get_size")
	357	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarGetText, lib, "adw_avatar_get_text")
	358	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarSetCustomImage, lib, "adw_avatar_set_custom_image")
	359	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarSetIconName, lib, "adw_avatar_set_icon_name")
	360	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarSetShowInitials, lib, "adw_avatar_set_show_initials")
	361	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarSetSize, lib, "adw_avatar_set_size")
	362	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xAvatarSetText, lib, "adw_avatar_set_text")
	363	+
	364	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-banner.go +412 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,412 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type BannerClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	// A bar with contextual information.
	17	+	//
	18	+	// <picture>
	19	+	//
	20	+	// <source srcset="banner-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	21	+	// <img src="banner.png" alt="banner">
	22	+	//
	23	+	// </picture>
	24	+	//
	25	+	// Banners are hidden by default, use [property@Banner:revealed] to show them.
	26	+	//
	27	+	// Banners have a title, set with [property@Banner:title]. Titles can be marked
	28	+	// up with Pango markup, use [property@Banner:use-markup] to enable it.
	29	+	//
	30	+	// The title will be shown centered or left-aligned depending on available
	31	+	// space.
	32	+	//
	33	+	// Banners can optionally have a button with text on it, set through
	34	+	// [property@Banner:button-label]. The button can be used with a `GAction`,
	35	+	// or with the [signal@Banner::button-clicked] signal.
	36	+	//
	37	+	// ## CSS nodes
	38	+	//
	39	+	// `AdwBanner` has a main CSS node with the name `banner`.
	40	+	type Banner struct {
	41	+	gtk.Widget
	42	+	}
	43	+
	44	+	func BannerNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Banner {
	45	+	cls := &Banner{}
	46	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	47	+	return cls
	48	+	}
	49	+
	50	+	var xNewBanner func(string) uintptr
	51	+
	52	+	// Creates a new `AdwBanner`.
	53	+	func NewBanner(TitleVar string) *gtk.Widget {
	54	+	NewBannerPtr := xNewBanner(TitleVar)
	55	+	if NewBannerPtr == 0 {
	56	+	return nil
	57	+	}
	58	+
	59	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewBannerPtr)
	60	+
	61	+	NewBannerCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	62	+	NewBannerCls.Ptr = NewBannerPtr
	63	+	return NewBannerCls
	64	+	}
	65	+
	66	+	var xBannerGetButtonLabel func(uintptr) string
	67	+
	68	+	// Gets the button label for @self.
	69	+	func (x *Banner) GetButtonLabel() string {
	70	+
	71	+	return xBannerGetButtonLabel(x.GoPointer())
	72	+
	73	+	}
	74	+
	75	+	var xBannerGetRevealed func(uintptr) bool
	76	+
	77	+	// Gets if a banner is revealed
	78	+	func (x *Banner) GetRevealed() bool {
	79	+
	80	+	return xBannerGetRevealed(x.GoPointer())
	81	+
	82	+	}
	83	+
	84	+	var xBannerGetTitle func(uintptr) string
	85	+
	86	+	// Gets the title for @self.
	87	+	func (x *Banner) GetTitle() string {
	88	+
	89	+	return xBannerGetTitle(x.GoPointer())
	90	+
	91	+	}
	92	+
	93	+	var xBannerGetUseMarkup func(uintptr) bool
	94	+
	95	+	// Gets whether to use Pango markup for the banner title.
	96	+	func (x *Banner) GetUseMarkup() bool {
	97	+
	98	+	return xBannerGetUseMarkup(x.GoPointer())
	99	+
	100	+	}
	101	+
	102	+	var xBannerSetButtonLabel func(uintptr, string)
	103	+
	104	+	// Sets the button label for @self.
	105	+	//
	106	+	// If set to `""` or `NULL`, the button won't be shown.
	107	+	//
	108	+	// The button can be used with a `GAction`, or with the
	109	+	// [signal@Banner::button-clicked] signal.
	110	+	func (x *Banner) SetButtonLabel(LabelVar string) {
	111	+
	112	+	xBannerSetButtonLabel(x.GoPointer(), LabelVar)
	113	+
	114	+	}
	115	+
	116	+	var xBannerSetRevealed func(uintptr, bool)
	117	+
	118	+	// Sets whether a banner should be revealed
	119	+	func (x *Banner) SetRevealed(RevealedVar bool) {
	120	+
	121	+	xBannerSetRevealed(x.GoPointer(), RevealedVar)
	122	+
	123	+	}
	124	+
	125	+	var xBannerSetTitle func(uintptr, string)
	126	+
	127	+	// Sets the title for this banner.
	128	+	//
	129	+	// See also: [property@Banner:use-markup].
	130	+	func (x *Banner) SetTitle(TitleVar string) {
	131	+
	132	+	xBannerSetTitle(x.GoPointer(), TitleVar)
	133	+
	134	+	}
	135	+
	136	+	var xBannerSetUseMarkup func(uintptr, bool)
	137	+
	138	+	// Sets whether to use Pango markup for the banner title.
	139	+	//
	140	+	// See also [func@Pango.parse_markup].
	141	+	func (x *Banner) SetUseMarkup(UseMarkupVar bool) {
	142	+
	143	+	xBannerSetUseMarkup(x.GoPointer(), UseMarkupVar)
	144	+
	145	+	}
	146	+
	147	+	func (c *Banner) GoPointer() uintptr {
	148	+	return c.Ptr
	149	+	}
	150	+
	151	+	func (c *Banner) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	152	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	153	+	}
	154	+
	155	+	// This signal is emitted after the action button has been clicked.
	156	+	//
	157	+	// It can be used as an alternative to setting an action.
	158	+	func (x *Banner) ConnectButtonClicked(cb func(Banner)) {
	159	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr) {
	160	+	fa := Banner{}
	161	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	162	+
	163	+	cb(fa)
	164	+
	165	+	}
	166	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::button-clicked", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	167	+	}
	168	+
	169	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	170	+	func (x *Banner) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	171	+
	172	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	173	+
	174	+	}
	175	+
	176	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	177	+	func (x *Banner) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	178	+
	179	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	180	+
	181	+	}
	182	+
	183	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	184	+	func (x *Banner) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	185	+
	186	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	187	+
	188	+	}
	189	+
	190	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	191	+	func (x *Banner) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	192	+
	193	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	194	+
	195	+	}
	196	+
	197	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	198	+	//
	199	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	200	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	201	+	//
	202	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	203	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	204	+	// technologies.
	205	+	//
	206	+	// Example:
	207	+	// ```c
	208	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	209	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	210	+	//
	211	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	212	+	// -1);
	213	+	//
	214	+	// ```
	215	+	func (x *Banner) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	216	+
	217	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	218	+
	219	+	}
	220	+
	221	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	222	+	//
	223	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	224	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	225	+	//
	226	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	227	+	func (x *Banner) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	228	+
	229	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	230	+
	231	+	}
	232	+
	233	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	234	+	//
	235	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	236	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	237	+	//
	238	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	239	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	240	+	//
	241	+	// ```c
	242	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	243	+	//
	244	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	245	+	// ref1, NULL,
	246	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	247	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	248	+	// -1);
	249	+	//
	250	+	// ```
	251	+	func (x *Banner) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	252	+
	253	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	254	+
	255	+	}
	256	+
	257	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	258	+	//
	259	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	260	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	261	+	//
	262	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	263	+	func (x *Banner) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	264	+
	265	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	266	+
	267	+	}
	268	+
	269	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	270	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	271	+	//
	272	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	273	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	274	+	//
	275	+	// Example:
	276	+	// ```c
	277	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	278	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	279	+	//
	280	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	281	+	// -1);
	282	+	//
	283	+	// ```
	284	+	func (x *Banner) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	285	+
	286	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	287	+
	288	+	}
	289	+
	290	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	291	+	//
	292	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	293	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	294	+	//
	295	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	296	+	func (x *Banner) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	297	+
	298	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	299	+
	300	+	}
	301	+
	302	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	303	+	func (x *Banner) GetActionName() string {
	304	+
	305	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	306	+
	307	+	}
	308	+
	309	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	310	+	func (x Banner) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	311	+
	312	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	313	+
	314	+	}
	315	+
	316	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	317	+	// associated.
	318	+	//
	319	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	320	+	// any previous action.
	321	+	//
	322	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	323	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	324	+	//
	325	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	326	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	327	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	328	+	// associated with the window.
	329	+	func (x *Banner) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	330	+
	331	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	332	+
	333	+	}
	334	+
	335	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	336	+	//
	337	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	338	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	339	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	340	+	//
	341	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	342	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	343	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	344	+	func (x *Banner) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	345	+
	346	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	347	+
	348	+	}
	349	+
	350	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	351	+	//
	352	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	353	+	//
	354	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	355	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	356	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	357	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	358	+	//
	359	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	360	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	361	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	362	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	363	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	364	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	365	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	366	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	367	+	// rendered inactive).
	368	+	func (x Banner) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	369	+
	370	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	371	+
	372	+	}
	373	+
	374	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	375	+	// actionable widget.
	376	+	//
	377	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	378	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	379	+	func (x *Banner) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	380	+
	381	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	382	+
	383	+	}
	384	+
	385	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	386	+	//
	387	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	388	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	389	+	func (x *Banner) GetBuildableId() string {
	390	+
	391	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	392	+
	393	+	}
	394	+
	395	+	func init() {
	396	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	397	+	if err != nil {
	398	+	panic(err)
	399	+	}
	400	+
	401	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewBanner, lib, "adw_banner_new")
	402	+
	403	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerGetButtonLabel, lib, "adw_banner_get_button_label")
	404	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerGetRevealed, lib, "adw_banner_get_revealed")
	405	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerGetTitle, lib, "adw_banner_get_title")
	406	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerGetUseMarkup, lib, "adw_banner_get_use_markup")
	407	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerSetButtonLabel, lib, "adw_banner_set_button_label")
	408	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerSetRevealed, lib, "adw_banner_set_revealed")
	409	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerSetTitle, lib, "adw_banner_set_title")
	410	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBannerSetUseMarkup, lib, "adw_banner_set_use_markup")
	411	+
	412	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-bin.go +244 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type BinClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	// A widget with one child.
	16	+	//
	17	+	// <picture>
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <source srcset="bin-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	20	+	// <img src="bin.png" alt="bin">
	21	+	//
	22	+	// </picture>
	23	+	//
	24	+	// The `AdwBin` widget has only one child, set with the [property@Bin:child]
	25	+	// property.
	26	+	//
	27	+	// It is useful for deriving subclasses, since it provides common code needed
	28	+	// for handling a single child widget.
	29	+	type Bin struct {
	30	+	gtk.Widget
	31	+	}
	32	+
	33	+	func BinNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Bin {
	34	+	cls := &Bin{}
	35	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	36	+	return cls
	37	+	}
	38	+
	39	+	var xNewBin func() uintptr
	40	+
	41	+	// Creates a new `AdwBin`.
	42	+	func NewBin() *gtk.Widget {
	43	+	NewBinPtr := xNewBin()
	44	+	if NewBinPtr == 0 {
	45	+	return nil
	46	+	}
	47	+
	48	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewBinPtr)
	49	+
	50	+	NewBinCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	51	+	NewBinCls.Ptr = NewBinPtr
	52	+	return NewBinCls
	53	+	}
	54	+
	55	+	var xBinGetChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	56	+
	57	+	// Gets the child widget of @self.
	58	+	func (x Bin) GetChild() gtk.Widget {
	59	+
	60	+	GetChildPtr := xBinGetChild(x.GoPointer())
	61	+	if GetChildPtr == 0 {
	62	+	return nil
	63	+	}
	64	+
	65	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetChildPtr)
	66	+
	67	+	GetChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	68	+	GetChildCls.Ptr = GetChildPtr
	69	+	return GetChildCls
	70	+
	71	+	}
	72	+
	73	+	var xBinSetChild func(uintptr, uintptr)
	74	+
	75	+	// Sets the child widget of @self.
	76	+	func (x Bin) SetChild(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	77	+
	78	+	xBinSetChild(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	79	+
	80	+	}
	81	+
	82	+	func (c *Bin) GoPointer() uintptr {
	83	+	return c.Ptr
	84	+	}
	85	+
	86	+	func (c *Bin) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	87	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	88	+	}
	89	+
	90	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	91	+	func (x *Bin) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	92	+
	93	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	94	+
	95	+	}
	96	+
	97	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	98	+	func (x *Bin) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	99	+
	100	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	101	+
	102	+	}
	103	+
	104	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	105	+	func (x *Bin) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	106	+
	107	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	108	+
	109	+	}
	110	+
	111	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	112	+	func (x *Bin) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	113	+
	114	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	115	+
	116	+	}
	117	+
	118	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	119	+	//
	120	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	121	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	122	+	//
	123	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	124	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	125	+	// technologies.
	126	+	//
	127	+	// Example:
	128	+	// ```c
	129	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	130	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	131	+	//
	132	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	133	+	// -1);
	134	+	//
	135	+	// ```
	136	+	func (x *Bin) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	137	+
	138	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	139	+
	140	+	}
	141	+
	142	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	143	+	//
	144	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	145	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	146	+	//
	147	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	148	+	func (x *Bin) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	149	+
	150	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	151	+
	152	+	}
	153	+
	154	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	155	+	//
	156	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	157	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	158	+	//
	159	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	160	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	161	+	//
	162	+	// ```c
	163	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	164	+	//
	165	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	166	+	// ref1, NULL,
	167	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	168	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	169	+	// -1);
	170	+	//
	171	+	// ```
	172	+	func (x *Bin) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	173	+
	174	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	175	+
	176	+	}
	177	+
	178	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	179	+	//
	180	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	181	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	182	+	//
	183	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	184	+	func (x *Bin) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	185	+
	186	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	187	+
	188	+	}
	189	+
	190	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	191	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	192	+	//
	193	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	194	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	195	+	//
	196	+	// Example:
	197	+	// ```c
	198	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	199	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	200	+	//
	201	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	202	+	// -1);
	203	+	//
	204	+	// ```
	205	+	func (x *Bin) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	206	+
	207	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	208	+
	209	+	}
	210	+
	211	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	212	+	//
	213	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	214	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	215	+	//
	216	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	217	+	func (x *Bin) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	218	+
	219	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	220	+
	221	+	}
	222	+
	223	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	224	+	//
	225	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	226	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	227	+	func (x *Bin) GetBuildableId() string {
	228	+
	229	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	230	+
	231	+	}
	232	+
	233	+	func init() {
	234	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	235	+	if err != nil {
	236	+	panic(err)
	237	+	}
	238	+
	239	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewBin, lib, "adw_bin_new")
	240	+
	241	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBinGetChild, lib, "adw_bin_get_child")
	242	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xBinSetChild, lib, "adw_bin_set_child")
	243	+
	244	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-button-content.go +317 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,317 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type ButtonContentClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	// A helper widget for creating buttons.
	16	+	//
	17	+	// <picture>
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <source srcset="button-content-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	20	+	// <img src="button-content.png" alt="button-content">
	21	+	//
	22	+	// </picture>
	23	+	//
	24	+	// `AdwButtonContent` is a box-like widget with an icon and a label.
	25	+	//
	26	+	// It's intended to be used as a direct child of [class@Gtk.Button],
	27	+	// [class@Gtk.MenuButton] or [class@SplitButton], when they need to have both an
	28	+	// icon and a label, as follows:
	29	+	//
	30	+	// ```xml
	31	+	// <object class="GtkButton">
	32	+	//
	33	+	// <property name="child">
	34	+	// <object class="AdwButtonContent">
	35	+	// <property name="icon-name">document-open-symbolic</property>
	36	+	// <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Open</property>
	37	+	// <property name="use-underline">True</property>
	38	+	// </object>
	39	+	// </property>
	40	+	//
	41	+	// </object>
	42	+	// ```
	43	+	//
	44	+	// `AdwButtonContent` handles style classes and connecting the mnemonic to the
	45	+	// button automatically.
	46	+	//
	47	+	// ## CSS nodes
	48	+	//
	49	+	// ```
	50	+	// buttoncontent
	51	+	// ├── image
	52	+	// ╰── label
	53	+	// ```
	54	+	//
	55	+	// `AdwButtonContent`'s CSS node is called `buttoncontent`. It contains the
	56	+	// subnodes `image` and `label`.
	57	+	//
	58	+	// When inside a `GtkButton` or `AdwSplitButton`, the button will receive the
	59	+	// `.image-text-button` style class. When inside a `GtkMenuButton`, the
	60	+	// internal `GtkButton` will receive it instead.
	61	+	//
	62	+	// ## Accessibility
	63	+	//
	64	+	// `AdwButtonContent` uses the `GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP` role.
	65	+	type ButtonContent struct {
	66	+	gtk.Widget
	67	+	}
	68	+
	69	+	func ButtonContentNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *ButtonContent {
	70	+	cls := &ButtonContent{}
	71	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	72	+	return cls
	73	+	}
	74	+
	75	+	var xNewButtonContent func() uintptr
	76	+
	77	+	// Creates a new `AdwButtonContent`.
	78	+	func NewButtonContent() *gtk.Widget {
	79	+	NewButtonContentPtr := xNewButtonContent()
	80	+	if NewButtonContentPtr == 0 {
	81	+	return nil
	82	+	}
	83	+
	84	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewButtonContentPtr)
	85	+
	86	+	NewButtonContentCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	87	+	NewButtonContentCls.Ptr = NewButtonContentPtr
	88	+	return NewButtonContentCls
	89	+	}
	90	+
	91	+	var xButtonContentGetIconName func(uintptr) string
	92	+
	93	+	// Gets the name of the displayed icon.
	94	+	func (x *ButtonContent) GetIconName() string {
	95	+
	96	+	return xButtonContentGetIconName(x.GoPointer())
	97	+
	98	+	}
	99	+
	100	+	var xButtonContentGetLabel func(uintptr) string
	101	+
	102	+	// Gets the displayed label.
	103	+	func (x *ButtonContent) GetLabel() string {
	104	+
	105	+	return xButtonContentGetLabel(x.GoPointer())
	106	+
	107	+	}
	108	+
	109	+	var xButtonContentGetUseUnderline func(uintptr) bool
	110	+
	111	+	// Gets whether an underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.
	112	+	func (x *ButtonContent) GetUseUnderline() bool {
	113	+
	114	+	return xButtonContentGetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer())
	115	+
	116	+	}
	117	+
	118	+	var xButtonContentSetIconName func(uintptr, string)
	119	+
	120	+	// Sets the name of the displayed icon.
	121	+	//
	122	+	// If empty, the icon is not shown.
	123	+	func (x *ButtonContent) SetIconName(IconNameVar string) {
	124	+
	125	+	xButtonContentSetIconName(x.GoPointer(), IconNameVar)
	126	+
	127	+	}
	128	+
	129	+	var xButtonContentSetLabel func(uintptr, string)
	130	+
	131	+	// Sets the displayed label.
	132	+	func (x *ButtonContent) SetLabel(LabelVar string) {
	133	+
	134	+	xButtonContentSetLabel(x.GoPointer(), LabelVar)
	135	+
	136	+	}
	137	+
	138	+	var xButtonContentSetUseUnderline func(uintptr, bool)
	139	+
	140	+	// Sets whether an underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.
	141	+	//
	142	+	// The mnemonic can be used to activate the parent button.
	143	+	//
	144	+	// See [property@ButtonContent:label].
	145	+	func (x *ButtonContent) SetUseUnderline(UseUnderlineVar bool) {
	146	+
	147	+	xButtonContentSetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer(), UseUnderlineVar)
	148	+
	149	+	}
	150	+
	151	+	func (c *ButtonContent) GoPointer() uintptr {
	152	+	return c.Ptr
	153	+	}
	154	+
	155	+	func (c *ButtonContent) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	156	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	157	+	}
	158	+
	159	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	160	+	func (x *ButtonContent) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	161	+
	162	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	163	+
	164	+	}
	165	+
	166	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	167	+	func (x *ButtonContent) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	168	+
	169	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	170	+
	171	+	}
	172	+
	173	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	174	+	func (x *ButtonContent) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	175	+
	176	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	177	+
	178	+	}
	179	+
	180	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	181	+	func (x *ButtonContent) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	182	+
	183	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	184	+
	185	+	}
	186	+
	187	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	188	+	//
	189	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	190	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	191	+	//
	192	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	193	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	194	+	// technologies.
	195	+	//
	196	+	// Example:
	197	+	// ```c
	198	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	199	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	200	+	//
	201	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	202	+	// -1);
	203	+	//
	204	+	// ```
	205	+	func (x *ButtonContent) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	206	+
	207	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	208	+
	209	+	}
	210	+
	211	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	212	+	//
	213	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	214	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	215	+	//
	216	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	217	+	func (x *ButtonContent) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	218	+
	219	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	220	+
	221	+	}
	222	+
	223	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	224	+	//
	225	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	226	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	227	+	//
	228	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	229	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	230	+	//
	231	+	// ```c
	232	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	233	+	//
	234	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	235	+	// ref1, NULL,
	236	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	237	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	238	+	// -1);
	239	+	//
	240	+	// ```
	241	+	func (x *ButtonContent) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	242	+
	243	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	244	+
	245	+	}
	246	+
	247	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	248	+	//
	249	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	250	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	251	+	//
	252	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	253	+	func (x *ButtonContent) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	254	+
	255	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	256	+
	257	+	}
	258	+
	259	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	260	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	261	+	//
	262	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	263	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	264	+	//
	265	+	// Example:
	266	+	// ```c
	267	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	268	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	269	+	//
	270	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	271	+	// -1);
	272	+	//
	273	+	// ```
	274	+	func (x *ButtonContent) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	275	+
	276	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	277	+
	278	+	}
	279	+
	280	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	281	+	//
	282	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	283	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	284	+	//
	285	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	286	+	func (x *ButtonContent) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	287	+
	288	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	289	+
	290	+	}
	291	+
	292	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	293	+	//
	294	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	295	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	296	+	func (x *ButtonContent) GetBuildableId() string {
	297	+
	298	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	299	+
	300	+	}
	301	+
	302	+	func init() {
	303	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	304	+	if err != nil {
	305	+	panic(err)
	306	+	}
	307	+
	308	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewButtonContent, lib, "adw_button_content_new")
	309	+
	310	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xButtonContentGetIconName, lib, "adw_button_content_get_icon_name")
	311	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xButtonContentGetLabel, lib, "adw_button_content_get_label")
	312	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xButtonContentGetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_button_content_get_use_underline")
	313	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xButtonContentSetIconName, lib, "adw_button_content_set_icon_name")
	314	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xButtonContentSetLabel, lib, "adw_button_content_set_label")
	315	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xButtonContentSetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_button_content_set_use_underline")
	316	+
	317	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-carousel-indicator-dots.go +264 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type CarouselIndicatorDotsClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	// A dots indicator for [class@Carousel].
	16	+	//
	17	+	// <picture>
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <source srcset="carousel-indicator-dots-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	20	+	// <img src="carousel-indicator-dots.png" alt="carousel-indicator-dots">
	21	+	//
	22	+	// </picture>
	23	+	//
	24	+	// The `AdwCarouselIndicatorDots` widget shows a set of dots for each page of a
	25	+	// given [class@Carousel]. The dot representing the carousel's active page is
	26	+	// larger and more opaque than the others, the transition to the active and
	27	+	// inactive state is gradual to match the carousel's position.
	28	+	//
	29	+	// See also [class@CarouselIndicatorLines].
	30	+	//
	31	+	// ## CSS nodes
	32	+	//
	33	+	// `AdwCarouselIndicatorDots` has a single CSS node with name
	34	+	// `carouselindicatordots`.
	35	+	type CarouselIndicatorDots struct {
	36	+	gtk.Widget
	37	+	}
	38	+
	39	+	func CarouselIndicatorDotsNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *CarouselIndicatorDots {
	40	+	cls := &CarouselIndicatorDots{}
	41	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	42	+	return cls
	43	+	}
	44	+
	45	+	var xNewCarouselIndicatorDots func() uintptr
	46	+
	47	+	// Creates a new `AdwCarouselIndicatorDots`.
	48	+	func NewCarouselIndicatorDots() *gtk.Widget {
	49	+	NewCarouselIndicatorDotsPtr := xNewCarouselIndicatorDots()
	50	+	if NewCarouselIndicatorDotsPtr == 0 {
	51	+	return nil
	52	+	}
	53	+
	54	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewCarouselIndicatorDotsPtr)
	55	+
	56	+	NewCarouselIndicatorDotsCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	57	+	NewCarouselIndicatorDotsCls.Ptr = NewCarouselIndicatorDotsPtr
	58	+	return NewCarouselIndicatorDotsCls
	59	+	}
	60	+
	61	+	var xCarouselIndicatorDotsGetCarousel func(uintptr) uintptr
	62	+
	63	+	// Gets the displayed carousel.
	64	+	func (x CarouselIndicatorDots) GetCarousel() Carousel {
	65	+
	66	+	GetCarouselPtr := xCarouselIndicatorDotsGetCarousel(x.GoPointer())
	67	+	if GetCarouselPtr == 0 {
	68	+	return nil
	69	+	}
	70	+
	71	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetCarouselPtr)
	72	+
	73	+	GetCarouselCls := &Carousel{}
	74	+	GetCarouselCls.Ptr = GetCarouselPtr
	75	+	return GetCarouselCls
	76	+
	77	+	}
	78	+
	79	+	var xCarouselIndicatorDotsSetCarousel func(uintptr, uintptr)
	80	+
	81	+	// Sets the displayed carousel.
	82	+	func (x CarouselIndicatorDots) SetCarousel(CarouselVar Carousel) {
	83	+
	84	+	xCarouselIndicatorDotsSetCarousel(x.GoPointer(), CarouselVar.GoPointer())
	85	+
	86	+	}
	87	+
	88	+	func (c *CarouselIndicatorDots) GoPointer() uintptr {
	89	+	return c.Ptr
	90	+	}
	91	+
	92	+	func (c *CarouselIndicatorDots) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	93	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	94	+	}
	95	+
	96	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	97	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	98	+
	99	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	100	+
	101	+	}
	102	+
	103	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	104	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	105	+
	106	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	107	+
	108	+	}
	109	+
	110	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	111	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	112	+
	113	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	114	+
	115	+	}
	116	+
	117	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	118	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	119	+
	120	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	121	+
	122	+	}
	123	+
	124	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	125	+	//
	126	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	127	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	128	+	//
	129	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	130	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	131	+	// technologies.
	132	+	//
	133	+	// Example:
	134	+	// ```c
	135	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	136	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	137	+	//
	138	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	139	+	// -1);
	140	+	//
	141	+	// ```
	142	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	143	+
	144	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	145	+
	146	+	}
	147	+
	148	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	149	+	//
	150	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	151	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	152	+	//
	153	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	154	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	155	+
	156	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	157	+
	158	+	}
	159	+
	160	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	161	+	//
	162	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	163	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	164	+	//
	165	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	166	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	167	+	//
	168	+	// ```c
	169	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	170	+	//
	171	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	172	+	// ref1, NULL,
	173	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	174	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	175	+	// -1);
	176	+	//
	177	+	// ```
	178	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	179	+
	180	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	181	+
	182	+	}
	183	+
	184	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	185	+	//
	186	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	187	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	188	+	//
	189	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	190	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	191	+
	192	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	193	+
	194	+	}
	195	+
	196	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	197	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	198	+	//
	199	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	200	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	201	+	//
	202	+	// Example:
	203	+	// ```c
	204	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	205	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	206	+	//
	207	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	208	+	// -1);
	209	+	//
	210	+	// ```
	211	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	212	+
	213	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	214	+
	215	+	}
	216	+
	217	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	218	+	//
	219	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	220	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	221	+	//
	222	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	223	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	224	+
	225	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	226	+
	227	+	}
	228	+
	229	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	230	+	//
	231	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	232	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	233	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) GetBuildableId() string {
	234	+
	235	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	236	+
	237	+	}
	238	+
	239	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	240	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	241	+
	242	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	243	+
	244	+	}
	245	+
	246	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	247	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorDots) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	248	+
	249	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	250	+
	251	+	}
	252	+
	253	+	func init() {
	254	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	255	+	if err != nil {
	256	+	panic(err)
	257	+	}
	258	+
	259	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewCarouselIndicatorDots, lib, "adw_carousel_indicator_dots_new")
	260	+
	261	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselIndicatorDotsGetCarousel, lib, "adw_carousel_indicator_dots_get_carousel")
	262	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselIndicatorDotsSetCarousel, lib, "adw_carousel_indicator_dots_set_carousel")
	263	+
	264	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-carousel-indicator-lines.go +263 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type CarouselIndicatorLinesClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	// A lines indicator for [class@Carousel].
	16	+	//
	17	+	// <picture>
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <source srcset="carousel-indicator-dots-lines.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	20	+	// <img src="carousel-indicator-lines.png" alt="carousel-indicator-lines">
	21	+	//
	22	+	// </picture>
	23	+	//
	24	+	// The `AdwCarouselIndicatorLines` widget shows a set of lines for each page of
	25	+	// a given [class@Carousel]. The carousel's active page is shown as another line
	26	+	// that moves between them to match the carousel's position.
	27	+	//
	28	+	// See also [class@CarouselIndicatorDots].
	29	+	//
	30	+	// ## CSS nodes
	31	+	//
	32	+	// `AdwCarouselIndicatorLines` has a single CSS node with name
	33	+	// `carouselindicatorlines`.
	34	+	type CarouselIndicatorLines struct {
	35	+	gtk.Widget
	36	+	}
	37	+
	38	+	func CarouselIndicatorLinesNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *CarouselIndicatorLines {
	39	+	cls := &CarouselIndicatorLines{}
	40	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	41	+	return cls
	42	+	}
	43	+
	44	+	var xNewCarouselIndicatorLines func() uintptr
	45	+
	46	+	// Creates a new `AdwCarouselIndicatorLines`.
	47	+	func NewCarouselIndicatorLines() *gtk.Widget {
	48	+	NewCarouselIndicatorLinesPtr := xNewCarouselIndicatorLines()
	49	+	if NewCarouselIndicatorLinesPtr == 0 {
	50	+	return nil
	51	+	}
	52	+
	53	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewCarouselIndicatorLinesPtr)
	54	+
	55	+	NewCarouselIndicatorLinesCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	56	+	NewCarouselIndicatorLinesCls.Ptr = NewCarouselIndicatorLinesPtr
	57	+	return NewCarouselIndicatorLinesCls
	58	+	}
	59	+
	60	+	var xCarouselIndicatorLinesGetCarousel func(uintptr) uintptr
	61	+
	62	+	// Gets the displayed carousel.
	63	+	func (x CarouselIndicatorLines) GetCarousel() Carousel {
	64	+
	65	+	GetCarouselPtr := xCarouselIndicatorLinesGetCarousel(x.GoPointer())
	66	+	if GetCarouselPtr == 0 {
	67	+	return nil
	68	+	}
	69	+
	70	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetCarouselPtr)
	71	+
	72	+	GetCarouselCls := &Carousel{}
	73	+	GetCarouselCls.Ptr = GetCarouselPtr
	74	+	return GetCarouselCls
	75	+
	76	+	}
	77	+
	78	+	var xCarouselIndicatorLinesSetCarousel func(uintptr, uintptr)
	79	+
	80	+	// Sets the displayed carousel.
	81	+	func (x CarouselIndicatorLines) SetCarousel(CarouselVar Carousel) {
	82	+
	83	+	xCarouselIndicatorLinesSetCarousel(x.GoPointer(), CarouselVar.GoPointer())
	84	+
	85	+	}
	86	+
	87	+	func (c *CarouselIndicatorLines) GoPointer() uintptr {
	88	+	return c.Ptr
	89	+	}
	90	+
	91	+	func (c *CarouselIndicatorLines) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	92	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	93	+	}
	94	+
	95	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	96	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	97	+
	98	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	99	+
	100	+	}
	101	+
	102	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	103	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	104	+
	105	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	106	+
	107	+	}
	108	+
	109	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	110	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	111	+
	112	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	113	+
	114	+	}
	115	+
	116	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	117	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	118	+
	119	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	120	+
	121	+	}
	122	+
	123	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	124	+	//
	125	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	126	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	127	+	//
	128	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	129	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	130	+	// technologies.
	131	+	//
	132	+	// Example:
	133	+	// ```c
	134	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	135	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	136	+	//
	137	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	138	+	// -1);
	139	+	//
	140	+	// ```
	141	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	142	+
	143	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	144	+
	145	+	}
	146	+
	147	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	148	+	//
	149	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	150	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	151	+	//
	152	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	153	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	154	+
	155	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	156	+
	157	+	}
	158	+
	159	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	160	+	//
	161	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	162	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	163	+	//
	164	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	165	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	166	+	//
	167	+	// ```c
	168	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	169	+	//
	170	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	171	+	// ref1, NULL,
	172	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	173	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	174	+	// -1);
	175	+	//
	176	+	// ```
	177	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	178	+
	179	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	180	+
	181	+	}
	182	+
	183	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	184	+	//
	185	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	186	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	187	+	//
	188	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	189	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	190	+
	191	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	192	+
	193	+	}
	194	+
	195	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	196	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	197	+	//
	198	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	199	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	200	+	//
	201	+	// Example:
	202	+	// ```c
	203	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	204	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	205	+	//
	206	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	207	+	// -1);
	208	+	//
	209	+	// ```
	210	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	211	+
	212	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	213	+
	214	+	}
	215	+
	216	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	217	+	//
	218	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	219	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	220	+	//
	221	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	222	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	223	+
	224	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	225	+
	226	+	}
	227	+
	228	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	229	+	//
	230	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	231	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	232	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) GetBuildableId() string {
	233	+
	234	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	235	+
	236	+	}
	237	+
	238	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	239	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	240	+
	241	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	242	+
	243	+	}
	244	+
	245	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	246	+	func (x *CarouselIndicatorLines) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	247	+
	248	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	249	+
	250	+	}
	251	+
	252	+	func init() {
	253	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	254	+	if err != nil {
	255	+	panic(err)
	256	+	}
	257	+
	258	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewCarouselIndicatorLines, lib, "adw_carousel_indicator_lines_new")
	259	+
	260	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselIndicatorLinesGetCarousel, lib, "adw_carousel_indicator_lines_get_carousel")
	261	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselIndicatorLinesSetCarousel, lib, "adw_carousel_indicator_lines_set_carousel")
	262	+
	263	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-carousel.go +565 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,565 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type CarouselClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	// A paginated scrolling widget.
	17	+	//
	18	+	// <picture>
	19	+	//
	20	+	// <source srcset="carousel-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	21	+	// <img src="carousel.png" alt="carousel">
	22	+	//
	23	+	// </picture>
	24	+	//
	25	+	// The `AdwCarousel` widget can be used to display a set of pages with
	26	+	// swipe-based navigation between them.
	27	+	//
	28	+	// [class@CarouselIndicatorDots] and [class@CarouselIndicatorLines] can be used
	29	+	// to provide page indicators for `AdwCarousel`.
	30	+	//
	31	+	// ## CSS nodes
	32	+	//
	33	+	// `AdwCarousel` has a single CSS node with name `carousel`.
	34	+	type Carousel struct {
	35	+	gtk.Widget
	36	+	}
	37	+
	38	+	func CarouselNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Carousel {
	39	+	cls := &Carousel{}
	40	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	41	+	return cls
	42	+	}
	43	+
	44	+	var xNewCarousel func() uintptr
	45	+
	46	+	// Creates a new `AdwCarousel`.
	47	+	func NewCarousel() *gtk.Widget {
	48	+	NewCarouselPtr := xNewCarousel()
	49	+	if NewCarouselPtr == 0 {
	50	+	return nil
	51	+	}
	52	+
	53	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewCarouselPtr)
	54	+
	55	+	NewCarouselCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	56	+	NewCarouselCls.Ptr = NewCarouselPtr
	57	+	return NewCarouselCls
	58	+	}
	59	+
	60	+	var xCarouselAppend func(uintptr, uintptr)
	61	+
	62	+	// Appends @child to @self.
	63	+	func (x Carousel) Append(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	64	+
	65	+	xCarouselAppend(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	66	+
	67	+	}
	68	+
	69	+	var xCarouselGetAllowLongSwipes func(uintptr) bool
	70	+
	71	+	// Gets whether to allow swiping for more than one page at a time.
	72	+	func (x *Carousel) GetAllowLongSwipes() bool {
	73	+
	74	+	return xCarouselGetAllowLongSwipes(x.GoPointer())
	75	+
	76	+	}
	77	+
	78	+	var xCarouselGetAllowMouseDrag func(uintptr) bool
	79	+
	80	+	// Sets whether @self can be dragged with mouse pointer.
	81	+	func (x *Carousel) GetAllowMouseDrag() bool {
	82	+
	83	+	return xCarouselGetAllowMouseDrag(x.GoPointer())
	84	+
	85	+	}
	86	+
	87	+	var xCarouselGetAllowScrollWheel func(uintptr) bool
	88	+
	89	+	// Gets whether @self will respond to scroll wheel events.
	90	+	func (x *Carousel) GetAllowScrollWheel() bool {
	91	+
	92	+	return xCarouselGetAllowScrollWheel(x.GoPointer())
	93	+
	94	+	}
	95	+
	96	+	var xCarouselGetInteractive func(uintptr) bool
	97	+
	98	+	// Gets whether @self can be navigated.
	99	+	func (x *Carousel) GetInteractive() bool {
	100	+
	101	+	return xCarouselGetInteractive(x.GoPointer())
	102	+
	103	+	}
	104	+
	105	+	var xCarouselGetNPages func(uintptr) uint
	106	+
	107	+	// Gets the number of pages in @self.
	108	+	func (x *Carousel) GetNPages() uint {
	109	+
	110	+	return xCarouselGetNPages(x.GoPointer())
	111	+
	112	+	}
	113	+
	114	+	var xCarouselGetNthPage func(uintptr, uint) uintptr
	115	+
	116	+	// Gets the page at position @n.
	117	+	func (x Carousel) GetNthPage(NVar uint) gtk.Widget {
	118	+
	119	+	GetNthPagePtr := xCarouselGetNthPage(x.GoPointer(), NVar)
	120	+	if GetNthPagePtr == 0 {
	121	+	return nil
	122	+	}
	123	+
	124	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetNthPagePtr)
	125	+
	126	+	GetNthPageCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	127	+	GetNthPageCls.Ptr = GetNthPagePtr
	128	+	return GetNthPageCls
	129	+
	130	+	}
	131	+
	132	+	var xCarouselGetPosition func(uintptr) float64
	133	+
	134	+	// Gets current scroll position in @self, unitless.
	135	+	//
	136	+	// 1 matches 1 page. Use [method@Carousel.scroll_to] for changing it.
	137	+	func (x *Carousel) GetPosition() float64 {
	138	+
	139	+	return xCarouselGetPosition(x.GoPointer())
	140	+
	141	+	}
	142	+
	143	+	var xCarouselGetRevealDuration func(uintptr) uint
	144	+
	145	+	// Gets the page reveal duration, in milliseconds.
	146	+	func (x *Carousel) GetRevealDuration() uint {
	147	+
	148	+	return xCarouselGetRevealDuration(x.GoPointer())
	149	+
	150	+	}
	151	+
	152	+	var xCarouselGetScrollParams func(uintptr) *SpringParams
	153	+
	154	+	// Gets the scroll animation spring parameters for @self.
	155	+	func (x Carousel) GetScrollParams() SpringParams {
	156	+
	157	+	return xCarouselGetScrollParams(x.GoPointer())
	158	+
	159	+	}
	160	+
	161	+	var xCarouselGetSpacing func(uintptr) uint
	162	+
	163	+	// Gets spacing between pages in pixels.
	164	+	func (x *Carousel) GetSpacing() uint {
	165	+
	166	+	return xCarouselGetSpacing(x.GoPointer())
	167	+
	168	+	}
	169	+
	170	+	var xCarouselInsert func(uintptr, uintptr, int32)
	171	+
	172	+	// Inserts @child into @self at position @position.
	173	+	//
	174	+	// If position is -1, or larger than the number of pages,
	175	+	// @child will be appended to the end.
	176	+	func (x Carousel) Insert(ChildVar gtk.Widget, PositionVar int32) {
	177	+
	178	+	xCarouselInsert(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	179	+
	180	+	}
	181	+
	182	+	var xCarouselPrepend func(uintptr, uintptr)
	183	+
	184	+	// Prepends @child to @self.
	185	+	func (x Carousel) Prepend(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	186	+
	187	+	xCarouselPrepend(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	188	+
	189	+	}
	190	+
	191	+	var xCarouselRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	192	+
	193	+	// Removes @child from @self.
	194	+	func (x Carousel) Remove(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	195	+
	196	+	xCarouselRemove(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	197	+
	198	+	}
	199	+
	200	+	var xCarouselReorder func(uintptr, uintptr, int32)
	201	+
	202	+	// Moves @child into position @position.
	203	+	//
	204	+	// If position is -1, or larger than the number of pages, @child will be moved
	205	+	// at the end.
	206	+	func (x Carousel) Reorder(ChildVar gtk.Widget, PositionVar int32) {
	207	+
	208	+	xCarouselReorder(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	209	+
	210	+	}
	211	+
	212	+	var xCarouselScrollTo func(uintptr, uintptr, bool)
	213	+
	214	+	// Scrolls to @widget.
	215	+	//
	216	+	// If @animate is `TRUE`, the transition will be animated.
	217	+	func (x Carousel) ScrollTo(WidgetVar gtk.Widget, AnimateVar bool) {
	218	+
	219	+	xCarouselScrollTo(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer(), AnimateVar)
	220	+
	221	+	}
	222	+
	223	+	var xCarouselSetAllowLongSwipes func(uintptr, bool)
	224	+
	225	+	// Sets whether to allow swiping for more than one page at a time.
	226	+	//
	227	+	// If @allow_long_swipes is `FALSE`, each swipe can only move to the adjacent
	228	+	// pages.
	229	+	func (x *Carousel) SetAllowLongSwipes(AllowLongSwipesVar bool) {
	230	+
	231	+	xCarouselSetAllowLongSwipes(x.GoPointer(), AllowLongSwipesVar)
	232	+
	233	+	}
	234	+
	235	+	var xCarouselSetAllowMouseDrag func(uintptr, bool)
	236	+
	237	+	// Sets whether @self can be dragged with mouse pointer.
	238	+	//
	239	+	// If @allow_mouse_drag is `FALSE`, dragging is only available on touch.
	240	+	func (x *Carousel) SetAllowMouseDrag(AllowMouseDragVar bool) {
	241	+
	242	+	xCarouselSetAllowMouseDrag(x.GoPointer(), AllowMouseDragVar)
	243	+
	244	+	}
	245	+
	246	+	var xCarouselSetAllowScrollWheel func(uintptr, bool)
	247	+
	248	+	// Sets whether @self will respond to scroll wheel events.
	249	+	//
	250	+	// If @allow_scroll_wheel is `FALSE`, wheel events will be ignored.
	251	+	func (x *Carousel) SetAllowScrollWheel(AllowScrollWheelVar bool) {
	252	+
	253	+	xCarouselSetAllowScrollWheel(x.GoPointer(), AllowScrollWheelVar)
	254	+
	255	+	}
	256	+
	257	+	var xCarouselSetInteractive func(uintptr, bool)
	258	+
	259	+	// Sets whether @self can be navigated.
	260	+	//
	261	+	// This can be used to temporarily disable the carousel to only allow navigating
	262	+	// it in a certain state.
	263	+	func (x *Carousel) SetInteractive(InteractiveVar bool) {
	264	+
	265	+	xCarouselSetInteractive(x.GoPointer(), InteractiveVar)
	266	+
	267	+	}
	268	+
	269	+	var xCarouselSetRevealDuration func(uintptr, uint)
	270	+
	271	+	// Sets the page reveal duration, in milliseconds.
	272	+	//
	273	+	// Reveal duration is used when animating adding or removing pages.
	274	+	func (x *Carousel) SetRevealDuration(RevealDurationVar uint) {
	275	+
	276	+	xCarouselSetRevealDuration(x.GoPointer(), RevealDurationVar)
	277	+
	278	+	}
	279	+
	280	+	var xCarouselSetScrollParams func(uintptr, *SpringParams)
	281	+
	282	+	// Sets the scroll animation spring parameters for @self.
	283	+	//
	284	+	// The default value is equivalent to:
	285	+	//
	286	+	// ```c
	287	+	// adw_spring_params_new (1, 0.5, 500)
	288	+	// ```
	289	+	func (x Carousel) SetScrollParams(ParamsVar SpringParams) {
	290	+
	291	+	xCarouselSetScrollParams(x.GoPointer(), ParamsVar)
	292	+
	293	+	}
	294	+
	295	+	var xCarouselSetSpacing func(uintptr, uint)
	296	+
	297	+	// Sets spacing between pages in pixels.
	298	+	func (x *Carousel) SetSpacing(SpacingVar uint) {
	299	+
	300	+	xCarouselSetSpacing(x.GoPointer(), SpacingVar)
	301	+
	302	+	}
	303	+
	304	+	func (c *Carousel) GoPointer() uintptr {
	305	+	return c.Ptr
	306	+	}
	307	+
	308	+	func (c *Carousel) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	309	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	310	+	}
	311	+
	312	+	// This signal is emitted after a page has been changed.
	313	+	//
	314	+	// It can be used to implement "infinite scrolling" by amending the pages
	315	+	// after every scroll. Note that an empty carousel is indicated by
	316	+	// `(int)index == -1`.
	317	+	func (x *Carousel) ConnectPageChanged(cb func(Carousel, uint)) {
	318	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr, IndexVarp uint) {
	319	+	fa := Carousel{}
	320	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	321	+
	322	+	cb(fa, IndexVarp)
	323	+
	324	+	}
	325	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::page-changed", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	326	+	}
	327	+
	328	+	// Gets the progress @self will snap back to after the gesture is canceled.
	329	+	func (x *Carousel) GetCancelProgress() float64 {
	330	+
	331	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetCancelProgress(x.GoPointer())
	332	+
	333	+	}
	334	+
	335	+	// Gets the swipe distance of @self.
	336	+	//
	337	+	// This corresponds to how many pixels 1 unit represents.
	338	+	func (x *Carousel) GetDistance() float64 {
	339	+
	340	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetDistance(x.GoPointer())
	341	+
	342	+	}
	343	+
	344	+	// Gets the current progress of @self.
	345	+	func (x *Carousel) GetProgress() float64 {
	346	+
	347	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetProgress(x.GoPointer())
	348	+
	349	+	}
	350	+
	351	+	// Gets the snap points of @self.
	352	+	//
	353	+	// Each snap point represents a progress value that is considered acceptable to
	354	+	// end the swipe on.
	355	+	func (x *Carousel) GetSnapPoints(NSnapPointsVar int32) uintptr {
	356	+
	357	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetSnapPoints(x.GoPointer(), NSnapPointsVar)
	358	+
	359	+	}
	360	+
	361	+	// Gets the area @self can start a swipe from for the given direction and
	362	+	// gesture type.
	363	+	//
	364	+	// This can be used to restrict swipes to only be possible from a certain area,
	365	+	// for example, to only allow edge swipes, or to have a draggable element and
	366	+	// ignore swipes elsewhere.
	367	+	//
	368	+	// If not implemented, the default implementation returns the allocation of
	369	+	// @self, allowing swipes from anywhere.
	370	+	func (x Carousel) GetSwipeArea(NavigationDirectionVar NavigationDirection, IsDragVar bool, RectVar gdk.Rectangle) {
	371	+
	372	+	XAdwSwipeableGetSwipeArea(x.GoPointer(), NavigationDirectionVar, IsDragVar, RectVar)
	373	+
	374	+	}
	375	+
	376	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	377	+	func (x *Carousel) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	378	+
	379	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	380	+
	381	+	}
	382	+
	383	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	384	+	func (x *Carousel) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	385	+
	386	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	387	+
	388	+	}
	389	+
	390	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	391	+	func (x *Carousel) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	392	+
	393	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	394	+
	395	+	}
	396	+
	397	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	398	+	func (x *Carousel) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	399	+
	400	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	401	+
	402	+	}
	403	+
	404	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	405	+	//
	406	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	407	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	408	+	//
	409	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	410	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	411	+	// technologies.
	412	+	//
	413	+	// Example:
	414	+	// ```c
	415	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	416	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	417	+	//
	418	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	419	+	// -1);
	420	+	//
	421	+	// ```
	422	+	func (x *Carousel) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	423	+
	424	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	425	+
	426	+	}
	427	+
	428	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	429	+	//
	430	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	431	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	432	+	//
	433	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	434	+	func (x *Carousel) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	435	+
	436	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	437	+
	438	+	}
	439	+
	440	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	441	+	//
	442	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	443	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	444	+	//
	445	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	446	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	447	+	//
	448	+	// ```c
	449	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	450	+	//
	451	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	452	+	// ref1, NULL,
	453	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	454	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	455	+	// -1);
	456	+	//
	457	+	// ```
	458	+	func (x *Carousel) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	459	+
	460	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	461	+
	462	+	}
	463	+
	464	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	465	+	//
	466	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	467	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	468	+	//
	469	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	470	+	func (x *Carousel) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	471	+
	472	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	473	+
	474	+	}
	475	+
	476	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	477	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	478	+	//
	479	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	480	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	481	+	//
	482	+	// Example:
	483	+	// ```c
	484	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	485	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	486	+	//
	487	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	488	+	// -1);
	489	+	//
	490	+	// ```
	491	+	func (x *Carousel) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	492	+
	493	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	494	+
	495	+	}
	496	+
	497	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	498	+	//
	499	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	500	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	501	+	//
	502	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	503	+	func (x *Carousel) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	504	+
	505	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	506	+
	507	+	}
	508	+
	509	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	510	+	//
	511	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	512	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	513	+	func (x *Carousel) GetBuildableId() string {
	514	+
	515	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	516	+
	517	+	}
	518	+
	519	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	520	+	func (x *Carousel) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	521	+
	522	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	523	+
	524	+	}
	525	+
	526	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	527	+	func (x *Carousel) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	528	+
	529	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	530	+
	531	+	}
	532	+
	533	+	func init() {
	534	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	535	+	if err != nil {
	536	+	panic(err)
	537	+	}
	538	+
	539	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewCarousel, lib, "adw_carousel_new")
	540	+
	541	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselAppend, lib, "adw_carousel_append")
	542	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetAllowLongSwipes, lib, "adw_carousel_get_allow_long_swipes")
	543	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetAllowMouseDrag, lib, "adw_carousel_get_allow_mouse_drag")
	544	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetAllowScrollWheel, lib, "adw_carousel_get_allow_scroll_wheel")
	545	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetInteractive, lib, "adw_carousel_get_interactive")
	546	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetNPages, lib, "adw_carousel_get_n_pages")
	547	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetNthPage, lib, "adw_carousel_get_nth_page")
	548	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetPosition, lib, "adw_carousel_get_position")
	549	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetRevealDuration, lib, "adw_carousel_get_reveal_duration")
	550	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetScrollParams, lib, "adw_carousel_get_scroll_params")
	551	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselGetSpacing, lib, "adw_carousel_get_spacing")
	552	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselInsert, lib, "adw_carousel_insert")
	553	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselPrepend, lib, "adw_carousel_prepend")
	554	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselRemove, lib, "adw_carousel_remove")
	555	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselReorder, lib, "adw_carousel_reorder")
	556	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselScrollTo, lib, "adw_carousel_scroll_to")
	557	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselSetAllowLongSwipes, lib, "adw_carousel_set_allow_long_swipes")
	558	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselSetAllowMouseDrag, lib, "adw_carousel_set_allow_mouse_drag")
	559	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselSetAllowScrollWheel, lib, "adw_carousel_set_allow_scroll_wheel")
	560	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselSetInteractive, lib, "adw_carousel_set_interactive")
	561	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselSetRevealDuration, lib, "adw_carousel_set_reveal_duration")
	562	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselSetScrollParams, lib, "adw_carousel_set_scroll_params")
	563	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xCarouselSetSpacing, lib, "adw_carousel_set_spacing")
	564	+
	565	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-clamp-layout.go +150 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	8	+	)
	9	+
	10	+	type ClampLayoutClass struct {
	11	+	ParentClass uintptr
	12	+	}
	13	+
	14	+	// A layout manager constraining its children to a given size.
	15	+	//
	16	+	// <picture>
	17	+	//
	18	+	// <source srcset="clamp-wide-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	19	+	// <img src="clamp-wide.png" alt="clamp-wide">
	20	+	//
	21	+	// </picture>
	22	+	// <picture>
	23	+	//
	24	+	// <source srcset="clamp-narrow-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	25	+	// <img src="clamp-narrow.png" alt="clamp-narrow">
	26	+	//
	27	+	// </picture>
	28	+	//
	29	+	// `AdwClampLayout` constraints the size of the widgets it contains to a given
	30	+	// maximum size. It will constrain the width if it is horizontal, or the height
	31	+	// if it is vertical. The expansion of the children from their minimum to their
	32	+	// maximum size is eased out for a smooth transition.
	33	+	//
	34	+	// If a child requires more than the requested maximum size, it will be
	35	+	// allocated the minimum size it can fit in instead.
	36	+	//
	37	+	// Each child will get the style classes .large when it reached its maximum
	38	+	// size, .small when it's allocated the full size, .medium in-between, or none
	39	+	// if it hasn't been allocated yet.
	40	+	type ClampLayout struct {
	41	+	gtk.LayoutManager
	42	+	}
	43	+
	44	+	func ClampLayoutNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *ClampLayout {
	45	+	cls := &ClampLayout{}
	46	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	47	+	return cls
	48	+	}
	49	+
	50	+	var xNewClampLayout func() uintptr
	51	+
	52	+	// Creates a new `AdwClampLayout`.
	53	+	func NewClampLayout() *gtk.LayoutManager {
	54	+	NewClampLayoutPtr := xNewClampLayout()
	55	+	if NewClampLayoutPtr == 0 {
	56	+	return nil
	57	+	}
	58	+
	59	+	NewClampLayoutCls := &gtk.LayoutManager{}
	60	+	NewClampLayoutCls.Ptr = NewClampLayoutPtr
	61	+	return NewClampLayoutCls
	62	+	}
	63	+
	64	+	var xClampLayoutGetMaximumSize func(uintptr) int32
	65	+
	66	+	// Gets the maximum size allocated to the children.
	67	+	func (x *ClampLayout) GetMaximumSize() int32 {
	68	+
	69	+	return xClampLayoutGetMaximumSize(x.GoPointer())
	70	+
	71	+	}
	72	+
	73	+	var xClampLayoutGetTighteningThreshold func(uintptr) int32
	74	+
	75	+	// Gets the size above which the children are clamped.
	76	+	func (x *ClampLayout) GetTighteningThreshold() int32 {
	77	+
	78	+	return xClampLayoutGetTighteningThreshold(x.GoPointer())
	79	+
	80	+	}
	81	+
	82	+	var xClampLayoutSetMaximumSize func(uintptr, int32)
	83	+
	84	+	// Sets the maximum size allocated to the children.
	85	+	//
	86	+	// It is the width if the layout is horizontal, or the height if it is vertical.
	87	+	func (x *ClampLayout) SetMaximumSize(MaximumSizeVar int32) {
	88	+
	89	+	xClampLayoutSetMaximumSize(x.GoPointer(), MaximumSizeVar)
	90	+
	91	+	}
	92	+
	93	+	var xClampLayoutSetTighteningThreshold func(uintptr, int32)
	94	+
	95	+	// Sets the size above which the children are clamped.
	96	+	//
	97	+	// Starting from this size, the layout will tighten its grip on the children,
	98	+	// slowly allocating less and less of the available size up to the maximum
	99	+	// allocated size. Below that threshold and below the maximum size, the children
	100	+	// will be allocated all the available size.
	101	+	//
	102	+	// If the threshold is greater than the maximum size to allocate to the
	103	+	// children, they will be allocated the whole size up to the maximum. If the
	104	+	// threshold is lower than the minimum size to allocate to the children, that
	105	+	// size will be used as the tightening threshold.
	106	+	//
	107	+	// Effectively, tightening the grip on a child before it reaches its maximum
	108	+	// size makes transitions to and from the maximum size smoother when resizing.
	109	+	func (x *ClampLayout) SetTighteningThreshold(TighteningThresholdVar int32) {
	110	+
	111	+	xClampLayoutSetTighteningThreshold(x.GoPointer(), TighteningThresholdVar)
	112	+
	113	+	}
	114	+
	115	+	func (c *ClampLayout) GoPointer() uintptr {
	116	+	return c.Ptr
	117	+	}
	118	+
	119	+	func (c *ClampLayout) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	120	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	121	+	}
	122	+
	123	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	124	+	func (x *ClampLayout) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	125	+
	126	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	127	+
	128	+	}
	129	+
	130	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	131	+	func (x *ClampLayout) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	132	+
	133	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	134	+
	135	+	}
	136	+
	137	+	func init() {
	138	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	139	+	if err != nil {
	140	+	panic(err)
	141	+	}
	142	+
	143	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewClampLayout, lib, "adw_clamp_layout_new")
	144	+
	145	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampLayoutGetMaximumSize, lib, "adw_clamp_layout_get_maximum_size")
	146	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampLayoutGetTighteningThreshold, lib, "adw_clamp_layout_get_tightening_threshold")
	147	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampLayoutSetMaximumSize, lib, "adw_clamp_layout_set_maximum_size")
	148	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampLayoutSetTighteningThreshold, lib, "adw_clamp_layout_set_tightening_threshold")
	149	+
	150	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-clamp-scrollable.go +398 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type ClampScrollableClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	// A scrollable [class@Clamp].
	16	+	//
	17	+	// `AdwClampScrollable` is a variant of [class@Clamp] that implements the
	18	+	// [iface@Gtk.Scrollable] interface.
	19	+	//
	20	+	// The primary use case for `AdwClampScrollable` is clamping
	21	+	// [class@Gtk.ListView].
	22	+	type ClampScrollable struct {
	23	+	gtk.Widget
	24	+	}
	25	+
	26	+	func ClampScrollableNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *ClampScrollable {
	27	+	cls := &ClampScrollable{}
	28	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	29	+	return cls
	30	+	}
	31	+
	32	+	var xNewClampScrollable func() uintptr
	33	+
	34	+	// Creates a new `AdwClampScrollable`.
	35	+	func NewClampScrollable() *gtk.Widget {
	36	+	NewClampScrollablePtr := xNewClampScrollable()
	37	+	if NewClampScrollablePtr == 0 {
	38	+	return nil
	39	+	}
	40	+
	41	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewClampScrollablePtr)
	42	+
	43	+	NewClampScrollableCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	44	+	NewClampScrollableCls.Ptr = NewClampScrollablePtr
	45	+	return NewClampScrollableCls
	46	+	}
	47	+
	48	+	var xClampScrollableGetChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	49	+
	50	+	// Gets the child widget of @self.
	51	+	func (x ClampScrollable) GetChild() gtk.Widget {
	52	+
	53	+	GetChildPtr := xClampScrollableGetChild(x.GoPointer())
	54	+	if GetChildPtr == 0 {
	55	+	return nil
	56	+	}
	57	+
	58	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetChildPtr)
	59	+
	60	+	GetChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	61	+	GetChildCls.Ptr = GetChildPtr
	62	+	return GetChildCls
	63	+
	64	+	}
	65	+
	66	+	var xClampScrollableGetMaximumSize func(uintptr) int32
	67	+
	68	+	// Gets the maximum size allocated to the child.
	69	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) GetMaximumSize() int32 {
	70	+
	71	+	return xClampScrollableGetMaximumSize(x.GoPointer())
	72	+
	73	+	}
	74	+
	75	+	var xClampScrollableGetTighteningThreshold func(uintptr) int32
	76	+
	77	+	// Gets the size above which the child is clamped.
	78	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) GetTighteningThreshold() int32 {
	79	+
	80	+	return xClampScrollableGetTighteningThreshold(x.GoPointer())
	81	+
	82	+	}
	83	+
	84	+	var xClampScrollableSetChild func(uintptr, uintptr)
	85	+
	86	+	// Sets the child widget of @self.
	87	+	func (x ClampScrollable) SetChild(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	88	+
	89	+	xClampScrollableSetChild(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	90	+
	91	+	}
	92	+
	93	+	var xClampScrollableSetMaximumSize func(uintptr, int32)
	94	+
	95	+	// Sets the maximum size allocated to the child.
	96	+	//
	97	+	// It is the width if the clamp is horizontal, or the height if it is vertical.
	98	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) SetMaximumSize(MaximumSizeVar int32) {
	99	+
	100	+	xClampScrollableSetMaximumSize(x.GoPointer(), MaximumSizeVar)
	101	+
	102	+	}
	103	+
	104	+	var xClampScrollableSetTighteningThreshold func(uintptr, int32)
	105	+
	106	+	// Sets the size above which the child is clamped.
	107	+	//
	108	+	// Starting from this size, the clamp will tighten its grip on the child, slowly
	109	+	// allocating less and less of the available size up to the maximum allocated
	110	+	// size. Below that threshold and below the maximum width, the child will be
	111	+	// allocated all the available size.
	112	+	//
	113	+	// If the threshold is greater than the maximum size to allocate to the child,
	114	+	// the child will be allocated all the width up to the maximum. If the threshold
	115	+	// is lower than the minimum size to allocate to the child, that size will be
	116	+	// used as the tightening threshold.
	117	+	//
	118	+	// Effectively, tightening the grip on the child before it reaches its maximum
	119	+	// size makes transitions to and from the maximum size smoother when resizing.
	120	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) SetTighteningThreshold(TighteningThresholdVar int32) {
	121	+
	122	+	xClampScrollableSetTighteningThreshold(x.GoPointer(), TighteningThresholdVar)
	123	+
	124	+	}
	125	+
	126	+	func (c *ClampScrollable) GoPointer() uintptr {
	127	+	return c.Ptr
	128	+	}
	129	+
	130	+	func (c *ClampScrollable) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	131	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	132	+	}
	133	+
	134	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	135	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	136	+
	137	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	138	+
	139	+	}
	140	+
	141	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	142	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	143	+
	144	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	145	+
	146	+	}
	147	+
	148	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	149	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	150	+
	151	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	152	+
	153	+	}
	154	+
	155	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	156	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	157	+
	158	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	159	+
	160	+	}
	161	+
	162	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	163	+	//
	164	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	165	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	166	+	//
	167	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	168	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	169	+	// technologies.
	170	+	//
	171	+	// Example:
	172	+	// ```c
	173	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	174	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	175	+	//
	176	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	177	+	// -1);
	178	+	//
	179	+	// ```
	180	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	181	+
	182	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	183	+
	184	+	}
	185	+
	186	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	187	+	//
	188	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	189	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	190	+	//
	191	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	192	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	193	+
	194	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	195	+
	196	+	}
	197	+
	198	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	199	+	//
	200	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	201	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	202	+	//
	203	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	204	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	205	+	//
	206	+	// ```c
	207	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	208	+	//
	209	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	210	+	// ref1, NULL,
	211	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	212	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	213	+	// -1);
	214	+	//
	215	+	// ```
	216	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	217	+
	218	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	219	+
	220	+	}
	221	+
	222	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	223	+	//
	224	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	225	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	226	+	//
	227	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	228	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	229	+
	230	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	231	+
	232	+	}
	233	+
	234	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	235	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	236	+	//
	237	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	238	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	239	+	//
	240	+	// Example:
	241	+	// ```c
	242	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	243	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	244	+	//
	245	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	246	+	// -1);
	247	+	//
	248	+	// ```
	249	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	250	+
	251	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	252	+
	253	+	}
	254	+
	255	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	256	+	//
	257	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	258	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	259	+	//
	260	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	261	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	262	+
	263	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	264	+
	265	+	}
	266	+
	267	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	268	+	//
	269	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	270	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	271	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) GetBuildableId() string {
	272	+
	273	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	274	+
	275	+	}
	276	+
	277	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	278	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	279	+
	280	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	281	+
	282	+	}
	283	+
	284	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	285	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	286	+
	287	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	288	+
	289	+	}
	290	+
	291	+	// Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
	292	+	// outside of the scrollable.
	293	+	//
	294	+	// An example for this would be treeview headers. GTK can use
	295	+	// this information to display overlaid graphics, like the
	296	+	// overshoot indication, at the right position.
	297	+	func (x ClampScrollable) GetBorder(BorderVar gtk.Border) bool {
	298	+
	299	+	return gtk.XGtkScrollableGetBorder(x.GoPointer(), BorderVar)
	300	+
	301	+	}
	302	+
	303	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAdjustment` used for horizontal scrolling.
	304	+	func (x ClampScrollable) GetHadjustment() gtk.Adjustment {
	305	+
	306	+	GetHadjustmentPtr := gtk.XGtkScrollableGetHadjustment(x.GoPointer())
	307	+	if GetHadjustmentPtr == 0 {
	308	+	return nil
	309	+	}
	310	+
	311	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetHadjustmentPtr)
	312	+
	313	+	GetHadjustmentCls := &gtk.Adjustment{}
	314	+	GetHadjustmentCls.Ptr = GetHadjustmentPtr
	315	+	return GetHadjustmentCls
	316	+
	317	+	}
	318	+
	319	+	// Gets the horizontal `GtkScrollablePolicy`.
	320	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) GetHscrollPolicy() gtk.ScrollablePolicy {
	321	+
	322	+	return gtk.XGtkScrollableGetHscrollPolicy(x.GoPointer())
	323	+
	324	+	}
	325	+
	326	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAdjustment` used for vertical scrolling.
	327	+	func (x ClampScrollable) GetVadjustment() gtk.Adjustment {
	328	+
	329	+	GetVadjustmentPtr := gtk.XGtkScrollableGetVadjustment(x.GoPointer())
	330	+	if GetVadjustmentPtr == 0 {
	331	+	return nil
	332	+	}
	333	+
	334	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetVadjustmentPtr)
	335	+
	336	+	GetVadjustmentCls := &gtk.Adjustment{}
	337	+	GetVadjustmentCls.Ptr = GetVadjustmentPtr
	338	+	return GetVadjustmentCls
	339	+
	340	+	}
	341	+
	342	+	// Gets the vertical `GtkScrollablePolicy`.
	343	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) GetVscrollPolicy() gtk.ScrollablePolicy {
	344	+
	345	+	return gtk.XGtkScrollableGetVscrollPolicy(x.GoPointer())
	346	+
	347	+	}
	348	+
	349	+	// Sets the horizontal adjustment of the `GtkScrollable`.
	350	+	func (x ClampScrollable) SetHadjustment(HadjustmentVar gtk.Adjustment) {
	351	+
	352	+	gtk.XGtkScrollableSetHadjustment(x.GoPointer(), HadjustmentVar.GoPointer())
	353	+
	354	+	}
	355	+
	356	+	// Sets the `GtkScrollablePolicy`.
	357	+	//
	358	+	// The policy determines whether horizontal scrolling should start
	359	+	// below the minimum width or below the natural width.
	360	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) SetHscrollPolicy(PolicyVar gtk.ScrollablePolicy) {
	361	+
	362	+	gtk.XGtkScrollableSetHscrollPolicy(x.GoPointer(), PolicyVar)
	363	+
	364	+	}
	365	+
	366	+	// Sets the vertical adjustment of the `GtkScrollable`.
	367	+	func (x ClampScrollable) SetVadjustment(VadjustmentVar gtk.Adjustment) {
	368	+
	369	+	gtk.XGtkScrollableSetVadjustment(x.GoPointer(), VadjustmentVar.GoPointer())
	370	+
	371	+	}
	372	+
	373	+	// Sets the `GtkScrollablePolicy`.
	374	+	//
	375	+	// The policy determines whether vertical scrolling should start
	376	+	// below the minimum height or below the natural height.
	377	+	func (x *ClampScrollable) SetVscrollPolicy(PolicyVar gtk.ScrollablePolicy) {
	378	+
	379	+	gtk.XGtkScrollableSetVscrollPolicy(x.GoPointer(), PolicyVar)
	380	+
	381	+	}
	382	+
	383	+	func init() {
	384	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	385	+	if err != nil {
	386	+	panic(err)
	387	+	}
	388	+
	389	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewClampScrollable, lib, "adw_clamp_scrollable_new")
	390	+
	391	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampScrollableGetChild, lib, "adw_clamp_scrollable_get_child")
	392	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampScrollableGetMaximumSize, lib, "adw_clamp_scrollable_get_maximum_size")
	393	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampScrollableGetTighteningThreshold, lib, "adw_clamp_scrollable_get_tightening_threshold")
	394	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampScrollableSetChild, lib, "adw_clamp_scrollable_set_child")
	395	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampScrollableSetMaximumSize, lib, "adw_clamp_scrollable_set_maximum_size")
	396	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampScrollableSetTighteningThreshold, lib, "adw_clamp_scrollable_set_tightening_threshold")
	397	+
	398	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-clamp.go +329 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,329 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type ClampClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	// A widget constraining its child to a given size.
	16	+	//
	17	+	// <picture>
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <source srcset="clamp-wide-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	20	+	// <img src="clamp-wide.png" alt="clamp-wide">
	21	+	//
	22	+	// </picture>
	23	+	// <picture>
	24	+	//
	25	+	// <source srcset="clamp-narrow-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	26	+	// <img src="clamp-narrow.png" alt="clamp-narrow">
	27	+	//
	28	+	// </picture>
	29	+	//
	30	+	// The `AdwClamp` widget constrains the size of the widget it contains to a
	31	+	// given maximum size. It will constrain the width if it is horizontal, or the
	32	+	// height if it is vertical. The expansion of the child from its minimum to its
	33	+	// maximum size is eased out for a smooth transition.
	34	+	//
	35	+	// If the child requires more than the requested maximum size, it will be
	36	+	// allocated the minimum size it can fit in instead.
	37	+	//
	38	+	// ## CSS nodes
	39	+	//
	40	+	// `AdwClamp` has a single CSS node with name `clamp`.
	41	+	//
	42	+	// Its children will receive the style classes `.large` when the child reached
	43	+	// its maximum size, `.small` when the clamp allocates its full size to the
	44	+	// child, `.medium` in-between, or none if it hasn't computed its size yet.
	45	+	type Clamp struct {
	46	+	gtk.Widget
	47	+	}
	48	+
	49	+	func ClampNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Clamp {
	50	+	cls := &Clamp{}
	51	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	52	+	return cls
	53	+	}
	54	+
	55	+	var xNewClamp func() uintptr
	56	+
	57	+	// Creates a new `AdwClamp`.
	58	+	func NewClamp() *gtk.Widget {
	59	+	NewClampPtr := xNewClamp()
	60	+	if NewClampPtr == 0 {
	61	+	return nil
	62	+	}
	63	+
	64	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewClampPtr)
	65	+
	66	+	NewClampCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	67	+	NewClampCls.Ptr = NewClampPtr
	68	+	return NewClampCls
	69	+	}
	70	+
	71	+	var xClampGetChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	72	+
	73	+	// Gets the child widget of @self.
	74	+	func (x Clamp) GetChild() gtk.Widget {
	75	+
	76	+	GetChildPtr := xClampGetChild(x.GoPointer())
	77	+	if GetChildPtr == 0 {
	78	+	return nil
	79	+	}
	80	+
	81	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetChildPtr)
	82	+
	83	+	GetChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	84	+	GetChildCls.Ptr = GetChildPtr
	85	+	return GetChildCls
	86	+
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	var xClampGetMaximumSize func(uintptr) int32
	90	+
	91	+	// Gets the maximum size allocated to the child.
	92	+	func (x *Clamp) GetMaximumSize() int32 {
	93	+
	94	+	return xClampGetMaximumSize(x.GoPointer())
	95	+
	96	+	}
	97	+
	98	+	var xClampGetTighteningThreshold func(uintptr) int32
	99	+
	100	+	// Gets the size above which the child is clamped.
	101	+	func (x *Clamp) GetTighteningThreshold() int32 {
	102	+
	103	+	return xClampGetTighteningThreshold(x.GoPointer())
	104	+
	105	+	}
	106	+
	107	+	var xClampSetChild func(uintptr, uintptr)
	108	+
	109	+	// Sets the child widget of @self.
	110	+	func (x Clamp) SetChild(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	111	+
	112	+	xClampSetChild(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	113	+
	114	+	}
	115	+
	116	+	var xClampSetMaximumSize func(uintptr, int32)
	117	+
	118	+	// Sets the maximum size allocated to the child.
	119	+	//
	120	+	// It is the width if the clamp is horizontal, or the height if it is vertical.
	121	+	func (x *Clamp) SetMaximumSize(MaximumSizeVar int32) {
	122	+
	123	+	xClampSetMaximumSize(x.GoPointer(), MaximumSizeVar)
	124	+
	125	+	}
	126	+
	127	+	var xClampSetTighteningThreshold func(uintptr, int32)
	128	+
	129	+	// Sets the size above which the child is clamped.
	130	+	//
	131	+	// Starting from this size, the clamp will tighten its grip on the child, slowly
	132	+	// allocating less and less of the available size up to the maximum allocated
	133	+	// size. Below that threshold and below the maximum size, the child will be
	134	+	// allocated all the available size.
	135	+	//
	136	+	// If the threshold is greater than the maximum size to allocate to the child,
	137	+	// the child will be allocated all the size up to the maximum. If the threshold
	138	+	// is lower than the minimum size to allocate to the child, that size will be
	139	+	// used as the tightening threshold.
	140	+	//
	141	+	// Effectively, tightening the grip on the child before it reaches its maximum
	142	+	// size makes transitions to and from the maximum size smoother when resizing.
	143	+	func (x *Clamp) SetTighteningThreshold(TighteningThresholdVar int32) {
	144	+
	145	+	xClampSetTighteningThreshold(x.GoPointer(), TighteningThresholdVar)
	146	+
	147	+	}
	148	+
	149	+	func (c *Clamp) GoPointer() uintptr {
	150	+	return c.Ptr
	151	+	}
	152	+
	153	+	func (c *Clamp) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	154	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	155	+	}
	156	+
	157	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	158	+	func (x *Clamp) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	159	+
	160	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	161	+
	162	+	}
	163	+
	164	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	165	+	func (x *Clamp) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	166	+
	167	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	168	+
	169	+	}
	170	+
	171	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	172	+	func (x *Clamp) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	173	+
	174	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	175	+
	176	+	}
	177	+
	178	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	179	+	func (x *Clamp) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	180	+
	181	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	182	+
	183	+	}
	184	+
	185	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	186	+	//
	187	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	188	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	189	+	//
	190	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	191	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	192	+	// technologies.
	193	+	//
	194	+	// Example:
	195	+	// ```c
	196	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	197	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	198	+	//
	199	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	200	+	// -1);
	201	+	//
	202	+	// ```
	203	+	func (x *Clamp) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	204	+
	205	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	206	+
	207	+	}
	208	+
	209	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	210	+	//
	211	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	212	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	213	+	//
	214	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	215	+	func (x *Clamp) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	216	+
	217	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	218	+
	219	+	}
	220	+
	221	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	222	+	//
	223	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	224	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	225	+	//
	226	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	227	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	228	+	//
	229	+	// ```c
	230	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	231	+	//
	232	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	233	+	// ref1, NULL,
	234	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	235	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	236	+	// -1);
	237	+	//
	238	+	// ```
	239	+	func (x *Clamp) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	240	+
	241	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	242	+
	243	+	}
	244	+
	245	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	246	+	//
	247	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	248	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	249	+	//
	250	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	251	+	func (x *Clamp) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	252	+
	253	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	254	+
	255	+	}
	256	+
	257	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	258	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	259	+	//
	260	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	261	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	262	+	//
	263	+	// Example:
	264	+	// ```c
	265	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	266	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	267	+	//
	268	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	269	+	// -1);
	270	+	//
	271	+	// ```
	272	+	func (x *Clamp) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	273	+
	274	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	275	+
	276	+	}
	277	+
	278	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	279	+	//
	280	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	281	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	282	+	//
	283	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	284	+	func (x *Clamp) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	285	+
	286	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	287	+
	288	+	}
	289	+
	290	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	291	+	//
	292	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	293	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	294	+	func (x *Clamp) GetBuildableId() string {
	295	+
	296	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	297	+
	298	+	}
	299	+
	300	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	301	+	func (x *Clamp) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	302	+
	303	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	304	+
	305	+	}
	306	+
	307	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	308	+	func (x *Clamp) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	309	+
	310	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	311	+
	312	+	}
	313	+
	314	+	func init() {
	315	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	316	+	if err != nil {
	317	+	panic(err)
	318	+	}
	319	+
	320	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewClamp, lib, "adw_clamp_new")
	321	+
	322	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampGetChild, lib, "adw_clamp_get_child")
	323	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampGetMaximumSize, lib, "adw_clamp_get_maximum_size")
	324	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampGetTighteningThreshold, lib, "adw_clamp_get_tightening_threshold")
	325	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampSetChild, lib, "adw_clamp_set_child")
	326	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampSetMaximumSize, lib, "adw_clamp_set_maximum_size")
	327	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xClampSetTighteningThreshold, lib, "adw_clamp_set_tightening_threshold")
	328	+
	329	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-combo-row.go +533 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,533 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gio"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	type ComboRowClass struct {
	14	+	ParentClass uintptr
	15	+
	16	+	Padding uintptr
	17	+	}
	18	+
	19	+	// A [class@Gtk.ListBoxRow] used to choose from a list of items.
	20	+	//
	21	+	// <picture>
	22	+	//
	23	+	// <source srcset="combo-row-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	24	+	// <img src="combo-row.png" alt="combo-row">
	25	+	//
	26	+	// </picture>
	27	+	//
	28	+	// The `AdwComboRow` widget allows the user to choose from a list of valid
	29	+	// choices. The row displays the selected choice. When activated, the row
	30	+	// displays a popover which allows the user to make a new choice.
	31	+	//
	32	+	// Example of an `AdwComboRow` UI definition:
	33	+	// ```xml
	34	+	// <object class="AdwComboRow">
	35	+	//
	36	+	// <property name="title" translatable="yes">Combo Row</property>
	37	+	// <property name="model">
	38	+	// <object class="GtkStringList">
	39	+	// <items>
	40	+	// <item translatable="yes">Foo</item>
	41	+	// <item translatable="yes">Bar</item>
	42	+	// <item translatable="yes">Baz</item>
	43	+	// </items>
	44	+	// </object>
	45	+	// </property>
	46	+	//
	47	+	// </object>
	48	+	// ```
	49	+	//
	50	+	// The [property@ComboRow:selected] and [property@ComboRow:selected-item]
	51	+	// properties can be used to keep track of the selected item and react to their
	52	+	// changes.
	53	+	//
	54	+	// `AdwComboRow` mirrors [class@Gtk.DropDown], see that widget for details.
	55	+	//
	56	+	// `AdwComboRow` is [property@Gtk.ListBoxRow:activatable] if a model is set.
	57	+	//
	58	+	// ## CSS nodes
	59	+	//
	60	+	// `AdwComboRow` has a main CSS node with name `row` and the `.combo` style
	61	+	// class.
	62	+	//
	63	+	// Its popover has the node named `popover` with the `.menu` style class, it
	64	+	// contains a [class@Gtk.ScrolledWindow], which in turn contains a
	65	+	// [class@Gtk.ListView], both are accessible via their regular nodes.
	66	+	//
	67	+	// ## Accessibility
	68	+	//
	69	+	// `AdwComboRow` uses the `GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_COMBO_BOX` role.
	70	+	type ComboRow struct {
	71	+	ActionRow
	72	+	}
	73	+
	74	+	func ComboRowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *ComboRow {
	75	+	cls := &ComboRow{}
	76	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	77	+	return cls
	78	+	}
	79	+
	80	+	var xNewComboRow func() uintptr
	81	+
	82	+	// Creates a new `AdwComboRow`.
	83	+	func NewComboRow() *gtk.Widget {
	84	+	NewComboRowPtr := xNewComboRow()
	85	+	if NewComboRowPtr == 0 {
	86	+	return nil
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewComboRowPtr)
	90	+
	91	+	NewComboRowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	92	+	NewComboRowCls.Ptr = NewComboRowPtr
	93	+	return NewComboRowCls
	94	+	}
	95	+
	96	+	var xComboRowGetExpression func(uintptr) uintptr
	97	+
	98	+	// Gets the expression used to obtain strings from items.
	99	+	func (x ComboRow) GetExpression() gtk.Expression {
	100	+
	101	+	GetExpressionPtr := xComboRowGetExpression(x.GoPointer())
	102	+	if GetExpressionPtr == 0 {
	103	+	return nil
	104	+	}
	105	+
	106	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetExpressionPtr)
	107	+
	108	+	GetExpressionCls := &gtk.Expression{}
	109	+	GetExpressionCls.Ptr = GetExpressionPtr
	110	+	return GetExpressionCls
	111	+
	112	+	}
	113	+
	114	+	var xComboRowGetFactory func(uintptr) uintptr
	115	+
	116	+	// Gets the factory for populating list items.
	117	+	func (x ComboRow) GetFactory() gtk.ListItemFactory {
	118	+
	119	+	GetFactoryPtr := xComboRowGetFactory(x.GoPointer())
	120	+	if GetFactoryPtr == 0 {
	121	+	return nil
	122	+	}
	123	+
	124	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetFactoryPtr)
	125	+
	126	+	GetFactoryCls := &gtk.ListItemFactory{}
	127	+	GetFactoryCls.Ptr = GetFactoryPtr
	128	+	return GetFactoryCls
	129	+
	130	+	}
	131	+
	132	+	var xComboRowGetListFactory func(uintptr) uintptr
	133	+
	134	+	// Gets the factory for populating list items in the popup.
	135	+	func (x ComboRow) GetListFactory() gtk.ListItemFactory {
	136	+
	137	+	GetListFactoryPtr := xComboRowGetListFactory(x.GoPointer())
	138	+	if GetListFactoryPtr == 0 {
	139	+	return nil
	140	+	}
	141	+
	142	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetListFactoryPtr)
	143	+
	144	+	GetListFactoryCls := &gtk.ListItemFactory{}
	145	+	GetListFactoryCls.Ptr = GetListFactoryPtr
	146	+	return GetListFactoryCls
	147	+
	148	+	}
	149	+
	150	+	var xComboRowGetModel func(uintptr) uintptr
	151	+
	152	+	// Gets the model that provides the displayed items.
	153	+	func (x ComboRow) GetModel() gio.ListModelBase {
	154	+
	155	+	GetModelPtr := xComboRowGetModel(x.GoPointer())
	156	+	if GetModelPtr == 0 {
	157	+	return nil
	158	+	}
	159	+
	160	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetModelPtr)
	161	+
	162	+	GetModelCls := &gio.ListModelBase{}
	163	+	GetModelCls.Ptr = GetModelPtr
	164	+	return GetModelCls
	165	+
	166	+	}
	167	+
	168	+	var xComboRowGetSelected func(uintptr) uint
	169	+
	170	+	// Gets the position of the selected item.
	171	+	func (x *ComboRow) GetSelected() uint {
	172	+
	173	+	return xComboRowGetSelected(x.GoPointer())
	174	+
	175	+	}
	176	+
	177	+	var xComboRowGetSelectedItem func(uintptr) uintptr
	178	+
	179	+	// Gets the selected item.
	180	+	func (x ComboRow) GetSelectedItem() gobject.Object {
	181	+
	182	+	GetSelectedItemPtr := xComboRowGetSelectedItem(x.GoPointer())
	183	+	if GetSelectedItemPtr == 0 {
	184	+	return nil
	185	+	}
	186	+
	187	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetSelectedItemPtr)
	188	+
	189	+	GetSelectedItemCls := &gobject.Object{}
	190	+	GetSelectedItemCls.Ptr = GetSelectedItemPtr
	191	+	return GetSelectedItemCls
	192	+
	193	+	}
	194	+
	195	+	var xComboRowGetUseSubtitle func(uintptr) bool
	196	+
	197	+	// Gets whether to use the current value as the subtitle.
	198	+	func (x *ComboRow) GetUseSubtitle() bool {
	199	+
	200	+	return xComboRowGetUseSubtitle(x.GoPointer())
	201	+
	202	+	}
	203	+
	204	+	var xComboRowSetExpression func(uintptr, uintptr)
	205	+
	206	+	// Sets the expression used to obtain strings from items.
	207	+	//
	208	+	// The expression must have a value type of `G_TYPE_STRING`.
	209	+	//
	210	+	// It's used to bind strings to labels produced by the default factory if
	211	+	// [property@ComboRow:factory] is not set, or when
	212	+	// [property@ComboRow:use-subtitle] is set to `TRUE`.
	213	+	func (x ComboRow) SetExpression(ExpressionVar gtk.Expression) {
	214	+
	215	+	xComboRowSetExpression(x.GoPointer(), ExpressionVar.GoPointer())
	216	+
	217	+	}
	218	+
	219	+	var xComboRowSetFactory func(uintptr, uintptr)
	220	+
	221	+	// Sets the factory for populating list items.
	222	+	//
	223	+	// This factory is always used for the item in the row. It is also used for
	224	+	// items in the popup unless [property@ComboRow:list-factory] is set.
	225	+	func (x ComboRow) SetFactory(FactoryVar gtk.ListItemFactory) {
	226	+
	227	+	xComboRowSetFactory(x.GoPointer(), FactoryVar.GoPointer())
	228	+
	229	+	}
	230	+
	231	+	var xComboRowSetListFactory func(uintptr, uintptr)
	232	+
	233	+	// Sets the factory for populating list items in the popup.
	234	+	//
	235	+	// If this is not set, [property@ComboRow:factory] is used.
	236	+	func (x ComboRow) SetListFactory(FactoryVar gtk.ListItemFactory) {
	237	+
	238	+	xComboRowSetListFactory(x.GoPointer(), FactoryVar.GoPointer())
	239	+
	240	+	}
	241	+
	242	+	var xComboRowSetModel func(uintptr, uintptr)
	243	+
	244	+	// Sets the model that provides the displayed items.
	245	+	func (x *ComboRow) SetModel(ModelVar gio.ListModel) {
	246	+
	247	+	xComboRowSetModel(x.GoPointer(), ModelVar.GoPointer())
	248	+
	249	+	}
	250	+
	251	+	var xComboRowSetSelected func(uintptr, uint)
	252	+
	253	+	// Selects the item at the given position.
	254	+	func (x *ComboRow) SetSelected(PositionVar uint) {
	255	+
	256	+	xComboRowSetSelected(x.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	257	+
	258	+	}
	259	+
	260	+	var xComboRowSetUseSubtitle func(uintptr, bool)
	261	+
	262	+	// Sets whether to use the current value as the subtitle.
	263	+	//
	264	+	// If you use a custom list item factory, you will need to give the row a
	265	+	// name conversion expression with [property@ComboRow:expression].
	266	+	//
	267	+	// If set to `TRUE`, you should not access [property@ActionRow:subtitle].
	268	+	//
	269	+	// The subtitle is interpreted as Pango markup if
	270	+	// [property@PreferencesRow:use-markup] is set to `TRUE`.
	271	+	func (x *ComboRow) SetUseSubtitle(UseSubtitleVar bool) {
	272	+
	273	+	xComboRowSetUseSubtitle(x.GoPointer(), UseSubtitleVar)
	274	+
	275	+	}
	276	+
	277	+	func (c *ComboRow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	278	+	return c.Ptr
	279	+	}
	280	+
	281	+	func (c *ComboRow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	282	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	283	+	}
	284	+
	285	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	286	+	func (x *ComboRow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	287	+
	288	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	289	+
	290	+	}
	291	+
	292	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	293	+	func (x *ComboRow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	294	+
	295	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	296	+
	297	+	}
	298	+
	299	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	300	+	func (x *ComboRow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	301	+
	302	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	303	+
	304	+	}
	305	+
	306	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	307	+	func (x *ComboRow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	308	+
	309	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	310	+
	311	+	}
	312	+
	313	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	314	+	//
	315	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	316	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	317	+	//
	318	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	319	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	320	+	// technologies.
	321	+	//
	322	+	// Example:
	323	+	// ```c
	324	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	325	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	326	+	//
	327	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	328	+	// -1);
	329	+	//
	330	+	// ```
	331	+	func (x *ComboRow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	332	+
	333	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	334	+
	335	+	}
	336	+
	337	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	338	+	//
	339	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	340	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	341	+	//
	342	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	343	+	func (x *ComboRow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	344	+
	345	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	346	+
	347	+	}
	348	+
	349	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	350	+	//
	351	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	352	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	353	+	//
	354	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	355	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	356	+	//
	357	+	// ```c
	358	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	359	+	//
	360	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	361	+	// ref1, NULL,
	362	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	363	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	364	+	// -1);
	365	+	//
	366	+	// ```
	367	+	func (x *ComboRow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	368	+
	369	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	370	+
	371	+	}
	372	+
	373	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	374	+	//
	375	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	376	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	377	+	//
	378	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	379	+	func (x *ComboRow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	380	+
	381	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	382	+
	383	+	}
	384	+
	385	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	386	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	387	+	//
	388	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	389	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	390	+	//
	391	+	// Example:
	392	+	// ```c
	393	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	394	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	395	+	//
	396	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	397	+	// -1);
	398	+	//
	399	+	// ```
	400	+	func (x *ComboRow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	401	+
	402	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	403	+
	404	+	}
	405	+
	406	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	407	+	//
	408	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	409	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	410	+	//
	411	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	412	+	func (x *ComboRow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	413	+
	414	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	415	+
	416	+	}
	417	+
	418	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	419	+	func (x *ComboRow) GetActionName() string {
	420	+
	421	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	422	+
	423	+	}
	424	+
	425	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	426	+	func (x ComboRow) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	427	+
	428	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	429	+
	430	+	}
	431	+
	432	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	433	+	// associated.
	434	+	//
	435	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	436	+	// any previous action.
	437	+	//
	438	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	439	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	440	+	//
	441	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	442	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	443	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	444	+	// associated with the window.
	445	+	func (x *ComboRow) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	446	+
	447	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	448	+
	449	+	}
	450	+
	451	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	452	+	//
	453	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	454	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	455	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	456	+	//
	457	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	458	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	459	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	460	+	func (x *ComboRow) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	461	+
	462	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	463	+
	464	+	}
	465	+
	466	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	467	+	//
	468	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	469	+	//
	470	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	471	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	472	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	473	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	474	+	//
	475	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	476	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	477	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	478	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	479	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	480	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	481	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	482	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	483	+	// rendered inactive).
	484	+	func (x ComboRow) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	485	+
	486	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	487	+
	488	+	}
	489	+
	490	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	491	+	// actionable widget.
	492	+	//
	493	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	494	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	495	+	func (x *ComboRow) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	496	+
	497	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	498	+
	499	+	}
	500	+
	501	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	502	+	//
	503	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	504	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	505	+	func (x *ComboRow) GetBuildableId() string {
	506	+
	507	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	508	+
	509	+	}
	510	+
	511	+	func init() {
	512	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	513	+	if err != nil {
	514	+	panic(err)
	515	+	}
	516	+
	517	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewComboRow, lib, "adw_combo_row_new")
	518	+
	519	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowGetExpression, lib, "adw_combo_row_get_expression")
	520	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowGetFactory, lib, "adw_combo_row_get_factory")
	521	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowGetListFactory, lib, "adw_combo_row_get_list_factory")
	522	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowGetModel, lib, "adw_combo_row_get_model")
	523	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowGetSelected, lib, "adw_combo_row_get_selected")
	524	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowGetSelectedItem, lib, "adw_combo_row_get_selected_item")
	525	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowGetUseSubtitle, lib, "adw_combo_row_get_use_subtitle")
	526	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowSetExpression, lib, "adw_combo_row_set_expression")
	527	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowSetFactory, lib, "adw_combo_row_set_factory")
	528	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowSetListFactory, lib, "adw_combo_row_set_list_factory")
	529	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowSetModel, lib, "adw_combo_row_set_model")
	530	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowSetSelected, lib, "adw_combo_row_set_selected")
	531	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xComboRowSetUseSubtitle, lib, "adw_combo_row_set_use_subtitle")
	532	+
	533	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-easing.go +114 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	)
	8	+
	9	+	// Describes the available easing functions for use with
	10	+	// [class@TimedAnimation].
	11	+	//
	12	+	// New values may be added to this enumeration over time.
	13	+	type Easing int
	14	+
	15	+	const (
	16	+
	17	+	// Linear tweening.
	18	+	LinearValue Easing = 0
	19	+	// Quadratic tweening.
	20	+	EaseInQuadValue Easing = 1
	21	+	// Quadratic tweening, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_QUAD`.
	22	+	EaseOutQuadValue Easing = 2
	23	+	// Quadratic tweening, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_QUAD` and
	24	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_QUAD`.
	25	+	EaseInOutQuadValue Easing = 3
	26	+	// Cubic tweening.
	27	+	EaseInCubicValue Easing = 4
	28	+	// Cubic tweening, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_CUBIC`.
	29	+	EaseOutCubicValue Easing = 5
	30	+	// Cubic tweening, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_CUBIC` and
	31	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_CUBIC`.
	32	+	EaseInOutCubicValue Easing = 6
	33	+	// Quartic tweening.
	34	+	EaseInQuartValue Easing = 7
	35	+	// Quartic tweening, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_QUART`.
	36	+	EaseOutQuartValue Easing = 8
	37	+	// Quartic tweening, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_QUART` and
	38	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_QUART`.
	39	+	EaseInOutQuartValue Easing = 9
	40	+	// Quintic tweening.
	41	+	EaseInQuintValue Easing = 10
	42	+	// Quintic tweening, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_QUINT`.
	43	+	EaseOutQuintValue Easing = 11
	44	+	// Quintic tweening, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_QUINT` and
	45	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_QUINT`.
	46	+	EaseInOutQuintValue Easing = 12
	47	+	// Sine wave tweening.
	48	+	EaseInSineValue Easing = 13
	49	+	// Sine wave tweening, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_SINE`.
	50	+	EaseOutSineValue Easing = 14
	51	+	// Sine wave tweening, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_SINE` and
	52	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_SINE`.
	53	+	EaseInOutSineValue Easing = 15
	54	+	// Exponential tweening.
	55	+	EaseInExpoValue Easing = 16
	56	+	// Exponential tweening, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_EXPO`.
	57	+	EaseOutExpoValue Easing = 17
	58	+	// Exponential tweening, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_EXPO` and
	59	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_EXPO`.
	60	+	EaseInOutExpoValue Easing = 18
	61	+	// Circular tweening.
	62	+	EaseInCircValue Easing = 19
	63	+	// Circular tweening, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_CIRC`.
	64	+	EaseOutCircValue Easing = 20
	65	+	// Circular tweening, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_CIRC` and
	66	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_CIRC`.
	67	+	EaseInOutCircValue Easing = 21
	68	+	// Elastic tweening, with offshoot on start.
	69	+	EaseInElasticValue Easing = 22
	70	+	// Elastic tweening, with offshoot on end, inverse of
	71	+	// `ADW_EASE_IN_ELASTIC`.
	72	+	EaseOutElasticValue Easing = 23
	73	+	// Elastic tweening, with offshoot on both ends,
	74	+	// combining `ADW_EASE_IN_ELASTIC` and `ADW_EASE_OUT_ELASTIC`.
	75	+	EaseInOutElasticValue Easing = 24
	76	+	// Overshooting cubic tweening, with backtracking on start.
	77	+	EaseInBackValue Easing = 25
	78	+	// Overshooting cubic tweening, with backtracking on end,
	79	+	// inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_BACK`.
	80	+	EaseOutBackValue Easing = 26
	81	+	// Overshooting cubic tweening, with backtracking on both
	82	+	// ends, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_BACK` and `ADW_EASE_OUT_BACK`.
	83	+	EaseInOutBackValue Easing = 27
	84	+	// Exponentially decaying parabolic (bounce) tweening,
	85	+	// on start.
	86	+	EaseInBounceValue Easing = 28
	87	+	// Exponentially decaying parabolic (bounce) tweening,
	88	+	// with bounce on end, inverse of `ADW_EASE_IN_BOUNCE`.
	89	+	EaseOutBounceValue Easing = 29
	90	+	// Exponentially decaying parabolic (bounce) tweening,
	91	+	// with bounce on both ends, combining `ADW_EASE_IN_BOUNCE` and
	92	+	// `ADW_EASE_OUT_BOUNCE`.
	93	+	EaseInOutBounceValue Easing = 30
	94	+	)
	95	+
	96	+	var xEasingEase func(Easing, float64) float64
	97	+
	98	+	// Computes easing with @easing for @value.
	99	+	//
	100	+	// @value should generally be in the [0, 1] range.
	101	+	func EasingEase(SelfVar Easing, ValueVar float64) float64 {
	102	+
	103	+	return xEasingEase(SelfVar, ValueVar)
	104	+
	105	+	}
	106	+
	107	+	func init() {
	108	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	109	+	if err != nil {
	110	+	panic(err)
	111	+	}
	112	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEasingEase, lib, "adw_easing_ease")
	113	+
	114	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-entry-row.go +772 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,772 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/pango"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	type EntryRowClass struct {
	14	+	ParentClass uintptr
	15	+	}
	16	+
	17	+	// A [class@Gtk.ListBoxRow] with an embedded text entry.
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <picture>
	20	+	//
	21	+	// <source srcset="entry-row-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	22	+	// <img src="entry-row.png" alt="entry-row">
	23	+	//
	24	+	// </picture>
	25	+	//
	26	+	// `AdwEntryRow` has a title that doubles as placeholder text. It shows an icon
	27	+	// indicating that it's editable and can receive additional widgets before or
	28	+	// after the editable part.
	29	+	//
	30	+	// If [property@EntryRow:show-apply-button] is set to `TRUE`, `AdwEntryRow` can
	31	+	// show an apply button when editing its contents. This can be useful if
	32	+	// changing its contents can result in an expensive operation, such as network
	33	+	// activity.
	34	+	//
	35	+	// `AdwEntryRow` provides only minimal API and should be used with the
	36	+	// [iface@Gtk.Editable] API.
	37	+	//
	38	+	// See also [class@PasswordEntryRow].
	39	+	//
	40	+	// ## AdwEntryRow as GtkBuildable
	41	+	//
	42	+	// The `AdwEntryRow` implementation of the [iface@Gtk.Buildable] interface
	43	+	// supports adding a child at its end by specifying “suffix” or omitting the
	44	+	// “type” attribute of a <child> element.
	45	+	//
	46	+	// It also supports adding a child as a prefix widget by specifying “prefix” as
	47	+	// the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
	48	+	//
	49	+	// ## CSS nodes
	50	+	//
	51	+	// `AdwEntryRow` has a single CSS node with name `row` and the `.entry` style
	52	+	// class.
	53	+	type EntryRow struct {
	54	+	PreferencesRow
	55	+	}
	56	+
	57	+	func EntryRowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *EntryRow {
	58	+	cls := &EntryRow{}
	59	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	60	+	return cls
	61	+	}
	62	+
	63	+	var xNewEntryRow func() uintptr
	64	+
	65	+	// Creates a new `AdwEntryRow`.
	66	+	func NewEntryRow() *gtk.Widget {
	67	+	NewEntryRowPtr := xNewEntryRow()
	68	+	if NewEntryRowPtr == 0 {
	69	+	return nil
	70	+	}
	71	+
	72	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewEntryRowPtr)
	73	+
	74	+	NewEntryRowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	75	+	NewEntryRowCls.Ptr = NewEntryRowPtr
	76	+	return NewEntryRowCls
	77	+	}
	78	+
	79	+	var xEntryRowAddPrefix func(uintptr, uintptr)
	80	+
	81	+	// Adds a prefix widget to @self.
	82	+	func (x EntryRow) AddPrefix(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	83	+
	84	+	xEntryRowAddPrefix(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	85	+
	86	+	}
	87	+
	88	+	var xEntryRowAddSuffix func(uintptr, uintptr)
	89	+
	90	+	// Adds a suffix widget to @self.
	91	+	func (x EntryRow) AddSuffix(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	92	+
	93	+	xEntryRowAddSuffix(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	94	+
	95	+	}
	96	+
	97	+	var xEntryRowGetActivatesDefault func(uintptr) bool
	98	+
	99	+	// Gets whether activating the embedded entry can activate the default widget.
	100	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetActivatesDefault() bool {
	101	+
	102	+	return xEntryRowGetActivatesDefault(x.GoPointer())
	103	+
	104	+	}
	105	+
	106	+	var xEntryRowGetAttributes func(uintptr) *pango.AttrList
	107	+
	108	+	// Gets Pango attributes applied to the text of the embedded entry.
	109	+	func (x EntryRow) GetAttributes() pango.AttrList {
	110	+
	111	+	return xEntryRowGetAttributes(x.GoPointer())
	112	+
	113	+	}
	114	+
	115	+	var xEntryRowGetEnableEmojiCompletion func(uintptr) bool
	116	+
	117	+	// Gets whether to suggest emoji replacements on @self.
	118	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetEnableEmojiCompletion() bool {
	119	+
	120	+	return xEntryRowGetEnableEmojiCompletion(x.GoPointer())
	121	+
	122	+	}
	123	+
	124	+	var xEntryRowGetInputHints func(uintptr) gtk.InputHints
	125	+
	126	+	// Gets the additional input hints of @self.
	127	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetInputHints() gtk.InputHints {
	128	+
	129	+	return xEntryRowGetInputHints(x.GoPointer())
	130	+
	131	+	}
	132	+
	133	+	var xEntryRowGetInputPurpose func(uintptr) gtk.InputPurpose
	134	+
	135	+	// Gets the input purpose of @self.
	136	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetInputPurpose() gtk.InputPurpose {
	137	+
	138	+	return xEntryRowGetInputPurpose(x.GoPointer())
	139	+
	140	+	}
	141	+
	142	+	var xEntryRowGetShowApplyButton func(uintptr) bool
	143	+
	144	+	// Gets whether @self can show the apply button.
	145	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetShowApplyButton() bool {
	146	+
	147	+	return xEntryRowGetShowApplyButton(x.GoPointer())
	148	+
	149	+	}
	150	+
	151	+	var xEntryRowGrabFocusWithoutSelecting func(uintptr) bool
	152	+
	153	+	// Causes @self to have keyboard focus without selecting the text.
	154	+	//
	155	+	// See [method@Gtk.Text.grab_focus_without_selecting] for more information.
	156	+	func (x *EntryRow) GrabFocusWithoutSelecting() bool {
	157	+
	158	+	return xEntryRowGrabFocusWithoutSelecting(x.GoPointer())
	159	+
	160	+	}
	161	+
	162	+	var xEntryRowRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	163	+
	164	+	// Removes a child from @self.
	165	+	func (x EntryRow) Remove(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	166	+
	167	+	xEntryRowRemove(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	168	+
	169	+	}
	170	+
	171	+	var xEntryRowSetActivatesDefault func(uintptr, bool)
	172	+
	173	+	// Sets whether activating the embedded entry can activate the default widget.
	174	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetActivatesDefault(ActivatesVar bool) {
	175	+
	176	+	xEntryRowSetActivatesDefault(x.GoPointer(), ActivatesVar)
	177	+
	178	+	}
	179	+
	180	+	var xEntryRowSetAttributes func(uintptr, *pango.AttrList)
	181	+
	182	+	// Sets Pango attributes to apply to the text of the embedded entry.
	183	+	//
	184	+	// The [struct@Pango.Attribute]'s `start_index` and `end_index` must refer to
	185	+	// the [class@Gtk.EntryBuffer] text, i.e. without the preedit string.
	186	+	func (x EntryRow) SetAttributes(AttributesVar pango.AttrList) {
	187	+
	188	+	xEntryRowSetAttributes(x.GoPointer(), AttributesVar)
	189	+
	190	+	}
	191	+
	192	+	var xEntryRowSetEnableEmojiCompletion func(uintptr, bool)
	193	+
	194	+	// Sets whether to suggest emoji replacements on @self.
	195	+	//
	196	+	// Emoji replacement is done with :-delimited names, like `:heart:`.
	197	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetEnableEmojiCompletion(EnableEmojiCompletionVar bool) {
	198	+
	199	+	xEntryRowSetEnableEmojiCompletion(x.GoPointer(), EnableEmojiCompletionVar)
	200	+
	201	+	}
	202	+
	203	+	var xEntryRowSetInputHints func(uintptr, gtk.InputHints)
	204	+
	205	+	// Set additional input hints for @self.
	206	+	//
	207	+	// Input hints allow input methods to fine-tune their behavior.
	208	+	//
	209	+	// See also: [property@AdwEntryRow:input-purpose]
	210	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetInputHints(HintsVar gtk.InputHints) {
	211	+
	212	+	xEntryRowSetInputHints(x.GoPointer(), HintsVar)
	213	+
	214	+	}
	215	+
	216	+	var xEntryRowSetInputPurpose func(uintptr, gtk.InputPurpose)
	217	+
	218	+	// Sets the input purpose of @self.
	219	+	//
	220	+	// The input purpose can be used by input methods to adjust their behavior.
	221	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetInputPurpose(PurposeVar gtk.InputPurpose) {
	222	+
	223	+	xEntryRowSetInputPurpose(x.GoPointer(), PurposeVar)
	224	+
	225	+	}
	226	+
	227	+	var xEntryRowSetShowApplyButton func(uintptr, bool)
	228	+
	229	+	// Sets whether @self can show the apply button.
	230	+	//
	231	+	// When set to `TRUE`, typing text in the entry will reveal an apply button.
	232	+	// Clicking it or pressing the <kbd>Enter</kbd> key will hide the button and
	233	+	// emit the [signal@EntryRow::apply] signal.
	234	+	//
	235	+	// This is useful if changing the entry contents can trigger an expensive
	236	+	// operation, e.g. network activity, to avoid triggering it after typing every
	237	+	// character.
	238	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetShowApplyButton(ShowApplyButtonVar bool) {
	239	+
	240	+	xEntryRowSetShowApplyButton(x.GoPointer(), ShowApplyButtonVar)
	241	+
	242	+	}
	243	+
	244	+	func (c *EntryRow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	245	+	return c.Ptr
	246	+	}
	247	+
	248	+	func (c *EntryRow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	249	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	250	+	}
	251	+
	252	+	// Emitted when the apply button is pressed.
	253	+	//
	254	+	// See [property@EntryRow:show-apply-button].
	255	+	func (x *EntryRow) ConnectApply(cb func(EntryRow)) {
	256	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr) {
	257	+	fa := EntryRow{}
	258	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	259	+
	260	+	cb(fa)
	261	+
	262	+	}
	263	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::apply", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	264	+	}
	265	+
	266	+	// Emitted when the embedded entry is activated.
	267	+	func (x *EntryRow) ConnectEntryActivated(cb func(EntryRow)) {
	268	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr) {
	269	+	fa := EntryRow{}
	270	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	271	+
	272	+	cb(fa)
	273	+
	274	+	}
	275	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::entry-activated", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	276	+	}
	277	+
	278	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	279	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	280	+
	281	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	282	+
	283	+	}
	284	+
	285	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	286	+	func (x *EntryRow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	287	+
	288	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	289	+
	290	+	}
	291	+
	292	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	293	+	func (x *EntryRow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	294	+
	295	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	296	+
	297	+	}
	298	+
	299	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	300	+	func (x *EntryRow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	301	+
	302	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	303	+
	304	+	}
	305	+
	306	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	307	+	//
	308	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	309	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	310	+	//
	311	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	312	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	313	+	// technologies.
	314	+	//
	315	+	// Example:
	316	+	// ```c
	317	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	318	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	319	+	//
	320	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	321	+	// -1);
	322	+	//
	323	+	// ```
	324	+	func (x *EntryRow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	325	+
	326	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	327	+
	328	+	}
	329	+
	330	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	331	+	//
	332	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	333	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	334	+	//
	335	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	336	+	func (x *EntryRow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	337	+
	338	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	339	+
	340	+	}
	341	+
	342	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	343	+	//
	344	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	345	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	346	+	//
	347	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	348	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	349	+	//
	350	+	// ```c
	351	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	352	+	//
	353	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	354	+	// ref1, NULL,
	355	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	356	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	357	+	// -1);
	358	+	//
	359	+	// ```
	360	+	func (x *EntryRow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	361	+
	362	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	363	+
	364	+	}
	365	+
	366	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	367	+	//
	368	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	369	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	370	+	//
	371	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	372	+	func (x *EntryRow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	373	+
	374	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	375	+
	376	+	}
	377	+
	378	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	379	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	380	+	//
	381	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	382	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	383	+	//
	384	+	// Example:
	385	+	// ```c
	386	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	387	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	388	+	//
	389	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	390	+	// -1);
	391	+	//
	392	+	// ```
	393	+	func (x *EntryRow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	394	+
	395	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	396	+
	397	+	}
	398	+
	399	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	400	+	//
	401	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	402	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	403	+	//
	404	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	405	+	func (x *EntryRow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	406	+
	407	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	408	+
	409	+	}
	410	+
	411	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	412	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetActionName() string {
	413	+
	414	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	415	+
	416	+	}
	417	+
	418	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	419	+	func (x EntryRow) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	420	+
	421	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	422	+
	423	+	}
	424	+
	425	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	426	+	// associated.
	427	+	//
	428	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	429	+	// any previous action.
	430	+	//
	431	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	432	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	433	+	//
	434	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	435	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	436	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	437	+	// associated with the window.
	438	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	439	+
	440	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	441	+
	442	+	}
	443	+
	444	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	445	+	//
	446	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	447	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	448	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	449	+	//
	450	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	451	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	452	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	453	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	454	+
	455	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	456	+
	457	+	}
	458	+
	459	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	460	+	//
	461	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	462	+	//
	463	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	464	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	465	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	466	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	467	+	//
	468	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	469	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	470	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	471	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	472	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	473	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	474	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	475	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	476	+	// rendered inactive).
	477	+	func (x EntryRow) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	478	+
	479	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	480	+
	481	+	}
	482	+
	483	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	484	+	// actionable widget.
	485	+	//
	486	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	487	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	488	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	489	+
	490	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	491	+
	492	+	}
	493	+
	494	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	495	+	//
	496	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	497	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	498	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetBuildableId() string {
	499	+
	500	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	501	+
	502	+	}
	503	+
	504	+	// Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
	505	+	//
	506	+	// This call doesn’t do anything if there is no selected text.
	507	+	func (x *EntryRow) DeleteSelection() {
	508	+
	509	+	gtk.XGtkEditableDeleteSelection(x.GoPointer())
	510	+
	511	+	}
	512	+
	513	+	// Deletes a sequence of characters.
	514	+	//
	515	+	// The characters that are deleted are those characters at positions
	516	+	// from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos. If @end_pos is
	517	+	// negative, then the characters deleted are those from @start_pos to
	518	+	// the end of the text.
	519	+	//
	520	+	// Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	521	+	func (x *EntryRow) DeleteText(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) {
	522	+
	523	+	gtk.XGtkEditableDeleteText(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	524	+
	525	+	}
	526	+
	527	+	// Undoes the setup done by [method@Gtk.Editable.init_delegate].
	528	+	//
	529	+	// This is a helper function that should be called from dispose,
	530	+	// before removing the delegate object.
	531	+	func (x *EntryRow) FinishDelegate() {
	532	+
	533	+	gtk.XGtkEditableFinishDelegate(x.GoPointer())
	534	+
	535	+	}
	536	+
	537	+	// Gets the alignment of the editable.
	538	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetAlignment() float32 {
	539	+
	540	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetAlignment(x.GoPointer())
	541	+
	542	+	}
	543	+
	544	+	// Retrieves a sequence of characters.
	545	+	//
	546	+	// The characters that are retrieved are those characters at positions
	547	+	// from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos. If @end_pos is negative,
	548	+	// then the characters retrieved are those characters from @start_pos to
	549	+	// the end of the text.
	550	+	//
	551	+	// Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	552	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetChars(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) string {
	553	+
	554	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetChars(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	555	+
	556	+	}
	557	+
	558	+	// Gets the `GtkEditable` that @editable is delegating its
	559	+	// implementation to.
	560	+	//
	561	+	// Typically, the delegate is a [class@Gtk.Text] widget.
	562	+	func (x EntryRow) GetDelegate() gtk.EditableBase {
	563	+
	564	+	GetDelegatePtr := gtk.XGtkEditableGetDelegate(x.GoPointer())
	565	+	if GetDelegatePtr == 0 {
	566	+	return nil
	567	+	}
	568	+
	569	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetDelegatePtr)
	570	+
	571	+	GetDelegateCls := &gtk.EditableBase{}
	572	+	GetDelegateCls.Ptr = GetDelegatePtr
	573	+	return GetDelegateCls
	574	+
	575	+	}
	576	+
	577	+	// Retrieves whether @editable is editable.
	578	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetEditable() bool {
	579	+
	580	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetEditable(x.GoPointer())
	581	+
	582	+	}
	583	+
	584	+	// Gets if undo/redo actions are enabled for @editable
	585	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetEnableUndo() bool {
	586	+
	587	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetEnableUndo(x.GoPointer())
	588	+
	589	+	}
	590	+
	591	+	// Retrieves the desired maximum width of @editable, in characters.
	592	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetMaxWidthChars() int32 {
	593	+
	594	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetMaxWidthChars(x.GoPointer())
	595	+
	596	+	}
	597	+
	598	+	// Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative
	599	+	// to the start of the content of the editable.
	600	+	//
	601	+	// Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
	602	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetPosition() int32 {
	603	+
	604	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetPosition(x.GoPointer())
	605	+
	606	+	}
	607	+
	608	+	// Retrieves the selection bound of the editable.
	609	+	//
	610	+	// @start_pos will be filled with the start of the selection and
	611	+	// @end_pos with end. If no text was selected both will be identical
	612	+	// and %FALSE will be returned.
	613	+	//
	614	+	// Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	615	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetSelectionBounds(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) bool {
	616	+
	617	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetSelectionBounds(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	618	+
	619	+	}
	620	+
	621	+	// Retrieves the contents of @editable.
	622	+	//
	623	+	// The returned string is owned by GTK and must not be modified or freed.
	624	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetText() string {
	625	+
	626	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetText(x.GoPointer())
	627	+
	628	+	}
	629	+
	630	+	// Gets the number of characters of space reserved
	631	+	// for the contents of the editable.
	632	+	func (x *EntryRow) GetWidthChars() int32 {
	633	+
	634	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetWidthChars(x.GoPointer())
	635	+
	636	+	}
	637	+
	638	+	// Sets up a delegate for `GtkEditable`.
	639	+	//
	640	+	// This is assuming that the get_delegate vfunc in the `GtkEditable`
	641	+	// interface has been set up for the @editable's type.
	642	+	//
	643	+	// This is a helper function that should be called in instance init,
	644	+	// after creating the delegate object.
	645	+	func (x *EntryRow) InitDelegate() {
	646	+
	647	+	gtk.XGtkEditableInitDelegate(x.GoPointer())
	648	+
	649	+	}
	650	+
	651	+	// Inserts @length bytes of @text into the contents of the
	652	+	// widget, at position @position.
	653	+	//
	654	+	// Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
	655	+	// The function updates @position to point after the newly
	656	+	// inserted text.
	657	+	func (x *EntryRow) InsertText(TextVar string, LengthVar int32, PositionVar int32) {
	658	+
	659	+	gtk.XGtkEditableInsertText(x.GoPointer(), TextVar, LengthVar, PositionVar)
	660	+
	661	+	}
	662	+
	663	+	// Selects a region of text.
	664	+	//
	665	+	// The characters that are selected are those characters at positions
	666	+	// from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos. If @end_pos is
	667	+	// negative, then the characters selected are those characters from
	668	+	// @start_pos to the end of the text.
	669	+	//
	670	+	// Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	671	+	func (x *EntryRow) SelectRegion(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) {
	672	+
	673	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSelectRegion(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	674	+
	675	+	}
	676	+
	677	+	// Sets the alignment for the contents of the editable.
	678	+	//
	679	+	// This controls the horizontal positioning of the contents when
	680	+	// the displayed text is shorter than the width of the editable.
	681	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetAlignment(XalignVar float32) {
	682	+
	683	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetAlignment(x.GoPointer(), XalignVar)
	684	+
	685	+	}
	686	+
	687	+	// Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable widget.
	688	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetEditable(IsEditableVar bool) {
	689	+
	690	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetEditable(x.GoPointer(), IsEditableVar)
	691	+
	692	+	}
	693	+
	694	+	// If enabled, changes to @editable will be saved for undo/redo
	695	+	// actions.
	696	+	//
	697	+	// This results in an additional copy of text changes and are not
	698	+	// stored in secure memory. As such, undo is forcefully disabled
	699	+	// when [property@Gtk.Text:visibility] is set to %FALSE.
	700	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetEnableUndo(EnableUndoVar bool) {
	701	+
	702	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetEnableUndo(x.GoPointer(), EnableUndoVar)
	703	+
	704	+	}
	705	+
	706	+	// Sets the desired maximum width in characters of @editable.
	707	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetMaxWidthChars(NCharsVar int32) {
	708	+
	709	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetMaxWidthChars(x.GoPointer(), NCharsVar)
	710	+
	711	+	}
	712	+
	713	+	// Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
	714	+	//
	715	+	// The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
	716	+	// index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than
	717	+	// or equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
	718	+	// indicates that the position should be set after the last character
	719	+	// of the editable. Note that @position is in characters, not in bytes.
	720	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetPosition(PositionVar int32) {
	721	+
	722	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetPosition(x.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	723	+
	724	+	}
	725	+
	726	+	// Sets the text in the editable to the given value.
	727	+	//
	728	+	// This is replacing the current contents.
	729	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetText(TextVar string) {
	730	+
	731	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetText(x.GoPointer(), TextVar)
	732	+
	733	+	}
	734	+
	735	+	// Changes the size request of the editable to be about the
	736	+	// right size for @n_chars characters.
	737	+	//
	738	+	// Note that it changes the size request, the size can still
	739	+	// be affected by how you pack the widget into containers.
	740	+	// If @n_chars is -1, the size reverts to the default size.
	741	+	func (x *EntryRow) SetWidthChars(NCharsVar int32) {
	742	+
	743	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetWidthChars(x.GoPointer(), NCharsVar)
	744	+
	745	+	}
	746	+
	747	+	func init() {
	748	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	749	+	if err != nil {
	750	+	panic(err)
	751	+	}
	752	+
	753	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewEntryRow, lib, "adw_entry_row_new")
	754	+
	755	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowAddPrefix, lib, "adw_entry_row_add_prefix")
	756	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowAddSuffix, lib, "adw_entry_row_add_suffix")
	757	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowGetActivatesDefault, lib, "adw_entry_row_get_activates_default")
	758	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowGetAttributes, lib, "adw_entry_row_get_attributes")
	759	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowGetEnableEmojiCompletion, lib, "adw_entry_row_get_enable_emoji_completion")
	760	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowGetInputHints, lib, "adw_entry_row_get_input_hints")
	761	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowGetInputPurpose, lib, "adw_entry_row_get_input_purpose")
	762	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowGetShowApplyButton, lib, "adw_entry_row_get_show_apply_button")
	763	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowGrabFocusWithoutSelecting, lib, "adw_entry_row_grab_focus_without_selecting")
	764	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowRemove, lib, "adw_entry_row_remove")
	765	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowSetActivatesDefault, lib, "adw_entry_row_set_activates_default")
	766	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowSetAttributes, lib, "adw_entry_row_set_attributes")
	767	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowSetEnableEmojiCompletion, lib, "adw_entry_row_set_enable_emoji_completion")
	768	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowSetInputHints, lib, "adw_entry_row_set_input_hints")
	769	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowSetInputPurpose, lib, "adw_entry_row_set_input_purpose")
	770	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEntryRowSetShowApplyButton, lib, "adw_entry_row_set_show_apply_button")
	771	+
	772	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-enum-list-model.go +224 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gio"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type EnumListItemClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	type EnumListModelClass struct {
	16	+	ParentClass uintptr
	17	+	}
	18	+
	19	+	// `AdwEnumListItem` is the type of items in a [class@EnumListModel].
	20	+	type EnumListItem struct {
	21	+	gobject.Object
	22	+	}
	23	+
	24	+	func EnumListItemNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *EnumListItem {
	25	+	cls := &EnumListItem{}
	26	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	27	+	return cls
	28	+	}
	29	+
	30	+	var xEnumListItemGetName func(uintptr) string
	31	+
	32	+	// Gets the enum value name.
	33	+	func (x *EnumListItem) GetName() string {
	34	+
	35	+	return xEnumListItemGetName(x.GoPointer())
	36	+
	37	+	}
	38	+
	39	+	var xEnumListItemGetNick func(uintptr) string
	40	+
	41	+	// Gets the enum value nick.
	42	+	func (x *EnumListItem) GetNick() string {
	43	+
	44	+	return xEnumListItemGetNick(x.GoPointer())
	45	+
	46	+	}
	47	+
	48	+	var xEnumListItemGetValue func(uintptr) int32
	49	+
	50	+	// Gets the enum value.
	51	+	func (x *EnumListItem) GetValue() int32 {
	52	+
	53	+	return xEnumListItemGetValue(x.GoPointer())
	54	+
	55	+	}
	56	+
	57	+	func (c *EnumListItem) GoPointer() uintptr {
	58	+	return c.Ptr
	59	+	}
	60	+
	61	+	func (c *EnumListItem) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	62	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	63	+	}
	64	+
	65	+	// A [iface@Gio.ListModel] representing values of a given enum.
	66	+	//
	67	+	// `AdwEnumListModel` contains objects of type [class@EnumListItem].
	68	+	type EnumListModel struct {
	69	+	gobject.Object
	70	+	}
	71	+
	72	+	func EnumListModelNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *EnumListModel {
	73	+	cls := &EnumListModel{}
	74	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	75	+	return cls
	76	+	}
	77	+
	78	+	var xNewEnumListModel func([]interface{}) uintptr
	79	+
	80	+	// Creates a new `AdwEnumListModel` for @enum_type.
	81	+	func NewEnumListModel(EnumTypeVar []interface{}) *EnumListModel {
	82	+	NewEnumListModelPtr := xNewEnumListModel(EnumTypeVar)
	83	+	if NewEnumListModelPtr == 0 {
	84	+	return nil
	85	+	}
	86	+
	87	+	NewEnumListModelCls := &EnumListModel{}
	88	+	NewEnumListModelCls.Ptr = NewEnumListModelPtr
	89	+	return NewEnumListModelCls
	90	+	}
	91	+
	92	+	var xEnumListModelFindPosition func(uintptr, int32) uint
	93	+
	94	+	// Finds the position of a given enum value in @self.
	95	+	func (x *EnumListModel) FindPosition(ValueVar int32) uint {
	96	+
	97	+	return xEnumListModelFindPosition(x.GoPointer(), ValueVar)
	98	+
	99	+	}
	100	+
	101	+	var xEnumListModelGetEnumType func(uintptr) []interface{}
	102	+
	103	+	// Gets the type of the enum represented by @self.
	104	+	func (x *EnumListModel) GetEnumType() []interface{} {
	105	+
	106	+	return xEnumListModelGetEnumType(x.GoPointer())
	107	+
	108	+	}
	109	+
	110	+	func (c *EnumListModel) GoPointer() uintptr {
	111	+	return c.Ptr
	112	+	}
	113	+
	114	+	func (c *EnumListModel) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	115	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	116	+	}
	117	+
	118	+	// Get the item at @position.
	119	+	//
	120	+	// If @position is greater than the number of items in @list, %NULL is
	121	+	// returned.
	122	+	//
	123	+	// %NULL is never returned for an index that is smaller than the length
	124	+	// of the list.
	125	+	//
	126	+	// See also: g_list_model_get_n_items()
	127	+	func (x *EnumListModel) GetItem(PositionVar uint) uintptr {
	128	+
	129	+	return gio.XGListModelGetItem(x.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	130	+
	131	+	}
	132	+
	133	+	// Gets the type of the items in @list.
	134	+	//
	135	+	// All items returned from g_list_model_get_item() are of the type
	136	+	// returned by this function, or a subtype, or if the type is an
	137	+	// interface, they are an implementation of that interface.
	138	+	//
	139	+	// The item type of a #GListModel can not change during the life of the
	140	+	// model.
	141	+	func (x *EnumListModel) GetItemType() []interface{} {
	142	+
	143	+	return gio.XGListModelGetItemType(x.GoPointer())
	144	+
	145	+	}
	146	+
	147	+	// Gets the number of items in @list.
	148	+	//
	149	+	// Depending on the model implementation, calling this function may be
	150	+	// less efficient than iterating the list with increasing values for
	151	+	// @position until g_list_model_get_item() returns %NULL.
	152	+	func (x *EnumListModel) GetNItems() uint {
	153	+
	154	+	return gio.XGListModelGetNItems(x.GoPointer())
	155	+
	156	+	}
	157	+
	158	+	// Get the item at @position.
	159	+	//
	160	+	// If @position is greater than the number of items in @list, %NULL is
	161	+	// returned.
	162	+	//
	163	+	// %NULL is never returned for an index that is smaller than the length
	164	+	// of the list.
	165	+	//
	166	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings in place
	167	+	// of g_list_model_get_item().
	168	+	//
	169	+	// See also: g_list_model_get_n_items()
	170	+	func (x EnumListModel) GetObject(PositionVar uint) gobject.Object {
	171	+
	172	+	GetObjectPtr := gio.XGListModelGetObject(x.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	173	+	if GetObjectPtr == 0 {
	174	+	return nil
	175	+	}
	176	+
	177	+	GetObjectCls := &gobject.Object{}
	178	+	GetObjectCls.Ptr = GetObjectPtr
	179	+	return GetObjectCls
	180	+
	181	+	}
	182	+
	183	+	// Emits the #GListModel::items-changed signal on @list.
	184	+	//
	185	+	// This function should only be called by classes implementing
	186	+	// #GListModel. It has to be called after the internal representation
	187	+	// of @list has been updated, because handlers connected to this signal
	188	+	// might query the new state of the list.
	189	+	//
	190	+	// Implementations must only make changes to the model (as visible to
	191	+	// its consumer) in places that will not cause problems for that
	192	+	// consumer. For models that are driven directly by a write API (such
	193	+	// as #GListStore), changes can be reported in response to uses of that
	194	+	// API. For models that represent remote data, changes should only be
	195	+	// made from a fresh mainloop dispatch. It is particularly not
	196	+	// permitted to make changes in response to a call to the #GListModel
	197	+	// consumer API.
	198	+	//
	199	+	// Stated another way: in general, it is assumed that code making a
	200	+	// series of accesses to the model via the API, without returning to the
	201	+	// mainloop, and without calling other code, will continue to view the
	202	+	// same contents of the model.
	203	+	func (x *EnumListModel) ItemsChanged(PositionVar uint, RemovedVar uint, AddedVar uint) {
	204	+
	205	+	gio.XGListModelItemsChanged(x.GoPointer(), PositionVar, RemovedVar, AddedVar)
	206	+
	207	+	}
	208	+
	209	+	func init() {
	210	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	211	+	if err != nil {
	212	+	panic(err)
	213	+	}
	214	+
	215	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEnumListItemGetName, lib, "adw_enum_list_item_get_name")
	216	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEnumListItemGetNick, lib, "adw_enum_list_item_get_nick")
	217	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEnumListItemGetValue, lib, "adw_enum_list_item_get_value")
	218	+
	219	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewEnumListModel, lib, "adw_enum_list_model_new")
	220	+
	221	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEnumListModelFindPosition, lib, "adw_enum_list_model_find_position")
	222	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xEnumListModelGetEnumType, lib, "adw_enum_list_model_get_enum_type")
	223	+
	224	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-expander-row.go +509 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,509 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type ExpanderRowClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+
	15	+	Padding uintptr
	16	+	}
	17	+
	18	+	// A [class@Gtk.ListBoxRow] used to reveal widgets.
	19	+	//
	20	+	// <picture>
	21	+	//
	22	+	// <source srcset="expander-row-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	23	+	// <img src="expander-row.png" alt="expander-row">
	24	+	//
	25	+	// </picture>
	26	+	//
	27	+	// The `AdwExpanderRow` widget allows the user to reveal or hide widgets below
	28	+	// it. It also allows the user to enable the expansion of the row, allowing to
	29	+	// disable all that the row contains.
	30	+	//
	31	+	// ## AdwExpanderRow as GtkBuildable
	32	+	//
	33	+	// The `AdwExpanderRow` implementation of the [iface@Gtk.Buildable] interface
	34	+	// supports adding a child as an action widget by specifying “action” as the
	35	+	// “type” attribute of a <child> element.
	36	+	//
	37	+	// It also supports adding it as a prefix widget by specifying “prefix” as the
	38	+	// “type” attribute of a <child> element.
	39	+	//
	40	+	// ## CSS nodes
	41	+	//
	42	+	// `AdwExpanderRow` has a main CSS node with name `row` and the `.expander`
	43	+	// style class. It has the `.empty` style class when it contains no children.
	44	+	//
	45	+	// It contains the subnodes `row.header` for its main embedded row,
	46	+	// `list.nested` for the list it can expand, and `image.expander-row-arrow` for
	47	+	// its arrow.
	48	+	type ExpanderRow struct {
	49	+	PreferencesRow
	50	+	}
	51	+
	52	+	func ExpanderRowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *ExpanderRow {
	53	+	cls := &ExpanderRow{}
	54	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	55	+	return cls
	56	+	}
	57	+
	58	+	var xNewExpanderRow func() uintptr
	59	+
	60	+	// Creates a new `AdwExpanderRow`.
	61	+	func NewExpanderRow() *gtk.Widget {
	62	+	NewExpanderRowPtr := xNewExpanderRow()
	63	+	if NewExpanderRowPtr == 0 {
	64	+	return nil
	65	+	}
	66	+
	67	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewExpanderRowPtr)
	68	+
	69	+	NewExpanderRowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	70	+	NewExpanderRowCls.Ptr = NewExpanderRowPtr
	71	+	return NewExpanderRowCls
	72	+	}
	73	+
	74	+	var xExpanderRowAddAction func(uintptr, uintptr)
	75	+
	76	+	// Adds an action widget to @self.
	77	+	func (x ExpanderRow) AddAction(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	78	+
	79	+	xExpanderRowAddAction(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	80	+
	81	+	}
	82	+
	83	+	var xExpanderRowAddPrefix func(uintptr, uintptr)
	84	+
	85	+	// Adds a prefix widget to @self.
	86	+	func (x ExpanderRow) AddPrefix(WidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	87	+
	88	+	xExpanderRowAddPrefix(x.GoPointer(), WidgetVar.GoPointer())
	89	+
	90	+	}
	91	+
	92	+	var xExpanderRowAddRow func(uintptr, uintptr)
	93	+
	94	+	// Adds a widget to @self.
	95	+	//
	96	+	// The widget will appear in the expanding list below @self.
	97	+	func (x ExpanderRow) AddRow(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	98	+
	99	+	xExpanderRowAddRow(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	100	+
	101	+	}
	102	+
	103	+	var xExpanderRowGetEnableExpansion func(uintptr) bool
	104	+
	105	+	// Gets whether the expansion of @self is enabled.
	106	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetEnableExpansion() bool {
	107	+
	108	+	return xExpanderRowGetEnableExpansion(x.GoPointer())
	109	+
	110	+	}
	111	+
	112	+	var xExpanderRowGetExpanded func(uintptr) bool
	113	+
	114	+	// Gets whether @self is expanded.
	115	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetExpanded() bool {
	116	+
	117	+	return xExpanderRowGetExpanded(x.GoPointer())
	118	+
	119	+	}
	120	+
	121	+	var xExpanderRowGetIconName func(uintptr) string
	122	+
	123	+	// Gets the icon name for @self.
	124	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetIconName() string {
	125	+
	126	+	return xExpanderRowGetIconName(x.GoPointer())
	127	+
	128	+	}
	129	+
	130	+	var xExpanderRowGetShowEnableSwitch func(uintptr) bool
	131	+
	132	+	// Gets whether the switch enabling the expansion of @self is visible.
	133	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetShowEnableSwitch() bool {
	134	+
	135	+	return xExpanderRowGetShowEnableSwitch(x.GoPointer())
	136	+
	137	+	}
	138	+
	139	+	var xExpanderRowGetSubtitle func(uintptr) string
	140	+
	141	+	// Gets the subtitle for @self.
	142	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetSubtitle() string {
	143	+
	144	+	return xExpanderRowGetSubtitle(x.GoPointer())
	145	+
	146	+	}
	147	+
	148	+	var xExpanderRowGetSubtitleLines func(uintptr) bool
	149	+
	150	+	// Gets the number of lines at the end of which the subtitle label will be
	151	+	// ellipsized.
	152	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetSubtitleLines() bool {
	153	+
	154	+	return xExpanderRowGetSubtitleLines(x.GoPointer())
	155	+
	156	+	}
	157	+
	158	+	var xExpanderRowGetTitleLines func(uintptr) bool
	159	+
	160	+	// Gets the number of lines at the end of which the title label will be
	161	+	// ellipsized.
	162	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetTitleLines() bool {
	163	+
	164	+	return xExpanderRowGetTitleLines(x.GoPointer())
	165	+
	166	+	}
	167	+
	168	+	var xExpanderRowRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	169	+
	170	+	func (x ExpanderRow) Remove(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	171	+
	172	+	xExpanderRowRemove(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	173	+
	174	+	}
	175	+
	176	+	var xExpanderRowSetEnableExpansion func(uintptr, bool)
	177	+
	178	+	// Sets whether the expansion of @self is enabled.
	179	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetEnableExpansion(EnableExpansionVar bool) {
	180	+
	181	+	xExpanderRowSetEnableExpansion(x.GoPointer(), EnableExpansionVar)
	182	+
	183	+	}
	184	+
	185	+	var xExpanderRowSetExpanded func(uintptr, bool)
	186	+
	187	+	// Sets whether @self is expanded.
	188	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetExpanded(ExpandedVar bool) {
	189	+
	190	+	xExpanderRowSetExpanded(x.GoPointer(), ExpandedVar)
	191	+
	192	+	}
	193	+
	194	+	var xExpanderRowSetIconName func(uintptr, string)
	195	+
	196	+	// Sets the icon name for @self.
	197	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetIconName(IconNameVar string) {
	198	+
	199	+	xExpanderRowSetIconName(x.GoPointer(), IconNameVar)
	200	+
	201	+	}
	202	+
	203	+	var xExpanderRowSetShowEnableSwitch func(uintptr, bool)
	204	+
	205	+	// Sets whether the switch enabling the expansion of @self is visible.
	206	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetShowEnableSwitch(ShowEnableSwitchVar bool) {
	207	+
	208	+	xExpanderRowSetShowEnableSwitch(x.GoPointer(), ShowEnableSwitchVar)
	209	+
	210	+	}
	211	+
	212	+	var xExpanderRowSetSubtitle func(uintptr, string)
	213	+
	214	+	// Sets the subtitle for @self.
	215	+	//
	216	+	// The subtitle is interpreted as Pango markup unless
	217	+	// [property@PreferencesRow:use-markup] is set to `FALSE`.
	218	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetSubtitle(SubtitleVar string) {
	219	+
	220	+	xExpanderRowSetSubtitle(x.GoPointer(), SubtitleVar)
	221	+
	222	+	}
	223	+
	224	+	var xExpanderRowSetSubtitleLines func(uintptr, int32)
	225	+
	226	+	// Sets the number of lines at the end of which the subtitle label will be
	227	+	// ellipsized.
	228	+	//
	229	+	// If the value is 0, the number of lines won't be limited.
	230	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetSubtitleLines(SubtitleLinesVar int32) {
	231	+
	232	+	xExpanderRowSetSubtitleLines(x.GoPointer(), SubtitleLinesVar)
	233	+
	234	+	}
	235	+
	236	+	var xExpanderRowSetTitleLines func(uintptr, int32)
	237	+
	238	+	// Sets the number of lines at the end of which the title label will be
	239	+	// ellipsized.
	240	+	//
	241	+	// If the value is 0, the number of lines won't be limited.
	242	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetTitleLines(TitleLinesVar int32) {
	243	+
	244	+	xExpanderRowSetTitleLines(x.GoPointer(), TitleLinesVar)
	245	+
	246	+	}
	247	+
	248	+	func (c *ExpanderRow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	249	+	return c.Ptr
	250	+	}
	251	+
	252	+	func (c *ExpanderRow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	253	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	254	+	}
	255	+
	256	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	257	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	258	+
	259	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	260	+
	261	+	}
	262	+
	263	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	264	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	265	+
	266	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	267	+
	268	+	}
	269	+
	270	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	271	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	272	+
	273	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	274	+
	275	+	}
	276	+
	277	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	278	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	279	+
	280	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	281	+
	282	+	}
	283	+
	284	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	285	+	//
	286	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	287	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	288	+	//
	289	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	290	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	291	+	// technologies.
	292	+	//
	293	+	// Example:
	294	+	// ```c
	295	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	296	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	297	+	//
	298	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	299	+	// -1);
	300	+	//
	301	+	// ```
	302	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	303	+
	304	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	305	+
	306	+	}
	307	+
	308	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	309	+	//
	310	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	311	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	312	+	//
	313	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	314	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	315	+
	316	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	317	+
	318	+	}
	319	+
	320	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	321	+	//
	322	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	323	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	324	+	//
	325	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	326	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	327	+	//
	328	+	// ```c
	329	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	330	+	//
	331	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	332	+	// ref1, NULL,
	333	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	334	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	335	+	// -1);
	336	+	//
	337	+	// ```
	338	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	339	+
	340	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	341	+
	342	+	}
	343	+
	344	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	345	+	//
	346	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	347	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	348	+	//
	349	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	350	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	351	+
	352	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	353	+
	354	+	}
	355	+
	356	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	357	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	358	+	//
	359	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	360	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	361	+	//
	362	+	// Example:
	363	+	// ```c
	364	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	365	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	366	+	//
	367	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	368	+	// -1);
	369	+	//
	370	+	// ```
	371	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	372	+
	373	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	374	+
	375	+	}
	376	+
	377	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	378	+	//
	379	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	380	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	381	+	//
	382	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	383	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	384	+
	385	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	386	+
	387	+	}
	388	+
	389	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	390	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetActionName() string {
	391	+
	392	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	393	+
	394	+	}
	395	+
	396	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	397	+	func (x ExpanderRow) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	398	+
	399	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	400	+
	401	+	}
	402	+
	403	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	404	+	// associated.
	405	+	//
	406	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	407	+	// any previous action.
	408	+	//
	409	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	410	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	411	+	//
	412	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	413	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	414	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	415	+	// associated with the window.
	416	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	417	+
	418	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	419	+
	420	+	}
	421	+
	422	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	423	+	//
	424	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	425	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	426	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	427	+	//
	428	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	429	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	430	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	431	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	432	+
	433	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	434	+
	435	+	}
	436	+
	437	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	438	+	//
	439	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	440	+	//
	441	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	442	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	443	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	444	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	445	+	//
	446	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	447	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	448	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	449	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	450	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	451	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	452	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	453	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	454	+	// rendered inactive).
	455	+	func (x ExpanderRow) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	456	+
	457	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	458	+
	459	+	}
	460	+
	461	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	462	+	// actionable widget.
	463	+	//
	464	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	465	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	466	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	467	+
	468	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	469	+
	470	+	}
	471	+
	472	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	473	+	//
	474	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	475	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	476	+	func (x *ExpanderRow) GetBuildableId() string {
	477	+
	478	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	479	+
	480	+	}
	481	+
	482	+	func init() {
	483	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	484	+	if err != nil {
	485	+	panic(err)
	486	+	}
	487	+
	488	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewExpanderRow, lib, "adw_expander_row_new")
	489	+
	490	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowAddAction, lib, "adw_expander_row_add_action")
	491	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowAddPrefix, lib, "adw_expander_row_add_prefix")
	492	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowAddRow, lib, "adw_expander_row_add_row")
	493	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowGetEnableExpansion, lib, "adw_expander_row_get_enable_expansion")
	494	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowGetExpanded, lib, "adw_expander_row_get_expanded")
	495	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowGetIconName, lib, "adw_expander_row_get_icon_name")
	496	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowGetShowEnableSwitch, lib, "adw_expander_row_get_show_enable_switch")
	497	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowGetSubtitle, lib, "adw_expander_row_get_subtitle")
	498	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowGetSubtitleLines, lib, "adw_expander_row_get_subtitle_lines")
	499	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowGetTitleLines, lib, "adw_expander_row_get_title_lines")
	500	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowRemove, lib, "adw_expander_row_remove")
	501	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowSetEnableExpansion, lib, "adw_expander_row_set_enable_expansion")
	502	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowSetExpanded, lib, "adw_expander_row_set_expanded")
	503	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowSetIconName, lib, "adw_expander_row_set_icon_name")
	504	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowSetShowEnableSwitch, lib, "adw_expander_row_set_show_enable_switch")
	505	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowSetSubtitle, lib, "adw_expander_row_set_subtitle")
	506	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowSetSubtitleLines, lib, "adw_expander_row_set_subtitle_lines")
	507	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xExpanderRowSetTitleLines, lib, "adw_expander_row_set_title_lines")
	508	+
	509	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-flap.go +739 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,739 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type FlapClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	// Describes the possible folding behavior of a [class@Flap] widget.
	17	+	type FlapFoldPolicy int
	18	+
	19	+	const (
	20	+
	21	+	// Disable folding, the flap cannot reach narrow
	22	+	// sizes.
	23	+	FlapFoldPolicyNeverValue FlapFoldPolicy = 0
	24	+	// Keep the flap always folded.
	25	+	FlapFoldPolicyAlwaysValue FlapFoldPolicy = 1
	26	+	// Fold and unfold the flap based on available
	27	+	// space.
	28	+	FlapFoldPolicyAutoValue FlapFoldPolicy = 2
	29	+	)
	30	+
	31	+	// Describes transitions types of a [class@Flap] widget.
	32	+	//
	33	+	// It determines the type of animation when transitioning between children in a
	34	+	// [class@Flap] widget, as well as which areas can be swiped via
	35	+	// [property@Flap:swipe-to-open] and [property@Flap:swipe-to-close].
	36	+	//
	37	+	// New values may be added to this enum over time.
	38	+	type FlapTransitionType int
	39	+
	40	+	const (
	41	+
	42	+	// The flap slides over the content, which is
	43	+	// dimmed. When folded, only the flap can be swiped.
	44	+	FlapTransitionTypeOverValue FlapTransitionType = 0
	45	+	// The content slides over the flap. Only the
	46	+	// content can be swiped.
	47	+	FlapTransitionTypeUnderValue FlapTransitionType = 1
	48	+	// The flap slides offscreen when hidden,
	49	+	// neither the flap nor content overlap each other. Both widgets can be
	50	+	// swiped.
	51	+	FlapTransitionTypeSlideValue FlapTransitionType = 2
	52	+	)
	53	+
	54	+	// An adaptive container acting like a box or an overlay.
	55	+	//
	56	+	// <picture>
	57	+	//
	58	+	// <source srcset="flap-wide-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	59	+	// <img src="flap-wide.png" alt="flap-wide">
	60	+	//
	61	+	// </picture>
	62	+	// <picture>
	63	+	//
	64	+	// <source srcset="flap-narrow-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	65	+	// <img src="flap-narrow.png" alt="flap-narrow">
	66	+	//
	67	+	// </picture>
	68	+	//
	69	+	// The `AdwFlap` widget can display its children like a [class@Gtk.Box] does or
	70	+	// like a [class@Gtk.Overlay] does, according to the
	71	+	// [property@Flap:fold-policy] value.
	72	+	//
	73	+	// `AdwFlap` has at most three children: [property@Flap:content],
	74	+	// [property@Flap:flap] and [property@Flap:separator]. Content is the primary
	75	+	// child, flap is displayed next to it when unfolded, or overlays it when
	76	+	// folded. Flap can be shown or hidden by changing the
	77	+	// [property@Flap:reveal-flap] value, as well as via swipe gestures if
	78	+	// [property@Flap:swipe-to-open] and/or [property@Flap:swipe-to-close] are set
	79	+	// to `TRUE`.
	80	+	//
	81	+	// Optionally, a separator can be provided, which would be displayed between
	82	+	// the content and the flap when there's no shadow to separate them, depending
	83	+	// on the transition type.
	84	+	//
	85	+	// [property@Flap:flap] is transparent by default; add the
	86	+	// [`.background`](style-classes.html#background) style class to it if this is
	87	+	// unwanted.
	88	+	//
	89	+	// If [property@Flap:modal] is set to `TRUE`, content becomes completely
	90	+	// inaccessible when the flap is revealed while folded.
	91	+	//
	92	+	// The position of the flap and separator children relative to the content is
	93	+	// determined by orientation, as well as the [property@Flap:flap-position]
	94	+	// value.
	95	+	//
	96	+	// Folding the flap will automatically hide the flap widget, and unfolding it
	97	+	// will automatically reveal it. If this behavior is not desired, the
	98	+	// [property@Flap:locked] property can be used to override it.
	99	+	//
	100	+	// Common use cases include sidebars, header bars that need to be able to
	101	+	// overlap the window content (for example, in fullscreen mode) and bottom
	102	+	// sheets.
	103	+	//
	104	+	// ## AdwFlap as GtkBuildable
	105	+	//
	106	+	// The `AdwFlap` implementation of the [iface@Gtk.Buildable] interface supports
	107	+	// setting the flap child by specifying “flap” as the “type” attribute of a
	108	+	// `<child>` element, and separator by specifying “separator”. Specifying
	109	+	// “content” child type or omitting it results in setting the content child.
	110	+	//
	111	+	// ## CSS nodes
	112	+	//
	113	+	// `AdwFlap` has a single CSS node with name `flap`. The node will get the style
	114	+	// classes `.folded` when it is folded, and `.unfolded` when it's not.
	115	+	type Flap struct {
	116	+	gtk.Widget
	117	+	}
	118	+
	119	+	func FlapNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Flap {
	120	+	cls := &Flap{}
	121	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	122	+	return cls
	123	+	}
	124	+
	125	+	var xNewFlap func() uintptr
	126	+
	127	+	// Creates a new `AdwFlap`.
	128	+	func NewFlap() *gtk.Widget {
	129	+	NewFlapPtr := xNewFlap()
	130	+	if NewFlapPtr == 0 {
	131	+	return nil
	132	+	}
	133	+
	134	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewFlapPtr)
	135	+
	136	+	NewFlapCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	137	+	NewFlapCls.Ptr = NewFlapPtr
	138	+	return NewFlapCls
	139	+	}
	140	+
	141	+	var xFlapGetContent func(uintptr) uintptr
	142	+
	143	+	// Gets the content widget for @self.
	144	+	func (x Flap) GetContent() gtk.Widget {
	145	+
	146	+	GetContentPtr := xFlapGetContent(x.GoPointer())
	147	+	if GetContentPtr == 0 {
	148	+	return nil
	149	+	}
	150	+
	151	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetContentPtr)
	152	+
	153	+	GetContentCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	154	+	GetContentCls.Ptr = GetContentPtr
	155	+	return GetContentCls
	156	+
	157	+	}
	158	+
	159	+	var xFlapGetFlap func(uintptr) uintptr
	160	+
	161	+	// Gets the flap widget for @self.
	162	+	func (x Flap) GetFlap() gtk.Widget {
	163	+
	164	+	GetFlapPtr := xFlapGetFlap(x.GoPointer())
	165	+	if GetFlapPtr == 0 {
	166	+	return nil
	167	+	}
	168	+
	169	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetFlapPtr)
	170	+
	171	+	GetFlapCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	172	+	GetFlapCls.Ptr = GetFlapPtr
	173	+	return GetFlapCls
	174	+
	175	+	}
	176	+
	177	+	var xFlapGetFlapPosition func(uintptr) gtk.PackType
	178	+
	179	+	// Gets the flap position for @self.
	180	+	func (x *Flap) GetFlapPosition() gtk.PackType {
	181	+
	182	+	return xFlapGetFlapPosition(x.GoPointer())
	183	+
	184	+	}
	185	+
	186	+	var xFlapGetFoldDuration func(uintptr) uint
	187	+
	188	+	// Gets the fold transition animation duration for @self, in milliseconds.
	189	+	func (x *Flap) GetFoldDuration() uint {
	190	+
	191	+	return xFlapGetFoldDuration(x.GoPointer())
	192	+
	193	+	}
	194	+
	195	+	var xFlapGetFoldPolicy func(uintptr) FlapFoldPolicy
	196	+
	197	+	// Gets the fold policy for @self.
	198	+	func (x *Flap) GetFoldPolicy() FlapFoldPolicy {
	199	+
	200	+	return xFlapGetFoldPolicy(x.GoPointer())
	201	+
	202	+	}
	203	+
	204	+	var xFlapGetFoldThresholdPolicy func(uintptr) FoldThresholdPolicy
	205	+
	206	+	// Gets the fold threshold policy for @self.
	207	+	func (x *Flap) GetFoldThresholdPolicy() FoldThresholdPolicy {
	208	+
	209	+	return xFlapGetFoldThresholdPolicy(x.GoPointer())
	210	+
	211	+	}
	212	+
	213	+	var xFlapGetFolded func(uintptr) bool
	214	+
	215	+	// Gets whether @self is currently folded.
	216	+	//
	217	+	// See [property@Flap:fold-policy].
	218	+	func (x *Flap) GetFolded() bool {
	219	+
	220	+	return xFlapGetFolded(x.GoPointer())
	221	+
	222	+	}
	223	+
	224	+	var xFlapGetLocked func(uintptr) bool
	225	+
	226	+	// Gets whether @self is locked.
	227	+	func (x *Flap) GetLocked() bool {
	228	+
	229	+	return xFlapGetLocked(x.GoPointer())
	230	+
	231	+	}
	232	+
	233	+	var xFlapGetModal func(uintptr) bool
	234	+
	235	+	// Gets whether @self is modal.
	236	+	func (x *Flap) GetModal() bool {
	237	+
	238	+	return xFlapGetModal(x.GoPointer())
	239	+
	240	+	}
	241	+
	242	+	var xFlapGetRevealFlap func(uintptr) bool
	243	+
	244	+	// Gets whether the flap widget is revealed for @self.
	245	+	func (x *Flap) GetRevealFlap() bool {
	246	+
	247	+	return xFlapGetRevealFlap(x.GoPointer())
	248	+
	249	+	}
	250	+
	251	+	var xFlapGetRevealParams func(uintptr) *SpringParams
	252	+
	253	+	// Gets the reveal animation spring parameters for @self.
	254	+	func (x Flap) GetRevealParams() SpringParams {
	255	+
	256	+	return xFlapGetRevealParams(x.GoPointer())
	257	+
	258	+	}
	259	+
	260	+	var xFlapGetRevealProgress func(uintptr) float64
	261	+
	262	+	// Gets the current reveal progress for @self.
	263	+	//
	264	+	// 0 means fully hidden, 1 means fully revealed.
	265	+	//
	266	+	// See [property@Flap:reveal-flap].
	267	+	func (x *Flap) GetRevealProgress() float64 {
	268	+
	269	+	return xFlapGetRevealProgress(x.GoPointer())
	270	+
	271	+	}
	272	+
	273	+	var xFlapGetSeparator func(uintptr) uintptr
	274	+
	275	+	// Gets the separator widget for @self.
	276	+	func (x Flap) GetSeparator() gtk.Widget {
	277	+
	278	+	GetSeparatorPtr := xFlapGetSeparator(x.GoPointer())
	279	+	if GetSeparatorPtr == 0 {
	280	+	return nil
	281	+	}
	282	+
	283	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetSeparatorPtr)
	284	+
	285	+	GetSeparatorCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	286	+	GetSeparatorCls.Ptr = GetSeparatorPtr
	287	+	return GetSeparatorCls
	288	+
	289	+	}
	290	+
	291	+	var xFlapGetSwipeToClose func(uintptr) bool
	292	+
	293	+	// Gets whether @self can be closed with a swipe gesture.
	294	+	func (x *Flap) GetSwipeToClose() bool {
	295	+
	296	+	return xFlapGetSwipeToClose(x.GoPointer())
	297	+
	298	+	}
	299	+
	300	+	var xFlapGetSwipeToOpen func(uintptr) bool
	301	+
	302	+	// Gets whether @self can be opened with a swipe gesture.
	303	+	func (x *Flap) GetSwipeToOpen() bool {
	304	+
	305	+	return xFlapGetSwipeToOpen(x.GoPointer())
	306	+
	307	+	}
	308	+
	309	+	var xFlapGetTransitionType func(uintptr) FlapTransitionType
	310	+
	311	+	// Gets the type of animation used for reveal and fold transitions in @self.
	312	+	func (x *Flap) GetTransitionType() FlapTransitionType {
	313	+
	314	+	return xFlapGetTransitionType(x.GoPointer())
	315	+
	316	+	}
	317	+
	318	+	var xFlapSetContent func(uintptr, uintptr)
	319	+
	320	+	// Sets the content widget for @self.
	321	+	//
	322	+	// It's always displayed when unfolded, and partially visible when folded.
	323	+	func (x Flap) SetContent(ContentVar gtk.Widget) {
	324	+
	325	+	xFlapSetContent(x.GoPointer(), ContentVar.GoPointer())
	326	+
	327	+	}
	328	+
	329	+	var xFlapSetFlap func(uintptr, uintptr)
	330	+
	331	+	// Sets the flap widget for @self.
	332	+	//
	333	+	// It's only visible when [property@Flap:reveal-progress] is greater than 0.
	334	+	func (x Flap) SetFlap(FlapVar gtk.Widget) {
	335	+
	336	+	xFlapSetFlap(x.GoPointer(), FlapVar.GoPointer())
	337	+
	338	+	}
	339	+
	340	+	var xFlapSetFlapPosition func(uintptr, gtk.PackType)
	341	+
	342	+	// Sets the flap position for @self.
	343	+	//
	344	+	// If it's set to `GTK_PACK_START`, the flap is displayed before the content,
	345	+	// if `GTK_PACK_END`, it's displayed after the content.
	346	+	func (x *Flap) SetFlapPosition(PositionVar gtk.PackType) {
	347	+
	348	+	xFlapSetFlapPosition(x.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	349	+
	350	+	}
	351	+
	352	+	var xFlapSetFoldDuration func(uintptr, uint)
	353	+
	354	+	// Sets the fold transition animation duration for @self, in milliseconds.
	355	+	func (x *Flap) SetFoldDuration(DurationVar uint) {
	356	+
	357	+	xFlapSetFoldDuration(x.GoPointer(), DurationVar)
	358	+
	359	+	}
	360	+
	361	+	var xFlapSetFoldPolicy func(uintptr, FlapFoldPolicy)
	362	+
	363	+	// Sets the fold policy for @self.
	364	+	func (x *Flap) SetFoldPolicy(PolicyVar FlapFoldPolicy) {
	365	+
	366	+	xFlapSetFoldPolicy(x.GoPointer(), PolicyVar)
	367	+
	368	+	}
	369	+
	370	+	var xFlapSetFoldThresholdPolicy func(uintptr, FoldThresholdPolicy)
	371	+
	372	+	// Sets the fold threshold policy for @self.
	373	+	//
	374	+	// If set to `ADW_FOLD_THRESHOLD_POLICY_MINIMUM`, flap will only fold when the
	375	+	// children cannot fit anymore. With `ADW_FOLD_THRESHOLD_POLICY_NATURAL`, it
	376	+	// will fold as soon as children don't get their natural size.
	377	+	//
	378	+	// This can be useful if you have a long ellipsizing label and want to let it
	379	+	// ellipsize instead of immediately folding.
	380	+	func (x *Flap) SetFoldThresholdPolicy(PolicyVar FoldThresholdPolicy) {
	381	+
	382	+	xFlapSetFoldThresholdPolicy(x.GoPointer(), PolicyVar)
	383	+
	384	+	}
	385	+
	386	+	var xFlapSetLocked func(uintptr, bool)
	387	+
	388	+	// Sets whether @self is locked.
	389	+	//
	390	+	// If `FALSE`, folding when the flap is revealed automatically closes it, and
	391	+	// unfolding it when the flap is not revealed opens it. If `TRUE`,
	392	+	// [property@Flap:reveal-flap] value never changes on its own.
	393	+	func (x *Flap) SetLocked(LockedVar bool) {
	394	+
	395	+	xFlapSetLocked(x.GoPointer(), LockedVar)
	396	+
	397	+	}
	398	+
	399	+	var xFlapSetModal func(uintptr, bool)
	400	+
	401	+	// Sets whether @self is modal.
	402	+	//
	403	+	// If `TRUE`, clicking the content widget while flap is revealed, as well as
	404	+	// pressing the <kbd>Esc</kbd> key, will close the flap. If `FALSE`, clicks are
	405	+	// passed through to the content widget.
	406	+	func (x *Flap) SetModal(ModalVar bool) {
	407	+
	408	+	xFlapSetModal(x.GoPointer(), ModalVar)
	409	+
	410	+	}
	411	+
	412	+	var xFlapSetRevealFlap func(uintptr, bool)
	413	+
	414	+	// Sets whether the flap widget is revealed for @self.
	415	+	func (x *Flap) SetRevealFlap(RevealFlapVar bool) {
	416	+
	417	+	xFlapSetRevealFlap(x.GoPointer(), RevealFlapVar)
	418	+
	419	+	}
	420	+
	421	+	var xFlapSetRevealParams func(uintptr, *SpringParams)
	422	+
	423	+	// Sets the reveal animation spring parameters for @self.
	424	+	//
	425	+	// The default value is equivalent to:
	426	+	//
	427	+	// ```c
	428	+	// adw_spring_params_new (1, 0.5, 500)
	429	+	// ```
	430	+	func (x Flap) SetRevealParams(ParamsVar SpringParams) {
	431	+
	432	+	xFlapSetRevealParams(x.GoPointer(), ParamsVar)
	433	+
	434	+	}
	435	+
	436	+	var xFlapSetSeparator func(uintptr, uintptr)
	437	+
	438	+	// Sets the separator widget for @self.
	439	+	//
	440	+	// It's displayed between content and flap when there's no shadow to display.
	441	+	// When exactly it's visible depends on the [property@Flap:transition-type]
	442	+	// value.
	443	+	func (x Flap) SetSeparator(SeparatorVar gtk.Widget) {
	444	+
	445	+	xFlapSetSeparator(x.GoPointer(), SeparatorVar.GoPointer())
	446	+
	447	+	}
	448	+
	449	+	var xFlapSetSwipeToClose func(uintptr, bool)
	450	+
	451	+	// Sets whether @self can be closed with a swipe gesture.
	452	+	//
	453	+	// The area that can be swiped depends on the [property@Flap:transition-type]
	454	+	// value.
	455	+	func (x *Flap) SetSwipeToClose(SwipeToCloseVar bool) {
	456	+
	457	+	xFlapSetSwipeToClose(x.GoPointer(), SwipeToCloseVar)
	458	+
	459	+	}
	460	+
	461	+	var xFlapSetSwipeToOpen func(uintptr, bool)
	462	+
	463	+	// Sets whether @self can be opened with a swipe gesture.
	464	+	//
	465	+	// The area that can be swiped depends on the [property@Flap:transition-type]
	466	+	// value.
	467	+	func (x *Flap) SetSwipeToOpen(SwipeToOpenVar bool) {
	468	+
	469	+	xFlapSetSwipeToOpen(x.GoPointer(), SwipeToOpenVar)
	470	+
	471	+	}
	472	+
	473	+	var xFlapSetTransitionType func(uintptr, FlapTransitionType)
	474	+
	475	+	// Sets the type of animation used for reveal and fold transitions in @self.
	476	+	//
	477	+	// [property@Flap:flap] is transparent by default, which means the content will
	478	+	// be seen through it with `ADW_FLAP_TRANSITION_TYPE_OVER` transitions; add the
	479	+	// [`.background`](style-classes.html#background) style class to it if this is
	480	+	// unwanted.
	481	+	func (x *Flap) SetTransitionType(TransitionTypeVar FlapTransitionType) {
	482	+
	483	+	xFlapSetTransitionType(x.GoPointer(), TransitionTypeVar)
	484	+
	485	+	}
	486	+
	487	+	func (c *Flap) GoPointer() uintptr {
	488	+	return c.Ptr
	489	+	}
	490	+
	491	+	func (c *Flap) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	492	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	493	+	}
	494	+
	495	+	// Gets the progress @self will snap back to after the gesture is canceled.
	496	+	func (x *Flap) GetCancelProgress() float64 {
	497	+
	498	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetCancelProgress(x.GoPointer())
	499	+
	500	+	}
	501	+
	502	+	// Gets the swipe distance of @self.
	503	+	//
	504	+	// This corresponds to how many pixels 1 unit represents.
	505	+	func (x *Flap) GetDistance() float64 {
	506	+
	507	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetDistance(x.GoPointer())
	508	+
	509	+	}
	510	+
	511	+	// Gets the current progress of @self.
	512	+	func (x *Flap) GetProgress() float64 {
	513	+
	514	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetProgress(x.GoPointer())
	515	+
	516	+	}
	517	+
	518	+	// Gets the snap points of @self.
	519	+	//
	520	+	// Each snap point represents a progress value that is considered acceptable to
	521	+	// end the swipe on.
	522	+	func (x *Flap) GetSnapPoints(NSnapPointsVar int32) uintptr {
	523	+
	524	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetSnapPoints(x.GoPointer(), NSnapPointsVar)
	525	+
	526	+	}
	527	+
	528	+	// Gets the area @self can start a swipe from for the given direction and
	529	+	// gesture type.
	530	+	//
	531	+	// This can be used to restrict swipes to only be possible from a certain area,
	532	+	// for example, to only allow edge swipes, or to have a draggable element and
	533	+	// ignore swipes elsewhere.
	534	+	//
	535	+	// If not implemented, the default implementation returns the allocation of
	536	+	// @self, allowing swipes from anywhere.
	537	+	func (x Flap) GetSwipeArea(NavigationDirectionVar NavigationDirection, IsDragVar bool, RectVar gdk.Rectangle) {
	538	+
	539	+	XAdwSwipeableGetSwipeArea(x.GoPointer(), NavigationDirectionVar, IsDragVar, RectVar)
	540	+
	541	+	}
	542	+
	543	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	544	+	func (x *Flap) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	545	+
	546	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	547	+
	548	+	}
	549	+
	550	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	551	+	func (x *Flap) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	552	+
	553	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	554	+
	555	+	}
	556	+
	557	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	558	+	func (x *Flap) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	559	+
	560	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	561	+
	562	+	}
	563	+
	564	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	565	+	func (x *Flap) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	566	+
	567	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	568	+
	569	+	}
	570	+
	571	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	572	+	//
	573	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	574	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	575	+	//
	576	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	577	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	578	+	// technologies.
	579	+	//
	580	+	// Example:
	581	+	// ```c
	582	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	583	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	584	+	//
	585	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	586	+	// -1);
	587	+	//
	588	+	// ```
	589	+	func (x *Flap) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	590	+
	591	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	592	+
	593	+	}
	594	+
	595	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	596	+	//
	597	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	598	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	599	+	//
	600	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	601	+	func (x *Flap) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	602	+
	603	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	604	+
	605	+	}
	606	+
	607	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	608	+	//
	609	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	610	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	611	+	//
	612	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	613	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	614	+	//
	615	+	// ```c
	616	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	617	+	//
	618	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	619	+	// ref1, NULL,
	620	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	621	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	622	+	// -1);
	623	+	//
	624	+	// ```
	625	+	func (x *Flap) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	626	+
	627	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	628	+
	629	+	}
	630	+
	631	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	632	+	//
	633	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	634	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	635	+	//
	636	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	637	+	func (x *Flap) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	638	+
	639	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	640	+
	641	+	}
	642	+
	643	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	644	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	645	+	//
	646	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	647	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	648	+	//
	649	+	// Example:
	650	+	// ```c
	651	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	652	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	653	+	//
	654	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	655	+	// -1);
	656	+	//
	657	+	// ```
	658	+	func (x *Flap) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	659	+
	660	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	661	+
	662	+	}
	663	+
	664	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	665	+	//
	666	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	667	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	668	+	//
	669	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	670	+	func (x *Flap) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	671	+
	672	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	673	+
	674	+	}
	675	+
	676	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	677	+	//
	678	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	679	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	680	+	func (x *Flap) GetBuildableId() string {
	681	+
	682	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	683	+
	684	+	}
	685	+
	686	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	687	+	func (x *Flap) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	688	+
	689	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	690	+
	691	+	}
	692	+
	693	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	694	+	func (x *Flap) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	695	+
	696	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	697	+
	698	+	}
	699	+
	700	+	func init() {
	701	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	702	+	if err != nil {
	703	+	panic(err)
	704	+	}
	705	+
	706	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewFlap, lib, "adw_flap_new")
	707	+
	708	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetContent, lib, "adw_flap_get_content")
	709	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetFlap, lib, "adw_flap_get_flap")
	710	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetFlapPosition, lib, "adw_flap_get_flap_position")
	711	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetFoldDuration, lib, "adw_flap_get_fold_duration")
	712	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetFoldPolicy, lib, "adw_flap_get_fold_policy")
	713	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetFoldThresholdPolicy, lib, "adw_flap_get_fold_threshold_policy")
	714	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetFolded, lib, "adw_flap_get_folded")
	715	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetLocked, lib, "adw_flap_get_locked")
	716	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetModal, lib, "adw_flap_get_modal")
	717	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetRevealFlap, lib, "adw_flap_get_reveal_flap")
	718	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetRevealParams, lib, "adw_flap_get_reveal_params")
	719	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetRevealProgress, lib, "adw_flap_get_reveal_progress")
	720	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetSeparator, lib, "adw_flap_get_separator")
	721	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetSwipeToClose, lib, "adw_flap_get_swipe_to_close")
	722	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetSwipeToOpen, lib, "adw_flap_get_swipe_to_open")
	723	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapGetTransitionType, lib, "adw_flap_get_transition_type")
	724	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetContent, lib, "adw_flap_set_content")
	725	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetFlap, lib, "adw_flap_set_flap")
	726	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetFlapPosition, lib, "adw_flap_set_flap_position")
	727	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetFoldDuration, lib, "adw_flap_set_fold_duration")
	728	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetFoldPolicy, lib, "adw_flap_set_fold_policy")
	729	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetFoldThresholdPolicy, lib, "adw_flap_set_fold_threshold_policy")
	730	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetLocked, lib, "adw_flap_set_locked")
	731	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetModal, lib, "adw_flap_set_modal")
	732	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetRevealFlap, lib, "adw_flap_set_reveal_flap")
	733	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetRevealParams, lib, "adw_flap_set_reveal_params")
	734	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetSeparator, lib, "adw_flap_set_separator")
	735	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetSwipeToClose, lib, "adw_flap_set_swipe_to_close")
	736	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetSwipeToOpen, lib, "adw_flap_set_swipe_to_open")
	737	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xFlapSetTransitionType, lib, "adw_flap_set_transition_type")
	738	+
	739	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-fold-threshold-policy.go +13 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	// Determines when [class@Flap] and [class@Leaflet] will fold.
	5	+	type FoldThresholdPolicy int
	6	+
	7	+	const (
	8	+
	9	+	// Folding is based on the minimum size
	10	+	FoldThresholdPolicyMinimumValue FoldThresholdPolicy = 0
	11	+	// Folding is based on the natural size
	12	+	FoldThresholdPolicyNaturalValue FoldThresholdPolicy = 1
	13	+	)

A v4/adw/adw-header-bar.go +486 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,486 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type HeaderBarClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+	}
	14	+
	15	+	// Describes title centering behavior of a [class@HeaderBar] widget.
	16	+	type CenteringPolicy int
	17	+
	18	+	const (
	19	+
	20	+	// Keep the title centered when possible
	21	+	CenteringPolicyLooseValue CenteringPolicy = 0
	22	+	// Keep the title centered at all cost
	23	+	CenteringPolicyStrictValue CenteringPolicy = 1
	24	+	)
	25	+
	26	+	// A title bar widget.
	27	+	//
	28	+	// <picture>
	29	+	//
	30	+	// <source srcset="header-bar-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	31	+	// <img src="header-bar.png" alt="header-bar">
	32	+	//
	33	+	// </picture>
	34	+	//
	35	+	// `AdwHeaderBar` is similar to [class@Gtk.HeaderBar], but provides additional
	36	+	// features compared to it. Refer to `GtkHeaderBar` for details.
	37	+	//
	38	+	// [property@HeaderBar:centering-policy] allows to enforce strict centering of
	39	+	// the title widget, this is useful for [class@ViewSwitcherTitle].
	40	+	//
	41	+	// [property@HeaderBar:show-start-title-buttons] and
	42	+	// [property@HeaderBar:show-end-title-buttons] allow to easily create split
	43	+	// header bar layouts using [class@Leaflet], as follows:
	44	+	//
	45	+	// ```xml
	46	+	// <object class="AdwLeaflet" id="leaflet">
	47	+	//
	48	+	// <child>
	49	+	// <object class="GtkBox">
	50	+	// <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
	51	+	// <child>
	52	+	// <object class="AdwHeaderBar">
	53	+	// <binding name="show-end-title-buttons">
	54	+	// <lookup name="folded">leaflet</lookup>
	55	+	// </binding>
	56	+	// </object>
	57	+	// </child>
	58	+	// <!-- ... -->
	59	+	// </object>
	60	+	// </child>
	61	+	// <!-- ... -->
	62	+	// <child>
	63	+	// <object class="GtkBox">
	64	+	// <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
	65	+	// <property name="hexpand">True</property>
	66	+	// <child>
	67	+	// <object class="AdwHeaderBar">
	68	+	// <binding name="show-start-title-buttons">
	69	+	// <lookup name="folded">leaflet</lookup>
	70	+	// </binding>
	71	+	// </object>
	72	+	// </child>
	73	+	// <!-- ... -->
	74	+	// </object>
	75	+	// </child>
	76	+	//
	77	+	// </object>
	78	+	// ```
	79	+	//
	80	+	// <picture>
	81	+	//
	82	+	// <source srcset="header-bar-split-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	83	+	// <img src="header-bar-split.png" alt="header-bar-split">
	84	+	//
	85	+	// </picture>
	86	+	//
	87	+	// ## CSS nodes
	88	+	//
	89	+	// ```
	90	+	// headerbar
	91	+	// ╰── windowhandle
	92	+	//
	93	+	// ╰── box
	94	+	// ├── widget
	95	+	// │ ╰── box.start
	96	+	// │ ├── windowcontrols.start
	97	+	// │ ╰── [other children]
	98	+	// ├── [Title Widget]
	99	+	// ╰── widget
	100	+	// ╰── box.end
	101	+	// ├── [other children]
	102	+	// ╰── windowcontrols.end
	103	+	//
	104	+	// ```
	105	+	//
	106	+	// `AdwHeaderBar`'s CSS node is called `headerbar`. It contains a `windowhandle`
	107	+	// subnode, which contains a `box` subnode, which contains two `widget` subnodes
	108	+	// at the start and end of the header bar, each of which contains a `box`
	109	+	// subnode with the `.start` and `.end` style classes respectively, as well as a
	110	+	// center node that represents the title.
	111	+	//
	112	+	// Each of the boxes contains a `windowcontrols` subnode, see
	113	+	// [class@Gtk.WindowControls] for details, as well as other children.
	114	+	//
	115	+	// ## Accessibility
	116	+	//
	117	+	// `AdwHeaderBar` uses the `GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP` role.
	118	+	type HeaderBar struct {
	119	+	gtk.Widget
	120	+	}
	121	+
	122	+	func HeaderBarNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *HeaderBar {
	123	+	cls := &HeaderBar{}
	124	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	125	+	return cls
	126	+	}
	127	+
	128	+	var xNewHeaderBar func() uintptr
	129	+
	130	+	// Creates a new `AdwHeaderBar`.
	131	+	func NewHeaderBar() *gtk.Widget {
	132	+	NewHeaderBarPtr := xNewHeaderBar()
	133	+	if NewHeaderBarPtr == 0 {
	134	+	return nil
	135	+	}
	136	+
	137	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewHeaderBarPtr)
	138	+
	139	+	NewHeaderBarCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	140	+	NewHeaderBarCls.Ptr = NewHeaderBarPtr
	141	+	return NewHeaderBarCls
	142	+	}
	143	+
	144	+	var xHeaderBarGetCenteringPolicy func(uintptr) CenteringPolicy
	145	+
	146	+	// Gets the policy for aligning the center widget.
	147	+	func (x *HeaderBar) GetCenteringPolicy() CenteringPolicy {
	148	+
	149	+	return xHeaderBarGetCenteringPolicy(x.GoPointer())
	150	+
	151	+	}
	152	+
	153	+	var xHeaderBarGetDecorationLayout func(uintptr) string
	154	+
	155	+	// Gets the decoration layout for @self.
	156	+	func (x *HeaderBar) GetDecorationLayout() string {
	157	+
	158	+	return xHeaderBarGetDecorationLayout(x.GoPointer())
	159	+
	160	+	}
	161	+
	162	+	var xHeaderBarGetShowEndTitleButtons func(uintptr) bool
	163	+
	164	+	// Gets whether to show title buttons at the end of @self.
	165	+	func (x *HeaderBar) GetShowEndTitleButtons() bool {
	166	+
	167	+	return xHeaderBarGetShowEndTitleButtons(x.GoPointer())
	168	+
	169	+	}
	170	+
	171	+	var xHeaderBarGetShowStartTitleButtons func(uintptr) bool
	172	+
	173	+	// Gets whether to show title buttons at the start of @self.
	174	+	func (x *HeaderBar) GetShowStartTitleButtons() bool {
	175	+
	176	+	return xHeaderBarGetShowStartTitleButtons(x.GoPointer())
	177	+
	178	+	}
	179	+
	180	+	var xHeaderBarGetTitleWidget func(uintptr) uintptr
	181	+
	182	+	// Gets the title widget widget of @self.
	183	+	func (x HeaderBar) GetTitleWidget() gtk.Widget {
	184	+
	185	+	GetTitleWidgetPtr := xHeaderBarGetTitleWidget(x.GoPointer())
	186	+	if GetTitleWidgetPtr == 0 {
	187	+	return nil
	188	+	}
	189	+
	190	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetTitleWidgetPtr)
	191	+
	192	+	GetTitleWidgetCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	193	+	GetTitleWidgetCls.Ptr = GetTitleWidgetPtr
	194	+	return GetTitleWidgetCls
	195	+
	196	+	}
	197	+
	198	+	var xHeaderBarPackEnd func(uintptr, uintptr)
	199	+
	200	+	// Adds @child to @self, packed with reference to the end of @self.
	201	+	func (x HeaderBar) PackEnd(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	202	+
	203	+	xHeaderBarPackEnd(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	204	+
	205	+	}
	206	+
	207	+	var xHeaderBarPackStart func(uintptr, uintptr)
	208	+
	209	+	// Adds @child to @self, packed with reference to the start of the @self.
	210	+	func (x HeaderBar) PackStart(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	211	+
	212	+	xHeaderBarPackStart(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	213	+
	214	+	}
	215	+
	216	+	var xHeaderBarRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	217	+
	218	+	// Removes a child from @self.
	219	+	//
	220	+	// The child must have been added with [method@HeaderBar.pack_start],
	221	+	// [method@HeaderBar.pack_end] or [property@HeaderBar:title-widget].
	222	+	func (x HeaderBar) Remove(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	223	+
	224	+	xHeaderBarRemove(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	225	+
	226	+	}
	227	+
	228	+	var xHeaderBarSetCenteringPolicy func(uintptr, CenteringPolicy)
	229	+
	230	+	// Sets the policy for aligning the center widget.
	231	+	func (x *HeaderBar) SetCenteringPolicy(CenteringPolicyVar CenteringPolicy) {
	232	+
	233	+	xHeaderBarSetCenteringPolicy(x.GoPointer(), CenteringPolicyVar)
	234	+
	235	+	}
	236	+
	237	+	var xHeaderBarSetDecorationLayout func(uintptr, string)
	238	+
	239	+	// Sets the decoration layout for @self.
	240	+	//
	241	+	// If this property is not set, the
	242	+	// [property@Gtk.Settings:gtk-decoration-layout] setting is used.
	243	+	//
	244	+	// The format of the string is button names, separated by commas. A colon
	245	+	// separates the buttons that should appear at the start from those at the end.
	246	+	// Recognized button names are minimize, maximize, close and icon (the window
	247	+	// icon).
	248	+	//
	249	+	// For example, “icon:minimize,maximize,close” specifies an icon at the start,
	250	+	// and minimize, maximize and close buttons at the end.
	251	+	func (x *HeaderBar) SetDecorationLayout(LayoutVar string) {
	252	+
	253	+	xHeaderBarSetDecorationLayout(x.GoPointer(), LayoutVar)
	254	+
	255	+	}
	256	+
	257	+	var xHeaderBarSetShowEndTitleButtons func(uintptr, bool)
	258	+
	259	+	// Sets whether to show title buttons at the end of @self.
	260	+	//
	261	+	// See [property@HeaderBar:show-start-title-buttons] for the other side.
	262	+	//
	263	+	// Which buttons are actually shown and where is determined by the
	264	+	// [property@HeaderBar:decoration-layout] property, and by the state of the
	265	+	// window (e.g. a close button will not be shown if the window can't be closed).
	266	+	func (x *HeaderBar) SetShowEndTitleButtons(SettingVar bool) {
	267	+
	268	+	xHeaderBarSetShowEndTitleButtons(x.GoPointer(), SettingVar)
	269	+
	270	+	}
	271	+
	272	+	var xHeaderBarSetShowStartTitleButtons func(uintptr, bool)
	273	+
	274	+	// Sets whether to show title buttons at the start of @self.
	275	+	//
	276	+	// See [property@HeaderBar:show-end-title-buttons] for the other side.
	277	+	//
	278	+	// Which buttons are actually shown and where is determined by the
	279	+	// [property@HeaderBar:decoration-layout] property, and by the state of the
	280	+	// window (e.g. a close button will not be shown if the window can't be closed).
	281	+	func (x *HeaderBar) SetShowStartTitleButtons(SettingVar bool) {
	282	+
	283	+	xHeaderBarSetShowStartTitleButtons(x.GoPointer(), SettingVar)
	284	+
	285	+	}
	286	+
	287	+	var xHeaderBarSetTitleWidget func(uintptr, uintptr)
	288	+
	289	+	// Sets the title widget for @self.
	290	+	//
	291	+	// When set to `NULL`, the header bar will display the title of the window it
	292	+	// is contained in.
	293	+	//
	294	+	// To use a different title, use [class@WindowTitle]:
	295	+	//
	296	+	// ```xml
	297	+	// <object class="AdwHeaderBar">
	298	+	//
	299	+	// <property name="title-widget">
	300	+	// <object class="AdwWindowTitle">
	301	+	// <property name="title" translatable="yes">Title</property>
	302	+	// </object>
	303	+	// </property>
	304	+	//
	305	+	// </object>
	306	+	// ```
	307	+	func (x HeaderBar) SetTitleWidget(TitleWidgetVar gtk.Widget) {
	308	+
	309	+	xHeaderBarSetTitleWidget(x.GoPointer(), TitleWidgetVar.GoPointer())
	310	+
	311	+	}
	312	+
	313	+	func (c *HeaderBar) GoPointer() uintptr {
	314	+	return c.Ptr
	315	+	}
	316	+
	317	+	func (c *HeaderBar) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	318	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	319	+	}
	320	+
	321	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	322	+	func (x *HeaderBar) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	323	+
	324	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	325	+
	326	+	}
	327	+
	328	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	329	+	func (x *HeaderBar) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	330	+
	331	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	332	+
	333	+	}
	334	+
	335	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	336	+	func (x *HeaderBar) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	337	+
	338	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	339	+
	340	+	}
	341	+
	342	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	343	+	func (x *HeaderBar) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	344	+
	345	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	346	+
	347	+	}
	348	+
	349	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	350	+	//
	351	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	352	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	353	+	//
	354	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	355	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	356	+	// technologies.
	357	+	//
	358	+	// Example:
	359	+	// ```c
	360	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	361	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	362	+	//
	363	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	364	+	// -1);
	365	+	//
	366	+	// ```
	367	+	func (x *HeaderBar) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	368	+
	369	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	370	+
	371	+	}
	372	+
	373	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	374	+	//
	375	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	376	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	377	+	//
	378	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	379	+	func (x *HeaderBar) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	380	+
	381	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	382	+
	383	+	}
	384	+
	385	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	386	+	//
	387	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	388	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	389	+	//
	390	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	391	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	392	+	//
	393	+	// ```c
	394	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	395	+	//
	396	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	397	+	// ref1, NULL,
	398	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	399	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	400	+	// -1);
	401	+	//
	402	+	// ```
	403	+	func (x *HeaderBar) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	404	+
	405	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	406	+
	407	+	}
	408	+
	409	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	410	+	//
	411	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	412	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	413	+	//
	414	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	415	+	func (x *HeaderBar) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	416	+
	417	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	418	+
	419	+	}
	420	+
	421	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	422	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	423	+	//
	424	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	425	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	426	+	//
	427	+	// Example:
	428	+	// ```c
	429	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	430	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	431	+	//
	432	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	433	+	// -1);
	434	+	//
	435	+	// ```
	436	+	func (x *HeaderBar) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	437	+
	438	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	439	+
	440	+	}
	441	+
	442	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	443	+	//
	444	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	445	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	446	+	//
	447	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	448	+	func (x *HeaderBar) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	449	+
	450	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	451	+
	452	+	}
	453	+
	454	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	455	+	//
	456	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	457	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	458	+	func (x *HeaderBar) GetBuildableId() string {
	459	+
	460	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	461	+
	462	+	}
	463	+
	464	+	func init() {
	465	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	466	+	if err != nil {
	467	+	panic(err)
	468	+	}
	469	+
	470	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewHeaderBar, lib, "adw_header_bar_new")
	471	+
	472	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarGetCenteringPolicy, lib, "adw_header_bar_get_centering_policy")
	473	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarGetDecorationLayout, lib, "adw_header_bar_get_decoration_layout")
	474	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarGetShowEndTitleButtons, lib, "adw_header_bar_get_show_end_title_buttons")
	475	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarGetShowStartTitleButtons, lib, "adw_header_bar_get_show_start_title_buttons")
	476	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarGetTitleWidget, lib, "adw_header_bar_get_title_widget")
	477	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarPackEnd, lib, "adw_header_bar_pack_end")
	478	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarPackStart, lib, "adw_header_bar_pack_start")
	479	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarRemove, lib, "adw_header_bar_remove")
	480	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarSetCenteringPolicy, lib, "adw_header_bar_set_centering_policy")
	481	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarSetDecorationLayout, lib, "adw_header_bar_set_decoration_layout")
	482	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarSetShowEndTitleButtons, lib, "adw_header_bar_set_show_end_title_buttons")
	483	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarSetShowStartTitleButtons, lib, "adw_header_bar_set_show_start_title_buttons")
	484	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xHeaderBarSetTitleWidget, lib, "adw_header_bar_set_title_widget")
	485	+
	486	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-leaflet.go +880 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,880 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type LeafletClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	type LeafletPageClass struct {
	17	+	ParentClass uintptr
	18	+	}
	19	+
	20	+	// Describes the possible transitions in a [class@Leaflet] widget.
	21	+	//
	22	+	// New values may be added to this enumeration over time.
	23	+	type LeafletTransitionType int
	24	+
	25	+	const (
	26	+
	27	+	// Cover the old page or uncover the new page, sliding from or towards the end according to orientation, text direction and children order
	28	+	LeafletTransitionTypeOverValue LeafletTransitionType = 0
	29	+	// Uncover the new page or cover the old page, sliding from or towards the start according to orientation, text direction and children order
	30	+	LeafletTransitionTypeUnderValue LeafletTransitionType = 1
	31	+	// Slide from left, right, up or down according to the orientation, text direction and the children order
	32	+	LeafletTransitionTypeSlideValue LeafletTransitionType = 2
	33	+	)
	34	+
	35	+	// An adaptive container acting like a box or a stack.
	36	+	//
	37	+	// <picture>
	38	+	//
	39	+	// <source srcset="leaflet-wide-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	40	+	// <img src="leaflet-wide.png" alt="leaflet-wide">
	41	+	//
	42	+	// </picture>
	43	+	// <picture>
	44	+	//
	45	+	// <source srcset="leaflet-narrow-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	46	+	// <img src="leaflet-narrow.png" alt="leaflet-narrow">
	47	+	//
	48	+	// </picture>
	49	+	//
	50	+	// The `AdwLeaflet` widget can display its children like a [class@Gtk.Box] does
	51	+	// or like a [class@Gtk.Stack] does, adapting to size changes by switching
	52	+	// between the two modes.
	53	+	//
	54	+	// When there is enough space the children are displayed side by side, otherwise
	55	+	// only one is displayed and the leaflet is said to be “folded”.
	56	+	// The threshold is dictated by the preferred minimum sizes of the children.
	57	+	// When a leaflet is folded, the children can be navigated using swipe gestures.
	58	+	//
	59	+	// The “over” and “under” transition types stack the children one on top of the
	60	+	// other, while the “slide” transition puts the children side by side. While
	61	+	// navigating to a child on the side or below can be performed by swiping the
	62	+	// current child away, navigating to an upper child requires dragging it from
	63	+	// the edge where it resides. This doesn't affect non-dragging swipes.
	64	+	//
	65	+	// ## CSS nodes
	66	+	//
	67	+	// `AdwLeaflet` has a single CSS node with name `leaflet`. The node will get the
	68	+	// style classes `.folded` when it is folded, `.unfolded` when it's not, or none
	69	+	// if it hasn't computed its fold yet.
	70	+	type Leaflet struct {
	71	+	gtk.Widget
	72	+	}
	73	+
	74	+	func LeafletNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *Leaflet {
	75	+	cls := &Leaflet{}
	76	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	77	+	return cls
	78	+	}
	79	+
	80	+	var xNewLeaflet func() uintptr
	81	+
	82	+	// Creates a new `AdwLeaflet`.
	83	+	func NewLeaflet() *gtk.Widget {
	84	+	NewLeafletPtr := xNewLeaflet()
	85	+	if NewLeafletPtr == 0 {
	86	+	return nil
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewLeafletPtr)
	90	+
	91	+	NewLeafletCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	92	+	NewLeafletCls.Ptr = NewLeafletPtr
	93	+	return NewLeafletCls
	94	+	}
	95	+
	96	+	var xLeafletAppend func(uintptr, uintptr) uintptr
	97	+
	98	+	// Adds a child to @self.
	99	+	func (x Leaflet) Append(ChildVar gtk.Widget) *LeafletPage {
	100	+
	101	+	AppendPtr := xLeafletAppend(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	102	+	if AppendPtr == 0 {
	103	+	return nil
	104	+	}
	105	+
	106	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(AppendPtr)
	107	+
	108	+	AppendCls := &LeafletPage{}
	109	+	AppendCls.Ptr = AppendPtr
	110	+	return AppendCls
	111	+
	112	+	}
	113	+
	114	+	var xLeafletGetAdjacentChild func(uintptr, NavigationDirection) uintptr
	115	+
	116	+	// Finds the previous or next navigatable child.
	117	+	//
	118	+	// This will be the same child [method@Leaflet.navigate] or swipe gestures will
	119	+	// navigate to.
	120	+	//
	121	+	// If there's no child to navigate to, `NULL` will be returned instead.
	122	+	//
	123	+	// See [property@LeafletPage:navigatable].
	124	+	func (x Leaflet) GetAdjacentChild(DirectionVar NavigationDirection) gtk.Widget {
	125	+
	126	+	GetAdjacentChildPtr := xLeafletGetAdjacentChild(x.GoPointer(), DirectionVar)
	127	+	if GetAdjacentChildPtr == 0 {
	128	+	return nil
	129	+	}
	130	+
	131	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetAdjacentChildPtr)
	132	+
	133	+	GetAdjacentChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	134	+	GetAdjacentChildCls.Ptr = GetAdjacentChildPtr
	135	+	return GetAdjacentChildCls
	136	+
	137	+	}
	138	+
	139	+	var xLeafletGetCanNavigateBack func(uintptr) bool
	140	+
	141	+	// Gets whether gestures and shortcuts for navigating backward are enabled.
	142	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetCanNavigateBack() bool {
	143	+
	144	+	return xLeafletGetCanNavigateBack(x.GoPointer())
	145	+
	146	+	}
	147	+
	148	+	var xLeafletGetCanNavigateForward func(uintptr) bool
	149	+
	150	+	// Gets whether gestures and shortcuts for navigating forward are enabled.
	151	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetCanNavigateForward() bool {
	152	+
	153	+	return xLeafletGetCanNavigateForward(x.GoPointer())
	154	+
	155	+	}
	156	+
	157	+	var xLeafletGetCanUnfold func(uintptr) bool
	158	+
	159	+	// Gets whether @self can unfold.
	160	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetCanUnfold() bool {
	161	+
	162	+	return xLeafletGetCanUnfold(x.GoPointer())
	163	+
	164	+	}
	165	+
	166	+	var xLeafletGetChildByName func(uintptr, string) uintptr
	167	+
	168	+	// Finds the child of @self with @name.
	169	+	//
	170	+	// Returns `NULL` if there is no child with this name.
	171	+	//
	172	+	// See [property@LeafletPage:name].
	173	+	func (x Leaflet) GetChildByName(NameVar string) gtk.Widget {
	174	+
	175	+	GetChildByNamePtr := xLeafletGetChildByName(x.GoPointer(), NameVar)
	176	+	if GetChildByNamePtr == 0 {
	177	+	return nil
	178	+	}
	179	+
	180	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetChildByNamePtr)
	181	+
	182	+	GetChildByNameCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	183	+	GetChildByNameCls.Ptr = GetChildByNamePtr
	184	+	return GetChildByNameCls
	185	+
	186	+	}
	187	+
	188	+	var xLeafletGetChildTransitionParams func(uintptr) *SpringParams
	189	+
	190	+	// Gets the child transition spring parameters for @self.
	191	+	func (x Leaflet) GetChildTransitionParams() SpringParams {
	192	+
	193	+	return xLeafletGetChildTransitionParams(x.GoPointer())
	194	+
	195	+	}
	196	+
	197	+	var xLeafletGetChildTransitionRunning func(uintptr) bool
	198	+
	199	+	// Gets whether a child transition is currently running for @self.
	200	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetChildTransitionRunning() bool {
	201	+
	202	+	return xLeafletGetChildTransitionRunning(x.GoPointer())
	203	+
	204	+	}
	205	+
	206	+	var xLeafletGetFoldThresholdPolicy func(uintptr) FoldThresholdPolicy
	207	+
	208	+	// Gets the fold threshold policy for @self.
	209	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetFoldThresholdPolicy() FoldThresholdPolicy {
	210	+
	211	+	return xLeafletGetFoldThresholdPolicy(x.GoPointer())
	212	+
	213	+	}
	214	+
	215	+	var xLeafletGetFolded func(uintptr) bool
	216	+
	217	+	// Gets whether @self is folded.
	218	+	//
	219	+	// The leaflet will be folded if the size allocated to it is smaller than the
	220	+	// sum of the minimum or natural sizes of the children (see
	221	+	// [property@Leaflet:fold-threshold-policy]), it will be unfolded otherwise.
	222	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetFolded() bool {
	223	+
	224	+	return xLeafletGetFolded(x.GoPointer())
	225	+
	226	+	}
	227	+
	228	+	var xLeafletGetHomogeneous func(uintptr) bool
	229	+
	230	+	// Gets whether @self is homogeneous.
	231	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetHomogeneous() bool {
	232	+
	233	+	return xLeafletGetHomogeneous(x.GoPointer())
	234	+
	235	+	}
	236	+
	237	+	var xLeafletGetModeTransitionDuration func(uintptr) uint
	238	+
	239	+	// Gets the mode transition animation duration for @self.
	240	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetModeTransitionDuration() uint {
	241	+
	242	+	return xLeafletGetModeTransitionDuration(x.GoPointer())
	243	+
	244	+	}
	245	+
	246	+	var xLeafletGetPage func(uintptr, uintptr) uintptr
	247	+
	248	+	// Returns the [class@LeafletPage] object for @child.
	249	+	func (x Leaflet) GetPage(ChildVar gtk.Widget) *LeafletPage {
	250	+
	251	+	GetPagePtr := xLeafletGetPage(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	252	+	if GetPagePtr == 0 {
	253	+	return nil
	254	+	}
	255	+
	256	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetPagePtr)
	257	+
	258	+	GetPageCls := &LeafletPage{}
	259	+	GetPageCls.Ptr = GetPagePtr
	260	+	return GetPageCls
	261	+
	262	+	}
	263	+
	264	+	var xLeafletGetPages func(uintptr) uintptr
	265	+
	266	+	// Returns a [iface@Gio.ListModel] that contains the pages of the leaflet.
	267	+	//
	268	+	// This can be used to keep an up-to-date view. The model also implements
	269	+	// [iface@Gtk.SelectionModel] and can be used to track and change the visible
	270	+	// page.
	271	+	func (x Leaflet) GetPages() gtk.SelectionModelBase {
	272	+
	273	+	GetPagesPtr := xLeafletGetPages(x.GoPointer())
	274	+	if GetPagesPtr == 0 {
	275	+	return nil
	276	+	}
	277	+
	278	+	GetPagesCls := &gtk.SelectionModelBase{}
	279	+	GetPagesCls.Ptr = GetPagesPtr
	280	+	return GetPagesCls
	281	+
	282	+	}
	283	+
	284	+	var xLeafletGetTransitionType func(uintptr) LeafletTransitionType
	285	+
	286	+	// Gets the type of animation used for transitions between modes and children.
	287	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetTransitionType() LeafletTransitionType {
	288	+
	289	+	return xLeafletGetTransitionType(x.GoPointer())
	290	+
	291	+	}
	292	+
	293	+	var xLeafletGetVisibleChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	294	+
	295	+	// Gets the widget currently visible when the leaflet is folded.
	296	+	func (x Leaflet) GetVisibleChild() gtk.Widget {
	297	+
	298	+	GetVisibleChildPtr := xLeafletGetVisibleChild(x.GoPointer())
	299	+	if GetVisibleChildPtr == 0 {
	300	+	return nil
	301	+	}
	302	+
	303	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetVisibleChildPtr)
	304	+
	305	+	GetVisibleChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	306	+	GetVisibleChildCls.Ptr = GetVisibleChildPtr
	307	+	return GetVisibleChildCls
	308	+
	309	+	}
	310	+
	311	+	var xLeafletGetVisibleChildName func(uintptr) string
	312	+
	313	+	// Gets the name of the currently visible child widget.
	314	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetVisibleChildName() string {
	315	+
	316	+	return xLeafletGetVisibleChildName(x.GoPointer())
	317	+
	318	+	}
	319	+
	320	+	var xLeafletInsertChildAfter func(uintptr, uintptr, uintptr) uintptr
	321	+
	322	+	// Inserts @child in the position after @sibling in the list of children.
	323	+	//
	324	+	// If @sibling is `NULL`, inserts @child at the first position.
	325	+	func (x Leaflet) InsertChildAfter(ChildVar gtk.Widget, SiblingVar gtk.Widget) LeafletPage {
	326	+
	327	+	InsertChildAfterPtr := xLeafletInsertChildAfter(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer(), SiblingVar.GoPointer())
	328	+	if InsertChildAfterPtr == 0 {
	329	+	return nil
	330	+	}
	331	+
	332	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(InsertChildAfterPtr)
	333	+
	334	+	InsertChildAfterCls := &LeafletPage{}
	335	+	InsertChildAfterCls.Ptr = InsertChildAfterPtr
	336	+	return InsertChildAfterCls
	337	+
	338	+	}
	339	+
	340	+	var xLeafletNavigate func(uintptr, NavigationDirection) bool
	341	+
	342	+	// Navigates to the previous or next child.
	343	+	//
	344	+	// The child must have the [property@LeafletPage:navigatable] property set to
	345	+	// `TRUE`, otherwise it will be skipped.
	346	+	//
	347	+	// This will be the same child as returned by
	348	+	// [method@Leaflet.get_adjacent_child] or navigated to via swipe gestures.
	349	+	func (x *Leaflet) Navigate(DirectionVar NavigationDirection) bool {
	350	+
	351	+	return xLeafletNavigate(x.GoPointer(), DirectionVar)
	352	+
	353	+	}
	354	+
	355	+	var xLeafletPrepend func(uintptr, uintptr) uintptr
	356	+
	357	+	// Inserts @child at the first position in @self.
	358	+	func (x Leaflet) Prepend(ChildVar gtk.Widget) *LeafletPage {
	359	+
	360	+	PrependPtr := xLeafletPrepend(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	361	+	if PrependPtr == 0 {
	362	+	return nil
	363	+	}
	364	+
	365	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(PrependPtr)
	366	+
	367	+	PrependCls := &LeafletPage{}
	368	+	PrependCls.Ptr = PrependPtr
	369	+	return PrependCls
	370	+
	371	+	}
	372	+
	373	+	var xLeafletRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	374	+
	375	+	// Removes a child widget from @self.
	376	+	func (x Leaflet) Remove(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	377	+
	378	+	xLeafletRemove(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	379	+
	380	+	}
	381	+
	382	+	var xLeafletReorderChildAfter func(uintptr, uintptr, uintptr)
	383	+
	384	+	// Moves @child to the position after @sibling in the list of children.
	385	+	//
	386	+	// If @sibling is `NULL`, moves @child to the first position.
	387	+	func (x Leaflet) ReorderChildAfter(ChildVar gtk.Widget, SiblingVar *gtk.Widget) {
	388	+
	389	+	xLeafletReorderChildAfter(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer(), SiblingVar.GoPointer())
	390	+
	391	+	}
	392	+
	393	+	var xLeafletSetCanNavigateBack func(uintptr, bool)
	394	+
	395	+	// Sets whether gestures and shortcuts for navigating backward are enabled.
	396	+	//
	397	+	// The supported gestures are:
	398	+	//
	399	+	// - One-finger swipe on touchscreens
	400	+	// - Horizontal scrolling on touchpads (usually two-finger swipe)
	401	+	// - Back/forward mouse buttons
	402	+	//
	403	+	// The keyboard back/forward keys are also supported, as well as the
	404	+	// <kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>←</kbd> shortcut for horizontal orientation, or
	405	+	// <kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>↑</kbd> for vertical orientation.
	406	+	//
	407	+	// If the orientation is horizontal, for right-to-left locales, gestures and
	408	+	// shortcuts are reversed.
	409	+	//
	410	+	// Only children that have [property@LeafletPage:navigatable] set to `TRUE` can
	411	+	// be navigated to.
	412	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetCanNavigateBack(CanNavigateBackVar bool) {
	413	+
	414	+	xLeafletSetCanNavigateBack(x.GoPointer(), CanNavigateBackVar)
	415	+
	416	+	}
	417	+
	418	+	var xLeafletSetCanNavigateForward func(uintptr, bool)
	419	+
	420	+	// Sets whether gestures and shortcuts for navigating forward are enabled.
	421	+	//
	422	+	// The supported gestures are:
	423	+	//
	424	+	// - One-finger swipe on touchscreens
	425	+	// - Horizontal scrolling on touchpads (usually two-finger swipe)
	426	+	// - Back/forward mouse buttons
	427	+	//
	428	+	// The keyboard back/forward keys are also supported, as well as the
	429	+	// <kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>→</kbd> shortcut for horizontal orientation, or
	430	+	// <kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>↓</kbd> for vertical orientation.
	431	+	//
	432	+	// If the orientation is horizontal, for right-to-left locales, gestures and
	433	+	// shortcuts are reversed.
	434	+	//
	435	+	// Only children that have [property@LeafletPage:navigatable] set to `TRUE` can
	436	+	// be navigated to.
	437	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetCanNavigateForward(CanNavigateForwardVar bool) {
	438	+
	439	+	xLeafletSetCanNavigateForward(x.GoPointer(), CanNavigateForwardVar)
	440	+
	441	+	}
	442	+
	443	+	var xLeafletSetCanUnfold func(uintptr, bool)
	444	+
	445	+	// Sets whether @self can unfold.
	446	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetCanUnfold(CanUnfoldVar bool) {
	447	+
	448	+	xLeafletSetCanUnfold(x.GoPointer(), CanUnfoldVar)
	449	+
	450	+	}
	451	+
	452	+	var xLeafletSetChildTransitionParams func(uintptr, *SpringParams)
	453	+
	454	+	// Sets the child transition spring parameters for @self.
	455	+	//
	456	+	// The default value is equivalent to:
	457	+	//
	458	+	// ```c
	459	+	// adw_spring_params_new (1, 0.5, 500)
	460	+	// ```
	461	+	func (x Leaflet) SetChildTransitionParams(ParamsVar SpringParams) {
	462	+
	463	+	xLeafletSetChildTransitionParams(x.GoPointer(), ParamsVar)
	464	+
	465	+	}
	466	+
	467	+	var xLeafletSetFoldThresholdPolicy func(uintptr, FoldThresholdPolicy)
	468	+
	469	+	// Sets the fold threshold policy for @self.
	470	+	//
	471	+	// If set to `ADW_FOLD_THRESHOLD_POLICY_MINIMUM`, it will only fold when the
	472	+	// children cannot fit anymore. With `ADW_FOLD_THRESHOLD_POLICY_NATURAL`, it
	473	+	// will fold as soon as children don't get their natural size.
	474	+	//
	475	+	// This can be useful if you have a long ellipsizing label and want to let it
	476	+	// ellipsize instead of immediately folding.
	477	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetFoldThresholdPolicy(PolicyVar FoldThresholdPolicy) {
	478	+
	479	+	xLeafletSetFoldThresholdPolicy(x.GoPointer(), PolicyVar)
	480	+
	481	+	}
	482	+
	483	+	var xLeafletSetHomogeneous func(uintptr, bool)
	484	+
	485	+	// Sets @self to be homogeneous or not.
	486	+	//
	487	+	// If set to `FALSE`, different children can have different size along the
	488	+	// opposite orientation.
	489	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetHomogeneous(HomogeneousVar bool) {
	490	+
	491	+	xLeafletSetHomogeneous(x.GoPointer(), HomogeneousVar)
	492	+
	493	+	}
	494	+
	495	+	var xLeafletSetModeTransitionDuration func(uintptr, uint)
	496	+
	497	+	// Sets the mode transition animation duration for @self.
	498	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetModeTransitionDuration(DurationVar uint) {
	499	+
	500	+	xLeafletSetModeTransitionDuration(x.GoPointer(), DurationVar)
	501	+
	502	+	}
	503	+
	504	+	var xLeafletSetTransitionType func(uintptr, LeafletTransitionType)
	505	+
	506	+	// Sets the type of animation used for transitions between modes and children.
	507	+	//
	508	+	// The transition type can be changed without problems at runtime, so it is
	509	+	// possible to change the animation based on the mode or child that is about to
	510	+	// become current.
	511	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetTransitionType(TransitionVar LeafletTransitionType) {
	512	+
	513	+	xLeafletSetTransitionType(x.GoPointer(), TransitionVar)
	514	+
	515	+	}
	516	+
	517	+	var xLeafletSetVisibleChild func(uintptr, uintptr)
	518	+
	519	+	// Sets the widget currently visible when the leaflet is folded.
	520	+	//
	521	+	// The transition is determined by [property@Leaflet:transition-type] and
	522	+	// [property@Leaflet:child-transition-params]. The transition can be cancelled
	523	+	// by the user, in which case visible child will change back to the previously
	524	+	// visible child.
	525	+	func (x Leaflet) SetVisibleChild(VisibleChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	526	+
	527	+	xLeafletSetVisibleChild(x.GoPointer(), VisibleChildVar.GoPointer())
	528	+
	529	+	}
	530	+
	531	+	var xLeafletSetVisibleChildName func(uintptr, string)
	532	+
	533	+	// Makes the child with the name @name visible.
	534	+	//
	535	+	// See [property@Leaflet:visible-child].
	536	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetVisibleChildName(NameVar string) {
	537	+
	538	+	xLeafletSetVisibleChildName(x.GoPointer(), NameVar)
	539	+
	540	+	}
	541	+
	542	+	func (c *Leaflet) GoPointer() uintptr {
	543	+	return c.Ptr
	544	+	}
	545	+
	546	+	func (c *Leaflet) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	547	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	548	+	}
	549	+
	550	+	// Gets the progress @self will snap back to after the gesture is canceled.
	551	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetCancelProgress() float64 {
	552	+
	553	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetCancelProgress(x.GoPointer())
	554	+
	555	+	}
	556	+
	557	+	// Gets the swipe distance of @self.
	558	+	//
	559	+	// This corresponds to how many pixels 1 unit represents.
	560	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetDistance() float64 {
	561	+
	562	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetDistance(x.GoPointer())
	563	+
	564	+	}
	565	+
	566	+	// Gets the current progress of @self.
	567	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetProgress() float64 {
	568	+
	569	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetProgress(x.GoPointer())
	570	+
	571	+	}
	572	+
	573	+	// Gets the snap points of @self.
	574	+	//
	575	+	// Each snap point represents a progress value that is considered acceptable to
	576	+	// end the swipe on.
	577	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetSnapPoints(NSnapPointsVar int32) uintptr {
	578	+
	579	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetSnapPoints(x.GoPointer(), NSnapPointsVar)
	580	+
	581	+	}
	582	+
	583	+	// Gets the area @self can start a swipe from for the given direction and
	584	+	// gesture type.
	585	+	//
	586	+	// This can be used to restrict swipes to only be possible from a certain area,
	587	+	// for example, to only allow edge swipes, or to have a draggable element and
	588	+	// ignore swipes elsewhere.
	589	+	//
	590	+	// If not implemented, the default implementation returns the allocation of
	591	+	// @self, allowing swipes from anywhere.
	592	+	func (x Leaflet) GetSwipeArea(NavigationDirectionVar NavigationDirection, IsDragVar bool, RectVar gdk.Rectangle) {
	593	+
	594	+	XAdwSwipeableGetSwipeArea(x.GoPointer(), NavigationDirectionVar, IsDragVar, RectVar)
	595	+
	596	+	}
	597	+
	598	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	599	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	600	+
	601	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	602	+
	603	+	}
	604	+
	605	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	606	+	func (x *Leaflet) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	607	+
	608	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	609	+
	610	+	}
	611	+
	612	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	613	+	func (x *Leaflet) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	614	+
	615	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	616	+
	617	+	}
	618	+
	619	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	620	+	func (x *Leaflet) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	621	+
	622	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	623	+
	624	+	}
	625	+
	626	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	627	+	//
	628	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	629	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	630	+	//
	631	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	632	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	633	+	// technologies.
	634	+	//
	635	+	// Example:
	636	+	// ```c
	637	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	638	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	639	+	//
	640	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	641	+	// -1);
	642	+	//
	643	+	// ```
	644	+	func (x *Leaflet) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	645	+
	646	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	647	+
	648	+	}
	649	+
	650	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	651	+	//
	652	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	653	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	654	+	//
	655	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	656	+	func (x *Leaflet) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	657	+
	658	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	659	+
	660	+	}
	661	+
	662	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	663	+	//
	664	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	665	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	666	+	//
	667	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	668	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	669	+	//
	670	+	// ```c
	671	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	672	+	//
	673	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	674	+	// ref1, NULL,
	675	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	676	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	677	+	// -1);
	678	+	//
	679	+	// ```
	680	+	func (x *Leaflet) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	681	+
	682	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	683	+
	684	+	}
	685	+
	686	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	687	+	//
	688	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	689	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	690	+	//
	691	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	692	+	func (x *Leaflet) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	693	+
	694	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	695	+
	696	+	}
	697	+
	698	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	699	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	700	+	//
	701	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	702	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	703	+	//
	704	+	// Example:
	705	+	// ```c
	706	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	707	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	708	+	//
	709	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	710	+	// -1);
	711	+	//
	712	+	// ```
	713	+	func (x *Leaflet) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	714	+
	715	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	716	+
	717	+	}
	718	+
	719	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	720	+	//
	721	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	722	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	723	+	//
	724	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	725	+	func (x *Leaflet) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	726	+
	727	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	728	+
	729	+	}
	730	+
	731	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	732	+	//
	733	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	734	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	735	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetBuildableId() string {
	736	+
	737	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	738	+
	739	+	}
	740	+
	741	+	// Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
	742	+	func (x *Leaflet) GetOrientation() gtk.Orientation {
	743	+
	744	+	return gtk.XGtkOrientableGetOrientation(x.GoPointer())
	745	+
	746	+	}
	747	+
	748	+	// Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
	749	+	func (x *Leaflet) SetOrientation(OrientationVar gtk.Orientation) {
	750	+
	751	+	gtk.XGtkOrientableSetOrientation(x.GoPointer(), OrientationVar)
	752	+
	753	+	}
	754	+
	755	+	// An auxiliary class used by [class@Leaflet].
	756	+	type LeafletPage struct {
	757	+	gobject.Object
	758	+	}
	759	+
	760	+	func LeafletPageNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *LeafletPage {
	761	+	cls := &LeafletPage{}
	762	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	763	+	return cls
	764	+	}
	765	+
	766	+	var xLeafletPageGetChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	767	+
	768	+	// Gets the leaflet child to which @self belongs.
	769	+	func (x LeafletPage) GetChild() gtk.Widget {
	770	+
	771	+	GetChildPtr := xLeafletPageGetChild(x.GoPointer())
	772	+	if GetChildPtr == 0 {
	773	+	return nil
	774	+	}
	775	+
	776	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetChildPtr)
	777	+
	778	+	GetChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	779	+	GetChildCls.Ptr = GetChildPtr
	780	+	return GetChildCls
	781	+
	782	+	}
	783	+
	784	+	var xLeafletPageGetName func(uintptr) string
	785	+
	786	+	// Gets the name of @self.
	787	+	func (x *LeafletPage) GetName() string {
	788	+
	789	+	return xLeafletPageGetName(x.GoPointer())
	790	+
	791	+	}
	792	+
	793	+	var xLeafletPageGetNavigatable func(uintptr) bool
	794	+
	795	+	// Gets whether the child can be navigated to when folded.
	796	+	func (x *LeafletPage) GetNavigatable() bool {
	797	+
	798	+	return xLeafletPageGetNavigatable(x.GoPointer())
	799	+
	800	+	}
	801	+
	802	+	var xLeafletPageSetName func(uintptr, string)
	803	+
	804	+	// Sets the name of the @self.
	805	+	func (x *LeafletPage) SetName(NameVar string) {
	806	+
	807	+	xLeafletPageSetName(x.GoPointer(), NameVar)
	808	+
	809	+	}
	810	+
	811	+	var xLeafletPageSetNavigatable func(uintptr, bool)
	812	+
	813	+	// Sets whether @self can be navigated to when folded.
	814	+	//
	815	+	// If `FALSE`, the child will be ignored by [method@Leaflet.get_adjacent_child],
	816	+	// [method@Leaflet.navigate], and swipe gestures.
	817	+	//
	818	+	// This can be used used to prevent switching to widgets like separators.
	819	+	func (x *LeafletPage) SetNavigatable(NavigatableVar bool) {
	820	+
	821	+	xLeafletPageSetNavigatable(x.GoPointer(), NavigatableVar)
	822	+
	823	+	}
	824	+
	825	+	func (c *LeafletPage) GoPointer() uintptr {
	826	+	return c.Ptr
	827	+	}
	828	+
	829	+	func (c *LeafletPage) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	830	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	831	+	}
	832	+
	833	+	func init() {
	834	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	835	+	if err != nil {
	836	+	panic(err)
	837	+	}
	838	+
	839	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewLeaflet, lib, "adw_leaflet_new")
	840	+
	841	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletAppend, lib, "adw_leaflet_append")
	842	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetAdjacentChild, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_adjacent_child")
	843	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetCanNavigateBack, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_can_navigate_back")
	844	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetCanNavigateForward, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_can_navigate_forward")
	845	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetCanUnfold, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_can_unfold")
	846	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetChildByName, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_child_by_name")
	847	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetChildTransitionParams, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_child_transition_params")
	848	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetChildTransitionRunning, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_child_transition_running")
	849	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetFoldThresholdPolicy, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_fold_threshold_policy")
	850	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetFolded, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_folded")
	851	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetHomogeneous, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_homogeneous")
	852	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetModeTransitionDuration, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_mode_transition_duration")
	853	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetPage, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_page")
	854	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetPages, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_pages")
	855	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetTransitionType, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_transition_type")
	856	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetVisibleChild, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_visible_child")
	857	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletGetVisibleChildName, lib, "adw_leaflet_get_visible_child_name")
	858	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletInsertChildAfter, lib, "adw_leaflet_insert_child_after")
	859	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletNavigate, lib, "adw_leaflet_navigate")
	860	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletPrepend, lib, "adw_leaflet_prepend")
	861	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletRemove, lib, "adw_leaflet_remove")
	862	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletReorderChildAfter, lib, "adw_leaflet_reorder_child_after")
	863	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetCanNavigateBack, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_can_navigate_back")
	864	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetCanNavigateForward, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_can_navigate_forward")
	865	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetCanUnfold, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_can_unfold")
	866	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetChildTransitionParams, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_child_transition_params")
	867	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetFoldThresholdPolicy, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_fold_threshold_policy")
	868	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetHomogeneous, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_homogeneous")
	869	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetModeTransitionDuration, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_mode_transition_duration")
	870	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetTransitionType, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_transition_type")
	871	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetVisibleChild, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_visible_child")
	872	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletSetVisibleChildName, lib, "adw_leaflet_set_visible_child_name")
	873	+
	874	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletPageGetChild, lib, "adw_leaflet_page_get_child")
	875	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletPageGetName, lib, "adw_leaflet_page_get_name")
	876	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletPageGetNavigatable, lib, "adw_leaflet_page_get_navigatable")
	877	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletPageSetName, lib, "adw_leaflet_page_set_name")
	878	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xLeafletPageSetNavigatable, lib, "adw_leaflet_page_set_navigatable")
	879	+
	880	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-main.go +46 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	)
	8	+
	9	+	var xInit func()
	10	+
	11	+	// Initializes Libadwaita.
	12	+	//
	13	+	// This function can be used instead of [func@Gtk.init] as it initializes GTK
	14	+	// implicitly.
	15	+	//
	16	+	// There's no need to call this function if you're using [class@Application].
	17	+	//
	18	+	// If Libadwaita has already been initialized, the function will simply return.
	19	+	//
	20	+	// This makes sure translations, types, themes, and icons for the Adwaita
	21	+	// library are set up properly.
	22	+	func Init() {
	23	+
	24	+	xInit()
	25	+
	26	+	}
	27	+
	28	+	var xIsInitialized func() bool
	29	+
	30	+	// Use this function to check if libadwaita has been initialized with
	31	+	// [func@init].
	32	+	func IsInitialized() bool {
	33	+
	34	+	return xIsInitialized()
	35	+
	36	+	}
	37	+
	38	+	func init() {
	39	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	40	+	if err != nil {
	41	+	panic(err)
	42	+	}
	43	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xInit, lib, "adw_init")
	44	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xIsInitialized, lib, "adw_is_initialized")
	45	+
	46	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-message-dialog.go +928 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,928 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gio"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gsk"
	11	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	12	+	)
	13	+
	14	+	type MessageDialogClass struct {
	15	+	ParentClass uintptr
	16	+
	17	+	Padding uintptr
	18	+	}
	19	+
	20	+	// Describes the possible styles of [class@MessageDialog] response buttons.
	21	+	//
	22	+	// See [method@MessageDialog.set_response_appearance].
	23	+	type ResponseAppearance int
	24	+
	25	+	const (
	26	+
	27	+	// the default appearance.
	28	+	ResponseDefaultValue ResponseAppearance = 0
	29	+	// used to denote important responses such as the
	30	+	// affirmative action.
	31	+	ResponseSuggestedValue ResponseAppearance = 1
	32	+	// used to draw attention to the potentially damaging
	33	+	// consequences of using the response. This appearance acts as a warning to
	34	+	// the user.
	35	+	ResponseDestructiveValue ResponseAppearance = 2
	36	+	)
	37	+
	38	+	// A dialog presenting a message or a question.
	39	+	//
	40	+	// <picture>
	41	+	//
	42	+	// <source srcset="message-dialog-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	43	+	// <img src="message-dialog.png" alt="message-dialog">
	44	+	//
	45	+	// </picture>
	46	+	//
	47	+	// Message dialogs have a heading, a body, an optional child widget, and one or
	48	+	// multiple responses, each presented as a button.
	49	+	//
	50	+	// Each response has a unique string ID, and a button label. Additionally, each
	51	+	// response can be enabled or disabled, and can have a suggested or destructive
	52	+	// appearance.
	53	+	//
	54	+	// When one of the responses is activated, or the dialog is closed, the
	55	+	// [signal@MessageDialog::response] signal will be emitted. This signal is
	56	+	// detailed, and the detail, as well as the `response` parameter will be set to
	57	+	// the ID of the activated response, or to the value of the
	58	+	// [property@MessageDialog:close-response] property if the dialog had been
	59	+	// closed without activating any of the responses.
	60	+	//
	61	+	// Response buttons can be presented horizontally or vertically depending on
	62	+	// available space.
	63	+	//
	64	+	// When a response is activated, `AdwMessageDialog` is closed automatically.
	65	+	//
	66	+	// An example of using a message dialog:
	67	+	//
	68	+	// ```c
	69	+	// GtkWidget *dialog;
	70	+	//
	71	+	// dialog = adw_message_dialog_new (parent, _("Replace File?"), NULL);
	72	+	//
	73	+	// adw_message_dialog_format_body (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
	74	+	//
	75	+	// _("A file named “%s” already exists. Do you want to replace it?"),
	76	+	// filename);
	77	+	//
	78	+	// adw_message_dialog_add_responses (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
	79	+	//
	80	+	// "cancel", _("_Cancel"),
	81	+	// "replace", _("_Replace"),
	82	+	// NULL);
	83	+	//
	84	+	// adw_message_dialog_set_response_appearance (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog), "replace", ADW_RESPONSE_DESTRUCTIVE);
	85	+	//
	86	+	// adw_message_dialog_set_default_response (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog), "cancel");
	87	+	// adw_message_dialog_set_close_response (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog), "cancel");
	88	+	//
	89	+	// g_signal_connect (dialog, "response", G_CALLBACK (response_cb), self);
	90	+	//
	91	+	// gtk_window_present (GTK_WINDOW (dialog));
	92	+	// ```
	93	+	//
	94	+	// ## Async API
	95	+	//
	96	+	// `AdwMessageDialog` can also be used via the [method@MessageDialog.choose]
	97	+	// method. This API follows the GIO async pattern, and the result can be
	98	+	// obtained by calling [method@MessageDialog.choose_finish], for example:
	99	+	//
	100	+	// ```c
	101	+	// static void
	102	+	// dialog_cb (AdwMessageDialog *dialog,
	103	+	//
	104	+	// GAsyncResult *result,
	105	+	// MyWindow *self)
	106	+	//
	107	+	// {
	108	+	// const char *response = adw_message_dialog_choose_finish (dialog, result);
	109	+	//
	110	+	// // ...
	111	+	// }
	112	+	//
	113	+	// static void
	114	+	// show_dialog (MyWindow *self)
	115	+	//
	116	+	// {
	117	+	// GtkWidget *dialog;
	118	+	//
	119	+	// dialog = adw_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (self), _("Replace File?"), NULL);
	120	+	//
	121	+	// adw_message_dialog_format_body (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
	122	+	// _("A file named “%s” already exists. Do you want to replace it?"),
	123	+	// filename);
	124	+	//
	125	+	// adw_message_dialog_add_responses (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
	126	+	// "cancel", _("_Cancel"),
	127	+	// "replace", _("_Replace"),
	128	+	// NULL);
	129	+	//
	130	+	// adw_message_dialog_set_response_appearance (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog), "replace", ADW_RESPONSE_DESTRUCTIVE);
	131	+	//
	132	+	// adw_message_dialog_set_default_response (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog), "cancel");
	133	+	// adw_message_dialog_set_close_response (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog), "cancel");
	134	+	//
	135	+	// adw_message_dialog_choose (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog), NULL, (GAsyncReadyCallback) dialog_cb, self);
	136	+	// }
	137	+	//
	138	+	// ```
	139	+	//
	140	+	// ## AdwMessageDialog as GtkBuildable
	141	+	//
	142	+	// `AdwMessageDialog` supports adding responses in UI definitions by via the
	143	+	// `<responses>` element that may contain multiple `<response>` elements, each
	144	+	// respresenting a response.
	145	+	//
	146	+	// Each of the `<response>` elements must have the `id` attribute specifying the
	147	+	// response ID. The contents of the element are used as the response label.
	148	+	//
	149	+	// Response labels can be translated with the usual `translatable`, `context`
	150	+	// and `comments` attributes.
	151	+	//
	152	+	// The `<response>` elements can also have `enabled` and/or `appearance`
	153	+	// attributes. See [method@MessageDialog.set_response_enabled] and
	154	+	// [method@MessageDialog.set_response_appearance] for details.
	155	+	//
	156	+	// Example of an `AdwMessageDialog` UI definition:
	157	+	//
	158	+	// ```xml
	159	+	// <object class="AdwMessageDialog" id="dialog">
	160	+	//
	161	+	// <property name="heading" translatable="yes">Save Changes?</property>
	162	+	// <property name="body" translatable="yes">Open documents contain unsaved changes. Changes which are not saved will be permanently lost.</property>
	163	+	// <property name="default-response">save</property>
	164	+	// <property name="close-response">cancel</property>
	165	+	// <signal name="response" handler="response_cb"/>
	166	+	// <responses>
	167	+	// <response id="cancel" translatable="yes">_Cancel</response>
	168	+	// <response id="discard" translatable="yes" appearance="destructive">_Discard</response>
	169	+	// <response id="save" translatable="yes" appearance="suggested" enabled="false">_Save</response>
	170	+	// </responses>
	171	+	//
	172	+	// </object>
	173	+	// ```
	174	+	//
	175	+	// ## Accessibility
	176	+	//
	177	+	// `AdwMessageDialog` uses the `GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_DIALOG` role.
	178	+	type MessageDialog struct {
	179	+	gtk.Window
	180	+	}
	181	+
	182	+	func MessageDialogNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *MessageDialog {
	183	+	cls := &MessageDialog{}
	184	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	185	+	return cls
	186	+	}
	187	+
	188	+	var xNewMessageDialog func(uintptr, string, string) uintptr
	189	+
	190	+	// Creates a new `AdwMessageDialog`.
	191	+	//
	192	+	// @heading and @body can be set to `NULL`. This can be useful if they need to
	193	+	// be formatted or use markup. In that case, set them to `NULL` and call
	194	+	// [method@MessageDialog.format_body] or similar methods afterwards:
	195	+	//
	196	+	// ```c
	197	+	// GtkWidget *dialog;
	198	+	//
	199	+	// dialog = adw_message_dialog_new (parent, _("Replace File?"), NULL);
	200	+	// adw_message_dialog_format_body (ADW_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
	201	+	//
	202	+	// _("A file named “%s” already exists. Do you want to replace it?"),
	203	+	// filename);
	204	+	//
	205	+	// ```
	206	+	func NewMessageDialog(ParentVar gtk.Window, HeadingVar string, BodyVar string) gtk.Widget {
	207	+	NewMessageDialogPtr := xNewMessageDialog(ParentVar.GoPointer(), HeadingVar, BodyVar)
	208	+	if NewMessageDialogPtr == 0 {
	209	+	return nil
	210	+	}
	211	+
	212	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewMessageDialogPtr)
	213	+
	214	+	NewMessageDialogCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	215	+	NewMessageDialogCls.Ptr = NewMessageDialogPtr
	216	+	return NewMessageDialogCls
	217	+	}
	218	+
	219	+	var xMessageDialogAddResponse func(uintptr, string, string)
	220	+
	221	+	// Adds a response with @id and @label to @self.
	222	+	//
	223	+	// Responses are represented as buttons in the dialog.
	224	+	//
	225	+	// Response ID must be unique. It will be used in
	226	+	// [signal@MessageDialog::response] to tell which response had been activated,
	227	+	// as well as to inspect and modify the response later.
	228	+	//
	229	+	// An embedded underline in @label indicates a mnemonic.
	230	+	//
	231	+	// [method@MessageDialog.set_response_label] can be used to change the response
	232	+	// label after it had been added.
	233	+	//
	234	+	// [method@MessageDialog.set_response_enabled] and
	235	+	// [method@MessageDialog.set_response_appearance] can be used to customize the
	236	+	// responses further.
	237	+	func (x *MessageDialog) AddResponse(IdVar string, LabelVar string) {
	238	+
	239	+	xMessageDialogAddResponse(x.GoPointer(), IdVar, LabelVar)
	240	+
	241	+	}
	242	+
	243	+	var xMessageDialogAddResponses func(uintptr, string, ...interface{})
	244	+
	245	+	// Adds multiple responses to @self.
	246	+	//
	247	+	// This is the same as calling [method@MessageDialog.add_response] repeatedly.
	248	+	// The variable argument list should be `NULL`-terminated list of response IDs
	249	+	// and labels.
	250	+	//
	251	+	// Example:
	252	+	//
	253	+	// ```c
	254	+	// adw_message_dialog_add_responses (dialog,
	255	+	//
	256	+	// "cancel", _("_Cancel"),
	257	+	// "discard", _("_Discard"),
	258	+	// "save", _("_Save"),
	259	+	// NULL);
	260	+	//
	261	+	// ```
	262	+	func (x *MessageDialog) AddResponses(FirstIdVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	263	+
	264	+	xMessageDialogAddResponses(x.GoPointer(), FirstIdVar, varArgs...)
	265	+
	266	+	}
	267	+
	268	+	var xMessageDialogChoose func(uintptr, uintptr, uintptr, uintptr)
	269	+
	270	+	// This function shows @self to the user.
	271	+	//
	272	+	// The @callback will be called when the alert is dismissed. It should call
	273	+	// [method@MessageDialog.choose_finish] to obtain the result.
	274	+	func (x MessageDialog) Choose(CancellableVar gio.Cancellable, CallbackVar gio.AsyncReadyCallback, UserDataVar uintptr) {
	275	+
	276	+	xMessageDialogChoose(x.GoPointer(), CancellableVar.GoPointer(), purego.NewCallback(CallbackVar), UserDataVar)
	277	+
	278	+	}
	279	+
	280	+	var xMessageDialogChooseFinish func(uintptr, uintptr) string
	281	+
	282	+	// Finishes the [method@MessageDialog.choose] call and returns the response ID.
	283	+	func (x *MessageDialog) ChooseFinish(ResultVar gio.AsyncResult) string {
	284	+
	285	+	return xMessageDialogChooseFinish(x.GoPointer(), ResultVar.GoPointer())
	286	+
	287	+	}
	288	+
	289	+	var xMessageDialogFormatBody func(uintptr, string, ...interface{})
	290	+
	291	+	// Sets the formatted body text of @self.
	292	+	//
	293	+	// See [property@MessageDialog:body].
	294	+	func (x *MessageDialog) FormatBody(FormatVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	295	+
	296	+	xMessageDialogFormatBody(x.GoPointer(), FormatVar, varArgs...)
	297	+
	298	+	}
	299	+
	300	+	var xMessageDialogFormatBodyMarkup func(uintptr, string, ...interface{})
	301	+
	302	+	// Sets the formatted body text of @self with Pango markup.
	303	+	//
	304	+	// The @format is assumed to contain Pango markup.
	305	+	//
	306	+	// Special XML characters in the `printf()` arguments passed to this function
	307	+	// will automatically be escaped as necessary, see
	308	+	// [func@GLib.markup_printf_escaped].
	309	+	//
	310	+	// See [property@MessageDialog:body].
	311	+	func (x *MessageDialog) FormatBodyMarkup(FormatVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	312	+
	313	+	xMessageDialogFormatBodyMarkup(x.GoPointer(), FormatVar, varArgs...)
	314	+
	315	+	}
	316	+
	317	+	var xMessageDialogFormatHeading func(uintptr, string, ...interface{})
	318	+
	319	+	// Sets the formatted heading of @self.
	320	+	//
	321	+	// See [property@MessageDialog:heading].
	322	+	func (x *MessageDialog) FormatHeading(FormatVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	323	+
	324	+	xMessageDialogFormatHeading(x.GoPointer(), FormatVar, varArgs...)
	325	+
	326	+	}
	327	+
	328	+	var xMessageDialogFormatHeadingMarkup func(uintptr, string, ...interface{})
	329	+
	330	+	// Sets the formatted heading of @self with Pango markup.
	331	+	//
	332	+	// The @format is assumed to contain Pango markup.
	333	+	//
	334	+	// Special XML characters in the `printf()` arguments passed to this function
	335	+	// will automatically be escaped as necessary, see
	336	+	// [func@GLib.markup_printf_escaped].
	337	+	//
	338	+	// See [property@MessageDialog:heading].
	339	+	func (x *MessageDialog) FormatHeadingMarkup(FormatVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	340	+
	341	+	xMessageDialogFormatHeadingMarkup(x.GoPointer(), FormatVar, varArgs...)
	342	+
	343	+	}
	344	+
	345	+	var xMessageDialogGetBody func(uintptr) string
	346	+
	347	+	// Gets the body text of @self.
	348	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetBody() string {
	349	+
	350	+	return xMessageDialogGetBody(x.GoPointer())
	351	+
	352	+	}
	353	+
	354	+	var xMessageDialogGetBodyUseMarkup func(uintptr) bool
	355	+
	356	+	// Gets whether the body text of @self includes Pango markup.
	357	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetBodyUseMarkup() bool {
	358	+
	359	+	return xMessageDialogGetBodyUseMarkup(x.GoPointer())
	360	+
	361	+	}
	362	+
	363	+	var xMessageDialogGetCloseResponse func(uintptr) string
	364	+
	365	+	// Gets the ID of the close response of @self.
	366	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetCloseResponse() string {
	367	+
	368	+	return xMessageDialogGetCloseResponse(x.GoPointer())
	369	+
	370	+	}
	371	+
	372	+	var xMessageDialogGetDefaultResponse func(uintptr) string
	373	+
	374	+	// Gets the ID of the default response of @self.
	375	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetDefaultResponse() string {
	376	+
	377	+	return xMessageDialogGetDefaultResponse(x.GoPointer())
	378	+
	379	+	}
	380	+
	381	+	var xMessageDialogGetExtraChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	382	+
	383	+	// Gets the child widget of @self.
	384	+	func (x MessageDialog) GetExtraChild() gtk.Widget {
	385	+
	386	+	GetExtraChildPtr := xMessageDialogGetExtraChild(x.GoPointer())
	387	+	if GetExtraChildPtr == 0 {
	388	+	return nil
	389	+	}
	390	+
	391	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetExtraChildPtr)
	392	+
	393	+	GetExtraChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	394	+	GetExtraChildCls.Ptr = GetExtraChildPtr
	395	+	return GetExtraChildCls
	396	+
	397	+	}
	398	+
	399	+	var xMessageDialogGetHeading func(uintptr) string
	400	+
	401	+	// Gets the heading of @self.
	402	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetHeading() string {
	403	+
	404	+	return xMessageDialogGetHeading(x.GoPointer())
	405	+
	406	+	}
	407	+
	408	+	var xMessageDialogGetHeadingUseMarkup func(uintptr) bool
	409	+
	410	+	// Gets whether the heading of @self includes Pango markup.
	411	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetHeadingUseMarkup() bool {
	412	+
	413	+	return xMessageDialogGetHeadingUseMarkup(x.GoPointer())
	414	+
	415	+	}
	416	+
	417	+	var xMessageDialogGetResponseAppearance func(uintptr, string) ResponseAppearance
	418	+
	419	+	// Gets the appearance of @response.
	420	+	//
	421	+	// See [method@MessageDialog.set_response_appearance].
	422	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetResponseAppearance(ResponseVar string) ResponseAppearance {
	423	+
	424	+	return xMessageDialogGetResponseAppearance(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar)
	425	+
	426	+	}
	427	+
	428	+	var xMessageDialogGetResponseEnabled func(uintptr, string) bool
	429	+
	430	+	// Gets whether @response is enabled.
	431	+	//
	432	+	// See [method@MessageDialog.set_response_enabled].
	433	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetResponseEnabled(ResponseVar string) bool {
	434	+
	435	+	return xMessageDialogGetResponseEnabled(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar)
	436	+
	437	+	}
	438	+
	439	+	var xMessageDialogGetResponseLabel func(uintptr, string) string
	440	+
	441	+	// Gets the label of @response.
	442	+	//
	443	+	// See [method@MessageDialog.set_response_label].
	444	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetResponseLabel(ResponseVar string) string {
	445	+
	446	+	return xMessageDialogGetResponseLabel(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar)
	447	+
	448	+	}
	449	+
	450	+	var xMessageDialogHasResponse func(uintptr, string) bool
	451	+
	452	+	// Gets whether @self has a response with the ID @response.
	453	+	func (x *MessageDialog) HasResponse(ResponseVar string) bool {
	454	+
	455	+	return xMessageDialogHasResponse(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar)
	456	+
	457	+	}
	458	+
	459	+	var xMessageDialogResponse func(uintptr, string)
	460	+
	461	+	// Emits the [signal@MessageDialog::response] signal with the given response ID.
	462	+	//
	463	+	// Used to indicate that the user has responded to the dialog in some way.
	464	+	func (x *MessageDialog) Response(ResponseVar string) {
	465	+
	466	+	xMessageDialogResponse(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar)
	467	+
	468	+	}
	469	+
	470	+	var xMessageDialogSetBody func(uintptr, string)
	471	+
	472	+	// Sets the body text of @self.
	473	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetBody(BodyVar string) {
	474	+
	475	+	xMessageDialogSetBody(x.GoPointer(), BodyVar)
	476	+
	477	+	}
	478	+
	479	+	var xMessageDialogSetBodyUseMarkup func(uintptr, bool)
	480	+
	481	+	// Sets whether the body text of @self includes Pango markup.
	482	+	//
	483	+	// See [func@Pango.parse_markup].
	484	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetBodyUseMarkup(UseMarkupVar bool) {
	485	+
	486	+	xMessageDialogSetBodyUseMarkup(x.GoPointer(), UseMarkupVar)
	487	+
	488	+	}
	489	+
	490	+	var xMessageDialogSetCloseResponse func(uintptr, string)
	491	+
	492	+	// Sets the ID of the close response of @self.
	493	+	//
	494	+	// It will be passed to [signal@MessageDialog::response] if the window is
	495	+	// closed by pressing <kbd>Escape</kbd> or with a system action.
	496	+	//
	497	+	// It doesn't have to correspond to any of the responses in the dialog.
	498	+	//
	499	+	// The default close response is `close`.
	500	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetCloseResponse(ResponseVar string) {
	501	+
	502	+	xMessageDialogSetCloseResponse(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar)
	503	+
	504	+	}
	505	+
	506	+	var xMessageDialogSetDefaultResponse func(uintptr, string)
	507	+
	508	+	// Sets the ID of the default response of @self.
	509	+	//
	510	+	// If set, pressing <kbd>Enter</kbd> will activate the corresponding button.
	511	+	//
	512	+	// If set to `NULL` or to a non-existent response ID, pressing <kbd>Enter</kbd>
	513	+	// will do nothing.
	514	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetDefaultResponse(ResponseVar string) {
	515	+
	516	+	xMessageDialogSetDefaultResponse(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar)
	517	+
	518	+	}
	519	+
	520	+	var xMessageDialogSetExtraChild func(uintptr, uintptr)
	521	+
	522	+	// Sets the child widget of @self.
	523	+	//
	524	+	// The child widget is displayed below the heading and body.
	525	+	func (x MessageDialog) SetExtraChild(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	526	+
	527	+	xMessageDialogSetExtraChild(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	528	+
	529	+	}
	530	+
	531	+	var xMessageDialogSetHeading func(uintptr, string)
	532	+
	533	+	// Sets the heading of @self.
	534	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetHeading(HeadingVar string) {
	535	+
	536	+	xMessageDialogSetHeading(x.GoPointer(), HeadingVar)
	537	+
	538	+	}
	539	+
	540	+	var xMessageDialogSetHeadingUseMarkup func(uintptr, bool)
	541	+
	542	+	// Sets whether the heading of @self includes Pango markup.
	543	+	//
	544	+	// See [func@Pango.parse_markup].
	545	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetHeadingUseMarkup(UseMarkupVar bool) {
	546	+
	547	+	xMessageDialogSetHeadingUseMarkup(x.GoPointer(), UseMarkupVar)
	548	+
	549	+	}
	550	+
	551	+	var xMessageDialogSetResponseAppearance func(uintptr, string, ResponseAppearance)
	552	+
	553	+	// Sets the appearance for @response.
	554	+	//
	555	+	// <picture>
	556	+	//
	557	+	// <source srcset="message-dialog-appearance-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	558	+	// <img src="message-dialog-appearance.png" alt="message-dialog-appearance">
	559	+	//
	560	+	// </picture>
	561	+	//
	562	+	// Use `ADW_RESPONSE_SUGGESTED` to mark important responses such as the
	563	+	// affirmative action, like the Save button in the example.
	564	+	//
	565	+	// Use `ADW_RESPONSE_DESTRUCTIVE` to draw attention to the potentially damaging
	566	+	// consequences of using @response. This appearance acts as a warning to the
	567	+	// user. The Discard button in the example is using this appearance.
	568	+	//
	569	+	// The default appearance is `ADW_RESPONSE_DEFAULT`.
	570	+	//
	571	+	// Negative responses like Cancel or Close should use the default appearance.
	572	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetResponseAppearance(ResponseVar string, AppearanceVar ResponseAppearance) {
	573	+
	574	+	xMessageDialogSetResponseAppearance(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar, AppearanceVar)
	575	+
	576	+	}
	577	+
	578	+	var xMessageDialogSetResponseEnabled func(uintptr, string, bool)
	579	+
	580	+	// Sets whether @response is enabled.
	581	+	//
	582	+	// If @response is not enabled, the corresponding button will have
	583	+	// [property@Gtk.Widget:sensitive] set to `FALSE` and it can't be activated as
	584	+	// a default response.
	585	+	//
	586	+	// @response can still be used as [property@MessageDialog:close-response] while
	587	+	// it's not enabled.
	588	+	//
	589	+	// Responses are enabled by default.
	590	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetResponseEnabled(ResponseVar string, EnabledVar bool) {
	591	+
	592	+	xMessageDialogSetResponseEnabled(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar, EnabledVar)
	593	+
	594	+	}
	595	+
	596	+	var xMessageDialogSetResponseLabel func(uintptr, string, string)
	597	+
	598	+	// Sets the label of @response to @label.
	599	+	//
	600	+	// Labels are displayed on the dialog buttons. An embedded underline in @label
	601	+	// indicates a mnemonic.
	602	+	func (x *MessageDialog) SetResponseLabel(ResponseVar string, LabelVar string) {
	603	+
	604	+	xMessageDialogSetResponseLabel(x.GoPointer(), ResponseVar, LabelVar)
	605	+
	606	+	}
	607	+
	608	+	func (c *MessageDialog) GoPointer() uintptr {
	609	+	return c.Ptr
	610	+	}
	611	+
	612	+	func (c *MessageDialog) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	613	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	614	+	}
	615	+
	616	+	// This signal is emitted when the dialog is closed.
	617	+	//
	618	+	// @response will be set to the response ID of the button that had been
	619	+	// activated.
	620	+	//
	621	+	// if the dialog was closed by pressing <kbd>Escape</kbd> or with a system
	622	+	// action, @response will be set to the value of
	623	+	// [property@MessageDialog:close-response].
	624	+	func (x *MessageDialog) ConnectResponse(cb func(MessageDialog, string)) {
	625	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr, ResponseVarp string) {
	626	+	fa := MessageDialog{}
	627	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	628	+
	629	+	cb(fa, ResponseVarp)
	630	+
	631	+	}
	632	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::response", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	633	+	}
	634	+
	635	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	636	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	637	+
	638	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	639	+
	640	+	}
	641	+
	642	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	643	+	func (x *MessageDialog) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	644	+
	645	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	646	+
	647	+	}
	648	+
	649	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	650	+	func (x *MessageDialog) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	651	+
	652	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	653	+
	654	+	}
	655	+
	656	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	657	+	func (x *MessageDialog) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	658	+
	659	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	660	+
	661	+	}
	662	+
	663	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	664	+	//
	665	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	666	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	667	+	//
	668	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	669	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	670	+	// technologies.
	671	+	//
	672	+	// Example:
	673	+	// ```c
	674	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	675	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	676	+	//
	677	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	678	+	// -1);
	679	+	//
	680	+	// ```
	681	+	func (x *MessageDialog) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	682	+
	683	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	684	+
	685	+	}
	686	+
	687	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	688	+	//
	689	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	690	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	691	+	//
	692	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	693	+	func (x *MessageDialog) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	694	+
	695	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	696	+
	697	+	}
	698	+
	699	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	700	+	//
	701	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	702	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	703	+	//
	704	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	705	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	706	+	//
	707	+	// ```c
	708	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	709	+	//
	710	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	711	+	// ref1, NULL,
	712	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	713	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	714	+	// -1);
	715	+	//
	716	+	// ```
	717	+	func (x *MessageDialog) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	718	+
	719	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	720	+
	721	+	}
	722	+
	723	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	724	+	//
	725	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	726	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	727	+	//
	728	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	729	+	func (x *MessageDialog) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	730	+
	731	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	732	+
	733	+	}
	734	+
	735	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	736	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	737	+	//
	738	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	739	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	740	+	//
	741	+	// Example:
	742	+	// ```c
	743	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	744	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	745	+	//
	746	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	747	+	// -1);
	748	+	//
	749	+	// ```
	750	+	func (x *MessageDialog) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	751	+
	752	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	753	+
	754	+	}
	755	+
	756	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	757	+	//
	758	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	759	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	760	+	//
	761	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	762	+	func (x *MessageDialog) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	763	+
	764	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	765	+
	766	+	}
	767	+
	768	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	769	+	//
	770	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	771	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	772	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetBuildableId() string {
	773	+
	774	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	775	+
	776	+	}
	777	+
	778	+	// Returns the renderer that is used for this `GtkNative`.
	779	+	func (x MessageDialog) GetRenderer() gsk.Renderer {
	780	+
	781	+	GetRendererPtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetRenderer(x.GoPointer())
	782	+	if GetRendererPtr == 0 {
	783	+	return nil
	784	+	}
	785	+
	786	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetRendererPtr)
	787	+
	788	+	GetRendererCls := &gsk.Renderer{}
	789	+	GetRendererCls.Ptr = GetRendererPtr
	790	+	return GetRendererCls
	791	+
	792	+	}
	793	+
	794	+	// Returns the surface of this `GtkNative`.
	795	+	func (x MessageDialog) GetSurface() gdk.Surface {
	796	+
	797	+	GetSurfacePtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurface(x.GoPointer())
	798	+	if GetSurfacePtr == 0 {
	799	+	return nil
	800	+	}
	801	+
	802	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetSurfacePtr)
	803	+
	804	+	GetSurfaceCls := &gdk.Surface{}
	805	+	GetSurfaceCls.Ptr = GetSurfacePtr
	806	+	return GetSurfaceCls
	807	+
	808	+	}
	809	+
	810	+	// Retrieves the surface transform of @self.
	811	+	//
	812	+	// This is the translation from @self's surface coordinates into
	813	+	// @self's widget coordinates.
	814	+	func (x *MessageDialog) GetSurfaceTransform(XVar float64, YVar float64) {
	815	+
	816	+	gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurfaceTransform(x.GoPointer(), XVar, YVar)
	817	+
	818	+	}
	819	+
	820	+	// Realizes a `GtkNative`.
	821	+	//
	822	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	823	+	func (x *MessageDialog) Realize() {
	824	+
	825	+	gtk.XGtkNativeRealize(x.GoPointer())
	826	+
	827	+	}
	828	+
	829	+	// Unrealizes a `GtkNative`.
	830	+	//
	831	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	832	+	func (x *MessageDialog) Unrealize() {
	833	+
	834	+	gtk.XGtkNativeUnrealize(x.GoPointer())
	835	+
	836	+	}
	837	+
	838	+	// Returns the display that this `GtkRoot` is on.
	839	+	func (x MessageDialog) GetDisplay() gdk.Display {
	840	+
	841	+	GetDisplayPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetDisplay(x.GoPointer())
	842	+	if GetDisplayPtr == 0 {
	843	+	return nil
	844	+	}
	845	+
	846	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetDisplayPtr)
	847	+
	848	+	GetDisplayCls := &gdk.Display{}
	849	+	GetDisplayCls.Ptr = GetDisplayPtr
	850	+	return GetDisplayCls
	851	+
	852	+	}
	853	+
	854	+	// Retrieves the current focused widget within the root.
	855	+	//
	856	+	// Note that this is the widget that would have the focus
	857	+	// if the root is active; if the root is not focused then
	858	+	// `gtk_widget_has_focus (widget)` will be %FALSE for the
	859	+	// widget.
	860	+	func (x MessageDialog) GetFocus() gtk.Widget {
	861	+
	862	+	GetFocusPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetFocus(x.GoPointer())
	863	+	if GetFocusPtr == 0 {
	864	+	return nil
	865	+	}
	866	+
	867	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetFocusPtr)
	868	+
	869	+	GetFocusCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	870	+	GetFocusCls.Ptr = GetFocusPtr
	871	+	return GetFocusCls
	872	+
	873	+	}
	874	+
	875	+	// If @focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
	876	+	// it as the focus widget for the root.
	877	+	//
	878	+	// If @focus is %NULL, unsets the focus widget for the root.
	879	+	//
	880	+	// To set the focus to a particular widget in the root, it is usually
	881	+	// more convenient to use [method@Gtk.Widget.grab_focus] instead of
	882	+	// this function.
	883	+	func (x MessageDialog) SetFocus(FocusVar gtk.Widget) {
	884	+
	885	+	gtk.XGtkRootSetFocus(x.GoPointer(), FocusVar.GoPointer())
	886	+
	887	+	}
	888	+
	889	+	func init() {
	890	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	891	+	if err != nil {
	892	+	panic(err)
	893	+	}
	894	+
	895	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewMessageDialog, lib, "adw_message_dialog_new")
	896	+
	897	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogAddResponse, lib, "adw_message_dialog_add_response")
	898	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogAddResponses, lib, "adw_message_dialog_add_responses")
	899	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogChoose, lib, "adw_message_dialog_choose")
	900	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogChooseFinish, lib, "adw_message_dialog_choose_finish")
	901	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogFormatBody, lib, "adw_message_dialog_format_body")
	902	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogFormatBodyMarkup, lib, "adw_message_dialog_format_body_markup")
	903	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogFormatHeading, lib, "adw_message_dialog_format_heading")
	904	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogFormatHeadingMarkup, lib, "adw_message_dialog_format_heading_markup")
	905	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetBody, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_body")
	906	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetBodyUseMarkup, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_body_use_markup")
	907	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetCloseResponse, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_close_response")
	908	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetDefaultResponse, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_default_response")
	909	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetExtraChild, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_extra_child")
	910	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetHeading, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_heading")
	911	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetHeadingUseMarkup, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_heading_use_markup")
	912	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetResponseAppearance, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_response_appearance")
	913	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetResponseEnabled, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_response_enabled")
	914	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogGetResponseLabel, lib, "adw_message_dialog_get_response_label")
	915	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogHasResponse, lib, "adw_message_dialog_has_response")
	916	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogResponse, lib, "adw_message_dialog_response")
	917	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetBody, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_body")
	918	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetBodyUseMarkup, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_body_use_markup")
	919	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetCloseResponse, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_close_response")
	920	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetDefaultResponse, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_default_response")
	921	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetExtraChild, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_extra_child")
	922	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetHeading, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_heading")
	923	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetHeadingUseMarkup, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_heading_use_markup")
	924	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetResponseAppearance, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_response_appearance")
	925	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetResponseEnabled, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_response_enabled")
	926	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xMessageDialogSetResponseLabel, lib, "adw_message_dialog_set_response_label")
	927	+
	928	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-navigation-direction.go +13 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	// Describes the direction of a swipe navigation gesture.
	5	+	type NavigationDirection int
	6	+
	7	+	const (
	8	+
	9	+	// Corresponds to start or top, depending on orientation and text direction
	10	+	NavigationDirectionBackValue NavigationDirection = 0
	11	+	// Corresponds to end or bottom, depending on orientation and text direction
	12	+	NavigationDirectionForwardValue NavigationDirection = 1
	13	+	)

A v4/adw/adw-password-entry-row.go +548 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,548 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type PasswordEntryRowClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	// A [class@EntryRow] tailored for entering secrets.
	17	+	//
	18	+	// <picture>
	19	+	//
	20	+	// <source srcset="password-entry-row-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	21	+	// <img src="password-entry-row.png" alt="password-entry-row">
	22	+	//
	23	+	// </picture>
	24	+	//
	25	+	// It does not show its contents in clear text, does not allow to copy it to the
	26	+	// clipboard, and shows a warning when Caps Lock is engaged. If the underlying
	27	+	// platform allows it, `AdwPasswordEntryRow` will also place the text in a
	28	+	// non-pageable memory area, to avoid it being written out to disk by the
	29	+	// operating system.
	30	+	//
	31	+	// It offer a way to reveal the contents in clear text.
	32	+	//
	33	+	// ## CSS Nodes
	34	+	//
	35	+	// `AdwPasswordEntryRow` has a single CSS node with name `row` that carries
	36	+	// `.entry` and `.password` style classes.
	37	+	type PasswordEntryRow struct {
	38	+	EntryRow
	39	+	}
	40	+
	41	+	func PasswordEntryRowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *PasswordEntryRow {
	42	+	cls := &PasswordEntryRow{}
	43	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	44	+	return cls
	45	+	}
	46	+
	47	+	var xNewPasswordEntryRow func() uintptr
	48	+
	49	+	// Creates a new `AdwPasswordEntryRow`.
	50	+	func NewPasswordEntryRow() *gtk.Widget {
	51	+	NewPasswordEntryRowPtr := xNewPasswordEntryRow()
	52	+	if NewPasswordEntryRowPtr == 0 {
	53	+	return nil
	54	+	}
	55	+
	56	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewPasswordEntryRowPtr)
	57	+
	58	+	NewPasswordEntryRowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	59	+	NewPasswordEntryRowCls.Ptr = NewPasswordEntryRowPtr
	60	+	return NewPasswordEntryRowCls
	61	+	}
	62	+
	63	+	func (c *PasswordEntryRow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	64	+	return c.Ptr
	65	+	}
	66	+
	67	+	func (c *PasswordEntryRow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	68	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	69	+	}
	70	+
	71	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	72	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	73	+
	74	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	75	+
	76	+	}
	77	+
	78	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	79	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	80	+
	81	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	82	+
	83	+	}
	84	+
	85	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	86	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	87	+
	88	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	89	+
	90	+	}
	91	+
	92	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	93	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	94	+
	95	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	96	+
	97	+	}
	98	+
	99	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	100	+	//
	101	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	102	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	103	+	//
	104	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	105	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	106	+	// technologies.
	107	+	//
	108	+	// Example:
	109	+	// ```c
	110	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	111	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	112	+	//
	113	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	114	+	// -1);
	115	+	//
	116	+	// ```
	117	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	118	+
	119	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	120	+
	121	+	}
	122	+
	123	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	124	+	//
	125	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	126	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	127	+	//
	128	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	129	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	130	+
	131	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	132	+
	133	+	}
	134	+
	135	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	136	+	//
	137	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	138	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	139	+	//
	140	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	141	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	142	+	//
	143	+	// ```c
	144	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	145	+	//
	146	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	147	+	// ref1, NULL,
	148	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	149	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	150	+	// -1);
	151	+	//
	152	+	// ```
	153	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	154	+
	155	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	156	+
	157	+	}
	158	+
	159	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	160	+	//
	161	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	162	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	163	+	//
	164	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	165	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	166	+
	167	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	168	+
	169	+	}
	170	+
	171	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	172	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	173	+	//
	174	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	175	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	176	+	//
	177	+	// Example:
	178	+	// ```c
	179	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	180	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	181	+	//
	182	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	183	+	// -1);
	184	+	//
	185	+	// ```
	186	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	187	+
	188	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	189	+
	190	+	}
	191	+
	192	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	193	+	//
	194	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	195	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	196	+	//
	197	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	198	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	199	+
	200	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	201	+
	202	+	}
	203	+
	204	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	205	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetActionName() string {
	206	+
	207	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	208	+
	209	+	}
	210	+
	211	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	212	+	func (x PasswordEntryRow) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	213	+
	214	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	215	+
	216	+	}
	217	+
	218	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	219	+	// associated.
	220	+	//
	221	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	222	+	// any previous action.
	223	+	//
	224	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	225	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	226	+	//
	227	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	228	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	229	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	230	+	// associated with the window.
	231	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	232	+
	233	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	234	+
	235	+	}
	236	+
	237	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	238	+	//
	239	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	240	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	241	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	242	+	//
	243	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	244	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	245	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	246	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	247	+
	248	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	249	+
	250	+	}
	251	+
	252	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	253	+	//
	254	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	255	+	//
	256	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	257	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	258	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	259	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	260	+	//
	261	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	262	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	263	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	264	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	265	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	266	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	267	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	268	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	269	+	// rendered inactive).
	270	+	func (x PasswordEntryRow) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	271	+
	272	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	273	+
	274	+	}
	275	+
	276	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	277	+	// actionable widget.
	278	+	//
	279	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	280	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	281	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	282	+
	283	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	284	+
	285	+	}
	286	+
	287	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	288	+	//
	289	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	290	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	291	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetBuildableId() string {
	292	+
	293	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	294	+
	295	+	}
	296	+
	297	+	// Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
	298	+	//
	299	+	// This call doesn’t do anything if there is no selected text.
	300	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) DeleteSelection() {
	301	+
	302	+	gtk.XGtkEditableDeleteSelection(x.GoPointer())
	303	+
	304	+	}
	305	+
	306	+	// Deletes a sequence of characters.
	307	+	//
	308	+	// The characters that are deleted are those characters at positions
	309	+	// from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos. If @end_pos is
	310	+	// negative, then the characters deleted are those from @start_pos to
	311	+	// the end of the text.
	312	+	//
	313	+	// Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	314	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) DeleteText(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) {
	315	+
	316	+	gtk.XGtkEditableDeleteText(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	317	+
	318	+	}
	319	+
	320	+	// Undoes the setup done by [method@Gtk.Editable.init_delegate].
	321	+	//
	322	+	// This is a helper function that should be called from dispose,
	323	+	// before removing the delegate object.
	324	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) FinishDelegate() {
	325	+
	326	+	gtk.XGtkEditableFinishDelegate(x.GoPointer())
	327	+
	328	+	}
	329	+
	330	+	// Gets the alignment of the editable.
	331	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetAlignment() float32 {
	332	+
	333	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetAlignment(x.GoPointer())
	334	+
	335	+	}
	336	+
	337	+	// Retrieves a sequence of characters.
	338	+	//
	339	+	// The characters that are retrieved are those characters at positions
	340	+	// from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos. If @end_pos is negative,
	341	+	// then the characters retrieved are those characters from @start_pos to
	342	+	// the end of the text.
	343	+	//
	344	+	// Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	345	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetChars(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) string {
	346	+
	347	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetChars(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	348	+
	349	+	}
	350	+
	351	+	// Gets the `GtkEditable` that @editable is delegating its
	352	+	// implementation to.
	353	+	//
	354	+	// Typically, the delegate is a [class@Gtk.Text] widget.
	355	+	func (x PasswordEntryRow) GetDelegate() gtk.EditableBase {
	356	+
	357	+	GetDelegatePtr := gtk.XGtkEditableGetDelegate(x.GoPointer())
	358	+	if GetDelegatePtr == 0 {
	359	+	return nil
	360	+	}
	361	+
	362	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetDelegatePtr)
	363	+
	364	+	GetDelegateCls := &gtk.EditableBase{}
	365	+	GetDelegateCls.Ptr = GetDelegatePtr
	366	+	return GetDelegateCls
	367	+
	368	+	}
	369	+
	370	+	// Retrieves whether @editable is editable.
	371	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetEditable() bool {
	372	+
	373	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetEditable(x.GoPointer())
	374	+
	375	+	}
	376	+
	377	+	// Gets if undo/redo actions are enabled for @editable
	378	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetEnableUndo() bool {
	379	+
	380	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetEnableUndo(x.GoPointer())
	381	+
	382	+	}
	383	+
	384	+	// Retrieves the desired maximum width of @editable, in characters.
	385	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetMaxWidthChars() int32 {
	386	+
	387	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetMaxWidthChars(x.GoPointer())
	388	+
	389	+	}
	390	+
	391	+	// Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative
	392	+	// to the start of the content of the editable.
	393	+	//
	394	+	// Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
	395	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetPosition() int32 {
	396	+
	397	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetPosition(x.GoPointer())
	398	+
	399	+	}
	400	+
	401	+	// Retrieves the selection bound of the editable.
	402	+	//
	403	+	// @start_pos will be filled with the start of the selection and
	404	+	// @end_pos with end. If no text was selected both will be identical
	405	+	// and %FALSE will be returned.
	406	+	//
	407	+	// Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	408	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetSelectionBounds(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) bool {
	409	+
	410	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetSelectionBounds(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	411	+
	412	+	}
	413	+
	414	+	// Retrieves the contents of @editable.
	415	+	//
	416	+	// The returned string is owned by GTK and must not be modified or freed.
	417	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetText() string {
	418	+
	419	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetText(x.GoPointer())
	420	+
	421	+	}
	422	+
	423	+	// Gets the number of characters of space reserved
	424	+	// for the contents of the editable.
	425	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) GetWidthChars() int32 {
	426	+
	427	+	return gtk.XGtkEditableGetWidthChars(x.GoPointer())
	428	+
	429	+	}
	430	+
	431	+	// Sets up a delegate for `GtkEditable`.
	432	+	//
	433	+	// This is assuming that the get_delegate vfunc in the `GtkEditable`
	434	+	// interface has been set up for the @editable's type.
	435	+	//
	436	+	// This is a helper function that should be called in instance init,
	437	+	// after creating the delegate object.
	438	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) InitDelegate() {
	439	+
	440	+	gtk.XGtkEditableInitDelegate(x.GoPointer())
	441	+
	442	+	}
	443	+
	444	+	// Inserts @length bytes of @text into the contents of the
	445	+	// widget, at position @position.
	446	+	//
	447	+	// Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
	448	+	// The function updates @position to point after the newly
	449	+	// inserted text.
	450	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) InsertText(TextVar string, LengthVar int32, PositionVar int32) {
	451	+
	452	+	gtk.XGtkEditableInsertText(x.GoPointer(), TextVar, LengthVar, PositionVar)
	453	+
	454	+	}
	455	+
	456	+	// Selects a region of text.
	457	+	//
	458	+	// The characters that are selected are those characters at positions
	459	+	// from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos. If @end_pos is
	460	+	// negative, then the characters selected are those characters from
	461	+	// @start_pos to the end of the text.
	462	+	//
	463	+	// Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	464	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SelectRegion(StartPosVar int32, EndPosVar int32) {
	465	+
	466	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSelectRegion(x.GoPointer(), StartPosVar, EndPosVar)
	467	+
	468	+	}
	469	+
	470	+	// Sets the alignment for the contents of the editable.
	471	+	//
	472	+	// This controls the horizontal positioning of the contents when
	473	+	// the displayed text is shorter than the width of the editable.
	474	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetAlignment(XalignVar float32) {
	475	+
	476	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetAlignment(x.GoPointer(), XalignVar)
	477	+
	478	+	}
	479	+
	480	+	// Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable widget.
	481	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetEditable(IsEditableVar bool) {
	482	+
	483	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetEditable(x.GoPointer(), IsEditableVar)
	484	+
	485	+	}
	486	+
	487	+	// If enabled, changes to @editable will be saved for undo/redo
	488	+	// actions.
	489	+	//
	490	+	// This results in an additional copy of text changes and are not
	491	+	// stored in secure memory. As such, undo is forcefully disabled
	492	+	// when [property@Gtk.Text:visibility] is set to %FALSE.
	493	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetEnableUndo(EnableUndoVar bool) {
	494	+
	495	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetEnableUndo(x.GoPointer(), EnableUndoVar)
	496	+
	497	+	}
	498	+
	499	+	// Sets the desired maximum width in characters of @editable.
	500	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetMaxWidthChars(NCharsVar int32) {
	501	+
	502	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetMaxWidthChars(x.GoPointer(), NCharsVar)
	503	+
	504	+	}
	505	+
	506	+	// Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
	507	+	//
	508	+	// The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
	509	+	// index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than
	510	+	// or equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
	511	+	// indicates that the position should be set after the last character
	512	+	// of the editable. Note that @position is in characters, not in bytes.
	513	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetPosition(PositionVar int32) {
	514	+
	515	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetPosition(x.GoPointer(), PositionVar)
	516	+
	517	+	}
	518	+
	519	+	// Sets the text in the editable to the given value.
	520	+	//
	521	+	// This is replacing the current contents.
	522	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetText(TextVar string) {
	523	+
	524	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetText(x.GoPointer(), TextVar)
	525	+
	526	+	}
	527	+
	528	+	// Changes the size request of the editable to be about the
	529	+	// right size for @n_chars characters.
	530	+	//
	531	+	// Note that it changes the size request, the size can still
	532	+	// be affected by how you pack the widget into containers.
	533	+	// If @n_chars is -1, the size reverts to the default size.
	534	+	func (x *PasswordEntryRow) SetWidthChars(NCharsVar int32) {
	535	+
	536	+	gtk.XGtkEditableSetWidthChars(x.GoPointer(), NCharsVar)
	537	+
	538	+	}
	539	+
	540	+	func init() {
	541	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	542	+	if err != nil {
	543	+	panic(err)
	544	+	}
	545	+
	546	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewPasswordEntryRow, lib, "adw_password_entry_row_new")
	547	+
	548	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-preferences-group.go +329 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,329 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type PreferencesGroupClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+
	14	+	Padding uintptr
	15	+	}
	16	+
	17	+	// A group of preference rows.
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <picture>
	20	+	//
	21	+	// <source srcset="preferences-group-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	22	+	// <img src="preferences-group.png" alt="preferences-group">
	23	+	//
	24	+	// </picture>
	25	+	//
	26	+	// An `AdwPreferencesGroup` represents a group or tightly related preferences,
	27	+	// which in turn are represented by [class@PreferencesRow].
	28	+	//
	29	+	// To summarize the role of the preferences it gathers, a group can have both a
	30	+	// title and a description. The title will be used by [class@PreferencesWindow]
	31	+	// to let the user look for a preference.
	32	+	//
	33	+	// ## AdwPreferencesGroup as GtkBuildable
	34	+	//
	35	+	// The `AdwPreferencesGroup` implementation of the [iface@Gtk.Buildable] interface
	36	+	// supports adding [class@PreferencesRow]s to the list by omitting "type". If "type"
	37	+	// is omitted and the widget isn't a [class@PreferencesRow] the child is added to
	38	+	// a box below the list.
	39	+	//
	40	+	// When the "type" attribute of a child is `header-suffix`, the child
	41	+	// is set as the suffix on the end of the title and description.
	42	+	//
	43	+	// ## CSS nodes
	44	+	//
	45	+	// `AdwPreferencesGroup` has a single CSS node with name `preferencesgroup`.
	46	+	//
	47	+	// ## Accessibility
	48	+	//
	49	+	// `AdwPreferencesGroup` uses the `GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP` role.
	50	+	type PreferencesGroup struct {
	51	+	gtk.Widget
	52	+	}
	53	+
	54	+	func PreferencesGroupNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *PreferencesGroup {
	55	+	cls := &PreferencesGroup{}
	56	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	57	+	return cls
	58	+	}
	59	+
	60	+	var xNewPreferencesGroup func() uintptr
	61	+
	62	+	// Creates a new `AdwPreferencesGroup`.
	63	+	func NewPreferencesGroup() *gtk.Widget {
	64	+	NewPreferencesGroupPtr := xNewPreferencesGroup()
	65	+	if NewPreferencesGroupPtr == 0 {
	66	+	return nil
	67	+	}
	68	+
	69	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewPreferencesGroupPtr)
	70	+
	71	+	NewPreferencesGroupCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	72	+	NewPreferencesGroupCls.Ptr = NewPreferencesGroupPtr
	73	+	return NewPreferencesGroupCls
	74	+	}
	75	+
	76	+	var xPreferencesGroupAdd func(uintptr, uintptr)
	77	+
	78	+	// Adds a child to @self.
	79	+	func (x PreferencesGroup) Add(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	80	+
	81	+	xPreferencesGroupAdd(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	82	+
	83	+	}
	84	+
	85	+	var xPreferencesGroupGetDescription func(uintptr) string
	86	+
	87	+	// Gets the description of @self.
	88	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) GetDescription() string {
	89	+
	90	+	return xPreferencesGroupGetDescription(x.GoPointer())
	91	+
	92	+	}
	93	+
	94	+	var xPreferencesGroupGetHeaderSuffix func(uintptr) uintptr
	95	+
	96	+	// Gets the suffix for @self's header.
	97	+	func (x PreferencesGroup) GetHeaderSuffix() gtk.Widget {
	98	+
	99	+	GetHeaderSuffixPtr := xPreferencesGroupGetHeaderSuffix(x.GoPointer())
	100	+	if GetHeaderSuffixPtr == 0 {
	101	+	return nil
	102	+	}
	103	+
	104	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetHeaderSuffixPtr)
	105	+
	106	+	GetHeaderSuffixCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	107	+	GetHeaderSuffixCls.Ptr = GetHeaderSuffixPtr
	108	+	return GetHeaderSuffixCls
	109	+
	110	+	}
	111	+
	112	+	var xPreferencesGroupGetTitle func(uintptr) string
	113	+
	114	+	// Gets the title of @self.
	115	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) GetTitle() string {
	116	+
	117	+	return xPreferencesGroupGetTitle(x.GoPointer())
	118	+
	119	+	}
	120	+
	121	+	var xPreferencesGroupRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	122	+
	123	+	// Removes a child from @self.
	124	+	func (x PreferencesGroup) Remove(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	125	+
	126	+	xPreferencesGroupRemove(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	127	+
	128	+	}
	129	+
	130	+	var xPreferencesGroupSetDescription func(uintptr, string)
	131	+
	132	+	// Sets the description for @self.
	133	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) SetDescription(DescriptionVar string) {
	134	+
	135	+	xPreferencesGroupSetDescription(x.GoPointer(), DescriptionVar)
	136	+
	137	+	}
	138	+
	139	+	var xPreferencesGroupSetHeaderSuffix func(uintptr, uintptr)
	140	+
	141	+	// Sets the suffix for @self's header.
	142	+	//
	143	+	// Displayed above the list, next to the title and description.
	144	+	//
	145	+	// Suffixes are commonly used to show a button or a spinner for the whole group.
	146	+	func (x PreferencesGroup) SetHeaderSuffix(SuffixVar gtk.Widget) {
	147	+
	148	+	xPreferencesGroupSetHeaderSuffix(x.GoPointer(), SuffixVar.GoPointer())
	149	+
	150	+	}
	151	+
	152	+	var xPreferencesGroupSetTitle func(uintptr, string)
	153	+
	154	+	// Sets the title for @self.
	155	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) SetTitle(TitleVar string) {
	156	+
	157	+	xPreferencesGroupSetTitle(x.GoPointer(), TitleVar)
	158	+
	159	+	}
	160	+
	161	+	func (c *PreferencesGroup) GoPointer() uintptr {
	162	+	return c.Ptr
	163	+	}
	164	+
	165	+	func (c *PreferencesGroup) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	166	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	167	+	}
	168	+
	169	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	170	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	171	+
	172	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	173	+
	174	+	}
	175	+
	176	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	177	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	178	+
	179	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	180	+
	181	+	}
	182	+
	183	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	184	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	185	+
	186	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	187	+
	188	+	}
	189	+
	190	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	191	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	192	+
	193	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	194	+
	195	+	}
	196	+
	197	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	198	+	//
	199	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	200	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	201	+	//
	202	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	203	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	204	+	// technologies.
	205	+	//
	206	+	// Example:
	207	+	// ```c
	208	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	209	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	210	+	//
	211	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	212	+	// -1);
	213	+	//
	214	+	// ```
	215	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	216	+
	217	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	218	+
	219	+	}
	220	+
	221	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	222	+	//
	223	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	224	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	225	+	//
	226	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	227	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	228	+
	229	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	230	+
	231	+	}
	232	+
	233	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	234	+	//
	235	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	236	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	237	+	//
	238	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	239	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	240	+	//
	241	+	// ```c
	242	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	243	+	//
	244	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	245	+	// ref1, NULL,
	246	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	247	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	248	+	// -1);
	249	+	//
	250	+	// ```
	251	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	252	+
	253	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	254	+
	255	+	}
	256	+
	257	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	258	+	//
	259	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	260	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	261	+	//
	262	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	263	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	264	+
	265	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	266	+
	267	+	}
	268	+
	269	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	270	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	271	+	//
	272	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	273	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	274	+	//
	275	+	// Example:
	276	+	// ```c
	277	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	278	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	279	+	//
	280	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	281	+	// -1);
	282	+	//
	283	+	// ```
	284	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	285	+
	286	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	287	+
	288	+	}
	289	+
	290	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	291	+	//
	292	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	293	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	294	+	//
	295	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	296	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	297	+
	298	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	299	+
	300	+	}
	301	+
	302	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	303	+	//
	304	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	305	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	306	+	func (x *PreferencesGroup) GetBuildableId() string {
	307	+
	308	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	309	+
	310	+	}
	311	+
	312	+	func init() {
	313	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	314	+	if err != nil {
	315	+	panic(err)
	316	+	}
	317	+
	318	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewPreferencesGroup, lib, "adw_preferences_group_new")
	319	+
	320	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupAdd, lib, "adw_preferences_group_add")
	321	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupGetDescription, lib, "adw_preferences_group_get_description")
	322	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupGetHeaderSuffix, lib, "adw_preferences_group_get_header_suffix")
	323	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupGetTitle, lib, "adw_preferences_group_get_title")
	324	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupRemove, lib, "adw_preferences_group_remove")
	325	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupSetDescription, lib, "adw_preferences_group_set_description")
	326	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupSetHeaderSuffix, lib, "adw_preferences_group_set_header_suffix")
	327	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesGroupSetTitle, lib, "adw_preferences_group_set_title")
	328	+
	329	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-preferences-page.go +332 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type PreferencesPageClass struct {
	12	+	ParentClass uintptr
	13	+
	14	+	Padding uintptr
	15	+	}
	16	+
	17	+	// A page from [class@PreferencesWindow].
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <picture>
	20	+	//
	21	+	// <source srcset="preferences-page-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	22	+	// <img src="preferences-page.png" alt="preferences-page">
	23	+	//
	24	+	// </picture>
	25	+	//
	26	+	// The `AdwPreferencesPage` widget gathers preferences groups into a single page
	27	+	// of a preferences window.
	28	+	//
	29	+	// ## CSS nodes
	30	+	//
	31	+	// `AdwPreferencesPage` has a single CSS node with name `preferencespage`.
	32	+	//
	33	+	// ## Accessibility
	34	+	//
	35	+	// `AdwPreferencesPage` uses the `GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP` role.
	36	+	type PreferencesPage struct {
	37	+	gtk.Widget
	38	+	}
	39	+
	40	+	func PreferencesPageNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *PreferencesPage {
	41	+	cls := &PreferencesPage{}
	42	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	43	+	return cls
	44	+	}
	45	+
	46	+	var xNewPreferencesPage func() uintptr
	47	+
	48	+	// Creates a new `AdwPreferencesPage`.
	49	+	func NewPreferencesPage() *gtk.Widget {
	50	+	NewPreferencesPagePtr := xNewPreferencesPage()
	51	+	if NewPreferencesPagePtr == 0 {
	52	+	return nil
	53	+	}
	54	+
	55	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewPreferencesPagePtr)
	56	+
	57	+	NewPreferencesPageCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	58	+	NewPreferencesPageCls.Ptr = NewPreferencesPagePtr
	59	+	return NewPreferencesPageCls
	60	+	}
	61	+
	62	+	var xPreferencesPageAdd func(uintptr, uintptr)
	63	+
	64	+	// Adds a preferences group to @self.
	65	+	func (x PreferencesPage) Add(GroupVar PreferencesGroup) {
	66	+
	67	+	xPreferencesPageAdd(x.GoPointer(), GroupVar.GoPointer())
	68	+
	69	+	}
	70	+
	71	+	var xPreferencesPageGetIconName func(uintptr) string
	72	+
	73	+	// Gets the icon name for @self.
	74	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) GetIconName() string {
	75	+
	76	+	return xPreferencesPageGetIconName(x.GoPointer())
	77	+
	78	+	}
	79	+
	80	+	var xPreferencesPageGetName func(uintptr) string
	81	+
	82	+	// Gets the name of @self.
	83	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) GetName() string {
	84	+
	85	+	return xPreferencesPageGetName(x.GoPointer())
	86	+
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	var xPreferencesPageGetTitle func(uintptr) string
	90	+
	91	+	// Gets the title of @self.
	92	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) GetTitle() string {
	93	+
	94	+	return xPreferencesPageGetTitle(x.GoPointer())
	95	+
	96	+	}
	97	+
	98	+	var xPreferencesPageGetUseUnderline func(uintptr) bool
	99	+
	100	+	// Gets whether an embedded underline in the title indicates a mnemonic.
	101	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) GetUseUnderline() bool {
	102	+
	103	+	return xPreferencesPageGetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer())
	104	+
	105	+	}
	106	+
	107	+	var xPreferencesPageRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	108	+
	109	+	// Removes a group from @self.
	110	+	func (x PreferencesPage) Remove(GroupVar PreferencesGroup) {
	111	+
	112	+	xPreferencesPageRemove(x.GoPointer(), GroupVar.GoPointer())
	113	+
	114	+	}
	115	+
	116	+	var xPreferencesPageScrollToTop func(uintptr)
	117	+
	118	+	// Scrolls the scrolled window of @self to the top.
	119	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) ScrollToTop() {
	120	+
	121	+	xPreferencesPageScrollToTop(x.GoPointer())
	122	+
	123	+	}
	124	+
	125	+	var xPreferencesPageSetIconName func(uintptr, string)
	126	+
	127	+	// Sets the icon name for @self.
	128	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) SetIconName(IconNameVar string) {
	129	+
	130	+	xPreferencesPageSetIconName(x.GoPointer(), IconNameVar)
	131	+
	132	+	}
	133	+
	134	+	var xPreferencesPageSetName func(uintptr, string)
	135	+
	136	+	// Sets the name of @self.
	137	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) SetName(NameVar string) {
	138	+
	139	+	xPreferencesPageSetName(x.GoPointer(), NameVar)
	140	+
	141	+	}
	142	+
	143	+	var xPreferencesPageSetTitle func(uintptr, string)
	144	+
	145	+	// Sets the title of @self.
	146	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) SetTitle(TitleVar string) {
	147	+
	148	+	xPreferencesPageSetTitle(x.GoPointer(), TitleVar)
	149	+
	150	+	}
	151	+
	152	+	var xPreferencesPageSetUseUnderline func(uintptr, bool)
	153	+
	154	+	// Sets whether an embedded underline in the title indicates a mnemonic.
	155	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) SetUseUnderline(UseUnderlineVar bool) {
	156	+
	157	+	xPreferencesPageSetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer(), UseUnderlineVar)
	158	+
	159	+	}
	160	+
	161	+	func (c *PreferencesPage) GoPointer() uintptr {
	162	+	return c.Ptr
	163	+	}
	164	+
	165	+	func (c *PreferencesPage) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	166	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	167	+	}
	168	+
	169	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	170	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	171	+
	172	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	173	+
	174	+	}
	175	+
	176	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	177	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	178	+
	179	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	180	+
	181	+	}
	182	+
	183	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	184	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	185	+
	186	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	187	+
	188	+	}
	189	+
	190	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	191	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	192	+
	193	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	194	+
	195	+	}
	196	+
	197	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	198	+	//
	199	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	200	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	201	+	//
	202	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	203	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	204	+	// technologies.
	205	+	//
	206	+	// Example:
	207	+	// ```c
	208	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	209	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	210	+	//
	211	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	212	+	// -1);
	213	+	//
	214	+	// ```
	215	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	216	+
	217	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	218	+
	219	+	}
	220	+
	221	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	222	+	//
	223	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	224	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	225	+	//
	226	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	227	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	228	+
	229	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	230	+
	231	+	}
	232	+
	233	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	234	+	//
	235	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	236	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	237	+	//
	238	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	239	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	240	+	//
	241	+	// ```c
	242	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	243	+	//
	244	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	245	+	// ref1, NULL,
	246	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	247	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	248	+	// -1);
	249	+	//
	250	+	// ```
	251	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	252	+
	253	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	254	+
	255	+	}
	256	+
	257	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	258	+	//
	259	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	260	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	261	+	//
	262	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	263	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	264	+
	265	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	266	+
	267	+	}
	268	+
	269	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	270	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	271	+	//
	272	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	273	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	274	+	//
	275	+	// Example:
	276	+	// ```c
	277	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	278	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	279	+	//
	280	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	281	+	// -1);
	282	+	//
	283	+	// ```
	284	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	285	+
	286	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	287	+
	288	+	}
	289	+
	290	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	291	+	//
	292	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	293	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	294	+	//
	295	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	296	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	297	+
	298	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	299	+
	300	+	}
	301	+
	302	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	303	+	//
	304	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	305	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	306	+	func (x *PreferencesPage) GetBuildableId() string {
	307	+
	308	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	309	+
	310	+	}
	311	+
	312	+	func init() {
	313	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	314	+	if err != nil {
	315	+	panic(err)
	316	+	}
	317	+
	318	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewPreferencesPage, lib, "adw_preferences_page_new")
	319	+
	320	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageAdd, lib, "adw_preferences_page_add")
	321	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageGetIconName, lib, "adw_preferences_page_get_icon_name")
	322	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageGetName, lib, "adw_preferences_page_get_name")
	323	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageGetTitle, lib, "adw_preferences_page_get_title")
	324	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageGetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_preferences_page_get_use_underline")
	325	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageRemove, lib, "adw_preferences_page_remove")
	326	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageScrollToTop, lib, "adw_preferences_page_scroll_to_top")
	327	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageSetIconName, lib, "adw_preferences_page_set_icon_name")
	328	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageSetName, lib, "adw_preferences_page_set_name")
	329	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageSetTitle, lib, "adw_preferences_page_set_title")
	330	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesPageSetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_preferences_page_set_use_underline")
	331	+
	332	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-preferences-row.go +385 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,385 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type PreferencesRowClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+
	15	+	Padding uintptr
	16	+	}
	17	+
	18	+	// A [class@Gtk.ListBoxRow] used to present preferences.
	19	+	//
	20	+	// The `AdwPreferencesRow` widget has a title that [class@PreferencesWindow]
	21	+	// will use to let the user look for a preference. It doesn't present the title
	22	+	// in any way and lets you present the preference as you please.
	23	+	//
	24	+	// [class@ActionRow] and its derivatives are convenient to use as preference
	25	+	// rows as they take care of presenting the preference's title while letting you
	26	+	// compose the inputs of the preference around it.
	27	+	type PreferencesRow struct {
	28	+	gtk.ListBoxRow
	29	+	}
	30	+
	31	+	func PreferencesRowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *PreferencesRow {
	32	+	cls := &PreferencesRow{}
	33	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	34	+	return cls
	35	+	}
	36	+
	37	+	var xNewPreferencesRow func() uintptr
	38	+
	39	+	// Creates a new `AdwPreferencesRow`.
	40	+	func NewPreferencesRow() *gtk.Widget {
	41	+	NewPreferencesRowPtr := xNewPreferencesRow()
	42	+	if NewPreferencesRowPtr == 0 {
	43	+	return nil
	44	+	}
	45	+
	46	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewPreferencesRowPtr)
	47	+
	48	+	NewPreferencesRowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	49	+	NewPreferencesRowCls.Ptr = NewPreferencesRowPtr
	50	+	return NewPreferencesRowCls
	51	+	}
	52	+
	53	+	var xPreferencesRowGetTitle func(uintptr) string
	54	+
	55	+	// Gets the title of the preference represented by @self.
	56	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) GetTitle() string {
	57	+
	58	+	return xPreferencesRowGetTitle(x.GoPointer())
	59	+
	60	+	}
	61	+
	62	+	var xPreferencesRowGetTitleSelectable func(uintptr) bool
	63	+
	64	+	// Gets whether the user can copy the title from the label
	65	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) GetTitleSelectable() bool {
	66	+
	67	+	return xPreferencesRowGetTitleSelectable(x.GoPointer())
	68	+
	69	+	}
	70	+
	71	+	var xPreferencesRowGetUseMarkup func(uintptr) bool
	72	+
	73	+	// Gets whether to use Pango markup for the title label.
	74	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) GetUseMarkup() bool {
	75	+
	76	+	return xPreferencesRowGetUseMarkup(x.GoPointer())
	77	+
	78	+	}
	79	+
	80	+	var xPreferencesRowGetUseUnderline func(uintptr) bool
	81	+
	82	+	// Gets whether an embedded underline in the title indicates a mnemonic.
	83	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) GetUseUnderline() bool {
	84	+
	85	+	return xPreferencesRowGetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer())
	86	+
	87	+	}
	88	+
	89	+	var xPreferencesRowSetTitle func(uintptr, string)
	90	+
	91	+	// Sets the title of the preference represented by @self.
	92	+	//
	93	+	// The title is interpreted as Pango markup unless
	94	+	// [property@PreferencesRow:use-markup] is set to `FALSE`.
	95	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) SetTitle(TitleVar string) {
	96	+
	97	+	xPreferencesRowSetTitle(x.GoPointer(), TitleVar)
	98	+
	99	+	}
	100	+
	101	+	var xPreferencesRowSetTitleSelectable func(uintptr, bool)
	102	+
	103	+	// Sets whether the user can copy the title from the label
	104	+	//
	105	+	// See also [property@Gtk.Label:selectable].
	106	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) SetTitleSelectable(TitleSelectableVar bool) {
	107	+
	108	+	xPreferencesRowSetTitleSelectable(x.GoPointer(), TitleSelectableVar)
	109	+
	110	+	}
	111	+
	112	+	var xPreferencesRowSetUseMarkup func(uintptr, bool)
	113	+
	114	+	// Sets whether to use Pango markup for the title label.
	115	+	//
	116	+	// Subclasses may also use it for other labels, such as subtitle.
	117	+	//
	118	+	// See also [func@Pango.parse_markup].
	119	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) SetUseMarkup(UseMarkupVar bool) {
	120	+
	121	+	xPreferencesRowSetUseMarkup(x.GoPointer(), UseMarkupVar)
	122	+
	123	+	}
	124	+
	125	+	var xPreferencesRowSetUseUnderline func(uintptr, bool)
	126	+
	127	+	// Sets whether an embedded underline in the title indicates a mnemonic.
	128	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) SetUseUnderline(UseUnderlineVar bool) {
	129	+
	130	+	xPreferencesRowSetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer(), UseUnderlineVar)
	131	+
	132	+	}
	133	+
	134	+	func (c *PreferencesRow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	135	+	return c.Ptr
	136	+	}
	137	+
	138	+	func (c *PreferencesRow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	139	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	140	+	}
	141	+
	142	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	143	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	144	+
	145	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	146	+
	147	+	}
	148	+
	149	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	150	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	151	+
	152	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	153	+
	154	+	}
	155	+
	156	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	157	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	158	+
	159	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	160	+
	161	+	}
	162	+
	163	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	164	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	165	+
	166	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	167	+
	168	+	}
	169	+
	170	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	171	+	//
	172	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	173	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	174	+	//
	175	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	176	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	177	+	// technologies.
	178	+	//
	179	+	// Example:
	180	+	// ```c
	181	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	182	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	183	+	//
	184	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	185	+	// -1);
	186	+	//
	187	+	// ```
	188	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	189	+
	190	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	191	+
	192	+	}
	193	+
	194	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	195	+	//
	196	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	197	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	198	+	//
	199	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	200	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	201	+
	202	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	203	+
	204	+	}
	205	+
	206	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	207	+	//
	208	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	209	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	210	+	//
	211	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	212	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	213	+	//
	214	+	// ```c
	215	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	216	+	//
	217	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	218	+	// ref1, NULL,
	219	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	220	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	221	+	// -1);
	222	+	//
	223	+	// ```
	224	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	225	+
	226	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	227	+
	228	+	}
	229	+
	230	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	231	+	//
	232	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	233	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	234	+	//
	235	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	236	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	237	+
	238	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	239	+
	240	+	}
	241	+
	242	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	243	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	244	+	//
	245	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	246	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	247	+	//
	248	+	// Example:
	249	+	// ```c
	250	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	251	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	252	+	//
	253	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	254	+	// -1);
	255	+	//
	256	+	// ```
	257	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	258	+
	259	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	260	+
	261	+	}
	262	+
	263	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	264	+	//
	265	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	266	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	267	+	//
	268	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	269	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	270	+
	271	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	272	+
	273	+	}
	274	+
	275	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	276	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) GetActionName() string {
	277	+
	278	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	279	+
	280	+	}
	281	+
	282	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	283	+	func (x PreferencesRow) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	284	+
	285	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	286	+
	287	+	}
	288	+
	289	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	290	+	// associated.
	291	+	//
	292	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	293	+	// any previous action.
	294	+	//
	295	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	296	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	297	+	//
	298	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	299	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	300	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	301	+	// associated with the window.
	302	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	303	+
	304	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	305	+
	306	+	}
	307	+
	308	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	309	+	//
	310	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	311	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	312	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	313	+	//
	314	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	315	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	316	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	317	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	318	+
	319	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	320	+
	321	+	}
	322	+
	323	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	324	+	//
	325	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	326	+	//
	327	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	328	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	329	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	330	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	331	+	//
	332	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	333	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	334	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	335	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	336	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	337	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	338	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	339	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	340	+	// rendered inactive).
	341	+	func (x PreferencesRow) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	342	+
	343	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	344	+
	345	+	}
	346	+
	347	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	348	+	// actionable widget.
	349	+	//
	350	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	351	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	352	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	353	+
	354	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	355	+
	356	+	}
	357	+
	358	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	359	+	//
	360	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	361	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	362	+	func (x *PreferencesRow) GetBuildableId() string {
	363	+
	364	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	365	+
	366	+	}
	367	+
	368	+	func init() {
	369	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	370	+	if err != nil {
	371	+	panic(err)
	372	+	}
	373	+
	374	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewPreferencesRow, lib, "adw_preferences_row_new")
	375	+
	376	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowGetTitle, lib, "adw_preferences_row_get_title")
	377	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowGetTitleSelectable, lib, "adw_preferences_row_get_title_selectable")
	378	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowGetUseMarkup, lib, "adw_preferences_row_get_use_markup")
	379	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowGetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_preferences_row_get_use_underline")
	380	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowSetTitle, lib, "adw_preferences_row_set_title")
	381	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowSetTitleSelectable, lib, "adw_preferences_row_set_title_selectable")
	382	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowSetUseMarkup, lib, "adw_preferences_row_set_use_markup")
	383	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesRowSetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_preferences_row_set_use_underline")
	384	+
	385	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-preferences-window.go +491 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,491 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gsk"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	type PreferencesWindowClass struct {
	14	+	ParentClass uintptr
	15	+
	16	+	Padding uintptr
	17	+	}
	18	+
	19	+	// A window to present an application's preferences.
	20	+	//
	21	+	// <picture>
	22	+	//
	23	+	// <source srcset="preferences-window-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	24	+	// <img src="preferences-window.png" alt="preferences-window">
	25	+	//
	26	+	// </picture>
	27	+	//
	28	+	// The `AdwPreferencesWindow` widget presents an application's preferences
	29	+	// gathered into pages and groups. The preferences are searchable by the user.
	30	+	//
	31	+	// ## CSS nodes
	32	+	//
	33	+	// `AdwPreferencesWindow` has a main CSS node with the name `window` and the
	34	+	// style class `.preferences`.
	35	+	type PreferencesWindow struct {
	36	+	Window
	37	+	}
	38	+
	39	+	func PreferencesWindowNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *PreferencesWindow {
	40	+	cls := &PreferencesWindow{}
	41	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	42	+	return cls
	43	+	}
	44	+
	45	+	var xNewPreferencesWindow func() uintptr
	46	+
	47	+	// Creates a new `AdwPreferencesWindow`.
	48	+	func NewPreferencesWindow() *gtk.Widget {
	49	+	NewPreferencesWindowPtr := xNewPreferencesWindow()
	50	+	if NewPreferencesWindowPtr == 0 {
	51	+	return nil
	52	+	}
	53	+
	54	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewPreferencesWindowPtr)
	55	+
	56	+	NewPreferencesWindowCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	57	+	NewPreferencesWindowCls.Ptr = NewPreferencesWindowPtr
	58	+	return NewPreferencesWindowCls
	59	+	}
	60	+
	61	+	var xPreferencesWindowAdd func(uintptr, uintptr)
	62	+
	63	+	// Adds a preferences page to @self.
	64	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) Add(PageVar PreferencesPage) {
	65	+
	66	+	xPreferencesWindowAdd(x.GoPointer(), PageVar.GoPointer())
	67	+
	68	+	}
	69	+
	70	+	var xPreferencesWindowAddToast func(uintptr, uintptr)
	71	+
	72	+	// Displays @toast.
	73	+	//
	74	+	// See [method@ToastOverlay.add_toast].
	75	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) AddToast(ToastVar Toast) {
	76	+
	77	+	xPreferencesWindowAddToast(x.GoPointer(), ToastVar.GoPointer())
	78	+
	79	+	}
	80	+
	81	+	var xPreferencesWindowCloseSubpage func(uintptr)
	82	+
	83	+	// Closes the current subpage.
	84	+	//
	85	+	// If there is no presented subpage, this does nothing.
	86	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) CloseSubpage() {
	87	+
	88	+	xPreferencesWindowCloseSubpage(x.GoPointer())
	89	+
	90	+	}
	91	+
	92	+	var xPreferencesWindowGetCanNavigateBack func(uintptr) bool
	93	+
	94	+	// Gets whether gestures and shortcuts for closing subpages are enabled.
	95	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) GetCanNavigateBack() bool {
	96	+
	97	+	return xPreferencesWindowGetCanNavigateBack(x.GoPointer())
	98	+
	99	+	}
	100	+
	101	+	var xPreferencesWindowGetSearchEnabled func(uintptr) bool
	102	+
	103	+	// Gets whether search is enabled for @self.
	104	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) GetSearchEnabled() bool {
	105	+
	106	+	return xPreferencesWindowGetSearchEnabled(x.GoPointer())
	107	+
	108	+	}
	109	+
	110	+	var xPreferencesWindowGetVisiblePage func(uintptr) uintptr
	111	+
	112	+	// Gets the currently visible page of @self.
	113	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) GetVisiblePage() PreferencesPage {
	114	+
	115	+	GetVisiblePagePtr := xPreferencesWindowGetVisiblePage(x.GoPointer())
	116	+	if GetVisiblePagePtr == 0 {
	117	+	return nil
	118	+	}
	119	+
	120	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetVisiblePagePtr)
	121	+
	122	+	GetVisiblePageCls := &PreferencesPage{}
	123	+	GetVisiblePageCls.Ptr = GetVisiblePagePtr
	124	+	return GetVisiblePageCls
	125	+
	126	+	}
	127	+
	128	+	var xPreferencesWindowGetVisiblePageName func(uintptr) string
	129	+
	130	+	// Gets the name of currently visible page of @self.
	131	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) GetVisiblePageName() string {
	132	+
	133	+	return xPreferencesWindowGetVisiblePageName(x.GoPointer())
	134	+
	135	+	}
	136	+
	137	+	var xPreferencesWindowPresentSubpage func(uintptr, uintptr)
	138	+
	139	+	// Sets @subpage as the window's subpage and opens it.
	140	+	//
	141	+	// The transition can be cancelled by the user, in which case visible child will
	142	+	// change back to the previously visible child.
	143	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) PresentSubpage(SubpageVar gtk.Widget) {
	144	+
	145	+	xPreferencesWindowPresentSubpage(x.GoPointer(), SubpageVar.GoPointer())
	146	+
	147	+	}
	148	+
	149	+	var xPreferencesWindowRemove func(uintptr, uintptr)
	150	+
	151	+	// Removes a page from @self.
	152	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) Remove(PageVar PreferencesPage) {
	153	+
	154	+	xPreferencesWindowRemove(x.GoPointer(), PageVar.GoPointer())
	155	+
	156	+	}
	157	+
	158	+	var xPreferencesWindowSetCanNavigateBack func(uintptr, bool)
	159	+
	160	+	// Sets whether gestures and shortcuts for closing subpages are enabled.
	161	+	//
	162	+	// The supported gestures are:
	163	+	//
	164	+	// - One-finger swipe on touchscreens
	165	+	// - Horizontal scrolling on touchpads (usually two-finger swipe)
	166	+	// - Back mouse button
	167	+	//
	168	+	// The keyboard back key is also supported, as well as the
	169	+	// <kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>←</kbd> shortcut.
	170	+	//
	171	+	// For right-to-left locales, gestures and shortcuts are reversed.
	172	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) SetCanNavigateBack(CanNavigateBackVar bool) {
	173	+
	174	+	xPreferencesWindowSetCanNavigateBack(x.GoPointer(), CanNavigateBackVar)
	175	+
	176	+	}
	177	+
	178	+	var xPreferencesWindowSetSearchEnabled func(uintptr, bool)
	179	+
	180	+	// Sets whether search is enabled for @self.
	181	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) SetSearchEnabled(SearchEnabledVar bool) {
	182	+
	183	+	xPreferencesWindowSetSearchEnabled(x.GoPointer(), SearchEnabledVar)
	184	+
	185	+	}
	186	+
	187	+	var xPreferencesWindowSetVisiblePage func(uintptr, uintptr)
	188	+
	189	+	// Makes @page the visible page of @self.
	190	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) SetVisiblePage(PageVar PreferencesPage) {
	191	+
	192	+	xPreferencesWindowSetVisiblePage(x.GoPointer(), PageVar.GoPointer())
	193	+
	194	+	}
	195	+
	196	+	var xPreferencesWindowSetVisiblePageName func(uintptr, string)
	197	+
	198	+	// Makes the page with the given name visible.
	199	+	//
	200	+	// See [property@ViewStack:visible-child].
	201	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) SetVisiblePageName(NameVar string) {
	202	+
	203	+	xPreferencesWindowSetVisiblePageName(x.GoPointer(), NameVar)
	204	+
	205	+	}
	206	+
	207	+	func (c *PreferencesWindow) GoPointer() uintptr {
	208	+	return c.Ptr
	209	+	}
	210	+
	211	+	func (c *PreferencesWindow) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	212	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	213	+	}
	214	+
	215	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	216	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	217	+
	218	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	219	+
	220	+	}
	221	+
	222	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	223	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	224	+
	225	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	226	+
	227	+	}
	228	+
	229	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	230	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	231	+
	232	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	233	+
	234	+	}
	235	+
	236	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	237	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	238	+
	239	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	240	+
	241	+	}
	242	+
	243	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	244	+	//
	245	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	246	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	247	+	//
	248	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	249	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	250	+	// technologies.
	251	+	//
	252	+	// Example:
	253	+	// ```c
	254	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	255	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	256	+	//
	257	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	258	+	// -1);
	259	+	//
	260	+	// ```
	261	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	262	+
	263	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	264	+
	265	+	}
	266	+
	267	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	268	+	//
	269	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	270	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	271	+	//
	272	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	273	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	274	+
	275	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	276	+
	277	+	}
	278	+
	279	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	280	+	//
	281	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	282	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	283	+	//
	284	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	285	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	286	+	//
	287	+	// ```c
	288	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	289	+	//
	290	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	291	+	// ref1, NULL,
	292	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	293	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	294	+	// -1);
	295	+	//
	296	+	// ```
	297	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	298	+
	299	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	300	+
	301	+	}
	302	+
	303	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	304	+	//
	305	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	306	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	307	+	//
	308	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	309	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	310	+
	311	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	312	+
	313	+	}
	314	+
	315	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	316	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	317	+	//
	318	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	319	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	320	+	//
	321	+	// Example:
	322	+	// ```c
	323	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	324	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	325	+	//
	326	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	327	+	// -1);
	328	+	//
	329	+	// ```
	330	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	331	+
	332	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	333	+
	334	+	}
	335	+
	336	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	337	+	//
	338	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	339	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	340	+	//
	341	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	342	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	343	+
	344	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	345	+
	346	+	}
	347	+
	348	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	349	+	//
	350	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	351	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	352	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) GetBuildableId() string {
	353	+
	354	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	355	+
	356	+	}
	357	+
	358	+	// Returns the renderer that is used for this `GtkNative`.
	359	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) GetRenderer() gsk.Renderer {
	360	+
	361	+	GetRendererPtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetRenderer(x.GoPointer())
	362	+	if GetRendererPtr == 0 {
	363	+	return nil
	364	+	}
	365	+
	366	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetRendererPtr)
	367	+
	368	+	GetRendererCls := &gsk.Renderer{}
	369	+	GetRendererCls.Ptr = GetRendererPtr
	370	+	return GetRendererCls
	371	+
	372	+	}
	373	+
	374	+	// Returns the surface of this `GtkNative`.
	375	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) GetSurface() gdk.Surface {
	376	+
	377	+	GetSurfacePtr := gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurface(x.GoPointer())
	378	+	if GetSurfacePtr == 0 {
	379	+	return nil
	380	+	}
	381	+
	382	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetSurfacePtr)
	383	+
	384	+	GetSurfaceCls := &gdk.Surface{}
	385	+	GetSurfaceCls.Ptr = GetSurfacePtr
	386	+	return GetSurfaceCls
	387	+
	388	+	}
	389	+
	390	+	// Retrieves the surface transform of @self.
	391	+	//
	392	+	// This is the translation from @self's surface coordinates into
	393	+	// @self's widget coordinates.
	394	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) GetSurfaceTransform(XVar float64, YVar float64) {
	395	+
	396	+	gtk.XGtkNativeGetSurfaceTransform(x.GoPointer(), XVar, YVar)
	397	+
	398	+	}
	399	+
	400	+	// Realizes a `GtkNative`.
	401	+	//
	402	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	403	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) Realize() {
	404	+
	405	+	gtk.XGtkNativeRealize(x.GoPointer())
	406	+
	407	+	}
	408	+
	409	+	// Unrealizes a `GtkNative`.
	410	+	//
	411	+	// This should only be used by subclasses.
	412	+	func (x *PreferencesWindow) Unrealize() {
	413	+
	414	+	gtk.XGtkNativeUnrealize(x.GoPointer())
	415	+
	416	+	}
	417	+
	418	+	// Returns the display that this `GtkRoot` is on.
	419	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) GetDisplay() gdk.Display {
	420	+
	421	+	GetDisplayPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetDisplay(x.GoPointer())
	422	+	if GetDisplayPtr == 0 {
	423	+	return nil
	424	+	}
	425	+
	426	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetDisplayPtr)
	427	+
	428	+	GetDisplayCls := &gdk.Display{}
	429	+	GetDisplayCls.Ptr = GetDisplayPtr
	430	+	return GetDisplayCls
	431	+
	432	+	}
	433	+
	434	+	// Retrieves the current focused widget within the root.
	435	+	//
	436	+	// Note that this is the widget that would have the focus
	437	+	// if the root is active; if the root is not focused then
	438	+	// `gtk_widget_has_focus (widget)` will be %FALSE for the
	439	+	// widget.
	440	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) GetFocus() gtk.Widget {
	441	+
	442	+	GetFocusPtr := gtk.XGtkRootGetFocus(x.GoPointer())
	443	+	if GetFocusPtr == 0 {
	444	+	return nil
	445	+	}
	446	+
	447	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetFocusPtr)
	448	+
	449	+	GetFocusCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	450	+	GetFocusCls.Ptr = GetFocusPtr
	451	+	return GetFocusCls
	452	+
	453	+	}
	454	+
	455	+	// If @focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
	456	+	// it as the focus widget for the root.
	457	+	//
	458	+	// If @focus is %NULL, unsets the focus widget for the root.
	459	+	//
	460	+	// To set the focus to a particular widget in the root, it is usually
	461	+	// more convenient to use [method@Gtk.Widget.grab_focus] instead of
	462	+	// this function.
	463	+	func (x PreferencesWindow) SetFocus(FocusVar gtk.Widget) {
	464	+
	465	+	gtk.XGtkRootSetFocus(x.GoPointer(), FocusVar.GoPointer())
	466	+
	467	+	}
	468	+
	469	+	func init() {
	470	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	471	+	if err != nil {
	472	+	panic(err)
	473	+	}
	474	+
	475	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewPreferencesWindow, lib, "adw_preferences_window_new")
	476	+
	477	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowAdd, lib, "adw_preferences_window_add")
	478	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowAddToast, lib, "adw_preferences_window_add_toast")
	479	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowCloseSubpage, lib, "adw_preferences_window_close_subpage")
	480	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowGetCanNavigateBack, lib, "adw_preferences_window_get_can_navigate_back")
	481	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowGetSearchEnabled, lib, "adw_preferences_window_get_search_enabled")
	482	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowGetVisiblePage, lib, "adw_preferences_window_get_visible_page")
	483	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowGetVisiblePageName, lib, "adw_preferences_window_get_visible_page_name")
	484	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowPresentSubpage, lib, "adw_preferences_window_present_subpage")
	485	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowRemove, lib, "adw_preferences_window_remove")
	486	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowSetCanNavigateBack, lib, "adw_preferences_window_set_can_navigate_back")
	487	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowSetSearchEnabled, lib, "adw_preferences_window_set_search_enabled")
	488	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowSetVisiblePage, lib, "adw_preferences_window_set_visible_page")
	489	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xPreferencesWindowSetVisiblePageName, lib, "adw_preferences_window_set_visible_page_name")
	490	+
	491	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-split-button.go +594 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,594 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gio"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/glib"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	10	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	11	+	)
	12	+
	13	+	type SplitButtonClass struct {
	14	+	ParentClass uintptr
	15	+	}
	16	+
	17	+	// A combined button and dropdown widget.
	18	+	//
	19	+	// <picture>
	20	+	//
	21	+	// <source srcset="split-button-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	22	+	// <img src="split-button.png" alt="split-button">
	23	+	//
	24	+	// </picture>
	25	+	//
	26	+	// `AdwSplitButton` is typically used to present a set of actions in a menu,
	27	+	// but allow access to one of them with a single click.
	28	+	//
	29	+	// The API is very similar to [class@Gtk.Button] and [class@Gtk.MenuButton], see
	30	+	// their documentation for details.
	31	+	//
	32	+	// ## CSS nodes
	33	+	//
	34	+	// ```
	35	+	// splitbutton[.image-button][.text-button]
	36	+	// ├── button
	37	+	// │ ╰── <content>
	38	+	// ├── separator
	39	+	// ╰── menubutton
	40	+	//
	41	+	// ╰── button.toggle
	42	+	// ╰── arrow
	43	+	//
	44	+	// ```
	45	+	//
	46	+	// `AdwSplitButton`'s CSS node is called `splitbutton`. It contains the css
	47	+	// nodes: `button`, `separator`, `menubutton`. See [class@Gtk.MenuButton]
	48	+	// documentation for the `menubutton` contents.
	49	+	//
	50	+	// The main CSS node will contain the `.image-button` or `.text-button` style
	51	+	// classes matching the button contents. The nested button nodes will never
	52	+	// contain them.
	53	+	//
	54	+	// ## Accessibility
	55	+	//
	56	+	// `AdwSplitButton` uses the `GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP` role.
	57	+	type SplitButton struct {
	58	+	gtk.Widget
	59	+	}
	60	+
	61	+	func SplitButtonNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *SplitButton {
	62	+	cls := &SplitButton{}
	63	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	64	+	return cls
	65	+	}
	66	+
	67	+	var xNewSplitButton func() uintptr
	68	+
	69	+	// Creates a new `AdwSplitButton`.
	70	+	func NewSplitButton() *gtk.Widget {
	71	+	NewSplitButtonPtr := xNewSplitButton()
	72	+	if NewSplitButtonPtr == 0 {
	73	+	return nil
	74	+	}
	75	+
	76	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewSplitButtonPtr)
	77	+
	78	+	NewSplitButtonCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	79	+	NewSplitButtonCls.Ptr = NewSplitButtonPtr
	80	+	return NewSplitButtonCls
	81	+	}
	82	+
	83	+	var xSplitButtonGetChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	84	+
	85	+	// Gets the child widget.
	86	+	func (x SplitButton) GetChild() gtk.Widget {
	87	+
	88	+	GetChildPtr := xSplitButtonGetChild(x.GoPointer())
	89	+	if GetChildPtr == 0 {
	90	+	return nil
	91	+	}
	92	+
	93	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetChildPtr)
	94	+
	95	+	GetChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	96	+	GetChildCls.Ptr = GetChildPtr
	97	+	return GetChildCls
	98	+
	99	+	}
	100	+
	101	+	var xSplitButtonGetDirection func(uintptr) gtk.ArrowType
	102	+
	103	+	// Gets the direction in which the popup will be popped up.
	104	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetDirection() gtk.ArrowType {
	105	+
	106	+	return xSplitButtonGetDirection(x.GoPointer())
	107	+
	108	+	}
	109	+
	110	+	var xSplitButtonGetDropdownTooltip func(uintptr) string
	111	+
	112	+	// Gets the tooltip of the dropdown button of @self.
	113	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetDropdownTooltip() string {
	114	+
	115	+	return xSplitButtonGetDropdownTooltip(x.GoPointer())
	116	+
	117	+	}
	118	+
	119	+	var xSplitButtonGetIconName func(uintptr) string
	120	+
	121	+	// Gets the name of the icon used to automatically populate the button.
	122	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetIconName() string {
	123	+
	124	+	return xSplitButtonGetIconName(x.GoPointer())
	125	+
	126	+	}
	127	+
	128	+	var xSplitButtonGetLabel func(uintptr) string
	129	+
	130	+	// Gets the label for @self.
	131	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetLabel() string {
	132	+
	133	+	return xSplitButtonGetLabel(x.GoPointer())
	134	+
	135	+	}
	136	+
	137	+	var xSplitButtonGetMenuModel func(uintptr) uintptr
	138	+
	139	+	// Gets the menu model from which the popup will be created.
	140	+	func (x SplitButton) GetMenuModel() gio.MenuModel {
	141	+
	142	+	GetMenuModelPtr := xSplitButtonGetMenuModel(x.GoPointer())
	143	+	if GetMenuModelPtr == 0 {
	144	+	return nil
	145	+	}
	146	+
	147	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetMenuModelPtr)
	148	+
	149	+	GetMenuModelCls := &gio.MenuModel{}
	150	+	GetMenuModelCls.Ptr = GetMenuModelPtr
	151	+	return GetMenuModelCls
	152	+
	153	+	}
	154	+
	155	+	var xSplitButtonGetPopover func(uintptr) uintptr
	156	+
	157	+	// Gets the popover that will be popped up when the dropdown is clicked.
	158	+	func (x SplitButton) GetPopover() gtk.Popover {
	159	+
	160	+	GetPopoverPtr := xSplitButtonGetPopover(x.GoPointer())
	161	+	if GetPopoverPtr == 0 {
	162	+	return nil
	163	+	}
	164	+
	165	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetPopoverPtr)
	166	+
	167	+	GetPopoverCls := &gtk.Popover{}
	168	+	GetPopoverCls.Ptr = GetPopoverPtr
	169	+	return GetPopoverCls
	170	+
	171	+	}
	172	+
	173	+	var xSplitButtonGetUseUnderline func(uintptr) bool
	174	+
	175	+	// Gets whether an underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.
	176	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetUseUnderline() bool {
	177	+
	178	+	return xSplitButtonGetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer())
	179	+
	180	+	}
	181	+
	182	+	var xSplitButtonPopdown func(uintptr)
	183	+
	184	+	// Dismisses the menu.
	185	+	func (x *SplitButton) Popdown() {
	186	+
	187	+	xSplitButtonPopdown(x.GoPointer())
	188	+
	189	+	}
	190	+
	191	+	var xSplitButtonPopup func(uintptr)
	192	+
	193	+	// Pops up the menu.
	194	+	func (x *SplitButton) Popup() {
	195	+
	196	+	xSplitButtonPopup(x.GoPointer())
	197	+
	198	+	}
	199	+
	200	+	var xSplitButtonSetChild func(uintptr, uintptr)
	201	+
	202	+	// Sets the child widget.
	203	+	//
	204	+	// Setting the child widget will set [property@SplitButton:label] and
	205	+	// [property@SplitButton:icon-name] to `NULL`.
	206	+	func (x SplitButton) SetChild(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	207	+
	208	+	xSplitButtonSetChild(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	209	+
	210	+	}
	211	+
	212	+	var xSplitButtonSetDirection func(uintptr, gtk.ArrowType)
	213	+
	214	+	// Sets the direction in which the popup will be popped up.
	215	+	//
	216	+	// The dropdown arrow icon will point at the same direction.
	217	+	//
	218	+	// If the does not fit in the available space in the given direction, GTK will
	219	+	// try its best to keep it inside the screen and fully visible.
	220	+	//
	221	+	// If you pass `GTK_ARROW_NONE`, it's equivalent to `GTK_ARROW_DOWN`.
	222	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetDirection(DirectionVar gtk.ArrowType) {
	223	+
	224	+	xSplitButtonSetDirection(x.GoPointer(), DirectionVar)
	225	+
	226	+	}
	227	+
	228	+	var xSplitButtonSetDropdownTooltip func(uintptr, string)
	229	+
	230	+	// Sets the tooltip of the dropdown button of @self.
	231	+	//
	232	+	// The tooltip can be marked up with the Pango text markup language.
	233	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetDropdownTooltip(TooltipVar string) {
	234	+
	235	+	xSplitButtonSetDropdownTooltip(x.GoPointer(), TooltipVar)
	236	+
	237	+	}
	238	+
	239	+	var xSplitButtonSetIconName func(uintptr, string)
	240	+
	241	+	// Sets the name of the icon used to automatically populate the button.
	242	+	//
	243	+	// Setting the icon name will set [property@SplitButton:label] and
	244	+	// [property@SplitButton:child] to `NULL`.
	245	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetIconName(IconNameVar string) {
	246	+
	247	+	xSplitButtonSetIconName(x.GoPointer(), IconNameVar)
	248	+
	249	+	}
	250	+
	251	+	var xSplitButtonSetLabel func(uintptr, string)
	252	+
	253	+	// Sets the label for @self.
	254	+	//
	255	+	// Setting the label will set [property@SplitButton:icon-name] and
	256	+	// [property@SplitButton:child] to `NULL`.
	257	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetLabel(LabelVar string) {
	258	+
	259	+	xSplitButtonSetLabel(x.GoPointer(), LabelVar)
	260	+
	261	+	}
	262	+
	263	+	var xSplitButtonSetMenuModel func(uintptr, uintptr)
	264	+
	265	+	// Sets the menu model from which the popup will be created.
	266	+	//
	267	+	// If the menu model is `NULL`, the dropdown is disabled.
	268	+	//
	269	+	// A [class@Gtk.Popover] will be created from the menu model with
	270	+	// [ctor@Gtk.PopoverMenu.new_from_model]. Actions will be connected as
	271	+	// documented for this function.
	272	+	//
	273	+	// If [property@SplitButton:popover] is already set, it will be dissociated from
	274	+	// the button, and the property is set to `NULL`.
	275	+	func (x SplitButton) SetMenuModel(MenuModelVar gio.MenuModel) {
	276	+
	277	+	xSplitButtonSetMenuModel(x.GoPointer(), MenuModelVar.GoPointer())
	278	+
	279	+	}
	280	+
	281	+	var xSplitButtonSetPopover func(uintptr, uintptr)
	282	+
	283	+	// Sets the popover that will be popped up when the dropdown is clicked.
	284	+	//
	285	+	// If the popover is `NULL`, the dropdown is disabled.
	286	+	//
	287	+	// If [property@SplitButton:menu-model] is set, the menu model is dissociated
	288	+	// from the button, and the property is set to `NULL`.
	289	+	func (x SplitButton) SetPopover(PopoverVar gtk.Popover) {
	290	+
	291	+	xSplitButtonSetPopover(x.GoPointer(), PopoverVar.GoPointer())
	292	+
	293	+	}
	294	+
	295	+	var xSplitButtonSetUseUnderline func(uintptr, bool)
	296	+
	297	+	// Sets whether an underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.
	298	+	//
	299	+	// See [property@SplitButton:label].
	300	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetUseUnderline(UseUnderlineVar bool) {
	301	+
	302	+	xSplitButtonSetUseUnderline(x.GoPointer(), UseUnderlineVar)
	303	+
	304	+	}
	305	+
	306	+	func (c *SplitButton) GoPointer() uintptr {
	307	+	return c.Ptr
	308	+	}
	309	+
	310	+	func (c *SplitButton) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	311	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	312	+	}
	313	+
	314	+	// Emitted to animate press then release.
	315	+	//
	316	+	// This is an action signal. Applications should never connect to this signal,
	317	+	// but use the [signal@SplitButton::clicked] signal.
	318	+	func (x *SplitButton) ConnectActivate(cb func(SplitButton)) {
	319	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr) {
	320	+	fa := SplitButton{}
	321	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	322	+
	323	+	cb(fa)
	324	+
	325	+	}
	326	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::activate", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	327	+	}
	328	+
	329	+	// Emitted when the button has been activated (pressed and released).
	330	+	func (x *SplitButton) ConnectClicked(cb func(SplitButton)) {
	331	+	fcb := func(clsPtr uintptr) {
	332	+	fa := SplitButton{}
	333	+	fa.Ptr = clsPtr
	334	+
	335	+	cb(fa)
	336	+
	337	+	}
	338	+	gobject.ObjectConnect(x.GoPointer(), "signal::clicked", purego.NewCallback(fcb))
	339	+	}
	340	+
	341	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	342	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	343	+
	344	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	345	+
	346	+	}
	347	+
	348	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	349	+	func (x *SplitButton) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	350	+
	351	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	352	+
	353	+	}
	354	+
	355	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	356	+	func (x *SplitButton) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	357	+
	358	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	359	+
	360	+	}
	361	+
	362	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	363	+	func (x *SplitButton) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	364	+
	365	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	366	+
	367	+	}
	368	+
	369	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	370	+	//
	371	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	372	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	373	+	//
	374	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	375	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	376	+	// technologies.
	377	+	//
	378	+	// Example:
	379	+	// ```c
	380	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	381	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	382	+	//
	383	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	384	+	// -1);
	385	+	//
	386	+	// ```
	387	+	func (x *SplitButton) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	388	+
	389	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	390	+
	391	+	}
	392	+
	393	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	394	+	//
	395	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	396	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	397	+	//
	398	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	399	+	func (x *SplitButton) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	400	+
	401	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	402	+
	403	+	}
	404	+
	405	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	406	+	//
	407	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	408	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	409	+	//
	410	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	411	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	412	+	//
	413	+	// ```c
	414	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	415	+	//
	416	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	417	+	// ref1, NULL,
	418	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	419	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	420	+	// -1);
	421	+	//
	422	+	// ```
	423	+	func (x *SplitButton) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	424	+
	425	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	426	+
	427	+	}
	428	+
	429	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	430	+	//
	431	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	432	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	433	+	//
	434	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	435	+	func (x *SplitButton) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	436	+
	437	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	438	+
	439	+	}
	440	+
	441	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	442	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	443	+	//
	444	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	445	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	446	+	//
	447	+	// Example:
	448	+	// ```c
	449	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	450	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	451	+	//
	452	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	453	+	// -1);
	454	+	//
	455	+	// ```
	456	+	func (x *SplitButton) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	457	+
	458	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	459	+
	460	+	}
	461	+
	462	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	463	+	//
	464	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	465	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	466	+	//
	467	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	468	+	func (x *SplitButton) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	469	+
	470	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	471	+
	472	+	}
	473	+
	474	+	// Gets the action name for @actionable.
	475	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetActionName() string {
	476	+
	477	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionName(x.GoPointer())
	478	+
	479	+	}
	480	+
	481	+	// Gets the current target value of @actionable.
	482	+	func (x SplitButton) GetActionTargetValue() glib.Variant {
	483	+
	484	+	return gtk.XGtkActionableGetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer())
	485	+
	486	+	}
	487	+
	488	+	// Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
	489	+	// associated.
	490	+	//
	491	+	// If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be unassociated from
	492	+	// any previous action.
	493	+	//
	494	+	// Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
	495	+	// located) within the hierarchy of a `GtkApplicationWindow`.
	496	+	//
	497	+	// Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
	498	+	// containing [class@ApplicationWindow] or its associated [class@Application],
	499	+	// respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the [class@Gio.Menu]
	500	+	// associated with the window.
	501	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetActionName(ActionNameVar string) {
	502	+
	503	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionName(x.GoPointer(), ActionNameVar)
	504	+
	505	+	}
	506	+
	507	+	// Sets the target of an actionable widget.
	508	+	//
	509	+	// This is a convenience function that calls [ctor@GLib.Variant.new] for
	510	+	// @format_string and uses the result to call
	511	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_action_target_value].
	512	+	//
	513	+	// If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set
	514	+	// the action name at the same time, you can use
	515	+	// [method@Gtk.Actionable.set_detailed_action_name].
	516	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetActionTarget(FormatStringVar string, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	517	+
	518	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTarget(x.GoPointer(), FormatStringVar, varArgs...)
	519	+
	520	+	}
	521	+
	522	+	// Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	523	+	//
	524	+	// If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
	525	+	//
	526	+	// The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter
	527	+	// to activation of the action associated with the `GtkActionable` widget.
	528	+	// Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as
	529	+	// “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.
	530	+	//
	531	+	// Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a [iface@Gio.Action]
	532	+	// with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
	533	+	// will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
	534	+	// value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
	535	+	// the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
	536	+	// the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
	537	+	// is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
	538	+	// be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
	539	+	// rendered inactive).
	540	+	func (x SplitButton) SetActionTargetValue(TargetValueVar glib.Variant) {
	541	+
	542	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetActionTargetValue(x.GoPointer(), TargetValueVar)
	543	+
	544	+	}
	545	+
	546	+	// Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
	547	+	// actionable widget.
	548	+	//
	549	+	// @detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by
	550	+	// [func@Gio.Action.parse_detailed_name].
	551	+	func (x *SplitButton) SetDetailedActionName(DetailedActionNameVar string) {
	552	+
	553	+	gtk.XGtkActionableSetDetailedActionName(x.GoPointer(), DetailedActionNameVar)
	554	+
	555	+	}
	556	+
	557	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	558	+	//
	559	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	560	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	561	+	func (x *SplitButton) GetBuildableId() string {
	562	+
	563	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	564	+
	565	+	}
	566	+
	567	+	func init() {
	568	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	569	+	if err != nil {
	570	+	panic(err)
	571	+	}
	572	+
	573	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewSplitButton, lib, "adw_split_button_new")
	574	+
	575	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetChild, lib, "adw_split_button_get_child")
	576	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetDirection, lib, "adw_split_button_get_direction")
	577	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetDropdownTooltip, lib, "adw_split_button_get_dropdown_tooltip")
	578	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetIconName, lib, "adw_split_button_get_icon_name")
	579	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetLabel, lib, "adw_split_button_get_label")
	580	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetMenuModel, lib, "adw_split_button_get_menu_model")
	581	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetPopover, lib, "adw_split_button_get_popover")
	582	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonGetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_split_button_get_use_underline")
	583	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonPopdown, lib, "adw_split_button_popdown")
	584	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonPopup, lib, "adw_split_button_popup")
	585	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetChild, lib, "adw_split_button_set_child")
	586	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetDirection, lib, "adw_split_button_set_direction")
	587	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetDropdownTooltip, lib, "adw_split_button_set_dropdown_tooltip")
	588	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetIconName, lib, "adw_split_button_set_icon_name")
	589	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetLabel, lib, "adw_split_button_set_label")
	590	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetMenuModel, lib, "adw_split_button_set_menu_model")
	591	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetPopover, lib, "adw_split_button_set_popover")
	592	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSplitButtonSetUseUnderline, lib, "adw_split_button_set_use_underline")
	593	+
	594	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-spring-animation.go +288 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,288 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	9	+	)
	10	+
	11	+	type SpringAnimationClass struct {
	12	+	}
	13	+
	14	+	// A spring-based [class@Animation].
	15	+	//
	16	+	// `AdwSpringAnimation` implements an animation driven by a physical model of a
	17	+	// spring described by [struct@SpringParams], with a resting position in
	18	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:value-to], stretched to
	19	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:value-from].
	20	+	//
	21	+	// Since the animation is physically simulated, spring animations don't have a
	22	+	// fixed duration. The animation will stop when the simulated spring comes to a
	23	+	// rest - when the amplitude of the oscillations becomes smaller than
	24	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:epsilon], or immediately when it reaches
	25	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:value-to] if
	26	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:clamp] is set to `TRUE`. The estimated duration can
	27	+	// be obtained with [property@SpringAnimation:estimated-duration].
	28	+	//
	29	+	// Due to the nature of spring-driven motion the animation can overshoot
	30	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:value-to] before coming to a rest. Whether the
	31	+	// animation will overshoot or not depends on the damping ratio of the spring.
	32	+	// See [struct@SpringParams] for more information about specific damping ratio
	33	+	// values.
	34	+	//
	35	+	// If [property@SpringAnimation:clamp] is `TRUE`, the animation will abruptly
	36	+	// end as soon as it reaches the final value, preventing overshooting.
	37	+	//
	38	+	// Animations can have an initial velocity value, set via
	39	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:initial-velocity], which adjusts the curve without
	40	+	// changing the duration. This makes spring animations useful for deceleration
	41	+	// at the end of gestures.
	42	+	//
	43	+	// If the initial and final values are equal, and the initial velocity is not 0,
	44	+	// the animation value will bounce and return to its resting position.
	45	+	type SpringAnimation struct {
	46	+	Animation
	47	+	}
	48	+
	49	+	func SpringAnimationNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *SpringAnimation {
	50	+	cls := &SpringAnimation{}
	51	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	52	+	return cls
	53	+	}
	54	+
	55	+	var xNewSpringAnimation func(uintptr, float64, float64, *SpringParams, uintptr) uintptr
	56	+
	57	+	// Creates a new `AdwSpringAnimation` on @widget.
	58	+	//
	59	+	// The animation will animate @target from @from to @to with the dynamics of a
	60	+	// spring described by @spring_params.
	61	+	func NewSpringAnimation(WidgetVar gtk.Widget, FromVar float64, ToVar float64, SpringParamsVar SpringParams, TargetVar AnimationTarget) Animation {
	62	+	NewSpringAnimationPtr := xNewSpringAnimation(WidgetVar.GoPointer(), FromVar, ToVar, SpringParamsVar, TargetVar.GoPointer())
	63	+	if NewSpringAnimationPtr == 0 {
	64	+	return nil
	65	+	}
	66	+
	67	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewSpringAnimationPtr)
	68	+
	69	+	NewSpringAnimationCls := &Animation{}
	70	+	NewSpringAnimationCls.Ptr = NewSpringAnimationPtr
	71	+	return NewSpringAnimationCls
	72	+	}
	73	+
	74	+	var xSpringAnimationCalculateValue func(uintptr, uint) float64
	75	+
	76	+	// Calculates the value @self will have at @time.
	77	+	//
	78	+	// The time starts at 0 and ends at
	79	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:estimated_duration].
	80	+	//
	81	+	// See also [method@SpringAnimation.calculate_velocity].
	82	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) CalculateValue(TimeVar uint) float64 {
	83	+
	84	+	return xSpringAnimationCalculateValue(x.GoPointer(), TimeVar)
	85	+
	86	+	}
	87	+
	88	+	var xSpringAnimationCalculateVelocity func(uintptr, uint) float64
	89	+
	90	+	// Calculates the velocity @self will have at @time.
	91	+	//
	92	+	// The time starts at 0 and ends at
	93	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:estimated_duration].
	94	+	//
	95	+	// See also [method@SpringAnimation.calculate_value].
	96	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) CalculateVelocity(TimeVar uint) float64 {
	97	+
	98	+	return xSpringAnimationCalculateVelocity(x.GoPointer(), TimeVar)
	99	+
	100	+	}
	101	+
	102	+	var xSpringAnimationGetClamp func(uintptr) bool
	103	+
	104	+	// Gets whether @self should be clamped.
	105	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) GetClamp() bool {
	106	+
	107	+	return xSpringAnimationGetClamp(x.GoPointer())
	108	+
	109	+	}
	110	+
	111	+	var xSpringAnimationGetEpsilon func(uintptr) float64
	112	+
	113	+	// Gets the precision of the spring.
	114	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) GetEpsilon() float64 {
	115	+
	116	+	return xSpringAnimationGetEpsilon(x.GoPointer())
	117	+
	118	+	}
	119	+
	120	+	var xSpringAnimationGetEstimatedDuration func(uintptr) uint
	121	+
	122	+	// Gets the estimated duration of @self, in milliseconds.
	123	+	//
	124	+	// Can be [const@DURATION_INFINITE] if the spring damping is set to 0.
	125	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) GetEstimatedDuration() uint {
	126	+
	127	+	return xSpringAnimationGetEstimatedDuration(x.GoPointer())
	128	+
	129	+	}
	130	+
	131	+	var xSpringAnimationGetInitialVelocity func(uintptr) float64
	132	+
	133	+	// Gets the initial velocity of @self.
	134	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) GetInitialVelocity() float64 {
	135	+
	136	+	return xSpringAnimationGetInitialVelocity(x.GoPointer())
	137	+
	138	+	}
	139	+
	140	+	var xSpringAnimationGetSpringParams func(uintptr) *SpringParams
	141	+
	142	+	// Gets the physical parameters of the spring of @self.
	143	+	func (x SpringAnimation) GetSpringParams() SpringParams {
	144	+
	145	+	return xSpringAnimationGetSpringParams(x.GoPointer())
	146	+
	147	+	}
	148	+
	149	+	var xSpringAnimationGetValueFrom func(uintptr) float64
	150	+
	151	+	// Gets the value @self will animate from.
	152	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) GetValueFrom() float64 {
	153	+
	154	+	return xSpringAnimationGetValueFrom(x.GoPointer())
	155	+
	156	+	}
	157	+
	158	+	var xSpringAnimationGetValueTo func(uintptr) float64
	159	+
	160	+	// Gets the value @self will animate to.
	161	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) GetValueTo() float64 {
	162	+
	163	+	return xSpringAnimationGetValueTo(x.GoPointer())
	164	+
	165	+	}
	166	+
	167	+	var xSpringAnimationGetVelocity func(uintptr) float64
	168	+
	169	+	// Gets the current velocity of @self.
	170	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) GetVelocity() float64 {
	171	+
	172	+	return xSpringAnimationGetVelocity(x.GoPointer())
	173	+
	174	+	}
	175	+
	176	+	var xSpringAnimationSetClamp func(uintptr, bool)
	177	+
	178	+	// Sets whether @self should be clamped.
	179	+	//
	180	+	// If set to `TRUE`, the animation will abruptly end as soon as it reaches the
	181	+	// final value, preventing overshooting.
	182	+	//
	183	+	// It won't prevent overshooting [property@SpringAnimation:value-from] if a
	184	+	// relative negative [property@SpringAnimation:initial-velocity] is set.
	185	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) SetClamp(ClampVar bool) {
	186	+
	187	+	xSpringAnimationSetClamp(x.GoPointer(), ClampVar)
	188	+
	189	+	}
	190	+
	191	+	var xSpringAnimationSetEpsilon func(uintptr, float64)
	192	+
	193	+	// Sets the precision of the spring.
	194	+	//
	195	+	// The level of precision used to determine when the animation has come to a
	196	+	// rest, that is, when the amplitude of the oscillations becomes smaller than
	197	+	// this value.
	198	+	//
	199	+	// If the epsilon value is too small, the animation will take a long time to
	200	+	// stop after the animated value has stopped visibly changing.
	201	+	//
	202	+	// If the epsilon value is too large, the animation will end prematurely.
	203	+	//
	204	+	// The default value is 0.001.
	205	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) SetEpsilon(EpsilonVar float64) {
	206	+
	207	+	xSpringAnimationSetEpsilon(x.GoPointer(), EpsilonVar)
	208	+
	209	+	}
	210	+
	211	+	var xSpringAnimationSetInitialVelocity func(uintptr, float64)
	212	+
	213	+	// Sets the initial velocity of @self.
	214	+	//
	215	+	// Initial velocity affects only the animation curve, but not its duration.
	216	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) SetInitialVelocity(VelocityVar float64) {
	217	+
	218	+	xSpringAnimationSetInitialVelocity(x.GoPointer(), VelocityVar)
	219	+
	220	+	}
	221	+
	222	+	var xSpringAnimationSetSpringParams func(uintptr, *SpringParams)
	223	+
	224	+	// Sets the physical parameters of the spring of @self.
	225	+	func (x SpringAnimation) SetSpringParams(SpringParamsVar SpringParams) {
	226	+
	227	+	xSpringAnimationSetSpringParams(x.GoPointer(), SpringParamsVar)
	228	+
	229	+	}
	230	+
	231	+	var xSpringAnimationSetValueFrom func(uintptr, float64)
	232	+
	233	+	// Sets the value @self will animate from.
	234	+	//
	235	+	// The animation will start at this value and end at
	236	+	// [property@SpringAnimation:value-to].
	237	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) SetValueFrom(ValueVar float64) {
	238	+
	239	+	xSpringAnimationSetValueFrom(x.GoPointer(), ValueVar)
	240	+
	241	+	}
	242	+
	243	+	var xSpringAnimationSetValueTo func(uintptr, float64)
	244	+
	245	+	// Sets the value @self will animate to.
	246	+	//
	247	+	// The animation will start at [property@SpringAnimation:value-from] and end at
	248	+	// this value.
	249	+	func (x *SpringAnimation) SetValueTo(ValueVar float64) {
	250	+
	251	+	xSpringAnimationSetValueTo(x.GoPointer(), ValueVar)
	252	+
	253	+	}
	254	+
	255	+	func (c *SpringAnimation) GoPointer() uintptr {
	256	+	return c.Ptr
	257	+	}
	258	+
	259	+	func (c *SpringAnimation) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	260	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	261	+	}
	262	+
	263	+	func init() {
	264	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	265	+	if err != nil {
	266	+	panic(err)
	267	+	}
	268	+
	269	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewSpringAnimation, lib, "adw_spring_animation_new")
	270	+
	271	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationCalculateValue, lib, "adw_spring_animation_calculate_value")
	272	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationCalculateVelocity, lib, "adw_spring_animation_calculate_velocity")
	273	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetClamp, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_clamp")
	274	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetEpsilon, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_epsilon")
	275	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetEstimatedDuration, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_estimated_duration")
	276	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetInitialVelocity, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_initial_velocity")
	277	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetSpringParams, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_spring_params")
	278	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetValueFrom, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_value_from")
	279	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetValueTo, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_value_to")
	280	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationGetVelocity, lib, "adw_spring_animation_get_velocity")
	281	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationSetClamp, lib, "adw_spring_animation_set_clamp")
	282	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationSetEpsilon, lib, "adw_spring_animation_set_epsilon")
	283	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationSetInitialVelocity, lib, "adw_spring_animation_set_initial_velocity")
	284	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationSetSpringParams, lib, "adw_spring_animation_set_spring_params")
	285	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationSetValueFrom, lib, "adw_spring_animation_set_value_from")
	286	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xSpringAnimationSetValueTo, lib, "adw_spring_animation_set_value_to")
	287	+
	288	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-spring-params.go +35 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	// Physical parameters of a spring for [class@SpringAnimation].
	5	+	//
	6	+	// Any spring can be described by three parameters: mass, stiffness and damping.
	7	+	//
	8	+	// An undamped spring will produce an oscillatory motion which will go on
	9	+	// forever.
	10	+	//
	11	+	// The frequency and amplitude of the oscillations will be determined by the
	12	+	// stiffness (how "strong" the spring is) and its mass (how much "inertia" it
	13	+	// has).
	14	+	//
	15	+	// If damping is larger than 0, the amplitude of that oscillating motion will
	16	+	// exponientally decrease over time. If that damping is strong enough that the
	17	+	// spring can't complete a full oscillation, it's called an overdamped spring.
	18	+	//
	19	+	// If we the spring can oscillate, it's called an underdamped spring.
	20	+	//
	21	+	// The value between these two behaviors is called critical damping; a
	22	+	// critically damped spring will comes to rest in the minimum possible time
	23	+	// without producing oscillations.
	24	+	//
	25	+	// The damping can be replaced by damping ratio, which produces the following
	26	+	// springs:
	27	+	//
	28	+	// * 0: an undamped spring.
	29	+	// * Between 0 and 1: an underdamped spring.
	30	+	// * 1: a critically damped spring.
	31	+	// * Larger than 1: an overdamped spring.
	32	+	//
	33	+	// As such
	34	+	type SpringParams struct {
	35	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-squeezer.go +619 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-status-page.go +347 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,347 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	9	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gtk"
	10	+	)
	11	+
	12	+	type StatusPageClass struct {
	13	+	ParentClass uintptr
	14	+	}
	15	+
	16	+	// A page used for empty/error states and similar use-cases.
	17	+	//
	18	+	// <picture>
	19	+	//
	20	+	// <source srcset="status-page-dark.png" media="(prefers-color-scheme: dark)">
	21	+	// <img src="status-page.png" alt="status-page">
	22	+	//
	23	+	// </picture>
	24	+	//
	25	+	// The `AdwStatusPage` widget can have an icon, a title, a description and a
	26	+	// custom widget which is displayed below them.
	27	+	//
	28	+	// ## CSS nodes
	29	+	//
	30	+	// `AdwStatusPage` has a main CSS node with name `statuspage`.
	31	+	//
	32	+	// `AdwStatusPage` can use the
	33	+	// [`.compact`](style-classes.html#compact-status-page) style class for when it
	34	+	// needs to fit into a small space such a sidebar or a popover.
	35	+	type StatusPage struct {
	36	+	gtk.Widget
	37	+	}
	38	+
	39	+	func StatusPageNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *StatusPage {
	40	+	cls := &StatusPage{}
	41	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	42	+	return cls
	43	+	}
	44	+
	45	+	var xNewStatusPage func() uintptr
	46	+
	47	+	// Creates a new `AdwStatusPage`.
	48	+	func NewStatusPage() *gtk.Widget {
	49	+	NewStatusPagePtr := xNewStatusPage()
	50	+	if NewStatusPagePtr == 0 {
	51	+	return nil
	52	+	}
	53	+
	54	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(NewStatusPagePtr)
	55	+
	56	+	NewStatusPageCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	57	+	NewStatusPageCls.Ptr = NewStatusPagePtr
	58	+	return NewStatusPageCls
	59	+	}
	60	+
	61	+	var xStatusPageGetChild func(uintptr) uintptr
	62	+
	63	+	// Gets the child widget of @self.
	64	+	func (x StatusPage) GetChild() gtk.Widget {
	65	+
	66	+	GetChildPtr := xStatusPageGetChild(x.GoPointer())
	67	+	if GetChildPtr == 0 {
	68	+	return nil
	69	+	}
	70	+
	71	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetChildPtr)
	72	+
	73	+	GetChildCls := &gtk.Widget{}
	74	+	GetChildCls.Ptr = GetChildPtr
	75	+	return GetChildCls
	76	+
	77	+	}
	78	+
	79	+	var xStatusPageGetDescription func(uintptr) string
	80	+
	81	+	// Gets the description for @self.
	82	+	func (x *StatusPage) GetDescription() string {
	83	+
	84	+	return xStatusPageGetDescription(x.GoPointer())
	85	+
	86	+	}
	87	+
	88	+	var xStatusPageGetIconName func(uintptr) string
	89	+
	90	+	// Gets the icon name for @self.
	91	+	func (x *StatusPage) GetIconName() string {
	92	+
	93	+	return xStatusPageGetIconName(x.GoPointer())
	94	+
	95	+	}
	96	+
	97	+	var xStatusPageGetPaintable func(uintptr) uintptr
	98	+
	99	+	// Gets the paintable for @self.
	100	+	func (x StatusPage) GetPaintable() gdk.PaintableBase {
	101	+
	102	+	GetPaintablePtr := xStatusPageGetPaintable(x.GoPointer())
	103	+	if GetPaintablePtr == 0 {
	104	+	return nil
	105	+	}
	106	+
	107	+	gobject.IncreaseRef(GetPaintablePtr)
	108	+
	109	+	GetPaintableCls := &gdk.PaintableBase{}
	110	+	GetPaintableCls.Ptr = GetPaintablePtr
	111	+	return GetPaintableCls
	112	+
	113	+	}
	114	+
	115	+	var xStatusPageGetTitle func(uintptr) string
	116	+
	117	+	// Gets the title for @self.
	118	+	func (x *StatusPage) GetTitle() string {
	119	+
	120	+	return xStatusPageGetTitle(x.GoPointer())
	121	+
	122	+	}
	123	+
	124	+	var xStatusPageSetChild func(uintptr, uintptr)
	125	+
	126	+	// Sets the child widget of @self.
	127	+	func (x StatusPage) SetChild(ChildVar gtk.Widget) {
	128	+
	129	+	xStatusPageSetChild(x.GoPointer(), ChildVar.GoPointer())
	130	+
	131	+	}
	132	+
	133	+	var xStatusPageSetDescription func(uintptr, string)
	134	+
	135	+	// Sets the description for @self.
	136	+	//
	137	+	// The description is displayed below the title.
	138	+	func (x *StatusPage) SetDescription(DescriptionVar string) {
	139	+
	140	+	xStatusPageSetDescription(x.GoPointer(), DescriptionVar)
	141	+
	142	+	}
	143	+
	144	+	var xStatusPageSetIconName func(uintptr, string)
	145	+
	146	+	// Sets the icon name for @self.
	147	+	//
	148	+	// Changing this will set [property@StatusPage:paintable] to `NULL`.
	149	+	func (x *StatusPage) SetIconName(IconNameVar string) {
	150	+
	151	+	xStatusPageSetIconName(x.GoPointer(), IconNameVar)
	152	+
	153	+	}
	154	+
	155	+	var xStatusPageSetPaintable func(uintptr, uintptr)
	156	+
	157	+	// Sets the paintable for @self.
	158	+	//
	159	+	// Changing this will set [property@StatusPage:icon-name] to `NULL`.
	160	+	func (x *StatusPage) SetPaintable(PaintableVar gdk.Paintable) {
	161	+
	162	+	xStatusPageSetPaintable(x.GoPointer(), PaintableVar.GoPointer())
	163	+
	164	+	}
	165	+
	166	+	var xStatusPageSetTitle func(uintptr, string)
	167	+
	168	+	// Sets the title for @self.
	169	+	//
	170	+	// The title is displayed below the icon.
	171	+	func (x *StatusPage) SetTitle(TitleVar string) {
	172	+
	173	+	xStatusPageSetTitle(x.GoPointer(), TitleVar)
	174	+
	175	+	}
	176	+
	177	+	func (c *StatusPage) GoPointer() uintptr {
	178	+	return c.Ptr
	179	+	}
	180	+
	181	+	func (c *StatusPage) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	182	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	183	+	}
	184	+
	185	+	// Retrieves the `GtkAccessibleRole` for the given `GtkAccessible`.
	186	+	func (x *StatusPage) GetAccessibleRole() gtk.AccessibleRole {
	187	+
	188	+	return gtk.XGtkAccessibleGetAccessibleRole(x.GoPointer())
	189	+
	190	+	}
	191	+
	192	+	// Resets the accessible @property to its default value.
	193	+	func (x *StatusPage) ResetProperty(PropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty) {
	194	+
	195	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetProperty(x.GoPointer(), PropertyVar)
	196	+
	197	+	}
	198	+
	199	+	// Resets the accessible @relation to its default value.
	200	+	func (x *StatusPage) ResetRelation(RelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation) {
	201	+
	202	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetRelation(x.GoPointer(), RelationVar)
	203	+
	204	+	}
	205	+
	206	+	// Resets the accessible @state to its default value.
	207	+	func (x *StatusPage) ResetState(StateVar gtk.AccessibleState) {
	208	+
	209	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleResetState(x.GoPointer(), StateVar)
	210	+
	211	+	}
	212	+
	213	+	// Updates a list of accessible properties.
	214	+	//
	215	+	// See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleProperty] documentation for the
	216	+	// value types of accessible properties.
	217	+	//
	218	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever
	219	+	// an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive
	220	+	// technologies.
	221	+	//
	222	+	// Example:
	223	+	// ```c
	224	+	// value = gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
	225	+	// gtk_accessible_update_property (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (spin_button),
	226	+	//
	227	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_VALUE_NOW, value,
	228	+	// -1);
	229	+	//
	230	+	// ```
	231	+	func (x *StatusPage) UpdateProperty(FirstPropertyVar gtk.AccessibleProperty, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	232	+
	233	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateProperty(x.GoPointer(), FirstPropertyVar, varArgs...)
	234	+
	235	+	}
	236	+
	237	+	// Updates an array of accessible properties.
	238	+	//
	239	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	240	+	// property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	241	+	//
	242	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	243	+	func (x *StatusPage) UpdatePropertyValue(NPropertiesVar int32, PropertiesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	244	+
	245	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdatePropertyValue(x.GoPointer(), NPropertiesVar, PropertiesVar, ValuesVar)
	246	+
	247	+	}
	248	+
	249	+	// Updates a list of accessible relations.
	250	+	//
	251	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	252	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	253	+	//
	254	+	// If the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleRelation] requires a list of references,
	255	+	// you should pass each reference individually, followed by %NULL, e.g.
	256	+	//
	257	+	// ```c
	258	+	// gtk_accessible_update_relation (accessible,
	259	+	//
	260	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_CONTROLS,
	261	+	// ref1, NULL,
	262	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_LABELLED_BY,
	263	+	// ref1, ref2, ref3, NULL,
	264	+	// -1);
	265	+	//
	266	+	// ```
	267	+	func (x *StatusPage) UpdateRelation(FirstRelationVar gtk.AccessibleRelation, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	268	+
	269	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelation(x.GoPointer(), FirstRelationVar, varArgs...)
	270	+
	271	+	}
	272	+
	273	+	// Updates an array of accessible relations.
	274	+	//
	275	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	276	+	// relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	277	+	//
	278	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	279	+	func (x *StatusPage) UpdateRelationValue(NRelationsVar int32, RelationsVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	280	+
	281	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateRelationValue(x.GoPointer(), NRelationsVar, RelationsVar, ValuesVar)
	282	+
	283	+	}
	284	+
	285	+	// Updates a list of accessible states. See the [enum@Gtk.AccessibleState]
	286	+	// documentation for the value types of accessible states.
	287	+	//
	288	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	289	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	290	+	//
	291	+	// Example:
	292	+	// ```c
	293	+	// value = GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_MIXED;
	294	+	// gtk_accessible_update_state (GTK_ACCESSIBLE (check_button),
	295	+	//
	296	+	// GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_CHECKED, value,
	297	+	// -1);
	298	+	//
	299	+	// ```
	300	+	func (x *StatusPage) UpdateState(FirstStateVar gtk.AccessibleState, varArgs ...interface{}) {
	301	+
	302	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateState(x.GoPointer(), FirstStateVar, varArgs...)
	303	+
	304	+	}
	305	+
	306	+	// Updates an array of accessible states.
	307	+	//
	308	+	// This function should be called by `GtkWidget` types whenever an accessible
	309	+	// state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.
	310	+	//
	311	+	// This function is meant to be used by language bindings.
	312	+	func (x *StatusPage) UpdateStateValue(NStatesVar int32, StatesVar uintptr, ValuesVar uintptr) {
	313	+
	314	+	gtk.XGtkAccessibleUpdateStateValue(x.GoPointer(), NStatesVar, StatesVar, ValuesVar)
	315	+
	316	+	}
	317	+
	318	+	// Gets the ID of the @buildable object.
	319	+	//
	320	+	// `GtkBuilder` sets the name based on the ID attribute
	321	+	// of the <object> tag used to construct the @buildable.
	322	+	func (x *StatusPage) GetBuildableId() string {
	323	+
	324	+	return gtk.XGtkBuildableGetBuildableId(x.GoPointer())
	325	+
	326	+	}
	327	+
	328	+	func init() {
	329	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	330	+	if err != nil {
	331	+	panic(err)
	332	+	}
	333	+
	334	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xNewStatusPage, lib, "adw_status_page_new")
	335	+
	336	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageGetChild, lib, "adw_status_page_get_child")
	337	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageGetDescription, lib, "adw_status_page_get_description")
	338	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageGetIconName, lib, "adw_status_page_get_icon_name")
	339	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageGetPaintable, lib, "adw_status_page_get_paintable")
	340	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageGetTitle, lib, "adw_status_page_get_title")
	341	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageSetChild, lib, "adw_status_page_set_child")
	342	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageSetDescription, lib, "adw_status_page_set_description")
	343	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageSetIconName, lib, "adw_status_page_set_icon_name")
	344	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageSetPaintable, lib, "adw_status_page_set_paintable")
	345	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xStatusPageSetTitle, lib, "adw_status_page_set_title")
	346	+
	347	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-style-manager.go +180 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-swipe-tracker.go +258 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-swipeable.go +109 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
	1	+	// Package adw was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package adw
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gdk"
	8	+	)
	9	+
	10	+	// An interface for swipeable widgets.
	11	+	type SwipeableInterface struct {
	12	+	Parent uintptr
	13	+
	14	+	Padding uintptr
	15	+	}
	16	+
	17	+	// An interface for swipeable widgets.
	18	+	//
	19	+	// The `AdwSwipeable` interface is implemented by all swipeable widgets.
	20	+	//
	21	+	// See [class@SwipeTracker] for details about implementing it.
	22	+	type Swipeable interface {
	23	+	GoPointer() uintptr
	24	+	SetGoPointer(uintptr)
	25	+	GetCancelProgress() float64
	26	+	GetDistance() float64
	27	+	GetProgress() float64
	28	+	GetSnapPoints(NSnapPointsVar int32) uintptr
	29	+	GetSwipeArea(NavigationDirectionVar NavigationDirection, IsDragVar bool, RectVar *gdk.Rectangle)
	30	+	}
	31	+	type SwipeableBase struct {
	32	+	Ptr uintptr
	33	+	}
	34	+
	35	+	func (x *SwipeableBase) GoPointer() uintptr {
	36	+	return x.Ptr
	37	+	}
	38	+
	39	+	func (x *SwipeableBase) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	40	+	x.Ptr = ptr
	41	+	}
	42	+
	43	+	// Gets the progress @self will snap back to after the gesture is canceled.
	44	+	func (x *SwipeableBase) GetCancelProgress() float64 {
	45	+
	46	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetCancelProgress(x.GoPointer())
	47	+
	48	+	}
	49	+
	50	+	// Gets the swipe distance of @self.
	51	+	//
	52	+	// This corresponds to how many pixels 1 unit represents.
	53	+	func (x *SwipeableBase) GetDistance() float64 {
	54	+
	55	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetDistance(x.GoPointer())
	56	+
	57	+	}
	58	+
	59	+	// Gets the current progress of @self.
	60	+	func (x *SwipeableBase) GetProgress() float64 {
	61	+
	62	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetProgress(x.GoPointer())
	63	+
	64	+	}
	65	+
	66	+	// Gets the snap points of @self.
	67	+	//
	68	+	// Each snap point represents a progress value that is considered acceptable to
	69	+	// end the swipe on.
	70	+	func (x *SwipeableBase) GetSnapPoints(NSnapPointsVar int32) uintptr {
	71	+
	72	+	return XAdwSwipeableGetSnapPoints(x.GoPointer(), NSnapPointsVar)
	73	+
	74	+	}
	75	+
	76	+	// Gets the area @self can start a swipe from for the given direction and
	77	+	// gesture type.
	78	+	//
	79	+	// This can be used to restrict swipes to only be possible from a certain area,
	80	+	// for example, to only allow edge swipes, or to have a draggable element and
	81	+	// ignore swipes elsewhere.
	82	+	//
	83	+	// If not implemented, the default implementation returns the allocation of
	84	+	// @self, allowing swipes from anywhere.
	85	+	func (x SwipeableBase) GetSwipeArea(NavigationDirectionVar NavigationDirection, IsDragVar bool, RectVar gdk.Rectangle) {
	86	+
	87	+	XAdwSwipeableGetSwipeArea(x.GoPointer(), NavigationDirectionVar, IsDragVar, RectVar)
	88	+
	89	+	}
	90	+
	91	+	var XAdwSwipeableGetCancelProgress func(uintptr) float64
	92	+	var XAdwSwipeableGetDistance func(uintptr) float64
	93	+	var XAdwSwipeableGetProgress func(uintptr) float64
	94	+	var XAdwSwipeableGetSnapPoints func(uintptr, int32) uintptr
	95	+	var XAdwSwipeableGetSwipeArea func(uintptr, NavigationDirection, bool, *gdk.Rectangle)
	96	+
	97	+	func init() {
	98	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("ADW"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	99	+	if err != nil {
	100	+	panic(err)
	101	+	}
	102	+
	103	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&XAdwSwipeableGetCancelProgress, lib, "adw_swipeable_get_cancel_progress")
	104	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&XAdwSwipeableGetDistance, lib, "adw_swipeable_get_distance")
	105	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&XAdwSwipeableGetProgress, lib, "adw_swipeable_get_progress")
	106	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&XAdwSwipeableGetSnapPoints, lib, "adw_swipeable_get_snap_points")
	107	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&XAdwSwipeableGetSwipeArea, lib, "adw_swipeable_get_swipe_area")
	108	+
	109	+	}

A v4/adw/adw-tab-bar.go +485 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-tab-button.go +373 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-tab-overview.go +601 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-tab-view.go +1637 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-timed-animation.go +232 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-toast-overlay.go +292 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-toast.go +484 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-version.go +66 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-view-stack.go +842 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-view-switcher-bar.go +308 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-view-switcher-title.go +379 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-view-switcher.go +290 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-window-title.go +261 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/adw/adw-window.go +382 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/cairo/main.go +510 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkapplaunchcontext.go +149 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkcairo.go +101 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkcairocontext.go +58 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkclipboard.go +378 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkcontentdeserializer.go +267 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkcontentformats.go +54 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkcontentprovider.go +231 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkcontentserializer.go +268 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkcursor.go +205 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdevice.go +375 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdevicepad.go +112 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdevicetool.go +113 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdisplay.go +564 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdisplaymanager.go +196 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdrag.go +274 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdragsurface.go +48 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
	1	+	// Package gdk was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package gdk
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	)
	8	+
	9	+	// The `GdkDragSurfaceInterface` implementation is private to GDK.
	10	+	type DragSurfaceInterface struct {
	11	+	}
	12	+
	13	+	// A `GdkDragSurface` is an interface for surfaces used during DND.
	14	+	type DragSurface interface {
	15	+	GoPointer() uintptr
	16	+	SetGoPointer(uintptr)
	17	+	Present(WidthVar int32, HeightVar int32) bool
	18	+	}
	19	+	type DragSurfaceBase struct {
	20	+	Ptr uintptr
	21	+	}
	22	+
	23	+	func (x *DragSurfaceBase) GoPointer() uintptr {
	24	+	return x.Ptr
	25	+	}
	26	+
	27	+	func (x *DragSurfaceBase) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	28	+	x.Ptr = ptr
	29	+	}
	30	+
	31	+	// Present @drag_surface.
	32	+	func (x *DragSurfaceBase) Present(WidthVar int32, HeightVar int32) bool {
	33	+
	34	+	return XGdkDragSurfacePresent(x.GoPointer(), WidthVar, HeightVar)
	35	+
	36	+	}
	37	+
	38	+	var XGdkDragSurfacePresent func(uintptr, int32, int32) bool
	39	+
	40	+	func init() {
	41	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("GDK"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	42	+	if err != nil {
	43	+	panic(err)
	44	+	}
	45	+
	46	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&XGdkDragSurfacePresent, lib, "gdk_drag_surface_present")
	47	+
	48	+	}

A v4/gdk/gdkdrawcontext.go +164 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkdrop.go +264 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkenums.go +255 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkevents.go +1222 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkframeclock.go +351 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkframetimings.go +13 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkglcontext.go +399 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkgltexture.go +296 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkkeys.go +120 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkmemorytexture.go +280 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkmonitor.go +222 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkpaintable.go +301 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkpango.go +60 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkpixbuf.go +61 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkpopup.go +143 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkpopuplayout.go +77 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkrgba.go +21 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkseat.go +202 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdksnapshot.go +28 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdksurface.go +566 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdktexture.go +536 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdktoplevel.go +399 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdktoplevellayout.go +14 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdktoplevelsize.go +29 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdktypes.go +71 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/gdkvulkancontext.go +94 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdk/main.go +53 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-animation.go +405 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-core.go +86 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.go +245 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-loader.go +359 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-simple-anim.go +86 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-transform.go +59 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/gdk-pixbuf.go +1394 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gdkpixbuf/main.go +76 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gaction.go +276 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gactiongroup.go +357 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gactionmap.go +168 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gappinfo.go +777 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gapplication.go +1388 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gapplicationcommandline.go +463 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gasyncinitable.go +237 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gasyncresult.go +186 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gbufferedinputstream.go +281 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gbufferedoutputstream.go +187 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gcancellable.go +362 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gcharsetconverter.go +228 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gcontenttype.go +240 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gconverter.go +150 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gconverterinputstream.go +141 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gconverteroutputstream.go +167 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gcredentials.go +194 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdatagrambased.go +282 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdatainputstream.go +451 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdataoutputstream.go +217 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusaddress.go +140 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusconnection.go +277 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbuserror.go +156 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusinterface.go +105 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusinterfaceskeleton.go +298 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusintrospection.go +114 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusnameowning.go +134 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusnamewatching.go +115 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusobject.go +81 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusobjectmanager.go +101 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusobjectmanagerclient.go +437 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusobjectmanagerserver.go +217 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusobjectproxy.go +115 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusobjectskeleton.go +176 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusproxy.go +712 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdbusutils.go +213 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdebugcontroller.go +73 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdebugcontrollerdbus.go +287 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdesktopappinfo.go +663 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdrive.go +388 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdtlsclientconnection.go +130 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdtlsconnection.go +536 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gdtlsserverconnection.go +55 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gemblem.go +145 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gemblemedicon.go +154 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfile.go +2758 -0 large diff (2758 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A v4/gio/gfileattribute.go +19 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfiledescriptorbased.go +54 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfileenumerator.go +313 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfileicon.go +154 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfileinfo.go +876 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfileinputstream.go +166 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfileiostream.go +197 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfilemonitor.go +142 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfilenamecompleter.go +101 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfileoutputstream.go +191 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfilterinputstream.go +83 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gfilteroutputstream.go +83 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gicon.go +167 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/ginetaddress.go +272 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/ginetaddressmask.go +194 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/ginetsocketaddress.go +176 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/ginitable.go +130 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/ginputstream.go +430 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gio-2.0.go +5784 -0 large diff (5784 lines changed): collapsed

load diff

A v4/gio/gioenums.go +1790 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gioerror.go +31 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/giomodule.go +248 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gioscheduler.go +46 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/giostream.go +257 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/giotypes.go +351 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/glistmodel.go +192 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gliststore.go +286 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gloadableicon.go +87 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gmemoryinputstream.go +228 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gmemorymonitor.go +102 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gmemoryoutputstream.go +340 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gmenumodel.go +534 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gmount.go +448 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gmountoperation.go +383 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gnativesocketaddress.go +104 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gnativevolumemonitor.go +24 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gnetworkaddress.go +179 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gnetworking.go +28 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gnetworkmonitor.go +171 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gnetworkservice.go +169 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/goutputstream.go +660 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gpermission.go +211 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gpollableinputstream.go +122 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gpollableoutputstream.go +157 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gpollableutils.go +108 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gpowerprofilemonitor.go +91 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gproxy.go +125 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gproxyaddress.go +186 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gproxyaddressenumerator.go +37 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gproxyresolver.go +124 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gremoteactiongroup.go +96 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gresolver.go +348 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gresource.go +143 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gseekable.go +125 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsettings.go +1357 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsettingsbackend.go +310 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsettingsschema.go +146 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsimpleactiongroup.go +441 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsimpleasyncresult.go +576 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsimpleproxyresolver.go +143 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocket.go +1353 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketaddress.go +143 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketaddressenumerator.go +117 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketclient.go +713 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketconnectable.go +155 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketconnection.go +166 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketcontrolmessage.go +111 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketlistener.go +327 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsocketservice.go +162 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gsrvtarget.go +26 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtask.go +1138 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtcpconnection.go +72 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtcpwrapperconnection.go +82 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gthemedicon.go +183 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gthreadedsocketservice.go +88 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlsbackend.go +175 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlscertificate.go +357 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlsclientconnection.go +210 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlsconnection.go +521 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlsdatabase.go +339 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlsfiledatabase.go +61 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlsinteraction.go +260 -0

@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
	1	+	// Package gio was automatically generated by github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk DO NOT EDIT
	2	+	package gio
	3	+
	4	+	import (
	5	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/purego"
	6	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/internal/core"
	7	+	"github.com/jwijenbergh/puregotk/v4/gobject"
	8	+	)
	9	+
	10	+	// The class for #GTlsInteraction. Derived classes implement the various
	11	+	// virtual interaction methods to handle TLS interactions.
	12	+	//
	13	+	// Derived classes can choose to implement whichever interactions methods they'd
	14	+	// like to support by overriding those virtual methods in their class
	15	+	// initialization function. If a derived class implements an async method,
	16	+	// it must also implement the corresponding finish method.
	17	+	//
	18	+	// The synchronous interaction methods should implement to display modal dialogs,
	19	+	// and the asynchronous methods to display modeless dialogs.
	20	+	//
	21	+	// If the user cancels an interaction, then the result should be
	22	+	// %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED and the error should be set with a domain of
	23	+	// %G_IO_ERROR and code of %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED.
	24	+	type TlsInteractionClass struct {
	25	+	ParentClass uintptr
	26	+
	27	+	Padding uintptr
	28	+	}
	29	+
	30	+	type TlsInteractionPrivate struct {
	31	+	}
	32	+
	33	+	// #GTlsInteraction provides a mechanism for the TLS connection and database
	34	+	// code to interact with the user. It can be used to ask the user for passwords.
	35	+	//
	36	+	// To use a #GTlsInteraction with a TLS connection use
	37	+	// g_tls_connection_set_interaction().
	38	+	//
	39	+	// Callers should instantiate a derived class that implements the various
	40	+	// interaction methods to show the required dialogs.
	41	+	//
	42	+	// Callers should use the 'invoke' functions like
	43	+	// g_tls_interaction_invoke_ask_password() to run interaction methods. These
	44	+	// functions make sure that the interaction is invoked in the main loop
	45	+	// and not in the current thread, if the current thread is not running the
	46	+	// main loop.
	47	+	//
	48	+	// Derived classes can choose to implement whichever interactions methods they'd
	49	+	// like to support by overriding those virtual methods in their class
	50	+	// initialization function. Any interactions not implemented will return
	51	+	// %G_TLS_INTERACTION_UNHANDLED. If a derived class implements an async method,
	52	+	// it must also implement the corresponding finish method.
	53	+	type TlsInteraction struct {
	54	+	gobject.Object
	55	+	}
	56	+
	57	+	func TlsInteractionNewFromInternalPtr(ptr uintptr) *TlsInteraction {
	58	+	cls := &TlsInteraction{}
	59	+	cls.Ptr = ptr
	60	+	return cls
	61	+	}
	62	+
	63	+	var xTlsInteractionAskPassword func(uintptr, uintptr, uintptr) TlsInteractionResult
	64	+
	65	+	// Run synchronous interaction to ask the user for a password. In general,
	66	+	// g_tls_interaction_invoke_ask_password() should be used instead of this
	67	+	// function.
	68	+	//
	69	+	// Derived subclasses usually implement a password prompt, although they may
	70	+	// also choose to provide a password from elsewhere. The @password value will
	71	+	// be filled in and then @callback will be called. Alternatively the user may
	72	+	// abort this password request, which will usually abort the TLS connection.
	73	+	//
	74	+	// If the interaction is cancelled by the cancellation object, or by the
	75	+	// user then %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED will be returned with an error that
	76	+	// contains a %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED error code. Certain implementations may
	77	+	// not support immediate cancellation.
	78	+	func (x TlsInteraction) AskPassword(PasswordVar TlsPassword, CancellableVar *Cancellable) TlsInteractionResult {
	79	+
	80	+	return xTlsInteractionAskPassword(x.GoPointer(), PasswordVar.GoPointer(), CancellableVar.GoPointer())
	81	+
	82	+	}
	83	+
	84	+	var xTlsInteractionAskPasswordAsync func(uintptr, uintptr, uintptr, uintptr, uintptr)
	85	+
	86	+	// Run asynchronous interaction to ask the user for a password. In general,
	87	+	// g_tls_interaction_invoke_ask_password() should be used instead of this
	88	+	// function.
	89	+	//
	90	+	// Derived subclasses usually implement a password prompt, although they may
	91	+	// also choose to provide a password from elsewhere. The @password value will
	92	+	// be filled in and then @callback will be called. Alternatively the user may
	93	+	// abort this password request, which will usually abort the TLS connection.
	94	+	//
	95	+	// If the interaction is cancelled by the cancellation object, or by the
	96	+	// user then %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED will be returned with an error that
	97	+	// contains a %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED error code. Certain implementations may
	98	+	// not support immediate cancellation.
	99	+	//
	100	+	// Certain implementations may not support immediate cancellation.
	101	+	func (x TlsInteraction) AskPasswordAsync(PasswordVar TlsPassword, CancellableVar *Cancellable, CallbackVar AsyncReadyCallback, UserDataVar uintptr) {
	102	+
	103	+	xTlsInteractionAskPasswordAsync(x.GoPointer(), PasswordVar.GoPointer(), CancellableVar.GoPointer(), purego.NewCallback(CallbackVar), UserDataVar)
	104	+
	105	+	}
	106	+
	107	+	var xTlsInteractionAskPasswordFinish func(uintptr, uintptr) TlsInteractionResult
	108	+
	109	+	// Complete an ask password user interaction request. This should be once
	110	+	// the g_tls_interaction_ask_password_async() completion callback is called.
	111	+	//
	112	+	// If %G_TLS_INTERACTION_HANDLED is returned, then the #GTlsPassword passed
	113	+	// to g_tls_interaction_ask_password() will have its password filled in.
	114	+	//
	115	+	// If the interaction is cancelled by the cancellation object, or by the
	116	+	// user then %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED will be returned with an error that
	117	+	// contains a %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED error code.
	118	+	func (x *TlsInteraction) AskPasswordFinish(ResultVar AsyncResult) TlsInteractionResult {
	119	+
	120	+	return xTlsInteractionAskPasswordFinish(x.GoPointer(), ResultVar.GoPointer())
	121	+
	122	+	}
	123	+
	124	+	var xTlsInteractionInvokeAskPassword func(uintptr, uintptr, uintptr) TlsInteractionResult
	125	+
	126	+	// Invoke the interaction to ask the user for a password. It invokes this
	127	+	// interaction in the main loop, specifically the #GMainContext returned by
	128	+	// g_main_context_get_thread_default() when the interaction is created. This
	129	+	// is called by called by #GTlsConnection or #GTlsDatabase to ask the user
	130	+	// for a password.
	131	+	//
	132	+	// Derived subclasses usually implement a password prompt, although they may
	133	+	// also choose to provide a password from elsewhere. The @password value will
	134	+	// be filled in and then @callback will be called. Alternatively the user may
	135	+	// abort this password request, which will usually abort the TLS connection.
	136	+	//
	137	+	// The implementation can either be a synchronous (eg: modal dialog) or an
	138	+	// asynchronous one (eg: modeless dialog). This function will take care of
	139	+	// calling which ever one correctly.
	140	+	//
	141	+	// If the interaction is cancelled by the cancellation object, or by the
	142	+	// user then %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED will be returned with an error that
	143	+	// contains a %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED error code. Certain implementations may
	144	+	// not support immediate cancellation.
	145	+	func (x TlsInteraction) InvokeAskPassword(PasswordVar TlsPassword, CancellableVar *Cancellable) TlsInteractionResult {
	146	+
	147	+	return xTlsInteractionInvokeAskPassword(x.GoPointer(), PasswordVar.GoPointer(), CancellableVar.GoPointer())
	148	+
	149	+	}
	150	+
	151	+	var xTlsInteractionInvokeRequestCertificate func(uintptr, uintptr, TlsCertificateRequestFlags, uintptr) TlsInteractionResult
	152	+
	153	+	// Invoke the interaction to ask the user to choose a certificate to
	154	+	// use with the connection. It invokes this interaction in the main
	155	+	// loop, specifically the #GMainContext returned by
	156	+	// g_main_context_get_thread_default() when the interaction is
	157	+	// created. This is called by called by #GTlsConnection when the peer
	158	+	// requests a certificate during the handshake.
	159	+	//
	160	+	// Derived subclasses usually implement a certificate selector,
	161	+	// although they may also choose to provide a certificate from
	162	+	// elsewhere. Alternatively the user may abort this certificate
	163	+	// request, which may or may not abort the TLS connection.
	164	+	//
	165	+	// The implementation can either be a synchronous (eg: modal dialog) or an
	166	+	// asynchronous one (eg: modeless dialog). This function will take care of
	167	+	// calling which ever one correctly.
	168	+	//
	169	+	// If the interaction is cancelled by the cancellation object, or by the
	170	+	// user then %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED will be returned with an error that
	171	+	// contains a %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED error code. Certain implementations may
	172	+	// not support immediate cancellation.
	173	+	func (x TlsInteraction) InvokeRequestCertificate(ConnectionVar TlsConnection, FlagsVar TlsCertificateRequestFlags, CancellableVar *Cancellable) TlsInteractionResult {
	174	+
	175	+	return xTlsInteractionInvokeRequestCertificate(x.GoPointer(), ConnectionVar.GoPointer(), FlagsVar, CancellableVar.GoPointer())
	176	+
	177	+	}
	178	+
	179	+	var xTlsInteractionRequestCertificate func(uintptr, uintptr, TlsCertificateRequestFlags, uintptr) TlsInteractionResult
	180	+
	181	+	// Run synchronous interaction to ask the user to choose a certificate to use
	182	+	// with the connection. In general, g_tls_interaction_invoke_request_certificate()
	183	+	// should be used instead of this function.
	184	+	//
	185	+	// Derived subclasses usually implement a certificate selector, although they may
	186	+	// also choose to provide a certificate from elsewhere. Alternatively the user may
	187	+	// abort this certificate request, which will usually abort the TLS connection.
	188	+	//
	189	+	// If %G_TLS_INTERACTION_HANDLED is returned, then the #GTlsConnection
	190	+	// passed to g_tls_interaction_request_certificate() will have had its
	191	+	// #GTlsConnection:certificate filled in.
	192	+	//
	193	+	// If the interaction is cancelled by the cancellation object, or by the
	194	+	// user then %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED will be returned with an error that
	195	+	// contains a %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED error code. Certain implementations may
	196	+	// not support immediate cancellation.
	197	+	func (x TlsInteraction) RequestCertificate(ConnectionVar TlsConnection, FlagsVar TlsCertificateRequestFlags, CancellableVar *Cancellable) TlsInteractionResult {
	198	+
	199	+	return xTlsInteractionRequestCertificate(x.GoPointer(), ConnectionVar.GoPointer(), FlagsVar, CancellableVar.GoPointer())
	200	+
	201	+	}
	202	+
	203	+	var xTlsInteractionRequestCertificateAsync func(uintptr, uintptr, TlsCertificateRequestFlags, uintptr, uintptr, uintptr)
	204	+
	205	+	// Run asynchronous interaction to ask the user for a certificate to use with
	206	+	// the connection. In general, g_tls_interaction_invoke_request_certificate() should
	207	+	// be used instead of this function.
	208	+	//
	209	+	// Derived subclasses usually implement a certificate selector, although they may
	210	+	// also choose to provide a certificate from elsewhere. @callback will be called
	211	+	// when the operation completes. Alternatively the user may abort this certificate
	212	+	// request, which will usually abort the TLS connection.
	213	+	func (x TlsInteraction) RequestCertificateAsync(ConnectionVar TlsConnection, FlagsVar TlsCertificateRequestFlags, CancellableVar *Cancellable, CallbackVar AsyncReadyCallback, UserDataVar uintptr) {
	214	+
	215	+	xTlsInteractionRequestCertificateAsync(x.GoPointer(), ConnectionVar.GoPointer(), FlagsVar, CancellableVar.GoPointer(), purego.NewCallback(CallbackVar), UserDataVar)
	216	+
	217	+	}
	218	+
	219	+	var xTlsInteractionRequestCertificateFinish func(uintptr, uintptr) TlsInteractionResult
	220	+
	221	+	// Complete a request certificate user interaction request. This should be once
	222	+	// the g_tls_interaction_request_certificate_async() completion callback is called.
	223	+	//
	224	+	// If %G_TLS_INTERACTION_HANDLED is returned, then the #GTlsConnection
	225	+	// passed to g_tls_interaction_request_certificate_async() will have had its
	226	+	// #GTlsConnection:certificate filled in.
	227	+	//
	228	+	// If the interaction is cancelled by the cancellation object, or by the
	229	+	// user then %G_TLS_INTERACTION_FAILED will be returned with an error that
	230	+	// contains a %G_IO_ERROR_CANCELLED error code.
	231	+	func (x *TlsInteraction) RequestCertificateFinish(ResultVar AsyncResult) TlsInteractionResult {
	232	+
	233	+	return xTlsInteractionRequestCertificateFinish(x.GoPointer(), ResultVar.GoPointer())
	234	+
	235	+	}
	236	+
	237	+	func (c *TlsInteraction) GoPointer() uintptr {
	238	+	return c.Ptr
	239	+	}
	240	+
	241	+	func (c *TlsInteraction) SetGoPointer(ptr uintptr) {
	242	+	c.Ptr = ptr
	243	+	}
	244	+
	245	+	func init() {
	246	+	lib, err := purego.Dlopen(core.GetPath("GIO"), purego.RTLD_NOW\|purego.RTLD_GLOBAL)
	247	+	if err != nil {
	248	+	panic(err)
	249	+	}
	250	+
	251	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionAskPassword, lib, "g_tls_interaction_ask_password")
	252	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionAskPasswordAsync, lib, "g_tls_interaction_ask_password_async")
	253	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionAskPasswordFinish, lib, "g_tls_interaction_ask_password_finish")
	254	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionInvokeAskPassword, lib, "g_tls_interaction_invoke_ask_password")
	255	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionInvokeRequestCertificate, lib, "g_tls_interaction_invoke_request_certificate")
	256	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionRequestCertificate, lib, "g_tls_interaction_request_certificate")
	257	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionRequestCertificateAsync, lib, "g_tls_interaction_request_certificate_async")
	258	+	core.PuregoSafeRegister(&xTlsInteractionRequestCertificateFinish, lib, "g_tls_interaction_request_certificate_finish")
	259	+
	260	+	}

A v4/gio/gtlspassword.go +175 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gtlsserverconnection.go +60 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixconnection.go +208 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixcredentialsmessage.go +112 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixfdlist.go +192 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixfdmessage.go +151 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixinputstream.go +160 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixmounts.go +429 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixoutputstream.go +186 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gunixsocketaddress.go +233 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gvfs.go +166 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gvolume.go +352 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gvolumemonitor.go +271 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gzlibcompressor.go +190 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/gzlibdecompressor.go +177 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gio/main.go +25 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/garray.go +177 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gasyncqueue.go +8 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gatomic.go +321 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gbacktrace.go +96 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gbase64.go +110 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gbitlock.go +128 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gbookmarkfile.go +31 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gcharset.go +143 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gchecksum.go +93 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gconvert.go +356 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gdataset.go +261 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gdate.go +296 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gdatetime.go +9 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gdir.go +6 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/genviron.go +154 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gerror.go +143 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gfileutils.go +716 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/ggettext.go +135 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/ghash.go +441 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/ghmac.go +61 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/ghook.go +154 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/ghostutils.go +89 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/giochannel.go +237 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gkeyfile.go +46 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/glib-2.0.go +46 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/glib-types.go +35 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/glib-unix.go +174 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/glibconfig.go +11 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/glist.go +36 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gmain.go +826 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gmappedfile.go +8 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gmarkup.go +228 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gmem.go +273 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gmessages.go +815 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gnode.go +83 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/goption.go +136 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gpattern.go +71 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gpoll.go +55 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gprimes.go +30 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gprintf.go +122 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gqsort.go +28 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gquark.go +120 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gqueue.go +12 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/grand.go +74 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/grcbox.go +205 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/grefcount.go +103 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/grefstring.go +95 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gregex.go +536 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gscanner.go +203 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gsequence.go +145 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gshell.go +110 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gslice.go +142 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gslist.go +35 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gspawn.go +550 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gstdio.go +103 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gstrfuncs.go +1089 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gstring.go +11 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gstringchunk.go +7 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gstrvbuilder.go +18 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gtestutils.go +1164 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gthread.go +436 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gthreadpool.go +105 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gtimer.go +60 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gtimezone.go +27 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gtrashstack.go +65 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gtree.go +24 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gtypes.go +106 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gunicode.go +1566 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/guri.go +600 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gutils.go +744 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/guuid.go +44 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gvariant.go +582 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gvarianttype.go +238 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/gversion.go +39 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/glib/main.go +159 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gmodule/gmodule.go +106 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gmodule/main.go +25 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gbinding.go +38 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gboxed.go +61 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gclosure.go +172 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/genums.go +220 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gmarshal.go +260 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gobject-2.0.go +723 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gobject.go +1326 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gparam.go +411 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gparamspecs.go +929 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gsignal.go +765 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gsourceclosure.go +49 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gtype.go +1114 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gtypemodule.go +204 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gtypeplugin.go +29 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gvalue.go +73 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gvaluearray.go +11 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/gvaluetypes.go +48 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/main.go +4 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gobject/more.go +94 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-box.go +98 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-config.go +22 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-euler.go +91 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-frustum.go +10 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-matrix.go +10 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-plane.go +12 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-point.go +32 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-point3d.go +34 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-quad.go +10 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-quaternion.go +16 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-ray.go +27 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-rect.go +56 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-size.go +33 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-sphere.go +9 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-triangle.go +11 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-vec2.go +63 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-vec3.go +78 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/graphene/graphene-vec4.go +89 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskbroadwayrenderer.go +59 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskcairorenderer.go +63 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskenums.go +221 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskglrenderer.go +52 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskglshader.go +432 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskrenderer.go +177 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskrendernode.go +250 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskrendernodeimpl.go +1884 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gskroundedrect.go +21 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gsktransform.go +32 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/gsktypes.go +14 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gsk/main.go +59 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.go +819 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkaccelgroup.go +161 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkaccessible.go +243 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkactionable.go +153 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkactionbar.go +321 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkadjustment.go +299 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkappchooser.go +91 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkappchooserbutton.go +426 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkappchooserdialog.go +413 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkappchooserwidget.go +410 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkapplication.go +812 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkapplicationwindow.go +778 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkaspectframe.go +320 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkassistant.go +809 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkatcontext.go +107 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbinlayout.go +60 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbitset.go +64 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbookmarklist.go +225 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkboolfilter.go +110 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkborder.go +15 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbox.go +376 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkboxlayout.go +149 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbuildable.go +75 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbuilder.go +706 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbuilderlistitemfactory.go +137 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbuilderscope.go +168 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkbutton.go +543 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcalendar.go +445 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellarea.go +1168 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellareabox.go +234 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.go +236 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcelleditable.go +82 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcelllayout.go +303 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.go +483 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrendereraccel.go +93 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrenderercombo.go +92 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrendererpixbuf.go +72 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrendererprogress.go +70 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrendererspin.go +67 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrendererspinner.go +65 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrenderertext.go +104 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellrenderertoggle.go +149 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcellview.go +530 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcenterbox.go +364 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcenterlayout.go +195 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcheckbutton.go +553 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcolorbutton.go +365 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcolorchooser.go +114 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcolorchooserdialog.go +371 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcolorchooserwidget.go +271 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcolorutils.go +41 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcolumnview.go +627 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcolumnviewcolumn.go +311 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcombobox.go +918 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcomboboxtext.go +538 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkconstraint.go +253 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkconstraintguide.go +179 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkconstraintlayout.go +490 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcssenums.go +40 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcsserror.go +25 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcsslocation.go +26 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcssprovider.go +190 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcsssection.go +9 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcustomfilter.go +86 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcustomlayout.go +72 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkcustomsorter.go +78 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdebug.go +89 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdialog.go +741 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdirectorylist.go +317 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdragicon.go +335 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdragsource.go +318 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdrawingarea.go +388 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdropcontrollermotion.go +142 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdropdown.go +489 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdroptarget.go +365 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkdroptargetasync.go +237 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeditable.go +572 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeditablelabel.go +508 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkemojichooser.go +302 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkentry.go +1419 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.go +226 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.go +595 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkenums.go +1512 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeventcontroller.go +226 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeventcontrollerfocus.go +124 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeventcontrollerkey.go +165 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeventcontrollerlegacy.go +70 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeventcontrollermotion.go +119 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkeventcontrollerscroll.go +203 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkexpander.go +507 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkexpression.go +711 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfilechooser.go +532 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.go +820 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfilechoosernative.go +596 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.go +783 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfilefilter.go +244 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfilter.go +170 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfilterlistmodel.go +282 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfixed.go +309 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfixedlayout.go +129 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkflattenlistmodel.go +200 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkflowbox.go +1130 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfontbutton.go +565 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfontchooser.go +347 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfontchooserdialog.go +539 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkfontchooserwidget.go +429 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkframe.go +355 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesture.go +506 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgestureclick.go +119 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesturedrag.go +127 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesturelongpress.go +118 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesturepan.go +100 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesturerotate.go +85 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesturesingle.go +152 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesturestylus.go +183 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgestureswipe.go +94 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgesturezoom.go +87 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkglarea.go +592 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgrid.go +577 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgridlayout.go +302 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkgridview.go +519 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkheaderbar.go +407 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkicontheme.go +622 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkiconview.go +1373 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkimage.go +618 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkimcontext.go +384 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkimcontextsimple.go +122 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkimmulticontext.go +90 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkinfobar.go +528 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkinscription.go +469 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklabel.go +1201 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklayoutchild.go +87 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklayoutmanager.go +191 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklevelbar.go +494 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklinkbutton.go +391 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklistbase.go +275 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklistbox.go +1290 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklistitem.go +195 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklistitemfactory.go +73 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkliststore.go +955 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklistview.go +560 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtklockbutton.go +347 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmain.go +148 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmaplistmodel.go +250 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmediacontrols.go +234 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmediafile.go +385 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmediastream.go +687 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmenubutton.go +607 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.go +526 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmountoperation.go +144 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmultifilter.go +459 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmultiselection.go +305 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkmultisorter.go +193 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtknative.go +148 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtknativedialog.go +217 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtknoselection.go +308 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtknotebook.go +1060 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtknumericsorter.go +117 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkorientable.go +62 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkoverlay.go +354 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkoverlaylayout.go +124 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpadcontroller.go +173 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpagesetup.go +412 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpagesetupunixdialog.go +377 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpaned.go +561 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpapersize.go +51 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpasswordentry.go +545 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpasswordentrybuffer.go +57 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpicture.go +569 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpopover.go +620 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpopovermenu.go +471 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkpopovermenubar.go +282 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprintcontext.go +264 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprinter.go +399 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprintjob.go +429 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprintoperation.go +1049 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprintoperationpreview.go +86 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprintsettings.go +901 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprintunixdialog.go +579 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkprogressbar.go +434 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkrange.go +572 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.go +307 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkrender.go +187 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkrevealer.go +360 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkroot.go +111 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkscale.go +510 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkscalebutton.go +401 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkscrollable.go +185 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkscrollbar.go +283 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.go +814 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksearchbar.go +373 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksearchentry.go +649 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkselectionfiltermodel.go +184 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkselectionmodel.go +244 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkseparator.go +225 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksettings.go +75 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcut.go +166 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutaction.go +368 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutcontroller.go +307 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutlabel.go +242 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutmanager.go +39 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutsgroup.go +188 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutssection.go +209 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutsshortcut.go +201 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcutswindow.go +354 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshortcuttrigger.go +437 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkshow.go +55 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksignallistitemfactory.go +167 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksingleselection.go +411 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksizegroup.go +194 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksizerequest.go +41 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkslicelistmodel.go +233 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksnapshot.go +688 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksorter.go +175 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksortlistmodel.go +289 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkspinbutton.go +1050 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkspinner.go +251 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstack.go +948 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstacksidebar.go +243 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstackswitcher.go +272 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstatusbar.go +316 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstringfilter.go +180 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstringlist.go +318 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstringsorter.go +118 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstylecontext.go +353 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkstyleprovider.go +27 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkswitch.go +393 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtksymbolicpaintable.go +65 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktestatcontext.go +98 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktestutils.go +74 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktext.go +1176 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktextbuffer.go +1494 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktextchild.go +111 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktextiter.go +62 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktextmark.go +177 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktexttag.go +125 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktexttagtable.go +201 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktextview.go +1722 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktogglebutton.go +473 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktooltip.go +157 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreednd.go +167 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreeexpander.go +340 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreelistmodel.go +472 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreelistrowsorter.go +104 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreemodel.go +739 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.go +662 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreemodelsort.go +697 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreeselection.go +323 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreesortable.go +140 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreestore.go +868 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreeview.go +1829 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.go +819 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtktypes.go +23 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkversion.go +122 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkvideo.go +420 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkviewport.go +358 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkvolumebutton.go +217 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkwidget.go +3604 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkwidgetpaintable.go +249 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkwindow.go +1301 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkwindowcontrols.go +318 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkwindowgroup.go +105 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/gtkwindowhandle.go +241 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/gtk/main.go +61 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/main.go +25 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-attributes.go +854 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-bidi-type.go +127 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-break.go +131 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-color.go +12 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-context.go +406 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-coverage.go +174 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-direction.go +42 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-font.go +688 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-fontmap.go +174 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-fontset.go +157 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-glyph-item.go +81 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-glyph.go +199 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-gravity.go +132 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-item.go +105 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-language.go +96 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-layout.go +1265 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-markup.go +88 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-matrix.go +25 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-renderer.go +362 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-script.go +332 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-tabs.go +59 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-types.go +92 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pango/pango-utils.go +304 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff

A v4/pangocairo/pangocairo.go +543 -0 collapsed to keep the page light

load diff